Which of the following changes would you most like to see in Washington in 2012?:

Blog Archive

Zach.Howell
Posted: Sunday, March 25, 2012 - 12:31

Liberal columnist Matt Miller is ready for a national discussion about the way to deal with our deficit. What’s more he thinks that Rep. Paul Ryan’s “Path to Prosperity” budget is a great way to kick off the “uber-debate the country needs to have.”

That’s where his graciousness ends. Miller then says that he’s ready to start the discussion only “once we get done dissecting the deceptions, hypocrisies, and regressive priorities in the Wisconsin Republican’s latest blueprint.” He then goes on to call Ryan’s plan a “misguided, misleading, and unacceptable vision.”

So much for an honest debate. Rather than engage in numbers and math, Miller, like so many liberals, relies on partisan attacks and acerbic adjectives.

But we’re better than that. Rather than rig the debate by attacking their ideological worldview, let’s lay some honest ground rules, chief among them the true size of the problem. And boy is it huge.

A new fiscal study from researchers Richard W. Evans, Kerk Phillips, and Laurence Kotlikoff uncovers the true size of our national debt. “In the U.S., federal liabilities (official debt plus the present value of projected non-interest expenditures) exceed federal assets (the present value of projected taxes) by $211 trillion or 14 times GDP.”

Let that number sink in for a minute: $211 trillion. The gross domestic product of the entire world – the value of every good and service produced by every human being – was about $63 trillion last year. Our projected deficit is more than three times that!

The enormity of that figure is mostly caused by unsustainable promises made by the three largest entitlement programs – Medicaid, Medicare, and Social Security. The growing cost of those programs is quickly pushing the United States toward what the researchers call “game over” which they define as “the point where the policies can no longer be maintained.”

“Game over” is reached when Washington is forced to redistribute more money than younger generations earn. The problem is, once you set down this path, it turns into a self-reinforcing death spiral that is very difficult to escape. “As the government enforces every greater redistribution, the economy saves and invests less and wages either fall or grow at slower rates,” the researchers write. As the economy slows, so too does the amount that young adults can prop up older generations. The more redistribution is enforces the more rapidly society speeds towards “game over.”

And once we reach that point the federal government will be forced, in the words of the researchers to “let the government take all of the earnings of the young and give them to the old and, thereby, terminate the economy.”

In other words, if you think society is redistributive now, you ain’t seen nothin’ yet.

If the “game over” point seems apocalyptic, that’s because it is. What’s more, it may not be far off. Their model estimates that there is a “35 percent chance of reaching the fiscal limit in about 30 years.”

None of this is to say that this course towards tragedy is unalterable. Indeed, Rep. Paul Ryan introduced a plan last week that makes each of the entitlement programs sustainable over the long-term by introducing market-based reforms. By comparison President Obama’s “plan” (which does nothing to fix the growth of entitlements) would never (as in ever) balance. And Congressional Democrats, well they have no plan at all (and haven’t even passed a budget for more 1,050 days).

Now that we have a good starting point – a debt measured in the hundreds of trillions of dollars – let’s start the conversation about reforms. Ready when you are…


Zach.Howell
Posted: Wednesday, March 21, 2012 - 09:29

It’s a sad indictment of today’s political discourse that the quality of a proposal can almost invariably be judged by the vehemence of the adjectives used to describe it.

The more extreme the rhetoric liberals choose to demagogue an idea, the better that idea probably is. So far I’ve heard the words “disturbing,” “extreme,” and my personal favorite, “a vicious plot to destroy our nation’s promise,” which came in a statement from House Democrats, used to describe Rep. Paul Ryan’s just-released Path to Prosperity budget.

Given the fervor of the attacks leveled against it you can pretty much rest assured that it’s a good plan. And based on my first reading, it is.

First and foremost it would reimagine the social safety net that is currently bursting at the seams.

For instance, Medicaid has grown from a $400 million per year program to a nearly $400 billion one. That explosive cost growth isn’t expected to slow. Indeed the Center for Medicare and Medicaid Service projects that within the decade costs will more than double to $804 billion. That is a burden that neither the federal government nor the states, which both share in the costs, can afford to pay.

Ryan’s plan would transform Medicaid into a block grant system that is indexed to inflation and population growth. This would provide states with the freedom and flexibility needed to adapt the program to their unique needs while also serving as a laboratories for cost-saving techniques.

The current fiscal situation of Medicare is arguably even worse. The CBO projects that the cost of Medicare will rise from 3.7 percent of GDP to 14 percent by 2085. For the sake of reference, tax revenues historically average around 18 percent of GDP. That means if the cost of Medicare grows as expected and taxes aren’t raised far above where they’ve ever been, Washington would only have 4 percent of GDP to spend on every other budget item from Social Security to education to defense. Of course, this won’t happen. Without change America WILL break a promise to its retirees. The budgetary math allows no other option.

But Paul Ryan’s budget does. The Path to Prosperity offers an innovative solution that blends options for a traditional fee-for-service option and a premium-support system in which beneficiaries receive an amount of money to spend on health care as they choose. By forcing health care plans to bid in a competitive market for subscribers Ryan’s plan uses market forces, not top-down government mandates or unworkable price controls, to keep prices down.

Finally, the Path to Prosperity would reform a Social Security program that has become an increasing burden on young adults.

“When Social Security was first enacted in 1935, each worker, on average, was contributing less than 2.5 percent of a retirees benefits. By 2030, each wage earner will be paying for nearly half of each retired person’s full benefits.” says Ryan’s budget resolution. “This is a massive shift of earnings away from younger families trying to build their futures, toward Social Security recipients.”

Not only is it unfair, but it is unworkable. Unless reforms are made the Social Security system will have to dramatically reduce its promised benefits for future generations. Although Ryan’s budget lacks a specific outline for reform, it sets the table for a concerted bipartisan effort to address the demographic changes in our society and ensure the solvency of Social Security.

Given that Republicans are now the only party in town with a comprehensive set of solutions to the major problems America faces, Democrats have nothing better to do than demagogue the heck out of the plan. “Democrats are poised to attack the GOP plan as one that would destroy the safety net for seniors and renege on an earlier agreement over government spending levels,” reports Lisa Mascaro in the LA Times.

But Paul Ryan’s budget isn’t about conflict. It’s about presenting an opportunity. An opportunity, as Ryan states, “for this generation of Americans to rise to the challenge, as previous generations have, and fulfill this nation’s unique legacy of leaving future generations with a freer, more prosperous America.”


Zach.Howell
Posted: Sunday, February 19, 2012 - 15:16

In its attempt to implement it’s healthcare reform bill, better known as Obamacare, the Obama Administration has tied itself in political and rhetorical knots.

When Democrats were attempting to sell the bill to the public they insisted that the individual mandate (the requirement that everyone must either obtain health insurance or pay a penalty) was not a tax. In a 2009 interview with George Stephanopoulos, Obama attempted to refute the argument that this portion of the bill violated his promise not to raise taxes on anyone making less than $250,000.

“For us to say that you’ve got to take a responsibility to get health insurance is absolutely not a tax increase,” Obama said in the interview.  “You just can’t make up that language and call it a tax increase. . .  I absolutely reject that notion.”

But after it passed the Obama Administration began to change its tune. Realizing that it was going to face a constitutional challenge the Obama team felt they would be on safer legal ground if they admitted it was a tax increase rather tan attempt to defend it based on the power to regulate interstate commerce.

Constitutionally speaking, this is a smart strategy. The Commerce Clause provides sweeping authority, allowing the government to regulate interstate commerce, a term of art that has come to mean it can regulate any economic activity. But this line of reasoning runs into problems because in the case of Obamacare there is no activity. It’s attempting to punish inactivity by punishing those who choose not to buy health care.

Democrats have sought to get around this problem by arguing that the collective decision not to purchase insurance has impacts that ripple into the economy. Numerous courts have pointed out that by this justification the government could regulate anything. “The government’s struggle to articulate cognizable, judicially administrable limiting principles only reiterates the conclusion we reach today: there are none,” the 11th Circuit Court of Appeals wrote in its decision on the case

The potential for failure has led the Obama legal team to take the much safer approach – argue that Obamacare is a tax, which Congress can exercise to provide for the “general welfare” – even broader language than the Commerce Clause.

The Justice Department has latched on to this argument, pointing out to the court that the individual mandate penalty would raise substantial revenue ($4 billion). It is also collected under the Internal Revenue Code and must be reported on tax returns “as an addition to income tax liability.” Therefore, despite the language of the bill calling it a “penalty” (a word chosen precisely because the Administration didn’t want it labeled a tax), if it walks like a tax and talks like a tax, it’s a tax.

(Of course, this too faces problems. As HotAir’s Allahpundit writes, “If Congress can use its taxing power to steer your money directly to private insurers, then in theory it could force you to fork your money over to any number of congressionally-favored private-sector businesses for not-so-public purposes.”)

But as the Obama Administration is keenly aware, enacting a new tax on the middle class in an election year is not sound political strategy, regardless of the legal merits. That’s why in public they continue to argue that Obamacare’s individual mandate should not be construed of as a tax.

The most recent example came in a hearing on Friday when Office of Management and Budget Director Jeffrey Zients said Obamacare is not a task.

When asked by Rep. Scott Garrett whether or not the individual mandate penalty is a tax that undermines the Obama Administration’s claim that it is not raising taxes for any families under $250,000, Zients seems confused, before eventually saying that the penalty is not a tax.

Zients confusion is understandable. With the Obama Administration completing changing its argument depending on the day and who is listening, it’s tough to keep your story straight. Of course this rhetorical knot could all be saved if Obama would just start being honest with the American people.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Sunday, February 5, 2012 - 15:52

At its core the State of the Union preceding a contested presidential election is as much a campaign speech as a statement of policy. It was of little surprise then that President Obama kicked it off with one of the few achievements that just about every voter, regardless of political philosophy, can agree was a success – the death of Osama bin Laden.

It’s also little surprise that Obama did his best to hide his weaknesses, namely Obamacare.

Yes, what was once supposed to be the bill that carried him to new heights of political power now threatens to drag his chances of reelection down. For that reason President Obama did his best to pretend that neither Obamacare, nor Medicare, nor really anything to do with health care at all was mentioned in his speech.

As Aaron E. Carroll writes,

If you weren’t paying close attention to the State of the Union speech, you might have missed the parts about health care. In almost 7000 words of text, a total of 44 words were spent on the topic, a mere 0.6% for a subject accounting for more than one-sixth of the US economy. Medicare and Medicaid received 1 mention each, in the same sentence.

Then again, what was he going to say? As we’ve written about before, since Obamacare was passed, health insurance premiums have risen substantially faster than in the years before it was passed. Indeed, premiums rose a 7.5 percent for individual coverage and 9.5 percent for family coverage in 2011 – compared to increases of 4.7 percent and 3.0 percent in 2010.  That translates into a $2,393 increase for the typical family.

President Obama has recently tried to pull a switcheroo and claim that decreasing the number of uninsured, not premium costs, was the ultimate goal of Obamacare. But brand new data from Gallup reveals that Obamacare has failed by that measure as well.

“More American adults lacked health insurance coverage last year than in any year since Gallup and Healthways started tracking it in 2008,” writes Elizabeth Mendes. “The uninsured rate has been increasing since 2008, climbing to 17.1 percent in 2011.”

Still wondering why Obama didn’t mention his “signature piece of legislation” in the State of the Union? Yea, us neither.

But that doesn’t mean everyone is running away from the issue. The Hill reports:

“House Republicans will be ready with a plan to replace President Obama’s healthcare law once the Supreme Court determines the law’s fate this summer, Rep. Joe Pitts (R-PA) told reporters Wednesday.

. . . Pitss said the GOP will instead propose state-based pools in which the government would take over the cost of the sickest, most expensive patients, rather than requiring private insurers to cover them.

The rest of the plan Pitts outlined draws from long-standing GOP priorities. It will include limits on medical malpractice suits and allow the sale of insurance across state lines, Pitts said, while also expanding the use of health savings accounts.”

The goal according to Rep. Pitts is actually to have several plans that would be custom-tailored to the Supreme Courts’ ruling – whether it strikes down the individual mandate, strikes the whole law, or keeps the bill largely in place.

President Obama and Congressional Democrats can’t avoid the issue forever. Eventually they’ll have to account for the fact that the numbers of uninsured have risen and premiums have soared after the passage of their bill. No doubt they’ll do their best to defend the status quo by completely eschewing numbers and instead focusing on heart-warming individual stories. But what they won’t do, can’t do, is offer up a replacement that will truly solve the serious health care issues facing this country.

And that’s where Republicans step in.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Wednesday, February 1, 2012 - 11:04

Today the Congressional Budget Office released its annual “baseline” budget projections. The good news is that the deficit is projected to fall to the lowest it has been since the beginning of the so-called “Great Recession.” The bad news is that number is still $1.1 trillion – making it higher than any deficit between 1947 and 2008.

The estimate pretty much put the final nail in the coffin for President Obama’s “pledge to cut the deficit in half by the end of my first term in office.” Yea, he said that. We can’t fully explain it, but the two best theories that the office could come up with were (1) his speechwriter was playing a Anchorman-esque practical joke on him, (2) his teleprompter malfunctioned, he got nervous, and gave a black out speech reminiscent of Will Ferrell in Old School. Admittedly, neither are great theories. And apparently we watch too many Will Ferrell movies.

But the point is, not only did he fail to live up to the pledge, he completely ignored it. When Obama came into office the prior year’s deficit was $458 billion. The next four years were $1.4 trillion, $1.3 trillion, $1.6 trillion, and now, a projected $1.1 trillion. Obama didn’t halve the deficit, he occasionally tripled it, and always at least doubled it.

Fortunately, the report isn’t all terrible news. The numbers show that the Republican-held House of Representatives has begun to turn the ship around…slowly. Using levers like the debt ceiling debate and the omnibus appropriations bill Republicans have been able to achieve a remarkable amount of fiscal discipline despite controlling only the House while Democrats have the Senate and the White House.

The CBO’s projections show that federal government spending will actually remain flat over the next two years.

“In fiscal year 2011, total discretionary spending authority – authority provided in appropriations acts to incur financial obligations that will result in immediate or future outlays – dropped by $42 billion; that authority has declined by another $24 billion in 2012,” writes the CBO. “As a result, outlays decreased by 0.1 percent layer year – the first time since 1996 that discretionary outlays had fallen.”

Not exactly reason to throw a party. Especially when you still have Democrats in the House like Rep. Rahall who say stuff like this, “In two years, who knows, we may find a pot of gold at the end of the rainbow.” Gosh, why didn’t we think of that sooner! We could have totally solved our deficit if only we hadn’t wasted so much time tracking bin Laden and focused on finding the Lucky Charms guy!

Despite the utter lack of help that Republicans should expect from Democrats who believe magical creatures are the answers to our deficit problems, there is still much to be done.

Namely, we have to look beyond the discretionary budget to other “mandatory” spending such as Social Security, Medicare, and Medicaid. Yes, we know talking about entitlements is about as popular as former Obama Chief of Staff Bill Daley was with Harry Reid. Hahaha! Too insider? Ok, how about…as popular as Anthony Weiner at a Clinton family barbecue. That’s funny because Weiner’s wife Huma Abedin is good friends with…Hilary…oh never mind.

The fact is we have to reform these programs if we want to achieve fiscal sustainability. The CBO finds that mandatory spending will rise from $2.1 trillion to $3.5 trillion annually in the next decade. Although some of that will be covered by higher revenues as a result in economic growth, we still need to find a way to cut cost or else face a crippling debt crisis.

Fortunately, this isn’t as impossible as it sounds. As Dan Mitchell of the Cato Institute has been yelling about for years now – Washington can let spending rise by 2 percent each year (roughly the amount of inflation) and we would have a balanced budget in about 10 years. That’s hard, but not impossible.

What would make it even easier, as American for Tax Reform’s Ryan Ellis points out, is if Washington would implement policies focused on economic growth. “If real GDP growth was 1 percentage point higher over this window,” Ellis writes, “tax revenues generated would be equal to an additional $2.8 trillion.

So take the good news and bad news in today’s CBO report. But most importantly, keep in mind that we must continue to press for more fiscal responsibility out of Washington if we truly want to avert disaster.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, January 17, 2012 - 19:18

Something strange is going on. Late last week President Obama made an official request for Congress to raise the debt ceiling by $1.2 trillion. But didn’t we just do that? It just seems like yesterday that Washington was abuzz over the debate about whether to increase the debt ceiling. And unless my memory fails me a $900 billion increase to the debt limit was granted.

Surely, Washington hasn’t blown through nearly $1 trillion already. And we’re still two weeks away from Groundhog Day, so unless there’s a Bill Murray sequel about the Martin Luther King, Jr. holiday that I missed, I’ll count out being stuck in a time loop.

Oh that’s right, this is Obama and the Democrats we’re talking about. Give them a few days and a blank check and they’ll have not only attempted to buy Antarctica, but will have unionized the penguins and given free health care to the seals. Yes, this is the party that makes Nicolas Cage look like a financial whiz (and this is a guy who bought not one, but two castles, not to mention a dinosaur skull for no apparent reason).

So here’s President Obama, back after having spent $900 billion in just five short months, and asking for more. Granted, the request is little more than a formality, a foregone conclusion that was folded in to the larger debt limit deal in August.

Under the package, President Obama was able to get a $900 billion immediate increase to the debt limit. The second tranche, worth as much as $1.5 billion that was intended to carry him through the election, could only happen if the Deficit Supercommittee agreed to the equivalent amount of cuts. Yea, we all know how that went over. About as well as a hygiene tutorial at an OWS camp.

According to the deal, the failure of the Supercommittee triggered automatic spending cuts – about half of which would come from the military and about half from Medicare providers. But it also meant that Obama can “only” get $1.2 trillion. Aw, poor guy.

Which brings us to where we are now, namely, screwed. OK not screwed (at least not yet), but not in the best of financial shape. After all, our debt, has surpassed $15.2 trillion – larger than our entire economy. And you know things are bad when not even the Liberal Ledger, er, I mean, New York Times, can sweep Obama’s spending habits under the rug.

“The government’s need for more borrowing results from the fact that it spends far more than it raises in revenue; it makes up the difference by borrowing 36 cents of every dollar it spends. In the fiscal year that ended Sept. 30, the government spend $3.6 trillion and collected $2.3 trillion.”

. . . Since President Obama took office, the debt has shot up 42 percent, to the current level of $15.1 trillion. Of that amount, $10.4 trillion is borrowed from the public, and $4.7 trillion consists of special-issue Treasury securities held by Social Security and other govenrment trust funds. Debt held by the public, considered by many economists to be the more significant indicator, is 65 percent higher now than in January 2009.”

When it comes to Obama and his penchant for spending there just isn’t many nice things you can say. This is a president who has the three largest deficits in U.S. history (FY 2009: $1.43 trillion, FY 2011: $1.29 trillion, FY 2010: $1.298 trillion). So if deficits were an olympic sport, Obama would take home the gold, silver, and bronze all by himself.

And those deficits are adding up fast. To provide a sense of just how large $15 trillion is consider this – in 2010 the Bureau of Engraving and Printing produced $974 million worth of currency. At that rate it would take 15,400 years to print $15 trillion – roughly around the same time we can expect Klingon to overtake English as our national language and Congress is desperately trying to rewrite the 2nd Amendment to include phasers. That is to say, never.

So yes, if it feels like we just raised the debt ceiling, it’s because we did. And unless Congress takes steps to slow the rate of spending, we’ll be right back in this same predicament in just a few months. So let’s try something that will feel really strange – let’s stop making debt limit increases seem mundane and let’s actually try and spend less.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Sunday, January 8, 2012 - 14:50

“It’s morning again in America.” That was the signature line from President Ronald Reagan’s famous campaign ad during his 1984 reelection bid. The message was perfect in its simplicity – that Reagan’s conservative policies had brought American out of the darkest depths of a recession and into the light of a new day.

The fact is, the strength of the economy is generally the first thing a president will cite in his reelection bid. Which brings us to a curious situation. Friday’s job numbers seemed to be the strongest evidence yet that the economy is gaining steam. And yet, President Obama largely withheld his excitement.

“We have made real progress,” Obama said Friday after the employment numbers were released. “Now is not the time to stop.”

Doesn’t exactly sound like the triumphant president, who is ready to point to his economic accomplishments come next November does it? It’s not even the calm reassurance of Reagan’s ‘morning in America.’

And with good reason. Wading below the positive jobs report, which showed 200,000 jobs were created in December, is a current of data that could wash away any positivity. The biggest problem is that people continue to drop out of the labor force, making the unemployment rate look much better than it truly is.

Economics blog Zero Hedge explains:

“One does not need to be a rocket scientist to grasp the fudging the BLS [Bureau of Labor Statistics] has been doing every month of years now in order to bring the unemployment rate lower: the BLS constantly lowers the labor force participation rate as more and more people “drop out” of the labor force for one reason or another.

. . . In order to back out of this fudge we are redoing an analysis we did first back in August 2010, which shows what the real unemployment rate would be using a realistic labor force participation rate. . . It won’t surprise anyone that as of December, the real implied unemployment rate was 11.4 percent – basically where it has been ever since 2009 – and at 2.9 percent delta to reported, represents the widest divergence to reported data since the early 1980s.”

In other words, the unemployment rate hasn’t changed, what’s changed is the historic amount of “fudging” that the BLS is doing to make things look rosy. And although it’s unlikely that there is anything nefarious going on, Zero Hedge finds an interesting point: “Extending this lunacy, America will officially have no unemployed, when the Labor Force Participation rate hits 58.5 percent, which should be just before the presidential election.”

Sadly, even the more accurate 11.4 percent figure doesn’t truly encapsulate the problem. To truly gauge our continued economic problems we must look at the U-6 rate, which takes into account part-time workers that would rather be working full time but have been forced to settle. Using this figure, unemployment stands at a whopping 15.2 percent.

Oh, and one other thing, courtesy of AEI’s Jim Pethokoukis:

“Then there is that 200,000 number. As Goldman Sachs points out:

Part of the strong gain reflected a 42k increase in employment for “couriers and messengers”, which likely reflects temporary employment for holiday gift delivery persons. As similar spike occurred last December and was reversed the following month. . .”

Obama was right to be reserved. The numbers are undoubtedly better, but they are also undoubtedly a flawed representation of the true unemployment picture. No doubt the Obama campaign team knew that standing behind them would be a risky strategy.

If Obama truly wants a “Morning in America” moment, with America positioned for long-term growth and prosperity, he’ll have to do more. Namely, he’ll have to get Washington out of the way.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Sunday, January 1, 2012 - 17:54

The ball has dropped, the last verses of Auld Lang Syne have been sung, the last hint of smoke from the fireworks has drifted to nothing, and party favors litter the floor. Another year is in the books. And frankly it was one many of us would as soon forget.

A year when Congressional Democrats likened spending money to saving the world; the national debt topping the $16 trillion dollar mark; the US credit rating downgraded after the debt limit debate yielded no substantial reforms; and President Obama abandoning any notion of governing, opting instead to focus on his reelection.

Yes, it was a dispiriting year, filled largely with worries of a double dip recession, and only spotty speculation about a recovery. It was another in an ever-growing timeline of high unemployment, sluggish growth, and lingering housing problems.

Worse still, it displayed once again Democrats’ utter aversion to solving the looming fiscal crisis that hovers ominously over America’s collective heads. Rather than agree to sensible reforms, or even engage in the conversation, they have taken to attack ads – setting back the reform process and potentially damning the solvency of the programs they claim to love.

That is not to say that no rays of light found their way through the dark clouds. Although no large cuts were made, newly elected Republican majorities in the House of Representatives were able to stem the tide of red ink that threatens to drown future generations. In doing so they were able to shift the national conversation away from “how much can we spend” to “where can we sensibly cut.” That is a question that should bear more fruit in the new year.

A conversation has also been started over how best to reform our broken tax code. According to the latest studies, the code takes 7.64 billion man-hours to comply with at a cost of $227.1 billion and does little to make us competitive in the world. All told, America continues to have the second highest corporate tax rate in the world, bucking the global trend of lowering rates. But there are signs that could change. Every Republican candidate for president has made it a key plank of their platform and even President Obama has indicated his willingness to pursue the issue.

Although Congressional Democrats remain staunchly opposed, the President has also hinted at a willingness to tinker with entitlements. Most recently, Rep. Paul Ryan, a Republicans, and Sen. Ron Wyden, a Democrat, have put forward a bipartisan plan to reform Medicare. As the debt looms larger and the fate of Greece becomes all the more real, there is reason to believe that the spark of reform could finally catch in 2012.

But perhaps the biggest reason for optimism is the election that will take place in a little more than 10 months.

Our nation has stagnated under Obama, crushed beneath the weight of an ever-growing federal government that spends our money with impunity. The national debt, the uncertainty of rising taxes, and burdensome federal regulations have served to yoke our once vibrant economy.

But that could soon change. 2012 will bring the chance to elect a new President, one who understands what it takes to succeed in a global economy, rather than one who has merely read about it within the ivy walls of academia. It brings an opportunity for a smaller, more responsive, more effective Washington that spends every dollar with the same care as a struggling family would. And finally, it offers hope of a new administration committed to helping the private sector thrive without the Solyndra-like scandals that have made many question the prevalence of crony-capitalism.

Sadly, 2011 brought far too little for far too many. Too little jobs, too little money, and too much Washington. But with hard work, a successful election, and a dash of hope, that could all change in 2012. Here’s to a Happy New Year…


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, December 27, 2011 - 14:27

We can all breathe a sigh of relief. Our representatives in Washington are home for the holidays until late January, giving Americans a brief respite from the comedy of horrors perpetuated by the government’s incessant tinkering and spending.

Fortunately or unfortunately, they’ll be back in town. The question is, what should they do when they get back?

I can hear you screaming through your screen: “NOTHING.” And I agree. With Democrats in the Senate and the White House, “doing” usually means “spending,” and even then, all that money rarely does much lasting good for the economy.

Nevertheless, the people do demand action. A new Rasmussen poll reveals that 50 percent of Americans worry that the government will not do enough to fix the nation’s economic problems. The sentiment is quite different than the one felt by Americans immediately following the housing crisis and subsequent financial meltdown. As Rasmussen analyzes:

“At that time, 63 percent of voters worried more that the government would do too much. In recent months, a plurality has expressed a fear that the government will do too little in response to the economic troubles gripping the nation. Earlier this month, for the first time ever, the number worried that the government would do too little reached 50 percent.”

Big government liberals everywhere are cheering the news. Finally, they say, the public is catching on to the fact that we need more government spending.

Not so fast. Let’s take a deeper look into just what sorts of actions voters want the government to take. As it turns out, the fears that Washington won’t do enough, have nothing to do with spending and everything to do with cutting.

Rasmussen finds that 77 percent want the government to cut deficits, 71 percent think the government should cut spending, and 59 percent want the government to cut taxes. The idea that the government should reduce rather than increase spending is one that stretches across almost every demographic. Even a significant plurality of Democrats (47/33) agree!

When it comes to cutting there is no shortage of work.

In the latest testament to a government gone out of control, the Government Accountability Office (GAO) issued a press release stating their inability to issue a financial report on the U.S. government. In their words:

“The U.S. Government Accountability Office (GAO) cannot render an opinion on the 2011 consolidated financial statements of the federal government, because of widespread material internal control weaknesses, significant uncertainties, and other limitations.

As was the case in 2010, the main obstacles to a GAO opinion on the accrual- based consolidated financial statements were: (1) serious financial management problems at the Department of Defense (DOD) that made its financial statements unauditable, (2) the federal government’s inability to adequately account for and reconcile intragovernmental activity and balances between federal agencies, and (3) the federal government’s ineffective process for preparing the consolidated financial statements.”

You know things have gotten bad when the agency responsible for keeping the government accountable just throws up its hands and says “forget it.” The government’s books are such a mess that they don’t even know where to start.

The inevitable creep towards insolvency poses troubling questions. For too long Washington has been able to promise more benefits without any concordant increases in taxes. Now the dynamic has shifted, likely permanently, forcing Congress to cut spending or raise taxes. Fortunately, the latest Rasmussen poll reveals the people’s presence. Will Washington listen when they get back to town?


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, December 13, 2011 - 14:34

“Here, finally, is the Barack Obama many of us thought we had elected in 2008.” – Robert Reich, Secretary of Labor under Bill Clinton

To many liberals that might have been true. They finally found their champion to ensure the equality of outcomes (not, as Obama would have you believe, the equality of opportunity) that comes from central economic planning.

“Of course, those productive investments cost money,” Obama said. “They’re not free. And so we’ve also paid for these investments by asking everybody to pay their fair share.”

But is that the President Obama that the rest of us elected? Too often we forget that one of Barack Obama’s most quoted pledges during the 2008 elections was to enact a “net spending cut” on the federal level.

Take this quote from a CNN debate as an example:

“We have had over the last 8 years the biggest increases in deficit spending and national debt in our history. . . Here’s what I would do. I would spend some money on the key issues we’ve got to work on. But we’ve also got to make spending cuts. And what I’ve proposed . . . is cutting more than I’m spending so it’s a net spending cut.”

In another debate Obama is asked to name some specifics about where he would cut. Here’s his answer:

“But there is no doubt that we’ve been living beyond our means and we’re going to have to make some adjustments. So what I’ve done throughout this campaign is to propose a net spending cut. . . Every dollar I have proposed I have proposed a different cuts. . . We need to eliminate a whole host of programs that don’t work, and I want to go through the federal budget line by line. Programs that don’t work we should cut. Programs we need we should make better.”

So as the Left cheers that their champion has finally arrived, ready to beat back the small-government numbskulls attempting to stop progress in its tracks, aren’t we right to wonder what happened to the candidate that promised us a net spending cut?

He’s still missing in action. In his place we’ve got the biggest deficit, the most debt, and the worst fiscal outlook we’ve ever had as a nation. Indeed,the president that Obama has morphed into would have appalled Obama as a candidate.

For instance, this past Obama achieved the milestone of adding just over $4 trillion to our national debt. And what’s more he accomplished it in three years. Now, here’s candidate Obama in a campaign event in Fargo, ND, laying the hammer down on President Bush for adding $4 trillion to the debt:

“The problem is, is that the way Bush has done it over the last eight years is to take out a credit card from the Bank of China in the name of our children, driving up our national debt from $5 trillion for the first 42 presidents – #43 added $4 trillion by his lonesome, so that we now have over $9 trillion of debt that we are going to have to pay back – $30,000 for every man, woman and child. That’s irresponsible. It’s unpatriotic.”

What President Bush took eight years to accomplish, Obama managed in less than three. In fact, as of Halloween the total U.S. debt was $15.01 trillion – an all-time high – which also happens to be the size of our entire Gross Domestic Product. For the first time since World War II, when we were burning up resources for full-scale war mobilization, our national debt is equal to the size of our entire economy.

This isn’t the president we elected in 2008. But here’s an even scarier thought – if liberals are right, and last week’s speech at Osawatomie truly was the emergence of the real, liberal Obama, then just how quickly will our national debt shoot up in the next five years?

There’s only one sure-fire way not to find out. Don’t vote for him.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Wednesday, December 7, 2011 - 19:54

President Obama is known for being generous (with other people’s money). It’s little wonder then that he went all out on a gift for Europe. No doubt, it was a struggle to pick something out. After all, what do you get for a continent that needs everything? A bottle of wine? No, they’re pretty good at making that on their own. A Starbucks gift card? Meh, too generic. Oh I know, how about a $100 billion bailout!

Although very little was heard about it at the time, Rep. Barney Frank slipped a provision into a war supplemental bill that gave the International Monetary Fund a $100 billion line of credit that they could use at any time. And the way the law is written, the funds are fully authorized, meaning that the Obama Administration can send the IMF a bailout without Congressional approval.

That’s not the end of America’s deep financial involvement with the IMF. Although very few Americans are aware of it, the IMF receives most of it’s funding through a member-quota system, in which member states contribute to the fund based on their size relative to the world economy.

Despite President Obama’s best efforts to the contrary, the U.S. remains the world’s largest economy, meaning we carry the biggest burden within the IMF. In fact, our member quota is 17.7 percent of the entire fund, while Japan, the next largest contributor pays 6.5 percent of total contributions. As if all of that wasn’t enough of a burden on US taxpayers, the IMF’s Board of Governors approved a package last year doubling member dues.

And guess who’s now being asked to act as the “lender of last resort” as Europe spirals deeper into trouble? That’s right…the IMF. As the Washington Post reports,

“So far, European leaders have set up the European Financial Stability Fund for that purpose [to act as a lender of last resort], especially since Germany doesn’t want Europe’s central bank to start printing euros and doling them out left and right. But . . . the EFSF has only raised about €440 billion — and nearly half of that is already committed to Ireland, Portugal, Greece, and (possibly) some troubled banks. . . Now, enter the IMF.”

So the IMF, which the Pelosi-led Congress authorized $100 billion in funds on top of our status as the largest dues-payer, may now be stepping in to fill the void in Europe.

Even with all of our financial help, the $390 billion IMF fund still isn’t big enough to keep huge economies like Italy, Spain, and (gasp) France afloat. So who’s going to fill the gap. But what they do have is 187 members (including the US) that they can milk for more money.

And sadly, President Obama seeks to be fine with being Europe’s cash cow. Although White House spokesman Tim Carney has said, “We do not in any way believe that additional resources are required from the United States and from taxpayers,” Obama seemed to contradict these words. Following a meeting with European Council President Herman Van Rompuy, Obama said “The United States stands ready to do our part to help them resolve this issue,” adding, “We’ve got a stake in their success.”

Republicans are doing their best to protect taxpayers from being on the hook for bailing out the fiscal mistakes of other nations. After all, it makes little sense to give profligate European countries hundreds of billions of dollars when many in the United States are suffering and we have a little bit of a debt problem ourselves.

Rep. Cathy McMorris Rodgers (R-WA) and Sen. Jim DeMint (R-SC) have introduced a bill that would prevent taxpayer money from being used in a possible IMF bailout of the eurozone. Senator Coburn, one of the Senate’s leaders in rooting out waste, has also backed the measure. “We’re throwing good money after bad down a hole that I think is not a solvable problem,” Coburn said. “Europe is going to default eventually, so why would you socialize their profligate spending?”’

It’s a good question. One we can’t figure out the answer to. Unless that is, Obama just wanted to give Europe a huge taxpayer-funded Christmas present.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Sunday, December 4, 2011 - 16:29

Looking for a job? Here are some want ads I stumbled across this week:

  • Greeting Card Merchandiser: “Needed part-time to service 1 store in Tooele, UT. Duties include replenishing, straightening, and tracking inventory of every-day and seasonal greeting cards and may include additional items such as gift-wrap and party supplies.
  • Temporary Gift Boxing Associate: “Are you looking to make some extra $$$ for the holiday season?? Then please read on for an immediate opportunity: As a Gift Boxing associate you will: Work in a warehouse setting unwrapping boxes, Work efficiently to then wrap small boxes with holiday wrap, Prepare packages for shipment, Creativity a plus!”
  • Lapland Elf: “A comprehensive and constant commitment to the Santa story is essential. There are four main elf activities: (1) Assist Santa Clause during family visits, (2) Meeting and greeting guests at the airport. Elves will frolic and play in the arrivals hall to welcome guests to Lapland. (3) Elf Sightings: time and rotas permitting, elves will participate in sightings. (4) Elves are responsible for ensuring that Santa’s presents are all wrapped and delivered to the Activity Centers.”

What? So you’re telling me you didn’t graduate from a four-year school to sort greeting cards? And could there a more resume-friendly euphemistic expression of a gift wrapper than a “temporary gift boxing associate?” Still, I guess it’s less degrading than dressing up in an elf costume and “frolicking” in an airport terminal.

Sadly, these are the sorts of jobs that President Obama is touting as evidence that his stimulus policies are finally working.

Obama’s spin machine got cranking because of a new Bureau of Labor Statistics report showing that the unemployment rate fell from 9.0 percent to 8.6 percent in November.

Undoubtedly, Obama was thrilled. The latest Gallup poll showed that Obama’s approval rating in November was 43 percent – the lowest of any modern president with the exception of Jimmy Carter (which is not exactly an accomplishment). In other words, the Obama campaign team was looking for some good news. And they seized on the BLS numbers as conclusive proof that all those hundreds of billions of dollars in stimulus money had finally kicked in (just, ya know, a couple of years later than expected).

But once you dig past the spin, the reality is a lot less appealing. The BLS data reveals two big problems. One, much of the jobs gains appeared to be seasonal – meaning that unless you never grew out of your dreams of being an elf when you grew up, you’re not going to be finding an enduring career in this market.

While unemployment fell, so too did average hourly earnings, meaning people were filling lower wage jobs. Moreover, the data reveals that much of the gain (50,000 jobs) was in the retail sector, whose jobs are notoriously seasonal.

Second, this is just another example of the “Antarctic Labor Market Miracle,” meaning that the drop in unemployment is due in large part to people giving up and leaving the labor force. As the Washington Post’s Ezra Klein explains,

“[The unemployment rate] is calculated by dividing the number of unemployed people by the size of the workforce, where an “unemployed person” is defined as an individual actively seeking work but not finding it. It excludes anyone who isn’t actively seeking work – a population captured by the labor force participation rate. And when it comes to that indicator, things don’t look as good. Over the past month, the labor force participation rate dropped from 64.2 to 64 percent, indicating that fewer Americans are looking for work and simply giving up on their searches.”

While 0.2 percent may not seem like much – that means that 315,000 people (roughly the equivalent of the whole city of Pittsburgh) stopped looking for work in the last month and are no longer included in the unemployment percentage. James Pethokoukis ran the numbers and found that if the participation rate was the same as October, the unemployment rate would be 8.9%, if the participation rate was the same as when Obama took office, the unemployment rate would be a devastating 11 percent.

As unabashed liberal Matthew Yglesias tweeted, “Decreasing unemployment by shrinking the labor force is not exactly winning the future.” We couldn’t have said it better ourselves.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, November 29, 2011 - 12:12

President Obama took the stage last Wednesday to offer this year’s Thanksgiving turkey pardon. And with a mere wave of his hand, Obama gave two turkeys, named Liberty and Courage, a reprieve from sitting next to the mashed potatoes and cranberry sauce on someone’s Thanksgiving dinner plate.

It will take more than a hand gesture to save President Obama’s signature accomplishment – the health care reform bill better known as Obamacare. In fact, it will take a majority of the sitting Justices of the Supreme Court, which recently agreed to take up the case following several conflicting decisions by federal courts.

The question that will be decided extends well beyond the bounds of the constitutionality of Obamacare. At its core, the decision will decide the limits of Washington’s power under the Commerce Clause to compel certain activities.

The Commerce Clause is already one of the broadest instruments of Congressional power. It is the foundational text that has allowed Washington to regulate anything impacting interstate commerce. But the case of the individual mandate is wholly different from past applications in that it Congress attempting to regulate the absence of commerce.

That is to say, Obamacare claims it can require you to buy health insurance because the uninsured may, at some undetermined point, impose costs on the wider economy. But this power would know no bounds. If this theory is found to be constitutional, Washington could require Americans to purchase certain services or perform certain actions since the failure to do so would “impact commerce.” Or as one circuit court said, “The government’s struggle to articulate cognizable, judicially administrable limiting principles only reiterates the conclusion we reach today: there are none.”

For instance, Congress could compel you to join a gym, or eat broccoli at every meal, because doing so would presumably make you healthier and reduce the national cost of health care. It could force you to buy an electric car to reduce the demand, and therefore the costs, of oil. It could (like China) limit the number of children you can have with the understanding that they will put a strain on the federal government’s entitlement programs. In essence, they can do anything. This is truly opening Pandora’s Box.

The importance of this decision means a lot of power rests in the hands of the Supreme Court Justices. Now, questions are arising as to whether Justice Elena Kagan, President Obama’s most recent appointee, should recuse herself because of a conflict of interest.

Federal law requires recusal from a case if a judicial officer of the United States “has served in governmental employment and in such capacity participated as counsel, adviser, or material witness concerning the proceeding or expressed an opinion concerning the merits of the particular case or controversy.” In addition, a federal judge must disqualify herself if her “impartiality might reasonably be questioned.”

As the Solicitor General during the Obama Administration’s defense of the health care law, does Kagan’s history disqualify her from hearing the case?

Emails uncovered by Judicial Watch, suggest, if nothing else, that she strongly supported Obamacare’s passage.

A March email from Kagan to then-Senior Counselor Laurence Tribe said, “I hear they have the votes Larry!! Simply amazing…” On the day Obamacare passed, then-Deputy Solicitor General Neal Katyal forwarded Kagan an email about a meeting with “the health care policy team tomorrow at 4 to help us prepare for litigation.”

These statements call into question not only her role as adviser on the potential litigation over Obamacare, but her impartiality over the law. And it is not as her recusal would be unprecedented. Indeed, Justice Kagan has stepped aside on 29 of the 82 Supreme Court cases heard during her term because of her previous work as Solicitor General.

The Obamacare decision will be one of the most important Supreme Court rulings of our lifetime. And while Obama may, with a flick of his hand, pardon a turkey, this case requires a measured and impartial study of the law as it relates to precedent. Can Elana Kagan provide that? Her past suggests not.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, November 29, 2011 - 12:12

President Obama took the stage last Wednesday to offer this year’s Thanksgiving turkey pardon. And with a mere wave of his hand, Obama gave two turkeys, named Liberty and Courage, a reprieve from sitting next to the mashed potatoes and cranberry sauce on someone’s Thanksgiving dinner plate.

It will take more than a hand gesture to save President Obama’s signature accomplishment – the health care reform bill better known as Obamacare. In fact, it will take a majority of the sitting Justices of the Supreme Court, which recently agreed to take up the case following several conflicting decisions by federal courts.

The question that will be decided extends well beyond the bounds of the constitutionality of Obamacare. At its core, the decision will decide the limits of Washington’s power under the Commerce Clause to compel certain activities.

The Commerce Clause is already one of the broadest instruments of Congressional power. It is the foundational text that has allowed Washington to regulate anything impacting interstate commerce. But the case of the individual mandate is wholly different from past applications in that it Congress attempting to regulate the absence of commerce.

That is to say, Obamacare claims it can require you to buy health insurance because the uninsured may, at some undetermined point, impose costs on the wider economy. But this power would know no bounds. If this theory is found to be constitutional, Washington could require Americans to purchase certain services or perform certain actions since the failure to do so would “impact commerce.” Or as one circuit court said, “The government’s struggle to articulate cognizable, judicially administrable limiting principles only reiterates the conclusion we reach today: there are none.”

For instance, Congress could compel you to join a gym, or eat broccoli at every meal, because doing so would presumably make you healthier and reduce the national cost of health care. It could force you to buy an electric car to reduce the demand, and therefore the costs, of oil. It could (like China) limit the number of children you can have with the understanding that they will put a strain on the federal government’s entitlement programs. In essence, they can do anything. This is truly opening Pandora’s Box.

The importance of this decision means a lot of power rests in the hands of the Supreme Court Justices. Now, questions are arising as to whether Justice Elena Kagan, President Obama’s most recent appointee, should recuse herself because of a conflict of interest.

Federal law requires recusal from a case if a judicial officer of the United States “has served in governmental employment and in such capacity participated as counsel, adviser, or material witness concerning the proceeding or expressed an opinion concerning the merits of the particular case or controversy.” In addition, a federal judge must disqualify herself if her “impartiality might reasonably be questioned.”

As the Solicitor General during the Obama Administration’s defense of the health care law, does Kagan’s history disqualify her from hearing the case?

Emails uncovered by Judicial Watch, suggest, if nothing else, that she strongly supported Obamacare’s passage.

A March email from Kagan to then-Senior Counselor Laurence Tribe said, “I hear they have the votes Larry!! Simply amazing…” On the day Obamacare passed, then-Deputy Solicitor General Neal Katyal forwarded Kagan an email about a meeting with “the health care policy team tomorrow at 4 to help us prepare for litigation.”

These statements call into question not only her role as adviser on the potential litigation over Obamacare, but her impartiality over the law. And it is not as her recusal would be unprecedented. Indeed, Justice Kagan has stepped aside on 29 of the 82 Supreme Court cases heard during her term because of her previous work as Solicitor General.

The Obamacare decision will be one of the most important Supreme Court rulings of our lifetime. And while Obama may, with a flick of his hand, pardon a turkey, this case requires a measured and impartial study of the law as it relates to precedent. Can Elana Kagan provide that? Her past suggests not.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Sunday, November 20, 2011 - 14:36

On a cool January morning a man named James Marshall was taking a walk along the banks of the American River in the foothills of the Sierra Nevada. As he looked down he noticed something sparkling in the water, bent down, and scooped up some tiny, yellowish nuggets. Gold.

The rest is history. Word eventually leaked out and the then-sleepy town of San Francisco was inundated with hundreds of thousands of people hoping to strike it rich. Many of them did. In the beginning, the valuable mineral was so prevalent that you could just pick gold nuggets up off the ground.

The California Gold Rush has long been over, but the green-energy gold rush is just beginning. Like gold, taxpayer-funded subsidies are there for the taking. Although Solyndra is the most well-known, the $535 million federal loan guarantee was one of 18 such projects that generated $9.5 billion in clean energy investment, with an addition $9.3 billion in the works.

Washington’s decision to spend such vast sums of cash has drawn struggling green-energy companies like a moth to a flame. Free cash has a tendency to do that.

NRG, a cleverly-named power company, has been one of the main beneficiaries of the Obama Administration’s green energy pipedream. The company, along with its partners, have received $5.2 billion in federal loan guarantees as well of hundreds of millions in other government subsidies for other solar-energy projects.

The New York Times reported that NRG’s chief executive, David W. Crane, told Wall Street Analysts that “the government’s largess was a once-in-a-generation opportunity, and ‘we intend to do as much of this business as we can get our hands on.’”

“I have never seen anything that I have had to do in my 20 years in the power industry that involved less risk than these projects,” the New York Times story quoted him as saying. “It is just filling the desert with panels.”

Not only is the federal government paying them to lay the solar panels, but it is mandating that consumers buy the energy. “These projects, in almost all cases, benefit from legislation that has been passed in about 30 states that pushes local utility companies to buy a significant share of their power from renewable sources, like wind and power,” explains the New York Times.

One green energy CEO joked that “it is like building a hotel, where you know in advance you are going to have 100 percent room occupancy for 25 years.

As if providing them with start-up money wasn’t enough, governments are now in the business of guaranteeing success by mandating a market. I guess that’s one way to ensure that you don’t have to deal with a Solyndra-style debacle anymore.

Like the 49ers before them, it was like picking gold nuggets up off the ground. It is as close to free money as you’ll find. Except it’s not free.

The money, being tossed around like it belongs in a Monopoly game, comes out of every taxpayers’ pocket. Not only is our money being spent on questionable green energy investments but it is completely distorting the energy marketplace, driving out competition and driving up costs.

But there are other, more hidden, costs as well. First, by guaranteeing success, the government is destroying the profit motive that keeps businesses searching for the next technology, the next innovation. Second, by giving green-energy, which is currently vastly more inefficient than traditional energy sources, a tremendous leg-up in the marketplace, it diverts investment from more lucrative societal endeavors. Finally, it snuffs out the potential for a completely new and potentially better technology to emerge. Why gamble on something different if the government is handing you a sure winner?

The green-energy rush is in many ways similar to the gold-rush that fundamentally transformed the west and made a lot of people rich. But there’s a key difference. Namely, the green-energy gold is mined from our pockets, not God’s green earth.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, November 15, 2011 - 20:03

As part of the agreement to raise the debt ceiling a so-called Deficit Supercommittee was created to put together a plan to cut the deficit over the next ten years.

It reminded me of my childhood, waking up on Saturday mornings to watch the SuperFriends – a team of well-known superheroes including Batman, Superman, Aquaman, and Wonder Woman, devoted to fighting crime.

I can still remember the theme song: “Banded together to protect the universe from the forces of evil…The Superfriends. Dedicated to truth, justice and peace for all mankind; the world’s greatest Superfriends.”

Sadly the Supercommittee has no super powers. No incredible intelligence capable of figuring a way out of this mess, no x-ray vision capable of slicing off any unnecessary spending, and no superhuman strength capable of pounding the government down to size.

Instead, we’ve got a smaller collection of what we always had – a group of Republicans focused on cutting spending and a group of Democrats intent on spending more. One would have hoped that in the context of a deficit committee, focused on reducing the deficit, that Democrats would have set aside their penchant for spending.

Alas, that would have made too much sense. Earlier this week The Hill reported:

“Democrats on the supercommitee have proposed that the savings from the end of the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan be used to pay for a new stimulus package, according to a summary of the $2.3 trillion plan obtained by The Hill.

The latest offer from Democrats on the deficit panel, made Monday night to their Republican counterparts, would use some of the war savings to help pay for spending on infrastructure.”

This is one of Democrats favorite budget gimmicks.

The way the budgeting process works, a lawmaker can claim a “cut” if he reduces spending below an arbitrary baseline.  I say arbitrary, because the CBO’s “current law baseline” makes certain assumptions regardless of how unrealistic they are. For instance, it assumes that the present spending on the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan will continue at the present level for the entire 10-year budget window.

Of course that is ridiculous given that President Obama announced last month that all U.S. troops would be out of Iraq by the end of 2011 and was proceeding with a drawdown plan to be out of Afghanistan by 2014. But that isn’t stopping Democrats from claiming that “ending the wars” will save around $1 trillion over the next decade.

BuBut why stop there? “Come to think of it, didn’t the Second World War end in 1945? Could we have the CBO score the estimated two-thirds of a century of “budget savings” we’ve enjoyed since ending that war?” Mark Steyn cynically asks in a recent editorial.

What we’re left with is Democrats willing to set aside reality in the name of claiming “imaginary savings” to fund very real, new spending.  In other words, a Supercommittee, whose task was to cut the deficit, is now seeking ways to increase it.

With our national debt continuing to grow and the risk of default becoming all the more real, it’s time we stop with the political games and get to the business of finding cuts. It shouldn’t be hard. There is no shortage of wasteful spending and no dearth of ideas on positive reforms to entitlement programs that could easily achieve the $1.2 trillion goal.

The Supercommittee doesn’t need to the SuperFriends. They don’t need special powers to secure “truth, peace and justice for all mankind.” They just need some common sense and a willingness to make the politically difficult choices required to get our budget under control. Wouldn’t that be super.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Sunday, November 6, 2011 - 17:17

The 1980 election between Jimmy Carter and Ronald Reagan was a turning point for American conservatives. Under Carter, Iranian radicals had held hostages in the American Embassy for just under a year. The economy was struggling and inflation was running rampant. Following the Iranian Revolution, gas prices were skyrocketing and there were mile-long lines at every filling station.

It was against this backdrop that Ronald Reagan asked Carter an all-important question. Just one week before the election in the final broadcast debate, Reagan asked the crowd “Are you better off now than you were four years ago?”

This past week a Minnesota reporter asked Obama essentially the same question – “Are we better off now than we were four years ago?”

“Well, you know, I think we are better off now than we would have been if I hadn’t taken all the steps that we took,” a hesitant Obama said.  “[W]e’ve made steady progress, we just need to make more.”

The ridiculous statement brought out some classic responses. “Are you kidding me?!? asked House Speaker John Boehner after hearing Obama’s answer. “Why don’t you go ask the 14 million Americans who are out of work whether they’re better than they were four years ago.”

Conservative columnist Jim Geraghty’s response was perhaps better: “Define ‘Better.”’

Something tells me Obama’s definition of “better” could be almost as confusing as Bill Clinton’s attempt to define “is.” Remember this gem? When asked if he was having an affair with Monica Lewinsky, Clinton told a grand jury, “It depends on what the meaning of the word ‘is’ is. If the – if he – if ‘is’ means is and never has been, that is not – that is one thing. If it means there is non, that was a completely true statement.”

To which we say, huh?

The word “is” has one meaning and the word “better” has one meaning. Just as Clinton looked ridiculous trying to dance around the issue of an illicit affair, President Obama can’t skirt the fact that things are patently worse than they were four years ago.

Are we further in debt than we’ve ever been? Yes. Are our entitlement programs growing increasingly unsustainable? Yes. Do we have fewer jobs? Yes. Have health care costs continued to increase? Yes. Do we have higher unemployment? Yes.

The list could go on, but let’s focus on the last one. On Friday, new jobs numbers were released, showing yet another month of dismal growth. The Washington Post reports:

“Another month, another dreary jobs report from the Labor Department. The U.S. economy added just 80,000 jobs in October, which isn’t enough to keep up with population growth, let alone get us back to full employment. Indeed, this marks the seventh straight month that the jobless rate hasn’t nudged below 9 percent. (it was 9.1 percent last month.”

Put another way, at our current rate of job growth, the economy wouldn’t get back to 6 percent unemployment (even then not ideal) until after 2023 – more than a decade away. By then an entire generation of young adults could be left behind, muddling through low wage jobs that permanently sap their long-term income potential.

America needs jobs, young adults need jobs, and this White House has shown an inability to get that done. There are currently 18 jobs-related bills that have passed through the House and are sitting in the Senate. There would be more if it wasn’t abundantly clear that Harry Reid has no plans on acting on any of them.

Unfortunately, it appears the only way to change our economic situation is to vote smart come November. And to vote smart, ask yourself one question: Are you better off now than you were four years ago?


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, October 25, 2011 - 19:43

One of my favorite Halloween traditions is watching “It’s the Great Pumpkin, Charlie Brown.” If you haven’t seen it (you poor, poor souls), there’s one great scene in which the Peanuts gang goes trick-or-treating. From house to house, every other kid gets chocolate bars, candy, packs of gum, and even money, but not Charlie Brown. No, at every house, Charlie gets a rock.

Given all the recent news about how Washington is investing our tax dollars it’s a little hard not to feel like Charlie Brown on Halloween when he says, “I don’t understand it. I went trick-or-treating and all I got was a bag full of rocks.”

The Solyndra debacle is perhaps the most visible, but certainly not the only rock filling our pillowcase. A much less-discussed, but no less disastrous, loan to yet another green energy company is just coming to light.

The company is called Ener1 Inc, a lithium-ion battery maker that received a presidential shout out, a tour of the factory, and a $118 million grant courtesy of taxpayers. In other words, Ener1 parallels the Solyndra plotline almost perfectly.

The Wall Street Journal reports:

“Ener1 was founded in 2002, went public in 2008 and has never turn a profit. In August, it restated its earnings for fiscal 2010 at a $165 million loss – nearly $100 million more than previously reported. On September 27 it ousted its CEO, and its share price yesterday was 27 cents – a 95 percent decline from its 52-week high.”

Things have gotten so bad for the company that they have said they are currently “in the process of determining whether the company has sufficient liquidity to fund its operations.”

This isn’t an isolated example. According to the WSJ story, 48 different battery technology and electric vehicle projects received federal money as part of the Obama administration’s green-energy initiative. But apparently they overlooked the fact that the market for such batteries cannot sustain that level of production.

According to a report by consulting firm Roland Berger, “capacity in 2015 will reach 200% of demand,” leading them to conclude that only 6 to 8 batter manufacturers will survive. Remind me again why we’re funding 48?

Looking on the bright-side, at least the Obama Administration was giving money to American manufacturers, even if they did have a terrible business model. Sadly, that hasn’t always been the case for this White House.

“With the approval of the Obama administration, an electric car company that received a $529 million federal government loan guarantee is assembling its first line of cars in Finland, saying it could not find a facility in the United States capable of doing the work,” reported ABC News this week.

Making the scene even that much more depressing is that Vice President Joe Biden heralded the loan as a “new chapter in which we strengthen American manufacturing by investing in innovation.” “This is proof that our efforts to create new jobs, invest in clean energy economy and reduce carbon pollution are working,” added Energy Secretary Steven Chu.

As it turns out the “clean energy” part of the Fisker deal is also a sham. According to a report by Forbes, Fisker’s new automobile will get about 19 miles to the gallon, making it worse than the city rating of a Ford Explorer. Sorry, Mr. Chu, the only thing your loan proves is that the government has no business gambling taxpayer money on risky bets like these.

So here we are, a bunch of Charlie Brown’s carrying around Washington’s bag of bad investments. And as he concluded on that fateful night of trick-or-treating, “I just don’t understand it.”


Zach.Howell
Posted: Thursday, October 20, 2011 - 10:01

A mysterious virus spread across Washington DC today. An unexplained outbreak that seemed to target our elected officials.

Don’t worry, there’s no need to alert the CDC, it doesn’t appear contagious, or even particularly harmful. But it is good for a laugh, or at least a resigned sigh of “how did we elect these clowns.”

It was just the latest flare-up of foot-in-mouth disease. Typical symptoms include the inability to form coherent thoughts, make cogent arguments, or an increased likelihood to offend everyone around you.

Elizabeth Warren, former adviser to President Obama and current candidate for the U.S. Senate, was the first indication we have have an outbreak on our hands. “I’m going for the hick vote here,” Warren said in a liberal podcast. “I just want you to know. Maybe we could start wearing stickers that say ‘Hicks for Elizabeth’ – could we do that?”

On any other day that would have dominated the headlines. But today – a five-alarm, perfect storm, of publicists’ nightmares – it barely made news. And rightly so compared to the utter nonsense that was coming from the President’s mouth.

“I guarantee it’s going to be a close election because the economy is not where it wants to be and, even though I believe all the choices we’ve made have been the right ones, we’re still going through difficult circumstances,” President Obama said in an interview with ABC today.

You could almost see Jay Carney, the White House’s chief spokesman, having an aneurism. He knew this would require more clean up than a frat house after a kegger and it couldn’t have come at a worse time.

Talk about hubris? The American economy is essentially collapsing (for a second time!) all around him and he wouldn’t change anything?

He wouldn’t make any changes to Obamacare despite the subsequent reports that it is actually causing higher premiums? He wouldn’t leave the CLASS Act, which he just had to admit was financially unsustainable, out of the health care bill? He wouldn’t have saved the $800 billion in taxpayer cash that he dumped into the stimulus? Or even say “my bad” on labeling last summer the “Recovery Summer?”

He wouldn’t make it a point to study Solyndra a little more before signing off on the loan and then making it a point to campaign at their factories? He wouldn’t act quicker to clean up the Gulf oil spill? Or check with Eric Holder to make sure that “Fast and Furious” wasn’t in fact another movie sequel?

I mean, at the very least wouldn’t you think he’d question the wisdom of vacationing in Martha’s Vineyard when the United States was standing at the edge of default and seriously contemplating jumping rather than cut our deficit?

Ok, then. Good luck in November!

But the coup de grâce, which is of course French for “dumbest thing ever uttered,” was Mr. Foot in Mouth himself – Harry Reid.

“It’s very clear that private-sector jobs have been doing just fine,” Reid said on the Senate floor, “it’s the public-sector jobs where we’ve lost huge numbers. . .”

Take a moment to pick your jaw off the floor. No really, I’ll wait. . .

Back? Good. The fact is that the private sector is far from fine. Since the recession began in 2007, the private sector has lost 6.3 million jobs. By contrast, government pay rolls have fallen by 392,000. Moreover, only 4.7 percent of government employees are unemployed – by far the lowest of any industry or class according to the Bureau of Labor Statistics, and about half the national unemployment rate. But even those numbers are misleadingly low because the number of involuntary part-time workers (they’d like to work full-time) is now at 9.3 million and 6.2 million workers have been out of work for 26 weeks are quickly becoming unemployable.

Unfortunately, there is no known cure for foot-in-mouth disease. But that doesn’t mean there is nothing we can do to eradicate it from Washington. Namely, we have to elect some people who know what the heck they’re talking about.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Sunday, October 16, 2011 - 15:25

Not even a month after we chronicled the “recipe for disaster” that is the CLASS Act – the Obama Administration has pulled the plug.

From the get-go it was clear that the “Community Living Assistance Services and Supports” program, better known as CLASS, was a budgetary and bureaucratic mess.

It was built on the unsustainable idea that millions of healthy Americans would sign up for an insurance program they didn’t need in order to subsidize the few who did. It was written in such a way that a so-called “insurance death spiral” was inevitable – unhealthy people would disproportionately sign up, the costs needed to cover the insurance would soar, which would further discourage healthier people from buying in.

Well intentioned? Yes. Well structured? No.

So it comes as little surprise that Obama was forced to abandon the program, despite being one of the signature pieces of his healthcare reform law. The news was delivered by Health and Human Services Secretary Kathleen Sebelius who earlier this year vowed to make the program financially viable.

“Despite our best analytical efforts, I do not see a viable path forward for CLASS implementation at this time,” she was forced to admit in a letter to Congress.

Senator John Thune (R-SD) and others cheered the announcement. “This is a victory for the American taxpayer and future generations,” he said. “The administration is finally admitting [the long-term care plan] is unsustainable and cannot be implemented.”

But what Obama has not yet admitted is that this is too little to late.

When Obamacare was still being debated, we did our best to highlight the unrealistic assumptions, the budgetary gimmicks, and the downright dirty tricks the Administration used to make it more palatable to Americans.  One of the worst offenders was the CLASS program.

The issues with the CLASS program are not new. As far back as May 2009, the chief actuary at the Center of Medicare and Medicaid services, attempted to warn the president that this program was not sustainable. Obama didn’t care. Instead of pulling it out of the law, Obama ignored the facts and seized on CLASS as a marketing tool.

Using some fiscal slight of hand, that many of us would call lies, the drafters of Obamacare wrote in a five-year vesting period during which premiums flow into the program, but no benefits would be paid out.

So in the 10-year budget window that the CBO uses to score legislation, they were forced to count 10 years of revenue and only 5 years of cost! Of course the program looked like a goldmine using that ridiculous framework!

Of course in Democrats’ fantasyland they ignored the fact that this money would eventually be needed to pay for benefits – not reduce the deficit. But such double counting, which would be called “accounting fraud” in the private sector, was part-and-parcel of the Obamacare package. Indeed, the gimmick was responsible for “reducing the deficit” by $72 billion, roughly half of the deficit reduction that Obama claimed would result from passage of Obamacare.

Now that CLASS helped push his health care reform bill over the finish line, Obama is more than willing to ditch it. And although we applaud them for pulling the plug before it caused too much budgetary havoc – the true damage has already been done…Obamacare passed.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Sunday, October 9, 2011 - 11:41

Another day, another scandal for the Obama Administration. On the heels of news that the Obama White House was prepared to give the failing Solyndra a second taxpayer-funded loan, comes disturbing new evidence from the botched Operation Fast and Furious.

Although it may sound like just another bad Vin Diesel sequel, this Operation Fast and Furious was meant as a sting operation run by the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco, Firearms, and Explosives (ATF) to help track down Mexican criminal organizations involved in the escalating drug war just across our border.

The concept was built around the knowledge that many Mexican drug cartels come to the United States to illegally purchase weapons. The ATF’s brilliant plan was to encourage these sales, but rather than arrest the purchasers on the spot, as in a traditional sting operation, agents were ordered to let them go.

Surely, you say, those smart guys at the ATF would have some way to track those guns! We wouldn’t just let them go, right? Right?

Well…

Wrong. According to testimony given by Special Agent John Dodson, one of the undercover agents who made the sale to the Mexican runners and then later turned into a whistleblower on the failed program, the ATF’s tracking plan was, shall we say, not exactly high-tech.

“I can tell you that after a trip to Radio Shack with ATF funds, I myself manufactured a GPS tracking device that could fit inside the handle of an AK variant rifle. The problem with it was the limited battery life,” said Dodson in House testimony.

Jon Stewart of The Daily Show sums it up this way: “The ATF plan to prevent American guns from being used in Mexican gun violence is to provide Mexican gangs with American guns, to use, according to our plans…for Mexican violence.”

Yep.

And we’re not just talking a few guns or a little violence. We’re talking an arsenal of more than 2,000 semi-automatic weapons for which the gangs spent more than $1.25 million. Whats worse, these guns were initially bought using taxpayer dollars. Moreover, using eTrace, the ATF’s electronic tracing program, those guns have been linked to more than 180 crime scenes. Two of those murders were US Border Patrol Agent Brian Terry and US Immigration & Customs Enforcement Special Agent Jaime Zapata.

The Justice Department, which overseas the ATF, has attempted to distance itself from this disaster. Attorney General Eric Holder even went as far as to testify on May 3rd, “I probably heard about Fast and Frious the last few weeks,” signifying that he was not briefed and had no knowledge of the operation.

But as CBS News later reported, “internal Justice Department documents show that at least ten months before that hearing, Holder began receiving frequent memos discussing Fast and Furious.” In fact, Holder received at least five memos beginning in July 2010 about the program.

The Justice Department then tried to do some damage control, telling CBS News that Holder misunderstood the question and did know about Fast and Furious – just not the details.

A quick glance at the memos reveal otherwise. They specifically state, among other details, that the buyers were “responsible for the purchase of 1500 firearms that were then supplied to Mexican drug trafficking cartels.”

Sadly, this case should be one of the biggest stories of the year. Using taxpayer money to buy and sell guns to violent criminals, which were later used in the murder of American citizens, is not just a bad or botched plan, it brings up fundamental questions about our democracy. And yet it has received scant news coverage. CBS News is the only major outlet covering the story, and even then, the chief reporter, Sharyl Attkisson has been literally yelled at by the Department of Justice and the White House for pursuing the story.

So much for this new “era of transparency.” So much for hope and change.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Sunday, October 2, 2011 - 13:48

Boardwalk Empire has brought to life, as only HBO can, the glitz, glamour, and corruption of machine-style politics. It tells the story of a man, Nucky Thompson, at the height of power in Prohibition-era Atlantic City. How he carefully used his influence as an elected official to subtly support the vice industry (gambling, alcohol, and prostitution) that made Atlantic City hum. And how he ultimately used that sway to build one of the most successful political machines in our nation’s history, helping to elect countless officials, including several governors and U.S. Senators.

But Atlantic City was child’s play compared to Chicago, namesake of the infamous Chicago-style politics that has become synonymous with corruption, patronage, and nepotism.

The ever-developing (and deepening) green energy scandal is enough to make you wonder whether Chicago-style politics have made their way to Washington.

The story began with a company called Solyndra, which received a $535 million loan issued by the U.S. government with incredibly low interest rates. What’s more, documents revealed that the Obama Administration overlooked numerous warnings from industry watchdogs and even the Office of Management and Budget, instead choosing to fast-track the loan prior to the President’s personal visit.

ABC News uncovered one potential motivation behind the seemingly nonsensical actions of the White House.

“Solyndra’s most prolific financial backer is George Kaiser, an Oklahoma oil billionaire who was a bundler of campaign donations for Obama’s 2008 race. Kaiser’s Argonaut Ventures and its affiliates have been the single largest shareholder of Solyndra, according to SEC filings and other records. The company holds 39 percent of Solyndra’s parent company, bankruptcy records filed Tuesday show.

Under terms of the bankruptcy filing, investors including Argonaut — which led a $75 million round of financing for Solyndra earlier this year — will stand in line before the federal government and other creditors.”

As it turns out, Solyndra may have just been the tip of the iceberg.

Earlier this week, the Department of Energy (DOE) announced that it has finalized a $737 million loan guarantee to help finance construction of a solar-power-generating facility owned by SolarReserve. According to the DOE the project will result in 45 permanent jobs.

The incredibly low jobs figure (it works out to around $16 million in taxpayer money for each job) is arguably not even the worst part. As multiple reports have since confirmed, the project is backed by an investment fund in which Ronald Pelosi – brother of Nancy Pelosi’s husband – serves as executive director. George Kaiser’s Argonaut Private Equity is also one of SolarReserve’s primary investors.

The money trail doesn’t end there. The Daily Caller did more digging and unsurprisingly, found more dirt.

“A Daily Caller investigation has found that in addition to the failed company Solyndra, at least four other solar panel manufacturing companies receiving in excess of $500 million in loan guarantees from the Obama administration employ executives or board members who have donated large sums of money to Democratic campaigns.”

Among them is a company called First Solar who won a $2.1 billion loan guarantee from the Department of Energy despite the fact that their technology is falling behind competitors. Their increasingly obsolete solar panels could be the reason their stock value has plummeted from $170.80 in February to $65.77 today.

Given these apparent troubles and what we know about Solyndra what could prompt the DOE to grant a loan? The Daily Caller’s research uncovered that First Solar’s founder, Michael Ahearn, has donated $123,650 do the Democratic Party over the last three cycles. The company has also spent more than $1.5 million lobbying Congress since 2009.

Does this mean a modern-day Nucky Thompson is rearing his head in Washington? Could we be witnessing the background material for an HBO series? Has Chicago-style politics migrated to the White House?

The more likely scenario is that the White House fell in love with green energy and naively ignored its critics. For this, their pet issue, they placed a thumb on the market scale to ensure its success, regardless of the costs. But such actions inevitably bring corruption in the form of questionable campaign contributions, massive lobbying efforts, and a gradual move towards crony capitalism.

Obama’s intentions may have been pure, but the results are the same – massive amounts of taxpayer dollars were wasted and free markets became a little less free.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Wednesday, September 28, 2011 - 19:34

Health care reform takes political courage.

Anytime you propose fundamentally changing something that is so important to so many peoples’ lives, there is a certain risk. But the alternative, doing nothing, is simply not an option. In the United States today our government spends about one-forth of its entire budget on health care programs. The Congressional Budget Office suggests that amount will quickly grow out of control, reaching 45 percent of the budget as our generation reaches adulthood.

Republicans understood the risk when they offered a plan to save health care earlier this year entitled a “Path to Prosperity.” Leading that charge was Rep. Paul Ryan (R-WI) who has set aside political self-interest to systematically save each of our failing entitlement programs.

Of course, every attempt to save is demagogued by Democrats as an attempt to eliminate. Political opportunism knows no bounds in today’s Washington. In a now famous attack-ad, a liberal group showed a Paul Ryan lookalike wheeling an elderly woman in a wheelchair off of a cliff.

This is what we’re up against. But in a speech today at the Hoover Institution, Rep. Ryan argued that conservatives cannot be deterred by these scare tactics.

“Fear and demagoguery are the last refuses of an intellectually bankrupt party,” Ryan said, “and the moment calls for leaders who are not afraid to be honest with people about how they would solve the problems we face.”

But Ryan does not wish martyrdom for intellectually honest Republicans. He does not foresee anyone dying on the hill of health care reform. Instead, his is a vision of hope in which Republicans “summon the courage and the ability to offer Americans a true choice of two futures on health care, which is a choice they deserve.”

Ryan’s feels optimistic, as all of those who believe in reform should, because conservatives have presented a workable vision that would fix the fundamental flaws in the current badly designed government system.

The biggest problem, Ryan explained, was that “the health care sector lacks most of the basic building blocks of a functioning market.” First, the true prices of care are hidden beneath government or insurance company bureaucracy. Second, consumers are insulated from marginal costs despite the fact that we’re paying higher premiums and taxes.

Rather than open the health care system up and allow free market principles to do their work – increase transparency, lower costs, increase supply, and add choices – Obamacare did the exact opposite. The bill pushes health insurance further out of the hands of consumers and closer to the grasp of government bureaucrats.

Similar approaches were introduced or expanded in Medicare and Medicaid, the two biggest drivers of government debt for the foreseeable future.

In Medicare, the President proposed using an Independent Payment Advisory Board (IPAB aka: 15 unelected government bureaucrats) to hold the cost of Medicare to a particular level. But as Ryan points out, IPAB’s chief tool is price controls for providers, which would do nothing but drive Medicare doctors “out of business, resulting in harsh disruptions and denied care for seniors.”

The Medicaid problem is equally bad. A faulty “matching formula” in which the federal government reimburses a portion of states’ Medicaid costs is ripping apart state budgets and incentivizing waste. To add insult to injury, Obamacare included a provision that prevents states from altering the program’s eligibility requirements, essentially handcuffing states’ ability to deal with one of their largest budgetary problems.

Republicans have a plan to fix each of these problems, not by adding more layers of government in the hopes of papering over these issues, but of introducing market forces. “Under a reformed approach, the government would make a defined contribution to the health-care security of every American, rather than continue to offer open-ended, well intentioned, but ultimately empty promises,” Ryan explained.

And that is the difficult part. Republicans are fighting against incredible sounding, but ultimately unsustainable promises. But we are armed with are facts, truth, and our integrity.

This will not be an easy debate. Every solution Republican’s introduce will be met with claims that we are destroying America’s entitlement system. What we must make people realize is that reform is the only way to save it, not just for this generation, but for all future generations.

Rep. Ryan is already leading the charge, we should all be brave courageous enough to get behind him.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, September 20, 2011 - 10:41

The first time I read George Orwell’s Animal Farm I was in 8th grade. It seemed a very interesting book, with talking pigs and horses, and battles with humans. Of course, I had no idea what it meant.

I had no idea it was an allegorical novel about the rise of Stalin during World War II, or grasped its lesson about the inevitable de-evolution of Communism. In middle school I thought Stalin was something I did every night when it came time to do homework; in other words, I wasn’t exactly prepared to grasp the fundamental lesson of Animal Farm.

But now I see what an important work it truly was. To watch how gradually, yet completely, rulers (pigs, in this case) bend the rules of the farm to their whims, completely forgetting the reasons the animals rebelled against their abusive human master in the first place. That change is seen best in the evolution of the farm’s chief commandment: “All animals are equal.”

Over time, as the pigs become more and more impressed with their own power - handing out favors to maintain in and punishments to strengthen it, an addendum is added to the amendment: “All animals are equal, but some animals are more equal than others.”

So it goes with the President’s two stimulus packages as well – all states may be equal, but some are more equal than others. Immediately after the release of the first stimulus package, USA Today dug into the numbers and found that Blue States, i.e. those who traditionally vote Democrat, may have been favored in doling out stimulus money.

“Counties that supported Obama last year have reaped twice as much per person from the administrations $787 billion economic stimulus package as those that voted for his Republican rival, Sen. John McCain,” wrote the USA Today.

Of course, we all know now just how unstimulative the stimulus was, so perhaps we could overlook this blatant attempt to reward his political supporters with money.

But now he’s doing it again!

President Obama recently introduced a so-called “jobs” bill with plans to spend upwards of $200 billion on various projects including, jobs for public sector workers and infrastructure projects.

But as researchers Paul Peterson and Daniel Nadler write for the Wall Street Journal,

“These vast contributions to the coffers of state and local governments, though pitched as a jobs bill, are in reality the latest in a series of bailouts of debt-ridden state and local governments. They are a form of special benefit to states in the blue regions of the country where the president’s most fervent supporters reside.”

Over the past several years liberal states have followed a similar track as the federal government – racking up massive amounts of debt through dramatic expansion of government programs and providing over-generous benefits to those who work for them. The result has been enormous debt and unsustainable fiscal trajectories.

But this situation makes for bad politics for Obama. If blue-hued states are suffering under higher taxes, more debts, and costlier interest rates, 2012 could be a tough sell. So what does he do? He does what he always does - redistributes wealth. Sure, he's promoting the "jobs" bill as a way to help everyone, not to do so would be political suicide, but he also made sure the plan contained plenty of special perks for states that will be crucial to his reelection chances by throwing them gobs of taxpayer money to help clean up the mess that public sector workers and unions have made of state finances. 

Despite all Obama's protestations and preaching of "fairness," this isn't fair. Debt-financed spending will fall on the shoulders of every taxpayer, regardless of whether they were one of the lu reaped the benefits. But not only is our president not making any attempt to evenly distribute “stimulus” money, he’s explicitly directing it towards states that lean Democrat.

In other words, all states are equal…it’s just that some states are more equal than others. Pigs came to rule Animal Farm, I find it tragically ironic that pork now dominates Obama's stimulus plan.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Saturday, September 17, 2011 - 11:37

Those obstructionists! Those partisan blowhards! Holding up jobs legislation for their own political gain, it’s simply unbelievable.

As if the White House didn’t have enough to do, they’re having to take time out of their schedule to try and convince opponents of the jobs bill to get behind it.

It’s a story we’ve heard before. In fact, it’s a story Democrats like to tell with just about every idea they’ve had over the past two years. Except this time, much to the chagrin of the Obama Administration, the obstructionists are the Democrats.

That’s right…the Democrats don’t even like Obama’s latest “jobs” (read: stimulus) bill.

The Hill reports from the Senate side,

“Senior administration officials met with Senate Democrats for an hour and a half on Thursday to answer their complaints about President Obama’s jobs bill.

Democratic lawmakers voiced objections to several of the president’s proposals to pay for the $447 billion stimulus package, including an elimination of tax breaks for the oil-and-gas industry.”

David Plouffe, a senior adviser to the president, acknowledged after a marathon meeting in the Senate’s Mansfield Room that not all Democrats are sold on the plan.”

But Obama’s troubles aren’t limited to the Senate, where Democrats have a majority, and are thus much more politically careful. No, his bill’s unpopularity extends to the House, where Democrats often use their minority status to truly “speak their mind.”

From Roll Call,

“President Barack Obama’s plans to pay for his jobs legislation are facing a cool reception from some House Democrats who wonder how the proposals – which went nowhere in the 111th Congress, when Democrats held majorities in both chambers – can attract support now.”

I’ve been wondering the same thing as well. Unfortunately, there is little indication the President Obama ever intends to address that.

From the very beginning it has been clear that this is less an attempt at creating good policy than a brazen attempt to score political points. In other words, this isn’t meant as legislation to actually help the millions of Americans who are unemployed, this is a bill to help him stay employed as President of the United States.

Except that plan isn’t working out to well either. Tough to convince Americans to vote for you when you can’t even convince your fellow Democrats in Congress to go along with your plan. In fact, on MSNBC’s Morning Joe, host Joe Scarborough went as far as to say that Democrats “are the ones that are in open revolt.”

And that isn’t hyperbole. Take Senator Jim Webb (D-VA) who, when asked about the President’s plan to pay for the bill said it was, “Terrible.” Sen, Mark Begich (D-AK) called it “frustrating,” that the bill would “singl[e] out certain industries” for tax hikes.” And Sen. Joe Manchin (D-WV) said he has “serious questions about the level of spending . . . as well as the afctual effectiveness some of these policies will have.”

That’s not to say that the plan is all bad. Immediately after presenting the jobs bill Republicans, led by Majority Leader Eric Cantor (R-VA) and Speaker John Boehner, (R-OH) signaled openness to portions of the plan. Democrats are now following their lead, suggesting that we “cherry pick” the good parts and nix the bad.

Sadly, White House spokesman David Axelrod already said they not accept an “a la carte menu” approach to the Presidents jobs bill.

With all the negativity swirling around Democrats it’s not much clearer why the President had to beg students at a North Carolina campaign stop, “If you love me, you gotta help me pass this bill.” With his party in revolt he’s gonna need all help he can get.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Monday, September 5, 2011 - 17:56

Happy Labor Day. In a normal year an exclamation point would have followed that sentence, but we’re at least four years removed from a normal year, at least on the labor front.

Yes, on a day that should be filled with cookouts, baseball, and one last dip in the neighborhood pool, all too many Americans are browsing job listings and scouring the dregs of the want ads. Labor Day used to be filled with lamentations of how much Americans worked, now it is filled with discussion about how much Americans want to work, but can’t.

News of last week’s jobs numbers have made today even less celebration-worthy. The Labor Department reported no job growth in August – a statistic that headlined several other depressing figures – 14 million unemployed, 9 million who are working part time because they have no other choice, and 6.5 million who have simply given up looking. The jobs picture is even more bleak for young adults who are suffering through unemployment that is higher than any other demographic.

In a column out today Robert Samuelson adds a dose of perspective to our sputtering jobs engine. “To reduce unemployment, the economy must create enough jobs to absorb entrants into the labor market and the existing out-of-work,” writes Samuelson. Citing a study conducted by liberal economist Heidi Shierholz, he says we will need to create 16.9 million jobs over the next five years to soak up all the new workers. That’s an average of 282,000 jobs each month. As a reminder, we created zero in August.

Perhaps things would feel a little more uplifting if there was at least a sense that our economy was preparing to turn the corner. Instead, there is more talk of a double dip than a true recovery and economists are more prone to debate whether this is a “new normal” than whether we’re suffering through some sort of anomaly.

Sadly, our President doesn’t inspire much conference. We’ve heard plenty of speeches, and the blogosphere is anxiously awaiting another one this Thursday, but we’ve seen very few plans. In fact, it’s hard to argue that Washington has done more to alleviate than exacerbate our economic pain.

The $800 billion stimulus was an expensive Keynesian experiment that only served to prove the impotency of government attempts at intervention in the economy. And yet, very few people seemed to study the results, or at least heed them.

Instead, President Obama and his liberal friends seems intent on pushing for more government spending in an attempt to jumpstart the economy. In an op-ed today Paul Krugman wrote, “we should have a lot of job-creating spending on the part of government,” as if somehow Washington knew the exact formula for such a feat.

In addition to the mound of debts we’re racking up, the government is constructing a wall of red tape and disincentives to job creation. The regulatory state is expanding at a record pace, shackling companies with the manacles of big government overreach. With the implementation of Obamacare and Dodd-Frank, these burdens will only grow.

The bureaucracy is extending its grasp in other areas as well. The most glaring example is the National Labor Relations Board who is suing Boeing for expanding into a non-union state. Throwing a bone to union friends, whose support (both financially and at the ballot box) will be absolutely essential to Democrats 2012 success, seems to tally above job creation on the Obama Administration’s list of priorities.

All told, this Labor Day brings little to celebrate. Americans are a people who appreciate and in most cases enjoy work. Our jobs and careers are critical not only to our survival, but more importantly, to our sense of self worth. Here’s to hoping that our economy will soon be able to provide enough jobs to satisfy the needs of America. Better yet, here’s hoping Washington will get out of the way and allow it to happen.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Thursday, September 1, 2011 - 18:51

Tonight, football arises from the ashes of an offseason filled with college scandals and a pro-lockout to once again soar to the forefront of Americans’ minds. Football is a sport built on rivalries. Michigan v. Ohio State, Oklahoma v. Texas. Alabama v. Auburn, and of course, Army v. Navy.

Americans simultaneously love the rivalry, hate the other team, and respect the tradition behind the game to form an odd, but incredibly potent cocktail that quenches our thirst every fall weekend.

But perhaps the biggest rivalry today crosses over from the world of sports, of football, and of fun. It is a rivalry not based in respect, but one of power. I’m talking about that relationship that exists between Democrats and Republicans.

At a time when our parties should be working together to overcome the incredible difficulties that Americans are facing every day – persistent unemployment, a slumping economy, and a staggering debt – Democrats’ continue to pick childish fights more reminiscent of Pop Warner than NFL. Americans deserve political pros, willing to put aside ego for the good of the country, but we’re getting rank amateurs.

That divide became all the more clear this week when President Obama decided to hold a so-called jobs speech (yes, another one) on the same day as an important Republican presidential debate.

Such obvious pettiness should be enough to pop even the most optimistic view that an action-oriented, more bipartisan Washington was going to prevail after the summer recess. Nope, before our Representatives even return to the nation’s capital, President Obama has shot a volley right across the bow.

Moreover, he’s committed to not admitting it. In a moment we can only describe as surreal, Jay Carney, the White House’s chief spokesman had the audacity to say that Obama’s upcoming speech would be aimed at healing the party divide.

“He will make the case to the American people…that politics is broken,” said Carney “And that politics is getting in the way of the very necessary things we need to do. Now he hopes…that members of Congress will come back from their recess with a new sense of urgency . . . There’s nothing that’s preventing us from doing these things – both to grow the economy and to create jobs, AND to get our fiscal house in order – except politics.”

Exactly. Hit the nail on the head. But the President’s decision to hold a jobs speech over top of the Republican debate can be described as nothing but the worst of politics.

Even Democratic strategist James Carville, who led Bill Clinton’s reelection campaign, had a negative reaction to the maneuver. “I do think this is a really big debate and I think the White House was out of bounds…in trying to schedule a speech during a debate,” Carvilles said on Good Morning America.

But we understand campaign politics. It’s a game so rough and a rivalry so deep that it makes Michigan-Auburn look like an intra-squad game of two-hand touch. We also understand that Obama’s speech isn’t all that important. As HotAir blogger AllahPundit wrote, “It’s not that his jobs plan [will] do much to help, or that everyone – everyone – knows that this speech will reek, filled as it’ll surely be with the usual tired bromides from the “adult in the room” about how mean Congress is.” After all, we know that anything President Obama lays out next week (which will surely consist of some tired, ill-thought-out stimulus plan described as “investment”) actually has a chance of passing.

What we don’t understand, or simply refuse to understand, is why the President insists on campaigning at this critical juncture in our economic recovery. As investment analytics expert, James Rickards wrote, “There’s a time for politics and a time for policy. A time for running and a time for governing. This White House has shown repeatedly that they are either incapable of making the distinction or reflexively go for politics every time.”

And with politics and campaigning consuming and manipulating every decision being made by our President, an economic recovery moves further into the distance. Granted, Obama’s team actually made the decision to back down from the original date (which prompted jeers from the liberals who are already starting the “He caved again” theme), but the damage has already been done. Obama has tipped his hand and it’s not pretty. It’s another 14 months of campaign maneuvering at a time when every waking moment should be trying to guide this once-proud nation towards recovery.

Democrats v. Republicans. It is a rivalry for the ages. The winner may not play for some novelty trophy, like the Jeweled Shillelagh of USC and Notre Dame rivalry; nor does it have an interesting name, like the “World’s Largest Outdoor Cocktail Party” of Florida and Georgia fame. No, the stakes are much higher and the game much more serious for this particular rivalry. It is sad that one team seems so intent on tarnishing it.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, August 23, 2011 - 19:30

Before the Great Recession consumer debt had been rising at an unsustainable pace. To give you a sense of America’s growing spendthrift habits, between 1984 and 2008 consumer debt rose from $2 trillion to $14 trillion. Then the house of cards we sat upon toppled. Housing, where we kept a significant portion of our debt, collapsed, causing both bank and individual balance sheets to turn to garbage seemingly overnight.

Americans have responded. We’re increasingly cautious about how we spend. We’re pinching every penny and stretching every dollar in an attempt to rebuild our savings. Much to the chagrin of Keynesians, whose theory rests on a never-ending cycle of spending and debt.

It was as if the recession pressed the reset button on Americans’ fiscal habits. Painful, yes; but we learned important lessons along the way. In fact, a study conducted by SunAmerica finds that three-quarters of Americans believe the recession provided a much needed wake-up call. They are also taking steps to ensure that their money won’t lose value and the investments they do choose are sound. The study found that 65 percent now want investments that are guaranteed not to lose value and 60 percent seek investments to protect them from market loss.

In other words, we’re keeping a close eye on our dollars and we’re no longer willing to gamble on risky investments or accede to bad returns.

The same goes for our tax dollars. For better or worse, our taxes are an investment. It is an investment in the roads we drive, the schools we attend, and the troops that protect us. It provides health care for those in need and retirement security for everyone. Unfortunately, as taxpayers we’re seeing diminishing returns on each of these investments.

In an op-ed in today’s Wall Street Journal, former CEO of American Express, Harvey Golub, explains how this sentiment is related to American’s feeling about higher taxes.

Governments have an obligation to spend our tax money on programs that work. They fail at this fundamental task. Do we really need dozens of retraining programs with no measure of performance or results? Do we really need to spend money on solar panels, windmills and battery-operated cars when we have ample energy supplies in this country? Do we really need all the regulations that put an estimated $2 trillion burden on our economy by raising the price of things we buy? Do we really need subsidies for domestic sugar farmers and ethanol producers?

Why do we require that public projects pay above-market labor costs? Why do we spend billions on trains that no one will ride? Why do we keep post offices open in places no one lives? Why do we subsidize small airports in communities close to larger ones? Why do we pay government workers above-market rates and outlandish benefits? Do we really need an energy department or an education department at all?

All great questions, but more importantly, all questions that Washington should answer before they ask us for a single dollar more in higher taxes.

No person in his or her right mind would throw an investor’s money into junk projects, with no chance of return, and then come back and ask for more money. And no investor with any financial sense wouldn’t laugh that person out of the room if he tried. Throwing good money after bad simply isn’t a sound investment strategy.

Why then does our government expect us to do it? And in ever-higher amounts? If the government is going to ask for more money, from anyone, rich, middle-class, or poor, then they owe it to us to make every effort to ensure the money they are already pulling from our pockets is well spent.

As of now they can’t do that. Not even close. Even if we put aside the questionable investments, like Obamacare, that arouse some partisan misgivings, there is plenty of overlap, inefficiency, and waste that should be cut.

The President’s own budget, in a section entitled “Terminations, Reductions and Savings” identifies $20 billion worth of programs that “do not accomplish their intended objectives, are not efficient, or that replicate efforts being completed by another initiative.” The Office of Management and Budget found a total of $703 billion in unobligated balances – money that was appropriated for agency use but has gone unspent. And the Government Accountability Office released a study earlier this year in which they came to the conclusion that, “reducing or eliminating duplication, overlap, or fragmentation could potentially save billions of taxpayer dollars annually and help provide more efficient and effective services.”

The recession has made every American more concerned about where their dollars are going. Shouldn’t the U.S. government be doing the same? So before they ask for more of our money, let’s make sure we demand they spend what they have more wisely.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, August 23, 2011 - 19:29

Burger King announced today that it is dropping its “King” mascot – the giant-headed, quasi-creepy, baron of the burger.

The edgy ad campaign received a lot of attention from the media and won rave reviews from critics, the trouble is, it just wasn’t selling nearly as many hamburgers as McDonalds. “This discrepancy in performance is not the result of McDonald’s having more “creative” advertising or a hipper mascot (Ronald McDonald is many things – hip he’s not),” writes Marc Babej in Forbes. “But while Burger King was trying to sell consumer an edgy brand image, McDonalds focused on something much more mundane: selling burgers.”

So obvious, and yet so rare. We’re used to being sold on edgy, flashy gimmicks, not actual substance. President Obama tried to do the same thing with his jobs agenda. His administration made no attempt to focus on what America is good at, has seemingly forgotten where our comparative advantages lie, and has refused to let free markets decide. Instead, in a misguided effort to push a ‘hope and change’ agenda, the government has decided what the future of our economy should look like.

One of the main ideas they’ve settled on is “green jobs.” Obama campaigned on the promise of plentiful green jobs – 5 million of them to be exact. He was so convinced that he included $2.3 billion in tax credits for the clean energy-manufacturing sector in the stimulus bill – $500 million of which were for job training programs. Of course, if you believe his 2008 campaign, that $2.3 billion was merely meant as a down payment. “We’ll invest $15 billion a year over the next decade in renewable energy,” Obama said in the fall of 2008.

Those jobs proved to be an illusion.

The New York Times recently reported,

“A study released in July by the non-partisan Brookings Institution found clean-technology jobs accounted for just 2 percent of employment nationwide and only slightly more – 2.2 percent – in Silicon Valley. Rather than adding jobs, the study found, the sector actually lost 491 positions from 2003 to 2010 in the South Bay, where the unemployment rate in June was 10.5 percent.

Federal and state efforts to stimulate creation of green jobs have largely failed, government records show.”

So it goes when Washington attempts to thwart the most basic principles of Econ 101 in some ill-fated quest to create jobs. “It is well understood, among economists, that governments do not “create jobs,” writes American Enterprise Scholar Kenneth Green. “The willingness of entrepreneurs to invest their capital, paired with consumer demand for goods and services, does that. All the government can do is subsidize some industries while jacking up costs for others. In the green case, it is destroying jobs in the conventional energy sector…through taxes and subsidies to green companies that will use taxpayer dollars to undercut the competition.”

Even some Democrats are ready to give up the ghost of green jobs and admit that simple economics rules the day. “Of course, we want to be part of the new innovation and the green jobs,” said Rep. Maxine Waters in a recent MSNBC interview. “But you know, the green jobs have been about a lot of talk and not a lot has been happening on that. All of this talk about the green jobs never materialized.”

The only person not ready to admit defeat is President Obama. He has already announced that he will be presenting another job creation “plan” in September and speculation abounds that it will include yet more money for green jobs. Before doing so we encourage him to read this Investors Business Daily report detailing some of the colossal failures from his first attempt at stimulus, including examples such as Evergreen Solar – a company that just cut 800 jobs despite receiving tons of taxpayer cash.

Promoting green jobs is flashy. For Obama, they were a way to sell people on an entirely new sector of the economy, one that was both earth-friendly and hugely profitable. But like “the King,” who was edgy, but couldn’t sell hamburgers, the promise of a “green economy,” is a lot of hype with no real results.

Burger King is dropping the marketing gimmicks and getting back to what they are good at – selling a decent burger. It’s time for President Obama to let America do the same. It’s time to drop the green jobs charade and let our economy grow naturally.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Saturday, August 20, 2011 - 16:59

Ah. August. The month where hardworking Americans take a little time off, head to the beach, take the kids to an amusement park, or maybe enjoy the cool air of the mountains. Oh wait, we’re in the worst recession in generations where a significant number of people aren’t working, but not because they’ve taken time off but because they can’t find a job. And a significant number of those who are lucky enough to have a job are pinching their pennies and making every dollar last.

And then there is Obama. Vacationing in Martha’s Vineyard.

This is hardly the time for our fearless leader to be taking time off. For the fourth consecutive week the Dow Jones Industrial Average lost ground. Over the past week a whopping $23.5 billion was pulled from equity funds– the most since the collapse of Lehman Brothers in 2008. That has driven the stock market down 11 percent for the month of August as nervous investors are beginning to panic.

What’s more, they might have reason too.

The Federal Reserve Bank of Philadelphia just reported a drop in regional manufacturing survey, a key signal showing lower domestic growth. As James Paulsen, chief investment strategest for Wells Capital Management told the New York Times, “That was the first number that says recession.”

If things are bad here, they are possibly worse overseas. Greece, Ireland, and Portugal remain an economic mess. They were at least small and bailout-able. Now, fears that two of Europe’s largest economies, Italy and Spain, could also need help, is sending the European Union into a panic. Despite early talk of creating a “fiscal union” by which nations’ debts would be collectively guaranteed, leaders in France and Germany signaled their contentment with the current bailout fund. This left investors, who were expecting something more audacious, feeling less than comforted.

So in sum we’ve got investors fleeing, the stock market plunging, Treasury rates hitting all time lows, gold prices hitting all time highs, and a President on vacation.

It was enough to make some political prognosticators to wonder if he had simply given up. Here’s Peggy Noonan in today’s Wall Street Journal,

“You can imagine him having lunch with political advisers, hearing some unwanted advice – “Don’t go to Martha’s Vineyard!” – putting his napkin by his plate, pushing back from the table, rising, and saying in a clipped, well-modulated voice, “I’m tired, I’m going. If they want this job so much let them have it.”

Nile Gardener took it a step further in the UK Telegraph, calling it “an act of presidential hara-kiri.”

It’s hard not to agree with them. After all, the stock market isn’t the only thing that is tanking. A new Gallup poll out earlier this week finds that only 26 percent of Americans approve of President Obama’s handling of the economy, well below his previous all-time low of 35 percent. Americans are also increasingly fed up with his job performance on job creation (29 percent approval) and the federal budget deficit (24 percent approval).

A vacation during one of the most volatile economic periods in recent history isn’t likely to boost his approval rating. Especially since he’s going to Martha’s Vineyard of all places. Heading to a posh playground for wealthy elites, to hobnob with locals whose biggest daily concern is figuring out whether to choose the Mahi Mahi or the lobster tail, doesn’t make for good optics.

“It’s the kind of place that reverberates in the political imagination – that tags you as elitist no matter how many g’s you drop,” writes Peggy Noonan.

But it’s not just limited to our imagination. It’s a clear signal that President Obama is out of touch with the deep-felt sense of unease that is permeating most of America.  Everyone understands the need for some time off. We get it. But do you really have to go now? When the threat of recession is real? And do you really have to go there? Where the economy is a distant worry for most of its residents.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Wednesday, August 17, 2011 - 20:32

The summer movie season is winding down which means super heroes and teenage wizards head for the exits while vampires and other nasties make their debut. The horror genre isn’t exactly known for their groundbreaking plots. I mean, at this point everyone should know that a house built on a cemetery is a bad idea, you never split up to “cover more ground,” and that the monster is never, ever, really dead.

Unfortunately, the horror genre has carried over to Washington, where the biggest villain – the stimulus – is back from the dead. Yep, just when you thought you had heard the end of the ill-fated testament to government excess, it’s baaa-aack. It’s the policy that conservative (and sane economics) just can’t seem to kill.

Word comes today that President Obama is considering asking the Deficit Reduction Committee (created as part of the debt-ceiling deal) to pass new stimulus measures. The question a sane person would ask is, “Why should a committee focused on reducing the deficit be asked to also pass measures that would increase the deficit.” The answer, of course, is pure politics.

Obama has long attempted to get Congress back on the stimulus bandwagon by talking up ideas like an “infrastructure bank.” Neither Chamber of Congress (and by extension, neither party) has even so much as listened to Obama’s nattering for more cash and thus his plan has failed to gain the necessary traction. But the Deficit Reduction Committee operates under an entirely different set of rules that could make it easier for Obama to get his ideas passed.

The final plan that the Committee creates will enjoy expedited floor consideration that limits the amount of debate time, eliminates the opportunity to offer amendments, and guts minority party defense mechanisms like the Senate filibuster. As Zeke Miller wrote in Business Insider, “Using the Super Committee would lower the threshold to pass a more substantial bill, because the group’s recommendations are required to be taken up for a straight majority vote before December 23.”

This breaking news confirms reports from earlier in the week that a rift had been developing among President Obama’s top economic staffers. On the one hand were advisers who felt that the debt ceiling had “weakened Republicans and created an opening for bigger ideas,” like additional stimulus measures. On the other, were confidantes that were “skeptical about the merits of stimulus spending,” and instead want to focus on deficit reduction measures.

If the latest reports are true, it appears that those who favored additional stimulus measures may have won out.

Republicans are already taking a stand. “We must put an end to the policy uncertainty constantly being driven by this Administration,” said House Majority Leader Eric Cantor. “That means stopping the discussions of new stimulus spending with money that we simply do not have.”

The fact that Republicans have to once again beat back a stimulus idea long presumed dead shows how out of touch the President really is. It’s as if Obama is panicking. His big-government plans haven’t panned out, the job market remains stagnant, his leadership is being called into question, and his job numbers are tanking. With his back against the wall he’s going back to his old bag of tricks.

But the stimulus was an expensive failure the first time around. Early evidence suggested that the program cost about $400,000 per job – proving the government is extremely efficient at spending taxpayer money, and extremely inefficient at creating jobs.

And yet President Obama wants to try this again, and use a committee created for the sole purpose of reducing our deficit to do it no less? Pardon our naïveté but we figured the Deficit Committee would actually be reducing spending, not adding to it.

But then again, perhaps we underestimated the horror movie that is Washington DC. How silly for us to assume that just because the stimulus was dead and buried beneath the weight of its own failure that it wouldn’t rise again. Monsters always come back. And this figures to be one high-budgeted frightfest.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Wednesday, August 17, 2011 - 20:26

The summer movie season is winding down which means super heroes and teenage wizards head for the exits while vampires and other nasties make their debut. The horror genre isn’t exactly known for their groundbreaking plots. I mean, at this point everyone should know that a house built on a cemetery is a bad idea, you never split up to “cover more ground,” and that the monster is never, ever, really dead.

Unfortunately, the horror genre has carried over to Washington, where the biggest villain – the stimulus – is back from the dead. Yep, just when you thought you had heard the end of the ill-fated testament to government excess, it’s baaa-aack. It’s the policy that conservative (and sane economics) just can’t seem to kill.

Word comes today that President Obama is considering asking the Deficit Reduction Committee (created as part of the debt-ceiling deal) to pass new stimulus measures. The question a sane person would ask is, “Why should a committee focused on reducing the deficit be asked to also pass measures that would increase the deficit.” The answer, of course, is pure politics.

Obama has long attempted to get Congress back on the stimulus bandwagon by talking up ideas like an “infrastructure bank.” Neither Chamber of Congress (and by extension, neither party) has even so much as listened to Obama’s nattering for more cash and thus his plan has failed to gain the necessary traction. But the Deficit Reduction Committee operates under an entirely different set of rules that could make it easier for Obama to get his ideas passed.

The final plan that the Committee creates will enjoy expedited floor consideration that limits the amount of debate time, eliminates the opportunity to offer amendments, and guts minority party defense mechanisms like the Senate filibuster. As Zeke Miller wrote in Business Insider, “Using the Super Committee would lower the threshold to pass a more substantial bill, because the group’s recommendations are required to be taken up for a straight majority vote before December 23."

This breaking news confirms reports from earlier in the week that a rift had been developing among President Obama’s top economic staffers. On the one hand were advisers who felt that the debt ceiling had “weakened Republicans and created an opening for bigger ideas,” like additional stimulus measures. On the other, were confidantes that were “skeptical about the merits of stimulus spending,” and instead want to focus on deficit reduction measures.

If the latest reports are true, it appears that those who favored additional stimulus measures may have won out.  

Republicans are already taking a stand. “We must put an end to the policy uncertainty constantly being driven by this Administration,” said House Majority Leader Eric Cantor. “That means stopping the discussions of new stimulus spending with money that we simply do not have.”

The fact that Republicans have to once again beat back a stimulus idea long presumed dead shows how out of touch the President really is. It’s as if Obama is panicking. His big-government plans haven’t panned out, the job market remains stagnant, his leadership is being called into question, and his job numbers are tanking. With his back against the wall he’s going back to his old bag of tricks.

But the stimulus was an expensive failure the first time around. Early evidence suggested that the program cost about $400,000 per job – proving the government is extremely efficient at spending taxpayer money, and extremely inefficient at creating jobs.

And yet President Obama wants to try this again, and use a committee created for the sole purpose of reducing our deficit to do it no less? Pardon our naïveté but we figured the Deficit Committee would actually be reducing spending, not adding to it.

But then again, perhaps we underestimated the horror movie that is Washington DC. How silly for us to assume that just because the stimulus was dead and buried beneath the weight of its own failure that it wouldn’t rise again. Monsters always come back. And this figures to be one high-budgeted frightfest.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Monday, August 15, 2011 - 14:29

What if America was no longer the greatest nation on earth? What if we lost our spot as the world’s economic powerhouse, the nation where companies and entrepreneurs flocked to be close to the consumers who would be purchasing their products? What if American exceptionalism faded to something more resembling American averageness?

Would we except our fate as a declining superpower the way, say, Great Britain has? Do we fall into a comfortable malaise, with a high standard of living but no real prospect for growth, such as France?

Ok, enough with the rhetorical questions, but sadly they are ones we may be facing in the very near future. The LA Times reports:

“[A]s the [the United States’] economy stalls and personal incomes stagnate, they see consumers in Asia and Latin America as offering brighter prospects for future sales and profits.

In effect, as many corporate executives look ahead, the United States has a diminishing place in their thinking.

The nation’s tax laws reinforce the pattern. American companies have piled up mountains of profits overseas, but they must pay very high taxes if they bring the money home. So instead of investing back home, they are more apt to put the money into overseas expansion, adding jobs there.

The shifting focus is one reason new job growth here has slowed to a trickle in recent months.”

America’s is slowly fading as the world’s economic bright-spot and Washington is the one standing by the dimmer switch.

American businesses are earning more overseas. That shouldn’t be viewed as a bad thing; as the world’s economy grows it serves as a rising tide that lifts all boats – the U.S. included. But bad policy decisions have prevented the U.S. from benefiting from the increased sales.

Rather than bring their investment back home, which could be spent on more workers, new machines, or researching the next generation of products, they’re parking it overseas. And who can blame them?

Legendary entrepreneur (and Democrat) Steve Wynn explained several of the reasons in a recent quarterly conference call. “This administration is the greatest wet blanket to business, and progress and job creation in my lifetime,” said Wynn. “And I can prove it and I could spend the next 3 hours giving you examples of all of us in the marketplace that are frightened to death a bout all the new regulations, our healthcare costs escalate . . . A President that keeps on using that word, “redistribution.”

Wynn’s sentiment seems to be shared by many business owners. In fact, a recent survey conducted by the U.S. Chamber of Commerce found that 64 percent of business owners will not hire anyone next year, giving taxation, regulation, and the threat of new legislation, as the top reasons why.

If American businesses are discouraged from investing their domestic profits, their practically punished for attempting to invest their foreign profits. A large factor in that decisions is our broken tax system. Not only do we have the highest corporate tax rate in the world (35 percent) but we are the only developed nation to use a territorial system to collect it.

What does that mean? Most nations only collect taxes on income earned on their shores. We on the other hand, collect taxes on anything a U.S. based company earns anywhere in the world. This opens up companies to double taxation. Of course, Washington has tried to alleviate the problem by granting tax credits on foreign income tax paid, but since we have the highest rate, it still makes sense for foreign earnings to be kept abroad.

America cannot continue to be great if its’ businesses are being incentivized to invest elsewhere. We are quickly becoming obsolete in a world economy that is constantly changing. Unless Washington acts to remove the barriers to investment (namely through fundamental tax reform) we’ll soon be relegated to the dustbin of past powerhouses – swept away by warnings we refused to heed.

Barack Obama is already the first president to preside over a downgrade from our ‘AAA’ status, at the current rate he may also be the reason for losing our spot atop the world economy.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Thursday, August 11, 2011 - 14:32

Lost amid the uproar over Standard and Poors’ decision to downgrade America’s credit rating came even more great news for overburdened taxpayers. The U.S. Post Office, that paragon of government efficiency, has announced it needs a multi-billion bailout to continue operating.

In a report released on Friday, the Postal Service said it ran a deficit of $3.1 billion in the third quarter. This is merely the latest financial blow from an agency that lost $8.5 billion last year, is on track to lose more than $8.3 billion this year, and is projected to run an $8.5 billion deficit next year.

These continuous operating losses create the potential for (yet another) bailout of the USPS. We said “another” because the Treasury has already realized that the Postal Service has no chance of paying its bills and extended a $15 billion line of credit to allow the agency breathing room to make reforms. Except those reforms never happened and the agency appears unable to pay Washington the $5.5 billion required to fund its employee’s retirement benefits.

The Postal Service’s woes exist at the intersection of two issues: (1) technology has largely overtaken the need for first-class mail (the bread and butter of the USPS), and (2) like all government agencies, the Postal Service is a model of bloated bureaucracy.

The USPS has more than 571,000 full-time workers, making it the second-largest employer after Wal-Mart. It has 31,871 brick-and-mortar stores, more than Wal-Mart, Starbucks, and McDonalds combined.  The enormity of the bureaucracy has meant that as much as 82 percent of the Postal Service’s operating costs are devoted to labor. Compare that to UPS, which spends 66 percent on labor, and FedEx, who devotes 45 percent towards labor, and you get a fuller picture of the problem.

Rather than address the problem, the Postal Service is asking to switch it’s retirement system to a pay-as-you-go model. Or as USPS’s chief financial officer put, it, “We are experiencing a severe cash crisis and are unable to continue to maintain the aggressive payment schedule.”

This solution should worry taxpayers who are leery of a bailout. Although the system may be called “pay-as-you-go” it rarely lives up to its name. Take California, which uses the same method for its public sector retirement system. The Golden State now finds itself in a near-insurmountable budget crunch, in large part because its pension system faces unfunded liabilities of $40.5 billion.

The same is likely to happen to the Postal Service. The difference is that California at least has some glimmer of hope that government reforms coupled with a reemerging economy could ease some of the burden. But with most Americans having made the permanent switch to email, text messaging or even Skype, it is highly unlikely that first-class mail could see any growth.

As revenue continues to decline but labor and pension costs remain persistently high deficits will begin to pile up. And if there is one thing Democrats in Washington cannot abide, it is public sector union employees facing the prospect of a failing pension system. The result? Why a taxpayer funded bailout of course.

A recent editorial by the Wall Street Journal explains why this would be infuriating,

“Postal workers already enjoy a 30% to 40% edge in pay and benefits over comparably skilled private workers, according to the Postal Service’s own economic analysis. Bureau of Labor Statistics data indicate the average hourly compensation for postal union members is $41 versus $28 for private industry. Postal workers also contribute far less than private workers and even less than other federal workers to cover health care costs.”

In the free market, the USPS would have long gone under. Overpaid workers, an uncompetitive product, and a flawed business model. But this is Washington, where taxpayers are more likely to get handed the bill for a bailout than bureaucrats are to be handed a pink slip. Quite the sad irony that the entity responsible for filling America’s mailboxes with bills to be paid, can’t seem to pay its own. It’s time Americans demanded reform, or else mark the antiquated USPS with “return to sender.”


Zach.Howell
Posted: Thursday, August 11, 2011 - 14:32

Downgrade? How could we be downgraded, we’re the United States of America! This just shows how stupid S&P is. I mean, they were the real reason we are even in a recession. If they hadn’t scored junk bonds as ‘AAA’ then everything would be humming along smoothly. And those Tea Partiers and fiscal conservatives, they’re the real villains in this whole mess. Going around demanding that we cut spending in order to raise the debt limit. Preposterous. It makes them, uh…terrorists. Yes, they’re terrorists!

Ladies and gentlemen, welcome to your hope and change.

Rather than stand up, take ownership of the crisis, and say “Dammit, we may have been part of the problem, but now we’re going to come up with some solutions,” we get a Washington-style round of pass the blame.

Tellingly, in their frantic quest to find someone (anyone) to pin the downgrade on, liberal commentators can’t even get their stories straight.

First, you have Democrats trying to cover their rear by saying that the downgrade was the result of shoddy work from a questionable company. “Apparently we’re supposed to care what some idiots at some corrupt organization think about anything,” wrote Eschaton, a widely-read liberal blog.

Though cloaked in softer verbiage the Obama Administration has taken much the same line. Knowing that they can do little to change the message, they’re doing their best to discredit the messenger. “I think the S&P has shown really terrible judgment and they’ve handled themselves very poorly and they’ve shown stunning lack of knowledge about basic U.S. fiscal budget math,” said Treasury Secretary Tim Geithner. “And I think they drew exactly the wrong conclusion.”

Now, to be fair, the S&P and other credit rating agencies aren’t the be-all-end-all of the world economy. In fact, we’ll be the first to admit that they’ve made a lot of mistakes in doling out their ratings. But as former College Republican Chairman Zach Howell tweeted on Monday, “Something to consider as Obama and the Treasury attack S&P: The problem has been that they’ve given too many ‘AAAs’, not taken too many away.”

Bill Gross, managing director of investment giant PIMCO, agrees. In a recent Investment Outlook, Gross wrote, “[Credit rating agency] warnings were more than tardy when it came to the Enrons and Worldcoms of 10 years past, and most recently their blind faith in sovereign solvency has led to egregious excess in Greece and their southern neighbors. The result has been the foisting of AAA ratings on an unsuspecting investment public who bought the rating-service Kool-Aid that housing prices could never really go down or that countries don’t go bankrupt.”

Given their loose standards it should be all the more shocking that S&P has downgraded our credit score. An agency that has given out ‘AAAs’ like candy couldn’t bring itself to allow the U.S. to keep theirs. Our underlying budget issues are that bad.

Of course, the fact that liberals are saying the credit rating is a sham hasn’t stopped them from blaming the (fake) downgrade on the Tea Party. As blogger Jim Treacher sarcastically quipped, “This isn’t happening…and it’s all your fault!”

Take, for instance, this smattering of quotes from some Democratic luminaries:

  • “I believe this is, without question, the Tea Party downgrade.” – Senator John Kerry
  • “I think this is a tea-party problem. I think they are totally unreasonable and doctrinaire and not founded in reality. I think they’ve been smoking some of that tea, not just drinking it.” – Howard Dean
  • “The fact of the matter is that this is essentially a Tea Party downgrade. The Tea Party brought us to the brink of default.” – David Axelrod

Blaming fiscal conservatives or the Tea Party is not only absurd, it is a boldfaced lie. After all, their entire raison d’etre is to reduce the size and scope of government, and thereby eliminate our debt and deficit.

Fiscal conservatives weren’t the reason for the small deal that ultimately led S&P to question our ‘AAA’ rating. In case you’ve forgotten, fiscal conservatives had passed a budget that would reform our entitlement programs and reduce our deficit, had passed the “Cut, Cap, and Balance” plan that would have created the structural reforms to permanently eliminate our debt, and had proposed myriad other bills including Sen. Coburn’s plan to cut $9 trillion. And Democrats are saying we’re to blame?

All the yelling and finger pointing among the Left just goes to show how ideologically bankrupt they really are. Seeing that their big-government plans and cradle-to-the-grave welfare state are fiscally unsustainable, they are simply out of ideas. Rather than admit their mistakes and work together towards sustainability, they’re content to find a scapegoat. Sadly, they can’t even do that right, having created two narratives that simply don’t fit together.

This isn’t the fault of S&P and this isn’t a Tea Party downgrade. No, if liberals are looking for someone to blame, they should start by looking in the mirror.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Thursday, August 11, 2011 - 14:31

It’s official. Democrats are out of ideas.

With President Obama’s reelection chances spiraling downward, with the United States in desperate need of a serious pick-me-up, and having just been hit with the dreaded downgrade, if ever there was a time to play the ace up your sleeve…this is it.

But Democrats have no ace, in fact, they don’t have jack. They went all in on a big government agenda and have no new cards to play. That sad fact became all too clear in President Obama’s latest speech, which consisted of sad potshots at S&P and recycled job creation ideas.

The speech was so bad that liberal columnist Dana Milbank could barely contain his disgust. “The economy crawls, the credit rating falls, the markets plunge, and a helicopter packed with U.S. special forces goes down in Afghanistan,” Milbank writes. “Yet Obama plods along, raising gobs of cash for his reelection bid…and varying little the words he reads from the teleprompter.”

For a president defined by his rhetorical ability (and little else) this was not one of his spirited speeches. He appeared listless, robotically turning his head side to side, and only showing emotion when it came time to shift blame. Obama looked so defeated, and quite honestly, sad, that I almost waited for him to spout the Eeyore line (he is a donkey after all), “Ohhh-kayy, thanks for noticin’ me.”

He finished by tossing out some tired ideas such as extending unemployment benefits, doing another round of payroll tax cuts, and spending more on infrastructure projects. If none of those put any pep in your step, he did promise to “present my own recommendations over the coming weeks.” Awesome. Can’t wait.

It was enough to remind me of the New York Times story from earlier this year when President Obama gathered his economic team to lay out ideas for the State of the Union address. “You know, guys,” he said, “I’ve told you before, I want you to come to me with ideas that excite me.”

Now, it is Obama that is the boring one.

The trouble is that Democrats are looking for jobs in the wrong places. No matter how much debt piles up around them and no matter how many failed “jobs initiatives” disintegrate into nothingness, Obama and his liberal friends can’t shake the belief that government spending is the solution. In reality, creating the ideal environment for job creation requires less government, not more. It requires less fiddling, tweaking, and regulatory prodding, and more freedom and certainty.

Sadly, this message just isn’t getting through. If you need further evidence just look at the recently announced “Contract for the American Dream.” This is a movement headlined by Van Jones (of green jobs czar fame) with the stated intent to “match (if not surpass) the debt reduction crowd in both size and energy.” “We think we can do what the Tea Party did,” said Jones in an interview with The Fix.

I guess, if you can’t beat em’, steal their ideas! Even the name and concept is modeled after Newt Gingrich’s 1994 Contract with America. Or, if you want to be more direct, stolen from Tea Partier Jason Chaffetz, who launched an initiative with the same name in 2010.

The Contract has 10 components, all of which are nothing more than recycled liberal talking points. Among the repackaged ideas are:

  • Invest in America’s Infrastructure: Great. And perhaps we could have paid for it had Democrats not rung up a debt bill so big that we’re facing insolvency.
  • Create 21st Century Energy Jobs: I love when groups say they’re just going to “create” jobs, seemingly without any comprehension that the government can’t simply wave a magic wand.
  • Invest in Public Education: Apparently this plan is heavy on “investment,” code word for spending, and light on reforms to actually ensure any return on that investment.
  • Secure Social Security and Offer Medicare for All: Given that just about every economist in the free world has offered their opinion on how broken our entitlement systems are, expanding them seems, well, unwise.
  • Return to Fairer Tax Rates: When the government starts determining what is and is not “fair” consider us afraid.
  • Strengthen Democracy: This is a grab bag of ideas focused around changing campaign finance laws (and somehow they even shoehorn in immigration reform). Sure this sounds nice, but I’m not sure how they’re going to get around a little thing called the First Amendment.

Yawn. This “movement” is like reheated leftovers from a meal that sucked to begin with. We’ve heard, and for the most part tried, most of the components listed above.  And by and large their failure was what compelled the fiscal conservative backlash that this movement is a response to.

Obama and his famed grassroots are out of ideas. Now it’s time for them to get out of town.


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Saturday, August 6, 2011 - 16:54

“You unlock this door with the key of imagination. Beyond it is another dimension – a dimension of sound, a dimension of sight, a dimension of mind. You’re moving into a land of both shadow and substance, of things and ideas. You’ve just crossed over into…the Twilight Zone.” – Twilight Zone theme

Reading the news over the past few days one would have thought we had been transported into the Twilight Zone. It is a dimension in which America’s debt problems are the result of the Tea Party and of fiscal conservatives. It is a world in which Democrats are the sole protectors of America’s credit rating. It is a time in which conservatives are labeled “terrorists” and “hostage takers.”  In short, it is a bunch of baloney.

Take these quotes from liberal commentators, all of which have come in just the last two days:

  • “Since the Republicans were threatening to go nuclear in unprecedented fashion, why didn’t the president at least threaten to use his unprecedented nuclear option to stop them?” – Kurt Andersen, New York Times
  • “A Congress dominated by mindless cannibals is now feasting on a supine president. But surely even he now realizes there’s no middle ground with antagonists whose only interest is in seeing him humiliated.” – Jacob Weisberg, Slate
  • “The GOP’s House tea party members abruptly hijacked a fairly routine congressional vote and threatened to send the United States into first-time default in order to fight a proxy war over their singular agenda of shrinking the federal government.” – Michael Hirsh, National Journal

What a sad irony it is that fiscal conservatives, the ones who are determined to save Washington from its own largesse, are being labeled its destroyers.

The Reality: Six months ago President Obama was demanding a “clean” increase to the debt ceiling. As The Hill reported at the time, “The administration has maintained for months that Congress should not attach other provisions to a vote to increase the $14.3. trillion debt ceiling.”

House Republicans fought back against that notion, realizing that unless something was done, and soon, America’s debt would soon become unmanageable. Having offered multiple plans, including a Balanced Budget Amendment supported by 80 percent of Americans, and even agreeing to $800 billion in new revenue (which Obama later moved the goalposts on), Democrats continued to fight against cuts.

Ultimately, Democratic intransigence led to a package of cuts that was not large enough to avoid a ding to our credit rating. To make matters worse, Democrats have already staked out the position that changes to entitlements are already off the table in future debt discussions.

The Twilight Zone: President Obama mishandled this situation from the very beginning by demonstrating a willingness to deal with Republicans and accede to spending cuts.

The problem is not really one of spending, but how broken Washington is. Our investors aren’t worried about our $1 trillion deficits, our $14 trillion debt, or our exploding entitlement system; no, what they are really concerned about is the “extremist” Republicans who want to cut government spending.

This is a world in which the Senate Majority Leader has called Social security “the most successful social program in the history of the world” and has said that reforms are “off the table.” Where Nancy Pelosi has called the current Medicare program “a value, an ethic, a pillar,” “a flag we’ve planted that we will protect and defend.” Where a Senate Democrats have rejected out of hand Republican hopes of reforming Medicaid. And where even the most modest cuts to discretionary spending are demagogued as “draconian.”

This fantasyland leaves us very few options. In fact, as far as we can tell it leaves us two: (1) raise taxes to levels unseen in American history, and/or (2) slash defense spending. Neither option nets you enough deficit reduction to put even a dent in our projected debt, much less qualify as an actual solution.

Despite their lack of answers, these are supposed to be the heroes of this story? Are we really supposed to believe that Tea Pariers and other fiscal conservatives who have at least offered plans to ensure these programs survive for future generations are the villains? Apparently we really have crossed over…to the Twilight Zone.


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Saturday, August 6, 2011 - 16:53

“Over the years we’ve had some fun together – killin’ some bears, drinkin’ moonshine – some even in these chambers. (Whiskey that is – the bears I’ve seen once or twice, but only when I was plum drunk). But the time for funnin’ is over. They’ll be no jokes from David Crockett today.” – Davy Crockett’s speech to Congress in 1830

Washington may be a completely different world now than it was in the 1830s – rather than kill bears and drink moonshine, our Congress dresses up in tiger costumes and takes pictures of their, well, you know what I’m talking about – but, Crockett’s speech is just as applicable today.

Our elected representatives may have had a grand old time the past decade, spending money faster than we could print it, but in Crockett’s words “the time for funning is over.”

The latest wake up call from the fiscal fantasyland that Washington has inhabited comes from credit ratings agency Standard and Poors (S&P). For the first time in our nation’s history, America will wake up tomorrow without a ‘AAA’ rating, potentially aggravating the threat of falling into the dreaded double-dip recession.

“The downgrade reflects our view that the effectiveness, stability, and predictability of American policymaking and political institutions have weakened at a time of ongoing fiscal and economic challenges,” said S&P in a statement released Friday. “[We are] pessimistic about the capacity of Congress and the Administration to be able to leverage their agreement this week into broader fiscal consolidation plan that stabilizes the government’s debt dynamics any time soon.”

The move to “AA+” means that U.S. Treasuries are now seen as a worse investment than UK, German, French, or Canadian bonds.

The S&P didn’t stop there. Their ratings release also indicated that the “outlook on the long-term rating is negative.” Indicating that they could once again lower our credit ratings within the next two years unless plans for spending reduction are put into place above and beyond what was agreed to as part of the debt limit deal.

All of this should be the final blow to an Administration who has long had its head in the sand. Don’t forget that we had been warned of this happening. In April, S&P issued a report cautioning Washington that it would lower our credit rating unless cuts were made. After the report Treasury Secretary Tim Geithner said that there is “no risk” of a downgrade.

And yet the current downgrade has been met with what can only be described as shock by the White House. Not only has S&P warned us before, but it doesn’t exactly take a degree from the London School of Economics to figure out that America’s current spending situation is unsustainable.

Our nation is currently running a deficit of $1.6 trillion, has a standing debt of $14.6 trillion, and is staring down the barrel of $62 trillion in unfunded liabilities. Arguably worse than any of those single statistics is the fact that liberals can’t muster up the courage to deal with any of them. Earlier this week House Minority Leader Nancy Pelosi said that she is making it a personal point to only appoint members to the new Deficit Committee that will oppose changes to entitlement programs – the largest drivers of our unsustainable debt.

Despite this intransigence liberals, as well as their media friends, have somehow made fiscal conservatives the villains. Somehow, we have become the “terrorists” and “hostage takers” despite our being the only ones willing to actually save the country from itself.

What a sad twist of fate that Democrats, who like to fashion themselves as “progressives,” have come to define their party identity around the defense of the status quo. Forget that America’s finances will soon collapse under the weight of our broken entitlement system; they can’t imagine a world where not only Medicare, Medicaid, and Social Security continue to rack up debts, but that they can’t continue to spend more money on top of it.

But the party is over. Our credit rating has officially been lowered. Over the years you may have had some fun, spending taxpayer money, bankrupting our generation, and playing our foreign creditors for dupes, but as Davy Crockett said, “the time for funnin’ is over. They’ll be no jokes…today.”


Zach.Howell
Posted: Wednesday, August 3, 2011 - 11:09

I will miss very few things about the debt limit debate. Between having to listen to President Obama give self-righteous speeches seemingly every day, watching as the House passed plan after plan only to see them go down in flames in the Senate, and having to keep up with Congress at all hours of the night and weekend, it has been a grueling few months.

But there is one thing that I will miss – the utterly ridiculous things that politicians said throughout the debt-limit debate. So without further ado here are the Top 5 Hilarious Quotes from the debt limit debate:

(1) “This deal is a sugar-coated Satan sandwich. If you lift the bun, you will not like what you see.” – Rep. Emanuel Cleaver (D-MO). Apparently unsatisfied, Nancy Pelosi took it one step further saying it was a “Satan sandwich with Satan fries on the side.”

What in the devil is a satan sandwich? Fortunately, a 2004 entry from Urban Dictionary tells us that a “satan sandwich” as: “The chiefest of hell’s dark delights, it is said that just one bite of it arouses and unspeakable lust of terrific potency.” Given the definition I can only think that sugar coating it would make it that much more devious (albeit tasty).

Given that Rep. Cleaver is a United Methodist pastor you’d think he’d be a little more careful than to label something satanic. Interestingly, a Pew report finds that “more than other Americans, evangelicals are prepared to cut deeply and forcefully when chopping the deficit.” In other words, Americans believe the enormous debt we are leaving to future generations is immoral, not the attempts to fix it.

(2) What we’re trying to do is save the world from the Republican budget. We’re trying to save life on this planet as we know it today.” – Nancy Pelosi (D-CA)

There are really two ways I could take this: (1) Accept that Nancy Pelosi actually meant what she was saying, in which case she’s defending the unsustainable debt and deficits or the status quo; or (2) Take this as yet another example of Pelosi’s penchant for drama.

Regardless of whether this was the result of a passing moment of senility, a carefully thought out response, or just your average, everyday brain fart, it was stunningly stupid. Without dramatic reductions in spending and reforms to government, our debt-to-GDP ratio will soon approach Greek levels. Of course when that happens, the Medicaid, Medicare, and Social Security which Democrats love will go the way of the dodo. In other words, the best way to save life on this planet as we know it today, is to change the spending habits of Democrats.

(3) “The idea seems to be that if the House GOP refuses to raise the debt ceiling…then Democrats would have no choice but to pass a balanced-budget amendment and reform entitlements, and the Tea Party Hobbits could return to Middle Earth having defeated Mordor.” – Wall Street Journal

Senator Rand Paul (R-KY) easily had the best retort for this stunning statement: “I think in reading the books, the hobbits were the heroes.” Bingo.

Say what you will about the Tea Partiers, but they, more than any other group, were responsible for achieving the best deal possible. Some may chide them for living in a political fantasyland, but the reality they strive for – one in which the government doesn’t spend more than it takes in – is far more grounded in the reality of economics than the spend-happy status quo.

(4) “They have acted like terrorists.” – Vice President Joe Biden

Even for a guy that has a chronic case of foot-in-mouth disease, this was a new low. No matter how upset Democrats are that they lost the debate on spending or were unable to strike the deal that they wanted, an argument over policy should never be equated with murdering innocent people. And yet these are the same people who just a few months ago lamented that the increasingly hostile rhetoric of Washington was to blame for Rep. Gabrielle Giffords shooting.

Beyond the sheer foolishness of the metaphor, since when is fiscal responsibility defined as terrorism? I can’t imagine we would have devoted a decade in time and treasure to finding bin Laden if his only act of terrorism was advocating for a balanced budget. Then again, this is the bizarro world of Washington.

(5) “Let’s pass a bill to cover the moon with yogurt” – Representative Paul Ryan.

As ridiculous as the statement sounds, Rep. Ryan’s entire point was to highlight how utterly inane Democrats’ deficit reduction plans were.

This quote was aimed squarely at Sen. Harry Reid whose debt limit plan including a phantom $1 trillion in savings from Iraq and Afghanistan. As we’ve written about previously, this is nothing but Washington gimmickry. Since the CBO is required to use current law in its projections, it’s 10-year forecast included surge level funding for our two wars. But that funding was never going to happen, it was merely a product of the CBO’s budgeting rules. So when Harry Reid proposed to “save” that cash, it was akin to writing a $5 trillion plan to cover the moon with yogurt and then writing a plan to cancel that bill and then saying it saves $5 trillion.

Yea, it’s a complicated concept, but damn if it wasn’t a hilarious metaphor.

Honorable Mention: After Rep. Gabrielle Giffords made a surprising return to the House floor for her first vote since being shot in the head by a crazed gunman, Vice President Biden said she is “now a member of the cracked head club like me.” There are no words for such stupidity.

Did we miss anything? Feel free to use the comments section below to tell us your favorites or add to the list!


Zach.Howell
Posted: Wednesday, August 3, 2011 - 11:08

Presidential candidate and former ambassador to China, John Huntsman, was the keynote speaker at the Biennial National College Republican Convention. In a stirring speech that often focused on the changes that must be made to protect the next generation, Huntsman promised something more than the ‘Hope and Change’ tagline that defined Obama’s candidacy. “President Obama won the youth vote in 2008 because he offered Hope,” said Huntsman. “We’re going to win in 2012 because we’re offering answers.”

Indeed, that is just what many young adults are looking for.  Since the beginning of the recession in December 2007, young adults have suffered through the highest unemployment rate on record (since 1948). The unemployment rate peaked at 19.2 percent and has remained persistently high.

Unfortunately, the Obama Administration’s problems have only made things worse. Their record spending binge has threatened businesses with higher taxes, Obamacare and Dodd-Frank have created costly new regulations, and harsh rhetoric against job creators has only added to the atmosphere of uncertainty.

This anti-jobs agenda caused the economy to stumble badly in the first half of 2011. According to new figures, the economy grew at an anemic 1.3 percent pace – a figure that is indicative of future increases in the unemployment rate. In fact, many economists are now worried that without significant change there is a threat that the U.S. economy may fall back into another recession.

For all the talk of hope in the run up to the 2008 elections, young adults have only seen it dwindle away in the Obama presidency. In three short years we’ve gone from hoping to enjoy the American Dream – achieving standard of living higher than our parent – to just hoping that there is an America left to inherit.

Young adults increasing disillusionment with President Obama is reflected in the latest Pew Research poll. Their research found that 18-29 year olds, the so-called Millennial generation, are abandoning the Democratic Party in favor of the Republican Party in droves. Pew explains, “Currently, 52 percent of Millennial voters are Democrats or lean to the Democratic Party while 39 percent are Republicans or lean to the GOP. This 13-point edge is less than half the size of the 32 point edge Democrats held just three years ago.”

In fact, the GOP’s largest gains in party identification have come from 18-29 year olds, a seeming impossibility following the 2008 elections. College Republicans have been working furiously behind the scenes to maximize these gains. Whether it was through our Red November election plan, our targeted ads, or our “Don’t Put It On Our Tab” campaign, we have been laying the groundwork for Republicans to win the youth vote in the crucial 2012 elections.

We understand what Obama does not. Young adults are more independent than ever. We are a generation that prizes choice – creating unique iPod playlists, customizing our Facebook pages, and watching videos when we want using YouTube – and yet President Obama is attempting to squeeze us into one-size-fits-all government programs that decide our future for us.

This is not the path to hope, this is the path toward stagnation. That’s why we at the College Republicans are going to be ramping up our efforts as 2012 nears. We’ll not only be educating young adults about the dangers of our debt, but showing how conservative solutions are the key to escaping a grim future. To steal John Huntsman’s line, “We’re going to win in 2012 because we’re offering answers.” And that’s something that Democrats just don’t have.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Wednesday, August 3, 2011 - 11:07

Battered, beaten, and bruised, Republicans nevertheless appear to have emerged from the debt limit fight as the clear winner. It was a political fight akin to the famed “Rumble in the Jungle” boxing match when challenger Muhammad Ali knocked out George Foreman to regain the heavyweight title.

The Rumble was not your average fight. Ali had just been suspended for boxing for three and a half years for his refusal to enter the Army during the Vietnam war. Foreman had catapulted from his gold medal in the 1968 Olympics to become the most feared fighter in the world.

Foreman was the overwhelming favorite and through the first eight rounds it showed. Knowing he couldn’t beat the bigger, stronger Foreman in a straight punching contest, Ali began leaning on the ropes and inviting Foreman to punch him on the arms and body. This strategy, which Ali dubbed “rope-a-dope,” eventually tired Foreman out, leaving him open to a series of punishing hooks that led to the historic Ali win.

At many times throughout the debate many Republicans had to feel like Ali – against the ropes, getting pounded with body blows, and wondering if Democrats would ever tire. For each punch that Foreman through it seems like Republicans offered a plan. First it was Paul Ryan, then Cut, Cap and Balance, then Boehner 1.0 and 2.0, all of which either glanced off the Democrats, or were thrown back in our faces.

Throughout it all you could feel Democrats’ resolve beginning to crack. There demand for a so-called “clean” debt limit increase without any spending cuts was quickly tossed aside. From then on, small demands began to fall away. For instance, President Obama began to express a willingness to deal with entitlements, including some changes to the Social Security benefit formula.

Gradually, Democrats ceded more. A turning point came two weeks ago when Senate Majority Leader Harry Reid offered a plan that included no new revenues, a step which President Obama wasn’t even willing to take. Finally, Democrats gave in on their demand to have an increase large enough to get them through the next election cycle without being forced to take another vote.

Slowly but surely Republicans rope-a-dope strategy was paying dividends. Every time we offered a plan, the Senate voted it down, but what appeared to the world a serious body-blow allowed Republicans to inch the debate in the right direction.

Tonight it appears as if the sides have finally reached an agreement on a deal. And although many conservatives will oppose it for not going far enough, it is hard to interpret it as anything but a solid win for Republicans.

The tentative deal reached is about as confusing a deal as you could imagine (what do you expect from the same Washington that brought you the 2,000 page health care bill?). Essentially, the framework as described in a slideshow distributed by Speaker Boehner’s office includes four key parts:

  1. It would cut and cap discretionary spending immediately in order to save $917 billion over the first 10 years and in return would raise the debt ceiling by $900 billion – enough to take us to approximately February.
  2. A Joint Committee would be created to create a plan that would reduce the deficit by at least $1.5 trillion over 10 years.
  3. The President could only receive a second $1.5 trillion debt increase if (1) the Joint Committee’s proposal is enacted OR (2) a Balanced Budget Amendment is sent to the states
  4. If either of those two processes fails then automatic, across-the-board spending cuts go into effect and the President may request another $1.2 trillion – which would not get him through the election.

Got all that? It’s certainly not perfect. Among the things we would have liked to seen are bigger cuts in immediate expenditures, spending caps that were not limited to discretionary spending, and a more thorough consideration of a Balanced Budget Amendment. But it’s also tremendous progress. Not only have did Republicans change the entire complexion of the government spending debate, they were able to achieve a solution that does not include revenues.

With a majority in only one-chamber, Republicans, like Ali, appeared to be overmatched and on the ropes throughout much of this debate. But after a long bout of rope-a-dope, Republicans, and more importantly, our principles, were left standing. It may be no Rumble in the Jungle, but maybe we can call it a Brawl in the Beltway.  Either way, it should go down in history as a solid win for Republicans.


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Thursday, July 28, 2011 - 13:58

What do you do when life hands you lemons? You make lemonade. Sadly, Democrats have also taken away all of the sugar, which means we’re all stuck with lemon juice. Sour and unrefreshing lemon juice.

The threat of a bond-rating downgrade hasn’t exactly been a closely guarded secret. Rep. Paul Ryan (R-WI) has long warned that America’s debt is quickly reaching a tipping point. In a speech earlier this year to the Economic Club of Chicago Ryan said,

“By the end of the decade, we will be spending 20 percent of our tax revenue simply paying interest on the debt – and that’s according to optimistic projections. If ratings agencies such as S&P move from downgrading our outlook to downgrading our credit, then interest rates will rise even higher, and debt service will cost trillions more.

This course is not sustainable. That isn’t an option; it’s a mathematical certainty. If we continue down our current path, we are walking right into the most preventable crisis in our nation’s history.”

Republicans did their level best to put forth a plan that would prevent the looming debt crisis and remove the threat of a ratings downgrade. Not only did Paul Ryan himself write an audacious budget that would fundamentally reform entitlements and achieve long-term balance, but House Republicans wrote a comprehensive plan to reduce spending through statutory caps and a Balanced Budget Amendment. Both passed the Republican House. Neither were even brought to a vote in the Democratic Senate.

Republicans attempt to bring a dose of fiscal sanity to Washington has extended to the debt limit debate. From the beginning of the negotiations Speaker of the House John Boehner has made clear that we need as large a package as possible in order to put our spending habits on a more sustainable course.

Unfortunately, idea after idea, plan after plan, was rebuffed by either President Obama or deemed doom to fail by Harry Reid’s Senate. This handcuffed Republicans’ ability to actually solve the looming debt crisis in a way that would reassure investors. We were forced to search for the lowest common denominator as the solution to a problem that was exponentially large.

The result may be that even if we pass Speaker Boehner’s plan, our credit rating may get dinged. Among the opinions listed by major players in the market:

  • Standard and Poors said “We expect the debt trajectory to continue increasing in the medium term if a medium-term fiscal consolidation plan of $4 trillion is not agreed upon.”
  • Deutsch Bank: “[Rating agencies] are now telling us that an increase in the debt ceiling is not enough. They want to see a serious bi-partisan effort here that directly addresses long-term deficits.”
  • Faros Trading analysts issued a report stating that, “We have gone past the point of no return regarding the debt downgrade. We fully expect the U.S. will lose its AAA status.”
  • Financial analyst Peter Cohan echoed Faros’ statement, “We’re at the point that the odds of having a downgrade make it pretty much inevitable.”

It didn’t need to be this way! The debt limit presented an amazing opportunity to put the nation on a fiscally sustainable course. Instead, it became a partisan flashpoint for Democrats, who were more determined to prevent Republicans from “winning” than they were about passing a plan that solved our problems.

And in large part Democrats “won.” Their belief in big-government was so strong that they were willing to hold the line on real cuts or even modest reforms to entitlement programs, even if it meant a downgrade. One has to wonder whether they read the reports that this would cost taxpayers $100 billion – money that will not be able to spent on the programs that Democrats purport to love.

Years of fiscal mismanagement handed Washington a bunch of lemons. Democrats and their intransigence took away our sugar. Where we could have had lemonade, we were stuck with lemon juice. Now we’re forced to watch as investors search for sweeter deals elsewhere.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Monday, July 25, 2011 - 22:39

A House leadership aide explained the current debt limit situation as the closest Washington gets to a Wild West showdown.

On one side of the corral you’ve got Speaker of the House John Boehner and on the other, Senate Majority Leader Harry Reid. Earlier today it appeared to be a question of who would be the quicker draw, who could get their shot off first. Both men had competing plans and a clear goal – get their plan introduced and passed through their chamber before the other.

The advantages of doing so were clear. One, the plan that passed would dominate the media coverage, sucking all the air out of the room before the other got a chance to breathe. Two, a significant portion of the public is antsy for a deal, any deal, and whomever seemed to have a viable plan first would capture this group of Americans. And three, as the clock ticks toward August 2nd, there will be increasing pressure to push whatever has already made it through one chamber of Congress.

Who was the real gunslinger? Well it turned out it didn’t matter. You’ve heard the expression ‘never bring a knife to a gunfight’? Well, Reid didn’t even bother to bring a knife, he brought a pop-gun. Sure, it may have been a realistic-looking pop-gun, but when it came time to fire, Reid’s plan was nothing but a tethered cork.

Reid unveiled a $2.7 trillion deficit-reduction plan that the Obama Administration was quick to support. “Senator Reid has put forward a responsible compromise that cuts spending in a way that protects critical investments and does not harm the economic recovery,” read a statement from the White House.

Eeek. Whenever Democrats say “protects critical investments,” I immediately know they did nothing to change the unsustainable course of our entitlement programs. To make things worse, when they say “does not harm the economic recovery,” I know that is code for “it enacts fake cuts in later years which can’t be enforced.”

As it turns out, my parsing of the Dem-speak proved correct.

House Budget Committee chairman Paul Ryan breaks down the supposed $2.7 trillion in cuts on his website, and let’s just say the results aren’t pretty.

The first, and most blatant, of the gimmick’s Reid uses to puff up his deficit reduction number is $1 trillion for winding down the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan. The key to seeing how this trick unfolds is to understand how the Congressional Budget Office works. As former CBO Director Douglas Holtz-Eakin explains, “The way the CBO constructs the baseline is it extrapolates current law, and the current law is that we are funding the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan.”

In its latest estimate, the CBO was not allowed under its rules to score President Obama’s decision to withdraw troops and wind-down operations. Thus, it’s budgetary baseline assumed that we would continue to fund those wars at surge levels, for a grand total of $1.67 through 2021.

But obviously it is not going to be nearly that expensive so Reid merely lopped $1 trillion off of this figure and called it savings. In other words, he’s taking credit for something that was already happening. That’s not a plan to save any money…that’s a gimmick.

Second, the plan’s other big “cut” is $400 billion in interest savings. These savings build on the foundation laid by the first gimmick in that if we “cut” $1 trillion in war costs, we also won’t have to pay interest on that debt. This allows Reid to count a fake spending reduction, not once, but twice!

Then again, these savings only become real if the interest rate on our debt stays at its current, historically low level. If recent reports are any indication this appears to be increasingly unlikely, deal or no deal. “While we see very little chance of a default and massive U.S. sovereign downgrade – we see a better than 50 percent chance that the deal to increase the debt ceiling is not strong enough to prevent a downgrade to double-A in 2011, wrote Citigroup’s head of interest rate strategy.

Third, Reid’s plan promises to cut $100 billion in mandatory spending, including $40 billion in “program integrity savings.” At worst, since none of these cuts are outlined they will quickly be forgotten; at best, they will come from one of the oldest political gimmicks – eliminating waste, fraud and abuse.

So once you clear away all that gimmickry you’re left with $1.2 trillion in spending cuts over the next decade. Granted, I’m skeptical that even these will be put into place given that Reid’s plan doesn’t put any measures in place to bind future Congress’ to his cuts. But even if we assume the best, those $1.2 trillion in cuts are the approximate equivalent of the deficit for just 2012! That leaves nine years worth of deficits to make up for.

Harry Reid’s plan (and calling it that is being generous) is nothing but a dud. The showdown at the Capitol Corral between Boehner and Reid’s dueling plans ended with a whimper, not a bang


Zach.Howell
Posted: Monday, July 25, 2011 - 13:35

Remember back to those days when Republicans were branded the “Party of No.” I always wore the label with pride, because frankly we’ve had way too many “yes-men” in Washington the past several decades. Politicians who thought every idea that involved spending money was sure to be a good one. In fact, I would argue the inability to say “no,” is the largest reason American now faces an imminent debt crisis.

But circumstances have reversed themselves. Republicans are putting forth plan after plan after plan in a quest to raise the debt ceiling and put forth some measures to ensure we’re not right back in the same boat in two years. Democrats keep saying “no.”

First, Rep. Paul Ryan wrote an audacious budget that would fundamentally reform all of the significant drivers of our government’s spending problem. Nary a stone was left unturned.

The House passed it. The Democrat-led Senate has yet to vote on it.

Second, House Republicans passed the Cut, Cap, and Balance Act, yet another bold plan that uses completely different techniques to achieve the spending restraints our creditors are demanding. Rather than touch entitlements directly, which Democrats said they refused to do, this plan instead put in budget-mechanisms that gradually reduced spending until a Balanced Budget Amendment could be passed.

The House passed it. The Democrat-led Senate used a procedural trick called a “motion to table” to ensure that it didn’t even receive a roll call vote. They were too scared to even say “no.”

And now, Republicans are back at the table, trying to craft something that Democrats will agree to and that solves our debt problem. Sadly, those two things go together as well as oil and water, or if we’re sticking to political metaphors, Eric Cantor and Barack Obama.

Byron York of the Washington Examiner has some details on the latest Republican effort,

“House Republicans are finishing work on a new proposal to resolve the standoff over the debt ceiling. The proposal, set to be finished and crafted into the form of a bill by Sunday, will be in two parts. The first will combine a short-term increase in the debt ceiling with spending cuts. The second will lay the groundwork for a longer-term increase in the debt ceiling coupled with far-reaching deficit reduction.”

Later reports suggest that the initial debt-limit increase will be around $900 billion that would be paired with approximately $1.2 trillion in cuts. This would be accomplished by setting discretionary spending caps that would be set around $1.05 trillion and then grow at half the rate of inflation (notice that since these are discretionary they would do nothing to entitlements or other mandatory spending).

The second phase would raise the debt limit by around $1.6 trillion and would be accompanied by a committee to consider a broad range of measures to reduce the deficit (including, presumably tax increases).

This outline represents significant concessions from the GOP and yet President Obama is still threatening a veto. The White House is demanding that any deal extend the debt limit beyond the 2012 elections. Speaker Boehner issued a short retort, saying, “The president’s worried about his next election, but my God, shouldn’t we be worried about the country?”

The country appears to be the last thing on Democrats’ minds as they craft new and ever-more-devious ways to justify their blanket “no” position. The truth is, Republicans have put forward dozens (literally) of plans that would solve our long-term debt crisis, they have voted on, and passed two such plans, and Democrats have rejected them all out of hand.

To steal a question from President Obama’s press conference on Friday, “I think that one of the questions that the Republican Party is going to have to ask itself is can they say yet to anything? Can they say yes to anything.”

It’s a great questions Mr. President. You just directed it at the wrong party.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Saturday, July 23, 2011 - 23:36

I know he’s considered part of the unholy triumvirate of liberal depravity, but I sometimes can’t help but smile when I listen to Harry Reid.

Sure he has a tendency to put his foot in his mouth, such as when remarked, in seeming amazement, that Barack Obama could be the first black president because he was “light skinned” and had “no Negro dialect.”

But other than that, he has a quasi-lovable Mr. Magoo way about him that simultaneously makes you want to giggle and throw things. That is, he seems to meander through his job, with little to no clue of what is happening around him, and yet by uncanny luck, situations always seem to work out.

The perfect example came today when Reid said that the Senate has a “path forward” to raise the debt ceiling, but he was waiting on Speaker Boehner to act.

“I’m at a point where I’m saying we need to hear from the House of Representatives,” said Reid. “We have a plan to go forward over here. But until we hear from the House of Representatives, all of our work here would be for naught.”

It was a total Magoo moment. Just 12 hours prior to that statement, the House of Representatives passed a “path forward” in the form of Cut, Cap and Balance. It was a comprehensive plan that would immediately raise the debt ceiling in return for some modest spending cuts and key budget-process reforms. But somehow, Reid apparently seemed to miss all of that.

Republican Study Committee Chairman Jim Jordan (R-OH) quickly picked up on Reid’s head-in-the-sand moment. “In case Senator Reid didn’t notice, a bipartisan ‘Gang of 234’ just sent him the way forward. It’s called Cut, Cap and Balance,” said Jordan. “This is the only plan that can fundamentally solve our debt problem, and it is waiting for Senator Reid to bring up on the Senate floor for an up-or-down vote.”

What made Reid’s statement seem all the more clueless was the fact that he thought the Senate actually had their own “path forward.” That’s rich. The closest thing they have to a plan is a collection of random ideas thrown together in a bullet-pointed list. The “plan,” so little resembles a plan, that one of its authors, Senator Dick Durbin (D-IL) said that it can’t really be included in a deal to raise the debt limit.

“The Gang of Six plan has not been drafted nor has it been scored by the CBO – it’s not ready for prime time,” Durbin told The Hill. “But as a concept, I think we have the starting concepts together, and that’s what we presented today.”

He “thinks” he has the “starting concepts” together. And Harry Reid is saying he has a path forward?

Or maybe Reid was referring to the McConnell plan. Ya know, the one that when asked about its prospects one House Republican said, “If there is a state or condition worse than death, that’s what it is. I can’t think of one, so we’ll just go with death for now.”

Or even more damning, the one that bond-rating firm Moody’s said would still likely need to a downgrade of our credit rating. “The numbers that are being discussed in terms of any possible deficit reduction coming out of this [McConnell] plan don’t seem to very large,” said Moody’s analyst Steven Hess. “Therefore, this plan might result in a negative outlook on the rating.”

So here we have the Senate Majority Leader who is stumbling along, clueless to the fact that House Republicans have presented a plan to raise the debt ceiling and that his own chamber have offered nothing but a bunch of bullet points and a do-nothing gimmick.

Yet, somehow, this affable addlebrain stands to win. Unless conservative activists LIKE YOU get fired up in support of the House-passed Cut, Cap and Balance plan, one of Reid’s lame-brained ideas that do nothing to solve Washington’s spending problems stands to cruise to victory.

Unless something is done to counter Reid, America will either have to gut the entitlement programs he purports to defend, or default on its debt. Such devotion to the status-quo highlights Reid’s most Magoo-ish trait of all – his short sightedness.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Saturday, July 23, 2011 - 23:35

The NFL preseason was scheduled to begin in just two weeks, when the Chicago Bears would meet the St. Louis Rams in the annual Hall of Fame Game. The deadline to raise the debt ceiling is even sooner than that, August 2nd, just nine short days away.

In the lead-up to these cataclysmic events one can’t help but to be amazed by the parallels between the debt limit negotiations and the collective bargaining agreement talks. Americans are being hit from all angles with “drop-dead”” dates, on-again-off-again negotiations, moving deadlines, and now, last minute “moving the goalpost.”

The last of these is no doubt the most frustrating. Even as early as last weekend it seemed clear that the NFL players and owners were finally coming to a deal. There would be football! Fans could once again rest easy that their Sundays would be filled with TV, beer, and wings, not just yard-work. Wednesday rolled around and it all seemed like little more than a formality, the owners had signed a deal and it was being sent to the NFL Player’s Union to sign.

Then, as quickly as it came, hope seemed to fade. NFL Players began lighting up the Twitter-verse in angry reactions about the deal the owners had sent over. Redskins defensive-end Vonnie Holliday summed it up best, telling fans, “Please don’t get excited about that press conference. The owners have agreed on a deal the players have not seen! This is not consistent with where we thought we were yesterday!”

Was it a sneaky media ploy on the part of the owners to gather public pressure and push players to sign something quick? Or was it the players reacting off-the-cuff without having read and digested the plan? In a way, fans don’t care. They just want to see football.

A very similar thing happened yesterday in the debt limit talks. Speaker of the House John Boehner had been working behind closed doors with President Obama on a “grand bargain” that would accept $800 billion in higher revenue, mostly through closing loopholes, in return for spending cuts near $3 trillion.

Once again, everything seemed to be tidying up nicely. Nobody got exactly (or even close, on Republicans part) what they wanted, but nobody ever does in negotiations. And then Obama made like the NFL owners and moved the goalposts.

The so-called Gang of Six plan had just been introduced and it contained tax increases of up to $2.2 trillion. Apparently, this left Obama feeling like he hadn’t squeezed enough out of Republicans (and, if I’m being honest, taxpayers) and decided to up the ante by asking for an additional $400 billion in revenues. Unlike the initial deal, this money would not be achieved by tax reform, but instead would be straight tax hikes.

This last minute move caused everything to fall apart, leaving questions as to whether a new agreement can be reached in time.

“During these discussions – as in my earlier discussions – it became evident that the White House is simply not serious about ending the spending binge that is destroying jobs and endangering our children’s future,” Boehner wrote in a letter to House Republicans. “In the end we couldn’t connect. Not because of different personalities, but because of different visions for our country.”

Despite the bumps along the road, a deal to have football this season looks imminent. There is just simply too much money that would be left on the table for it to be otherwise. One can only hope that the debt-limit ceiling negotiations follow that parallel, lest we end the speculation and see what really happens when we exceed the sovereign debt limit. But in this case, there appears to be too many taxes on the table, and too little deficit reduction. Hopefully that will change.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Saturday, July 23, 2011 - 23:34

Negotiations, especially those dealing with something as important as the debt ceiling, should be done with a cool head and a clear mind. Impulse and impertinence have no room at the bargaining table. And yet that is exactly what we saw out of Democratic leaders involved in the negotiation process, leaving many to wonder if a deal could be reached in time.

Earlier in the day Senate Majority Leader Harry Reid was facing calls from his members to have a vote on the Cut, Cap and Balance plan. This commonsense measure would make immediate cuts to spending and then install expenditure caps and a Balanced Budget Amendment to ensure a permanent end to reckless deficits.

Harry Reid hates the bill. In fact, he used his time on the Senate floor to call it “one of the worst pieces of legislation ever brought to the floor of the Senate.” In fiery tones he also called it “weak,” senseless,” and an “anathema,” all of which are better descriptors of Reid himself than Cut, Cap and Balance.

I guess this is the time to remind Reid of the stance he took on raising the debt limit in 2006, when he said,

“[Republicans] should explain why they think more debt is good for our economy. How can the Republican majority in this Congress explain to their constituents that trillions of dollars in new debt is good for our economy. How can they explain that they think it is fair to force our children, our grandchildren and our great grandchildren to finance this debt through higher taxes?”

Now, Washington is spending at rates that make 2006 look like a model of fiscal discipline. Republicans have realized that this can’t go on, so have sought to use the negotiations to enact much-needed reforms to reduce spending. Now, Harry Reid is balking. Rather than end his tax, spend, and borrow ways, he is urging Washington to pile up more debt on the nation’s credit card, understanding full well that it will be paid off by the children and grandchildren that he said he wanted to protect.

Statements such as that make you realize that Harry Reid is not a serious representative of the people, he’s a business as usual politician. So when he said on Friday that the “bill was a waste of the Senate’s time,” I have to wonder what he plans to do with that time? This do-nothing Senate hasn’t come up with a plan to reduce the debt; hell, they haven’t even met their legal obligation to write a budget!

Sadly, Reid is not the only Democratic “leader” who has taken to bloviating rather than legislating. Yesterday, after talks over a “grand bargain” to raise the debt limit broke down due to Obama’s demands for $400 billion more in taxes, the President became furious.

He immediately called a press conference to publicly chide and denounce Republicans.

“I think that one of the questions that the Republican Party is going to have to ask itself is can they say yes to anything,” Obama said. “I mean, keeping in mind it’s the Republican Party has said that the single most important thing facing our country is deficits and debts.”

You needn’t remind us Mr. President. In fact, that is why Republicans have put forward several plans that would cure the underlying disease of our deficit – government spending. Republicans not only passed a budget, Paul Ryan’s Path to Prosperity, but we passed Cut, Cap and Balance. Either of those proposals would send a strong signal to creditors that we are taking the necessary steps to solve our deficit.

And make no mistake, time is running out. Standard and Poors credit rating agency said today that they may not wait until August 2nd to downgrade the United States “AAA” rating. Unless there are indicators that a plan will be agreed to that not only raises the debt ceiling in the short-term, but fundamentally alters our deficit trajectory in the long-term, they could downgrade our debt as early as this week.

Time is of the essence. Any moment used to point fingers is a moment that is not used to hash out a plan. But Obama seems unable to help himself. “If Congress – and in particular, the House Republicans – are not willing to make sure that we avoid default, then I think it’s fair to say that they would have to take responsibility for whatever problems arise,” the President said Friday.

Temper tantrums, finger pointing, and blame games are what Democratic leaders have to offer so far. Republicans are the only ones with a plan. So when President Obama wrapped up his press conference by saying “At some point, I think if you want to be a leader, then you have got to lead,” all we can say is “Amen.” Now, if he would only heed his own advice.


Tierra.Warren
Posted: Friday, July 22, 2011 - 14:37

 

Our generation has had a lot of those “where were you when” moments. We all remember where we were on September 11, 2001 when America was attacked. Many people can still remember exactly where they were when the first reports came out that the levees failed in New Orleans, and we realized we were facing the worst natural disaster in American history. Many current and soon to be college students at the time can remember exactly where they were in 2007 when 32 people were tragically killed on the campus of Virginia Tech, the worst mass shooting in the country’s history. And of course, we all remember where we were when our country elected its first African American president, although we wish it hadn’t been Barack Obama.

In case our generation hasn’t seen enough already, Washington politicians want to add financial Armageddon to the list. The U.S. may soon default on its debt. While nobody can seem to state exactly what the consequences will be on August 2 if this happens, we at least know that the outcome won’t be pretty. So where will the American people be if and when this happens? Well, thanks to President Obama, many people will likely be in the unemployment compensation line. Thousands of other people will be working jobs with far lower pay than what they are actually qualified for. Some in this country may even be hiding money under their mattresses because they can no longer trust Uncle Sam, and for good reason too. Finally, many people will (hopefully) be out campaigning for economically conservative candidates to get rid of the most fiscally irresponsible president this country has ever seen.

The American people need to keep the pressure on our leaders in Washington, mainly the Democrats. The Republicans are bringing smart ideas to the table, while the Democrats just want tax increases. Yep, they honestly believe that American people and businesses can afford more taxes right now, which shows you how out of touch their party is. Instead of trying to reach a compromise, the Democrats are taking to their typical spewing of ridiculously untrue rhetoric. They’re whining things like Republican spending cuts taking us back to the Jim Crow Laws era, and there’s the always surprising “Republicans are trying to kill Granny.” So while the U.S. races towards a fiscal cliff, we all must suffer because of the lack of leadership in the Democratic Party.

Speaking of lack of leadership, I think White House Press Secretary Jay Carney knows that definition fits the current president very well. Obama has yet to propose a plan to fix the nation’s debt problems. He blasts Republicans for refusing to compromise, yet he doesn’t want to put forth his own plan to allow compromising on. Obama isn’t even interested in trying to fix this problem. Carney tried to cover this up with a wonderful twist of words, saying, “Leadership is not proposing a plan for the sake of having it voted up or down, and likely voted down.” I like to call this the Carney rule. Next time you’re facing a tough problem, to be a leader you must not try to fix it.

Basically, thanks to the existence of the Democratic Party, we may not be able to fix this problem before it is too late. They don’t seem to know the definition of “leadership,” “compromise,” “debt,” or “making sense.” So will people take to the streets like in Greece? Will China stop buying our debt? Will the economy completely crash, and could we possibly be heading towards a depression? Whatever the outcome is, one thing is clear: if the U.S. does default on its debt, we won’t soon forget where we were when it happened.

 

By: Matthew Hurt

 
Zach.Howell
Posted: Wednesday, July 20, 2011 - 09:50

Everyone is telling us just how catastrophic it will be if Washington fails to raise the debt ceiling. But the media is conveniently leaving out the second part of the equation – the utter calamity that will ensue if the deal is not up to snuff.

Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke said it would lead to a “calamitous outcome. Treasury Secretary Tim Geithner said that failure to have a deal in place by the end of this week could lead to “catastrophic damage.”

Now, the ratings agencies, like Moody’s and Standard & Poor’s are adding to the pile. Each of them have released statements in the past week saying that they will review and downgrade America’s credit rating if a deal isn’t reached. In his analysis of these statements blogger Ezra Klein wrote, “They’re telling us, slowly, clearly and with terrifying detail, what they will do if we don’t raise the debt ceiling.”

Once again, the media has let us down. All of the news coverage focused on what the credit rating agencies will do if Republicans and Democrats can’t come to an agreement and America defaults. But that is only one-half of the story.

Moody’s and S&P’s reports included another extremely important caveat, one that is unsurprisingly receiving little coverage from the left-leaning media. The reports not only said that a deal needs to be in place, but it must be a deal that makes substantial headway against Washington’s overspending problem.

For instance, Moody’s said “If the debt limit is raised and default avoided, the AAA rating will be maintained. However, the rating outlook will depend on the outcome of negotiations on deficit reduction.”

Moody’s goes on to state that these debt limit negotations are “a real near-term opportunity for agreement on a plan” to reduce the deficit. Moreover, it may be our last, best chance. Given the political realities, Moody’s argues that if Washington wastes this opportunity, “the likelihood of anything significant being accomplished before the next presidential election is reduced.” In other words, this is your shot to right the ship, don’t blow it.

S&P’s warning was even more heavily focused on the need for long-term deficit reduction as part of a deal to raise the debt limit.

“Congress and the Administration might . . . agree on a plan that, while avoiding a near-term default, might not, in our view, materially improve our base case expectation for the future path of the net general government debt-to-GDP ratio,” said S&P. This situation they warned, may be “inconsistent with a “AAA” sovereign rating, given the expected government debt trajectory.”

Now that we have the full picture, we can amend Klein’s statement. It should read “they’re telling us, slowly, clearly and with terrifying detail, what they will do if we don’t raise the debt ceiling (as part of a deal that would substantially reduce near-term deficits and long-term debt).” There, that’s better.

This complete understanding also allows us to begin having a real debate over what we must accomplish in the coming weeks.  Saving our credit rating and preventing bond markets from collapsing is not as simple (contrary to what many Democrats have told us) as merely raising the debt limit. That may save us from an immediate downgrade, but with very little deficit cutting likely to happen between now and the presidential election, a long-term downgrade could become an inevitability.

Instead, we must, as Moody’s said, make “meaningful progress toward substantial and credible long-term deficit reduction.” To the careful reader, this provides an important clue into the type of deal the credit-rating agencies would like to see.

Spending cuts are nothing but promises. If Congress says it is going to cut $2 billion over 10-years, it’s not actually cutting much of anything, it’s just saying – we really, really promise to change our ways and cut spending…for real this time. But they can’t actually bind future Congress to anything. So if Democrats take back the house in the next decade do you really trust them to live up to cuts they made years ago? Ha.

The only way then to truly achieve the “long-term deficit reduction” they seek is through spending caps, which can bind Congress unless negated by another bill, or a Balanced Budget Amendment, which is as permanent as they come.

Whether or not the final compromise will contain either of these two options is yet to be seen. Regardless, Washington would be wise to remember that the bond markets’ demand is not as simple as raising the debt limit, it also has to come with spending restraints.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Wednesday, July 20, 2011 - 09:50

The Pentagon, the world’s largest office building, was built in 15 months at a total cost of $83 million.

The Hoover Dam, the largest hydroelectric facility in the world at the time of its construction, was completed in less than five years, two years ahead of schedule.

The Panama Canal, one of the largest and most difficult engineering projects ever undertaken, was completed in less than a decade, and once again, ahead of schedule.

I think about each of these engineering marvels as I sit in traffic during my weekday commute. The clog of cars is the result of ongoing construction on the Capital Beltway, a road that has undergone constant evolution since my earliest memory. Sadly, after a decade of driving it, I’d be hard pressed to know exactly what all that time and money was spent doing.

I’m sure you have a similar experience with some government-run project where you’re from. Examples abound. The Big Dig in Boston, which replaced an elevated highway with a tunnel under the city, ran five years behind schedule while the cost ballooned from $2.6 billion to $14.6 billion. The Capitol Visitor Center in Washington was supposed to be built in four years at a cost of $71 million; it ended up taking 8 years and $621 million. Denver’s new International Airport was sold to taxpayers with the understanding it would cost $1.7 billion, but mushroomed to $4.8 billion.

We could go on, but the story always stays the same – government projects are always late and are always more expensive than proposed.

That’s why College Republicans’ were more than skeptical when President Obama announced his plan to “rebuild 150,000 miles of our roads – enough to circle the world six times…lay and maintain 4,000 miles of our railways – enough to stretch coast to coast, and…restore 150 miles of runways.”

It all sounded great, but we kept waiting on a pricetag. It never came. And sadly, if it ever had, it would have likely been more misleading than illuminating. Or at least, that is the finding of a new study conducted by Bent Flyvbjerg, a professor at the University of Oxford’s Said Business School.

Flyvbjerg analyzed results from 258 government projects in 20 countries over 70 years in order to compile a database and draw conclusions. They aren’t pretty. He found,

“For rail, average cost overrun is 44.7 percent measured in constant prices from the build decisions. For bridges and tunnels, the equivalent figure is 33.8 percent, and for roads 20.4 percent.”

Moreover, Flyvbjerg found that ridership projections are often dramatically off. This is most true for rail projects in which 84 percent of passenger forecasts are wrong by more than 20 percent.

This all leads to a question: If cost overruns have been a fixture of infrastructure projects for decades and ridership estimates are continuously overstated, why haven’t better methods been adopted? The answer is likely political. For politicians adept at bringing home the pork, the key is to understate the cost to taxpayers and overstate the benefits.

Sadly, it is hard to predict that this behavior will change. In an interesting bit of irony, the increasing concern over the deficit, which should prompt better accounting, will likely only lead to more egregious examples of understating costs. Keep that in mind the next time you hear President Obama reiterate his call for Congress to “invest” in the nation’s future.

In order to really “win the future” through this type of investment the government will have to reverse a long-standing trend toward government waste. Although, there is little to suggest that it can overcome its penchant for overspending, there are a few easy policy prescriptions that should be adopted immediately. First, Davis-Bacon wage requirements, which needlessly drive up the cost of infrastructure projects as a handout to union friends, should be repealed. Second, a clear cost-benefit model should be adopted that takes into account realistic impacts of cost, ridership, and economic growth. Third, there should be a focus on transparency and a leaner bureaucracy in order to drive down needless costs and increase the pressure to reduce overruns.

Who knows, with some significant changes perhaps we’ll reintroduce the words “under budget” and “ahead of schedule” back in the Washington lexicon.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Wednesday, July 20, 2011 - 09:49

Remember when we called last Friday “potentially the most important political moment since the November elections”?

Well, we weren’t wrong. Friday’s events set the board for an incredibly complex game of debt ceiling chess that is playing out before our very eyes. Today, some interesting moves were made that could possibly result in a checkmate. We’ll break it down for you here, in sections of The Good, The Bad, and The Ugly:

The Good

The House of Representatives passed the Cut, Cap and Balance Act! In many ways, this bill is the conservative’s holy grail. Not only would it make immediate cuts of $111 billion, in order to reassure our bond investors that we have our act together, but it would enact much needed procedural reforms to ensure Washington doesn’t go soft. Fortunately, Sen. Harry Reid (D-NV) has said “We on this side of the aisle realize we have some problems with spending and we have to do something about it.”

The first important change would be statutory spending caps that gradually reduce government expenditures to near-historical levels. Currently, Washington is blowing through taxpayer cash at break-neck speed. All-told, federal spending is equal to 23.9 percent of GDP, a level which is rapidly pushing our nation to the brink of default. The Republican bill would impose caps that work that level down to a still high, but much more manageable, 19.9 percent. Predictably, some liberals are throwing a tantrum about this, despite the fact that even those reduced levels get us nowhere near the average of tax revenues, which is around 18.5 percent.  But a few Senate Democrats have been supportive. Among them, Sen. Amy Klobuchar who said, “I have supported caps in the past. That’s got to be a part of this.”

And that’s where the Balanced Budget Amendment comes in. Even using the most lenient of measures, Washington has had deficits 50 out of the last 54 years! That is a testament to the utter lack of leadership displayed by our purported “representatives.” Unless we want to continue mortgaging our future, it is absolutely imperative that we achieve balanced budgets, and if you’ve been disappointed by Washington long enough, you realize the only way to do that is through an amendment to the Constitution. Once again, Democrats have been incredibly supportive. For instance, Mark Udall (D-CO) has said, “I’ve long gone by the saying, if you find yourself in a hole, stop digging. By restoring healthy and responsible spending through a reasonable Balanced Budget Amendment, we can begin filling in that hole.”

Funny that Democrats seem to agree with each of the components in the abstract, but call Republicans crazy for wanting to actually, you know, follow through with them.

The Bad

Democrats pulled a Dr. Frankenstein and resurrected a monster we all thought was long-dead. The so-called “Gang of Six” released the outline of a plan that they say has the ability to be a game-changer in the debate. The “plan” if you can call it that would make unspecified spending cuts and unspecified tax hikes to reduce the deficit. Then they “promise” to enact a law with all sorts of goodies like a drop in the individual tax rate, elimination of the Alternative Minimum Tax, and oh yea…a $3.4 trillion tax increase.

But here’s the kicker – the plan won’t be ready by August 2, the supposed drop-dead date for the debt ceiling. In fact, Sen. Durbin (D-IL), said “The Gang of Six plan has not been drafted nor has it been scored by the CBO – it’s not ready for prime time.”

So why introduce it today? Easy, to take away the spotlight from the Cut, Cap and Balance vote. Sneaky? Yes. Business as usual? Definitely. A clever move in this high-stakes chess game? We’re forced to admit…Yes.

The Ugly

President Obama reiterated that he will veto Cut, Cap and balance if it passes. The White House released an official statement saying, among other things, that we must stop pursuing “unrealistic policy goals.” Oh, and it also argues that a Balanced Budget Amendment would “leave the nation unable to meet its core commitment of ensuring dignity in retirement.”

So wait, let me get this straight. The President released a statement saying that reducing spending to historic levels (that would still have deficits, mind you) is unrealistic? Further, he is prepared to say that America is incapable of simultaneously having a balanced budget and maintaining the dignity of older Americans? If anything, that just goes to show how deep of a hole he has dug for us!

Beyond the seemingly remarkable admissions of his big-government philosophy, doesn’t this just show how unserious President Obama is? After all, isn’t this the same guy who said that failure to raise the debt ceiling would “plunge the world economy back into a recession”? And now, in the name of politics, he’s prepared to say that if he were presented with a plan to raise the debt ceiling, in exchange for cuts to return us to solvency, he would veto it?

Now, who is the one risking default?


Zach.Howell
Posted: Thursday, July 14, 2011 - 13:33

There aren’t too many good movies when it comes to the genre of politics. Every once in a while you’ll get a Frost/Nixon or Wag the Dog, but for the most part you’re left with one-sided social commentary (Nixon), lame-brain comedy (The Distinguished Gentlemen), or boring Robert Redford Movies (Lions for Lambs).

The fact that most non-movie nerds haven’t heard of a single one of those titles just goes to show you what an utter wasteland the catalog of political movies really is.

“Dave,” may fall into a number of these categories. It wasn’t particularly memorable or funny, and definitely came with a leftist bent, but it was inspired in a number of ways. The movie, for those who haven’t seen it, is about an ordinary every-man (Dave) who happens to look exactly like the President. The President is a really slimy guy, who hires Dave as a stand-in for him at a townhall style meet-and-greet so that he can enjoy a little extramarital liaison. The President suffers a severe stroke during the (ahem) festivities and Dave the look-alike is left to run the country.

In my favorite scene Dave reveals his true identity to the President’s wife and they engage in the following self-revelatory conversation:

Ellen (wife): What do you do for a living?

Dave: You mean, when I’m not running the country

Ellen: Yea.

Dave: I run a temp agency. You know, secretaries and stuff.

Ellen: So you find people jobs.

Dave: Yes.

[Ellen laughs]

Dave: What’s so funny?

Ellen: It’s just, it’s more than most people do around here.

The movie goes downhill from there as Dave announces a jobs bill to create employment for everyone who wants work. If only it were that easy! Or better yet, if only that weren’t a straight path to Socialism! Nevertheless, the dialogue brings up a great point – Washington, even as far back as 1993 (when the movie was made) has been terrible at job creation.

Now, just to be clear, it is not the domain of Washington to specifically “create” jobs. That’s because the only jobs the government can directly create are more government jobs. But that doesn’t mean there is nothing the federal government can do.

The goal of Washington should be to create the most favorable environment possible for job creation. That should include things like: freezing taxes at current levels to mitigate the disruptive threat of future tax increases, finding and eliminating burdensome regulations that do little to protect consumers, repealing  union handouts like Davis-Bacon which increase the cost of construction, and passing all of the pending free trade agreements.

Rather than do any of these things, Washington is paralyzed by its President’s lack of leadership. As economist Irwin Seltzer wrote in The Weekly Standard,

“The good news is that the sluggishness of the recovery is due in good part to policies that can be reversed. America is not in terminal decline, but the victim of a president who wants to see the unemployment rate come down, but not at the expense of interrupting what he calls his “transformation” of the American economy, or of antagonizing trade unions he needs to supply his reelection campaign with cash and doorbell ringers.”

This “transformation” has a number of different tenets. Obama’s efforts to redistribute wealth through manipulating the tax code and entitlement system, his failing attempt to promote so-called “green” technologies while over-regulating fossil fuels, and passing scores of new burdensome regulations through Obamacare and Dodd-Frank.

In other words, “So you find people jobs,” is still a punchline in today’s Washington. The more things “change” the more they say the same.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Thursday, July 14, 2011 - 13:32

Today, President Obama told Congress that it’s time to “Pull off the band-aid. Eat our peas,” and pass the debt limit.

Once you dig through Obama’s attempt to play the wise father figure presiding over a bunch of spoiled kids in Congress, you come to realize he’s the spoiled kid. Essentially Republicans want to take away his toys, or more accurately, his ability to buy new toys with other people’s money. In response, he’s throwing a hissy fit.

Pulling off a band-aid and eating your peas are bad enough as they are. Nobody likes doing these things, but on some level we recognize that we’ll be better off because of them in the long run. Does anyone get that sense about raising the debt limit by more than $2 trillion without enacting any kind of reforms to ensure we’re not right back here in two years having the same debate?

But as unpleasant as those things are, President Obama wants to make them worse. He wants to pull the band-aid off really slow and maybe add some brussels sprouts  to our helping of peas. Because not only does President Obama want to raise the debt limit, he’s demanding that tax increases be a part of any package.

One has to wonder if the current version of President Obama would even recognize the man who occupied the White House or the Senate just a few short years ago. Because that President Obama said that “the last thing you want to do is raise taxes in the middle of a recession because that would just suck up – take more demand out of the economy and put businesses in a further hole.”

Not only was the earlier Obama model against raising taxes in a recession, he was against raising the debt ceiling altogether.  Let’s not forget that in 2006 then-Senator Obama said that,

“The fact that we are here today to debate raising America’s debt limit is a sign of leadership failure. It is a sign that the U.S. Government can’t pay its own bills. It is a sign that we now depend on ongoing financial assistance from foreign countries to finance our government’s reckless fiscal policy . . . Leadership means that ‘the buck stops here. Instead, Washington is shifting the burden of bad choices today onto the backs of our children and grandchildren. America has a debt problem and a failure of leadership.”

Forget ripping off a band-aid, that’s gotta hurt!

While Obama is flailing, trying to figure out whether to trust his own gut and follow his past or listen to the liberals who will guide his future, Republicans, led by Speaker John Boehner are sticking to their guns. “The American people will not accept, and the house cannot pass a bill that raises taxes on job creators,” said Speaker Boehner at a press conference today.

What the House can pass is “a bill that includes spending cuts larger than the hike in the limit, as well as real restraints on future spending. [We] feel we should enact a balanced budget amendment to keep the federal government from spending us into the same situation again. I think we also need real reductions in spending right now and spending caps to ensure that progress we make is not undone in the future.”

In other words, a three step strategy: (1) immediate spending cuts to reduce the deficit, (2) spending caps to prevent the government from going back to its old spend-happy ways, and (3) a Balanced Budget Amendment to permanently protect Americans from debt.

That is a three-step solution to our spending problem. Notice it has nothing to do with taxes, which would only be in order if we had a revenue problem. In fact, higher taxes would only serve to further encourage the profligacy of the federal government. Studies conducted by economists Stephen Moore and Richard Vedder have conducted a series of studies finding that “every new dollar of taxes led to more than one dollar of new spending.” Just how much more? Anywhere from $1.58 to $1.17 in new spending.

You don’t feed the habits of a junkie. Nobody would give a chocolate cake to someone in need of a diet. Why should we give a government with a spending problem more of our money? So when President Obama says Washington needs to “eat its peas,” he shouldn’t be talking about the debt limit, he should be talking about how the government needs to go on a diet.

Republicans are insistent that tax increases not be part of any deal to raise the debt limit. History has taught our party that in any deal involving a mix of spending cuts and tax increases, the government keeps on spending and Americans are left with the higher taxes.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Thursday, July 14, 2011 - 13:32

Every once in a while we Republicans need to do a self-analysis and simply ask, “Are we really on the right side of this issue.” The trouble in Washington is that so often you lay out your principles at the beginning, but inevitably the debate takes so many twists and turns that sometimes you lose sight of exactly why you took that particular stand.

The debt limit debate has been one of those times and Republicans stance on tax increases deserves a moment of reflection.

It should come as no surprise that Republicans are ideologically opposed to tax increases. They mean more money coming out of the pocket of those who earned it, inescapably lead to a larger government that infringes on liberty, and a substantial part of the revenue derived are spent supporting issues, causes and programs that many disagree with. Staying true to these tenets we argue that tax hikes should not be a part of any deal to increase the debt limit.

Then liberals got a hold of our opposition, mangled it into some unrecognizable theory that was complex enough to even have some conservatives scratching their head and asking, “Are they right?”

The Left’s critique conceptualization of our problem generally flows like this: Due to the Bush tax cuts government revenues are at an incredibly low levels. That means conservatives have it exactly backwards in that we have a revenue problem, not a spending problem. Thus, Republican opposition to including taxes in a deal to raise the debt limit just shows how fanatical and unserious they’ve become as a party. After all, we offered them a 4-to-1 ratio of spending cuts to tax hikes and they still balked. What more can we do!

There are actually some truths in that critique. Taxes are at really low levels and Democrats have offered a compromise that includes a 4-to-1 plan. But the devil is in the details. So let’s take a closer look and determine whether Republicans are on the right side of this issue, or have become the extremist fringe the Left often crows about.

Taxes Are at Low Levels

On this point Democrats are correct, but they’re wrong to say it is due to the Bush tax cuts. Last year revenues were 14.9 percent of GDP compared to the historical level of around 18 percent. The reason is that the economy stinks. Companies are earning less, individuals are working less, and a round of temporary tax concessions in the stimulus bill all conspired to depress revenues. The good/bad news (depending on your frame of reference) is that tax revenues are on their way back toward the norm. According to the Congressional Budget Office, even if we continue the Bush tax cuts and patch the Alternative Minimum Tax, revenues will naturally increase to 18.4 percent of GDP within the decade.

So while it’s technically correct to say taxes are low, it’s a temporary issue. What is not temporary however is spending. Which brings us to our next point…

We Have a Spending Problem, Not a Revenue Problem

While tax revenues are headed right back towards their historical levels, spending, which is currently at 23.9 percent of GDP (well above historical norms) will continue to rocket skyward. In fact, according to the CBO, government spending will so far outpace revenues that our annual deficit will soon grow to 15 percent of GDP. That would quickly push our national debt to unsustainable levels. By 2021 debt would exceed 100 percent of GDP, by 2023 it would surpass it’s historical peak of 109 percent, and by 2035 would reach 190 percent of GDP.

As we’ve asked on this blog before, if revenues are in line with history, but spending levels are way out of whack, shouldn’t the entirety of the focus be on reducing spending?

Republicans Are Serious, We’ve Just Been Burned Before

The party as a whole is much less tolerant of deals that include tax hikes because we’ve learned from history that taxes inevitably go up as scheduled, but Congress fails to deliver spending cuts.

As Philip Klein notes in the Washington Examiner,

“No deal poisoned the well more than the 1990 budget pact, in which President Bush infamously broke his “no new taxes” pledge. . . By 1995, the end of the five-year budget window that the CBO was then using, actual spending was $58 billion higher than projected by the CBO at the time of the deal.”

In fact, the figure would have been even higher had defense spending not naturally fallen as the Cold War wound down.

Furthermore, there is significantly worried that unless we put our foot down now, we’ll be burned again. In 2012, the Bush-era tax rates will once again expire and we’ll likely be dealing with an Obama White House that doesn’t have much to lose in vetoing an extension. The deck is also stacked against us in the long-term with entitlements (which nobody seems to want to cut) growing an ever-larger portion of our deficit.

Taking all of that into account, I think Republicans are doing right by their constituents and their principles in holding their ground on taxes.


Tierra.Warren
Posted: Thursday, July 14, 2011 - 10:35

 

For the millions of Americans looking for work, the Labor Department’s most recent report offers no consolation. While economists anticipated that 110,000 jobs would be created in June, their expectations proved to be far too optimistic. According to the report, the economy generated only 18,000 jobs in June—a sharp decline from the meager 25,000 newly created jobs in May. In response to the devastating employment results, President Obama stated the obvious: “We still have a long way to go, and a lot of work to do to give people the security they deserve.”

To keep up with population growth, the United States’ economy needs to create about 125,000 jobs each month. At least twice that many jobs are needed to bring down the unemployment rate. Job creation in June fell short by more than 100,000 jobs, and came nowhere near the necessary levels to begin reducing unemployment. As a result, the unemployment rate soared to a year high of 9.2 percent. Policy makers and economists alike anticipate the situation to worsen, and therefore are lowering their forecasts for economic growth in the second half of the year.

The results of a late-June survey conducted by the U.S. Chamber of Commerce are in full agreement with the pessimistic policy makers and economists. Even two years after the recession officially ended, companies continue to add fewer employees to their workforce. Among those surveyed, 64 percent of small business executives say that they do not expect to add to their payrolls in the next year, whereas only 19 percent anticipate expanding their workforce. 12 percent of small business executives actually plan to cut more jobs next year.

According to the Wall Street Journal, “More than half of the surveyed small business executives cited economic uncertainty as the main reason for holding back on hiring.” House Speaker John Boehner said it best: “[The] report is more evidence that the misguided 'stimulus' spending binge, excessive regulations, and an overwhelming national debt continue to hold back private-sector job creation in our country.” Until the government stops restraining private-sector job growth, conditions are not likely to change.

By: Blair Hart Newman

 
Tierra.Warren
Posted: Monday, July 11, 2011 - 10:37

 

Wouldn’t it be easy if we relied on the rich to fund the Federal Government? Whenever we needed more revenue, we’d simply raise taxes on the rich and then we could fund all of our social programs. With the current budget crisis, members of the Democratic Party have proposed that corporate taxes be raised. To fix our debt we must reduce our country’s spending, and make tough decisions.  Democrats are having trouble being adults about the debt crisis—they want to raise taxes, even on those that are being taxed at 35%. If a tax rate of 35% doesn’t slow job growth, then I don’t know what would!

Clearly, something must be done to fix our budget shortfall, but increasing taxes is not the answer. Current corporate tax levels continue to drive jobs out of the country. Even former President Clinton now realizes that our nation’s tax structure is seriously flawed, despite raising corporate taxes while in office: “It made sense when I did it. It doesn’t make sense anymore — we’ve got an uncompetitive rate.” While I am glad that President Clinton has come to his senses, most Democrats still do not understand that companies are unable to grow when they are taxed at such high levels. If we continue to burden our corporations with such high taxes, they will move their operations to foreign countries that have more competitive tax rates.

The high level of unemployment in the U.S. is our nation’s greatest problem. To reduce unemployment we don’t need more failed stimulus spending. Rather, we need to allow the private sector to hire workers. Very few companies are willing to hire with today’s excessively high tax rates. For once, we should follow the advice of Bill Clinton, and reform the corporate tax rates, so our country can have a pro-business agenda. Economic recovery will only be realized when American companies can start hiring American workers again, and this will not happen if they are saddled with even higher taxes.

By: Bronwyn Haltom


Zach.Howell
Posted: Sunday, July 10, 2011 - 15:08

I had a friend write on my Facebook wall today that five-time Nathan’s International Hot Dog Eating Contest champion, Joey Chestnut, stands for “all that is right with America.”

I’m not exactly sure what he was trying to tell me. Perhaps it was the fact that people can make a living by stuffing food into their face signals how far our nation has come. Perhaps he was looking at how Chestnut, an American, now dominates the competitive food-eating scene, having dethroned Japan’s Takeru Kobayashi. Or perhaps he just really likes hot dogs?

Whatever the explanation, I don’t look upon Joey Chestnut’s ability to down 62 hot dogs in 10 minutes as any sort of metaphor on America’s greatness; instead, I tend to view it as a metaphor for what ails Washington. Namely, a penchant for excess.

If you’re not familiar with Nathan’s annual hotdog eating contest, it really is a sight to behold. A bunch of men standing on a platform in the middle of Coney Island in New York with huge plates of hotdogs and buns sitting in front of them. Once the gluttony begins, most competitors dip the dogs into the water (apparently to lubricate things on the way down) and stuff it down, often with as few as three bites per dog.

Chestnut, who is ranked first in the world by the International Federal of Competitive Eating (yes, sadly, there is such a thing), was this years’ winner. He downed 62 hot dogs, or about one per 10 seconds, the equivalent of about 19,158 calories.

A hot dog in 10 seconds sounds impressive, but pales in comparison to the utter fiscal gluttony of our government. This year, our government will spend $580,000, more than half a million dollars, every 10 seconds. That means in a 10-second span Washington spends enough to buy around 116,000 eight packs of hot-dogs.

Such voracious spending is pushing us towards the brink of default. Without substantial changes to our spending habits, including reforms to entitlement programs, there is no doubt we will face a fate similar to Greece.

One of the worst decisions made by spend-happy Washington was the economic stimulus program. At a cost of nearly $1 billion and few results to show for it, there is no doubt that it, like hotdogs, were chocked full of empty calories.

A new report, compiled by the White House’s Council of Economic Advisers, reveals just how little impact the stimulus had. The council reported that using “mainstream estimates of economic multipliers for the effects of fiscal stimulus,” the program added or saved just about 2.4 million jobs. A bit of quick math and you’ll see that each job costs taxpayers around $278,000 each! Each!

As Jeffrey Anderson writes in the Weekly Standard, “the government could simply have cut a $100,000 check to everyone whose employment was allegedly made possible by the stimulus,” and taxpayers would have come out $427 billion ahead.”

Conservatives recognized all along that there were myriad problems with the concept of stimulus – There was no method to efficiently dole it out. It would simply replace state’s welfare funding rather than create consumer demand. To the extent the money would make its way into the private sector it would perpetuate sectoral imbalances in the economy. Regardless of its effectiveness in the short term, it would come at great cost to the long term in tax increases. Etc, etc.

So now we are left, having gorged ourselves on deficit financed dollars, and have nothing but a serious bellyache to show for it. The economy remains in the dumps, unemployment is higher today than when the stimulus passed, and the housing market shows no signs of life. On top of all that, we have been left with an impossibly large bill for a bunch of rag-tag solutions that didn’t work.

Joey Chestnut may be all that is right with America, but the bacchanalian gluttony on which he makes his living, provides a sad metaphor for Washington’s spending habits. The eating, like the spending, may not be too terribly pleasant, but the displeasure pales in comparison to the hangover you’ll feel the next day.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Sunday, July 10, 2011 - 15:07

Every liberal with a computer and a website has taken to lashing out at Republicans for their no tax stance. Apparently I missed the Netroots Nation panel on the issue, because there is no other explanation for the unified argument the left is proposing.

It’s almost as if the entire liberal movement has been replaced with robots, programmed to say, “Republicans are not serious, they demand spending cuts, but will not allow a single cent of new tax revenue.” One iteration or another of this argument can be found on darn near every liberal blog, editorial page, and newspaper in America.

Besides the fact that we’re talking about hundreds of billions of new taxes, and not, as liberals like to say “a single cent,” this argument is completely misleading.

Sure, it sounds good and makes for great politics. After all, it seems to fit perfectly with the two themes Democrats have been trying to mercilessly hammer into the minds of every American voter – that Republicans are the “party of no” and that we’ve somehow been taken over by right wing extremists.

But dig deeper into this. Fortunately, given the superficiality of the liberal attack, you don’t have to dig very deep. In fact, it requires only one question: Why should we raise taxes?

Liberals everywhere are bemoaning the fact that Republicans refuse to raise taxes as part of a deal to raise the debt limit, but I bet not a single one of them can tell you why we need to.

I guarantee you they’ll furiously rub their only two neurons together, hoping some spark jumps across the synapses that comes close to resembling an answer. And no doubt, they’ll come up with something. Probably like, “Well we’ve got this huge deficit and these enormous programs that need paid for. It doesn’t make sense to do it all through spending cuts.”

But why not? Well I’ll tell you why. Because the Congressional Budget Office estimates that if the current tax rates are extended (yes, even the Bush-era tax cuts), federal tax revenues will soon climb above historical norms. Let me repeat that: ABOVE HISTORICAL NORMS.

What that means, is that we do not, contrary to what the liberal robots unendingly spitting out their talking points are telling us, have a revenue problem. If tax revenues are rising, but deficits are persisting, that should tell you that it is spending that is out of whack.

Despite the entirety of the problem existing on the “outlays” side of the federal register, Democrats are insistent that higher taxes be part of the deal. That’s because government has grown substantially over the last decade and they need to find ways to pay for it. Historical revenue rates will just not do the trick anymore under the big-government vision espoused by today’s left-wingers.

This turns the liberal talking point on its head. Given that revenues are projected to rise to above average levels, it is Democrats who are not being serious in the debt limit negotiations.

Democrats want to raise taxes. And in their quest to do so, they are attempting to convince America that higher taxes must be part of any debt limit deal. This one-sided problem does not demand a nuanced solution. In fact, it is a rather simple equation: The answer to abnormally high spending is not to raise taxes to abnormally high levels, it is to cut spending. So simple and yet so apparently hard for liberals to grasp.

Nevertheless, conservatives are the one’s who are said to be “making outrageous demands” like, uh, a Balanced Budget Amendment. Let’s just say that when balancing a budget (something families do everyday) is considered “radical” and “outrageous,” something might be wrong with the discourse. This implies that deficits are somehow normal, apparently somehow ignoring our present situation which finds our nation perilously close to default.

So whenever you hear someone giving Republicans a hard time for taking a hard line in refusing to give in to tax hikes, tell them to give it a rest. Better yet ask them why we need new taxes if revenues are already set to grow above historical averages. I can guarantee they won’t have an answer, but it’ll be fun to watch the stunned look on their faces when they realize they haven’t been programmed with a talking point for that yet.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Sunday, July 10, 2011 - 15:06

I admit, I spent most of my Saturday watching a marathon of Hoarders. For those of you lucky enough not to have been sucked into this show, it is a documentary series about people suffering from compulsive hoarding and an attempt to clean their homes. When they say “hoarding” they don’t mean that a person has collected every Prescious Moments figurine or every comic book action figure – these people save everything. Their homes are piled from floor to ceiling with what anyone else would describe as trash.

Inevitably, as part of every Hoarding episode is the ultimatum – when the family gathers around the person and says, “unless you get help, we’re not going to come visit anymore.”

Generally, ultimatums carry negative connotations. And to be honest, they often do more to add to the tension than dissipate it. But sometimes, when there is no other hope to spur change, you’ve just got to put your foot down.

It’s ultimatum time in America.

Washington is a hoarder of the first degree. Their addiction to programs, and offices, and initiatives has left our government a cluttered mess of overlapping garbage that is in desperate need of a deep clean. But beyond a thorough scrub, Washington needs a change in attitude. They have to take inventory of the mounds of programs and bureaucracy they’ve already accumulated and make a decision to stop collecting more.

Sadly, Washington has continually failed to seek treatment on its own; choosing instead to tax and spend and push the day of reckoning off until another day. In other words, it’s that time in the Hoarder’s episode when we call a family conference, express our concerns, and if all else fails, make an ultimatum.

And that’s about where we find ourselves now. Republicans, led by Speaker of the House John Boehner, have said that they will only raise the debt limit if (1) it is met by spending cuts, (2) if the size of the spending cuts agreed to exceed the level of the increase to the debt limit, and (3) that the package not include any tax increases.

That’s akin to telling a hoarder that they have to get rid of some stuff, that anything they into the house has to be matched by something going out, and that we’re not going to support your habits by giving you money to go out and buy more stuff. An ultimatum, yes, but all imminently reasonable demands given the depth and severity of the problem.

Of course, Democrats acted like most people without the gift of self-realization do. Namely, they threw a tantrum. They yelled that Republicans weren’t serious in negotiations, they crowed that Republican demands were pushing us toward default, and insisted that tax hikes must be part of any deal.

They were so proud of this last point that they too decided to issue an ultimatum based upon it – either we increase taxes or there will be no deal on the debt limit. Highlighting just how deluded Democrats have become about their own position, right after stating that they’ll only support a deal that “reduces spending in the tax code” (liberal code words to make tax hikes sound nicer) Obama had the audacity to say, “I hope everyone leaves ultimatums and political rhetoric at the door.”

Somehow, Democrats believe this is a winning argument. They believe that voters will see that a solution involving a mix of tax increases and spending cuts is a balanced approach that shows just how serious they are. But when out of control spending is almost entirely to blame for our current and future deficit I fail to see why taxes must be part of the answer.

It is akin to a Hoarder saying, yes, I have a problem, but part of the solution must be allowing me to get a bigger house to put all my stuff in.

No, that’s not how it works. Buying a bigger house will only feed the addiction even more. In the same way, giving the government more revenue will only feed its voracious desire to grow. The government will not make the needed changes to grow smaller, the deficit won’t shrink, the only outcome will be a Washington emboldened to spend more.

It’s time to break Washington’s spending addiction. And it begins with owning up to the problem in the debt limit debate.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Sunday, July 10, 2011 - 15:06

“Listen, here’s the thing. If you can’t spot the sucker in the first half hour at the table, then you are the sucker.”

So begins the quintessential poker movie, Rounders. If you’ve been paying attention, the debt limit negotiations have pretty much evolved into a high stakes game of poker. The question now is, who is the sucker?

Republicans are sitting with pocket 10s, a great but by no means infallible hand. We know we’ve got a lot going for us, namely, a majority in the House of Representatives and a public who understands that out of control spending is what put us in this position.

The trick is finding out what cards President Obama is holding. He’s sure betting big, going so far as to up the ante on a debt limit deal to include cuts to entitlement programs. But if history is our guide, it’s clear Obama is bluffing.

The Washington Post reported today,

“Obama plans to argue that a rare consensus has emerged about the size and scope of the nation’s budget problems and that policymakers should seize the moment to take dramatic action.

As part of his pitch, Obama is proposing significant reductions in Medicare spending and for the first time is offering to tackle the rising cost of Social Security.”

The moves would push President Obama’s proposal from $2 trillion in savings to $4 trillion. Predictably, the media, which values the act of making a deal rather than what’s actually a part of the deal, has fawned over President Obama’s so-called compromise. Just as predictably House Democrats and online left-wingers are furious.

(As an insider’s aside: I’d like to point out that this is mock outrage from Nancy Pelosi and House Democrats. Notice you’re not hearing the vocal attacks from the Senate, where Democrats have the majority, but the House, where they are in the minority, and their opinions are essentially nothing but showpieces with no real effect on policy. This is a clever trick Democrats have been using quite often – adopt a position that independents agree with, but your base hates; then use one of the Democratic Leaders in the House as a vocal opponent to tamp down any full fledged opposition from their left flank. Savvy but disingenuous.)

But $4 trillion does not a good deal make. After all, Washington will be spending an astounding $46 trillion over the next decade – and that’s an optimistic assumption.

The real problem though, and the true “tell” in President Obama’s bluff, lies in the fact that the recent history of the Democratic party is built around the concept of entitlements. As James Capretta writes in today’s National Review,

“The Democratic party has come to define itself as the party of entitlements. The New Deal. The Great Society. Obamacare. Nothing gets the Democratic heart beating quite like ensnaring the entire American middle class in entitlement dependence. For Democrats, victory means forcing Republicans to accept a budget framework that leave’s today’s entitlement superstructure exactly as it is today.”

Notice the key point there – Democrats are willing to accept funding cuts, so long as the entitlement skeleton remains in place. Why? Easy – because it ensures no permanent change.

A quick glimpse into history reveals that Democrats have played the “cut entitlements” card quite often when striking budget deals with Republicans. For example, in 1997’s Balanced Budget Act, Democrats “gave up” cuts to Medicare in return for modest tax increases. Except those Medicare cuts never happened. Instead they’ve become the infamous “doc fix” which costs the government hundreds of billions annually to ensure doctor pay isn’t slashed. But despite the cuts never coming to fruition, you can bet your last poker chips that those tax increases remained.

Now, President Obama is promising “further reductions in what providers of services and products are paid, trims in Medicare’s support of hospital-based physician training programs, and importation of Medicaid’s pharmaceutical-rebate scheme into the Medicare prescription drug benefit.”

That may save money now, but who is to say the next Congress, when the politics get tough or the economy improves, is going to stand by them. Whose to say we’re not left with “doc fix part deux”? Nobody, and that’s exactly the ace of President Obama’s sleeve. Pass some phony cuts that Congress will soon ignore and preserve the bones of the entitlement program to continue to build upon later.

Obama may have pegged us as the suckers at this poker table, but he’s tipped his hand, and it’s clear as day he’s bluffing.


Tierra.Warren
Posted: Thursday, July 7, 2011 - 14:53
 

Republicans and Democrats remain divided over the budget, even after last month’s negotiations. This morning, President Obama met with Speaker of the House, John Boehner to seek a possible compromise between the two parties—something for which the Speaker has recently expressed a new desire. In the meantime, Obama is trying to work out a deal that would raise the federal debt ceiling and increase the $2 trillion of savings from previous negotiations, receiving double the revenue over the next decade.

However, CNN explains that the meeting today between Boehner and Obama does not say much for the future of the budget:

“there has been no offer, no deal and this is just a discussion between the President and Speaker, and does not expect any agreement to come out of talks today.”

Recently it surfaced that Democrats were willing to cut a large amount of the Medicare and Medicaid entitlements. According to CBS News:

“What's needed is fundamental entitlement reform, and most especially a reform of Medicare and Medicaid that moves away from government micromanagement and toward a market-based system with cost-conscious consumers. Most Republicans understand this, which is why the House passed a budget plan that included far-reaching reforms of the Medicare and Medicaid programs.”

Just as Democrats are willing make scarifies for the sake of the deficit, so are the Republicans.  Eric Cantor of Virginia, second-ranking Republican in the House of Representatives, states that in order to decrease the deficit, “‘both sides can come together’… ‘It is about finding areas where we can agree and set aside the differences, and hopefully that will be the spirit of the meeting today at the White House.’”

Although Republicans firmly oppose raising taxes, Boehner has been working on negotiations and has explained that he is open to $1 trillion or more in revenue. He stated that this could be taken from taxes such as breaks for the oil and gas industry, eliminating ethanol subsidies, and ending preferential treatment of corporate jets, already brought up in discussions. The Speaker explained that there are currently no tax cuts being discussed nor had he agreed to have any of the tax cuts expirations.

However, Democrats are still not trusting of Republicans and are skeptical that their sacrifices will be one sided. They stated that this approach could bring about future taxes and budget changes that might be struck down by Republicans after all is said and done. This paranoia on behalf of the Democrat Party is mainly what has caused the budget decisions to be held up.

Despite the need for both parties to make scarifies, Republicans are taking a solid stance for the people not to raise taxes. Cantor states,

“We have said all along that preferences in the code are not something that helps economic growth over all.  But, listen, we are not for any proposal that increases taxes. Any type of discussion should be coupled with offsetting tax cuts somewhere else … we are united as Republicans to say now is not the time to raise taxes.”

If the two parties are unable to come to an agreement, it could bring about “unpredictable and unfavorable economic and political consequences.” CNN questions whether or not it is even possible for these two parties to come to an agreement in the next few weeks. And according to CNN, this may not be possible due to length of time that tax reform would take.  “[I]f Democrats and Republicans don’t come to a deal in the time specified, then the Treasury Department would have the authority to intervene in such a way that it is distasteful to both Democrats and Republicans, enough to incentivize them to strike a deal.”

 

By: Judy Frankel

 
Tierra.Warren
Posted: Tuesday, July 5, 2011 - 16:57

 

Since 1995, Congress has required the White House to release a detailed report of the titles and salaries of every employee. Because the Obama Administration rightly anticipated that the American people would find the latest report displeasing, they strategically timed its release in order to postpone the negative feedback that would undoubtedly result from its disclosure. While many Americans were out celebrating our nation’s independence this weekend and not sitting indoors watching the news, the White House conveniently unveiled its annual report. So much for transparency!

Despite the budget crisis and an unemployment rate of 9.1 percent, President Obama and his 454 staff members are safe from the recession—they’ll make $37,121,463 this year! According to the report, one in every three employees at the White House will earn more than $100,000 this year, and twenty-one aides will bring home a hefty $172,200.

Although the President reduced this year’s staff by fifteen people and $1.7 million, the $37.1 million figure is still strikingly high. If this is Obama’s way of showing Americans that his administration is working hard to restore the economy, he should just wave goodbye to his chance of re-election. The report only intensifies the fact that he and his staff are so far removed from the economic reality that faces Americans, and that the current administration is unfit to fix our deficit.

To top it off, President Obama is far more generous with taxpayer money than his predecessor, President George W. Bush. Obama currently employs seven more staff members and uses nearly $4 million more in tax dollars on White House staffer’s yearly salaries, as compared to his predecessor. Now, the average White House salary is approximately $82,000, which doesn’t even include President Obama’s yearly $400,000!

When facing these numbers, it is clear that the President and his staff are completely out of touch with the financial struggles facing millions of Americans. We need to get our economy back on track, and the sooner the better! One of the solutions already proposed by Congress has been to cut spending—I suggest they start by taking a look at the White House payroll.

 

By: Blair Hart Newman

 
Zach.Howell
Posted: Monday, July 4, 2011 - 10:51

Grilling out, watching The Sandlot, gathering with family and friends, watching fireworks, and a backyard game of baseball. That pretty much sums of my Fourth of July. And to be quite honest that’s not too far off from the celebration that the forefathers expected.

As John Adams wrote of the day,

“[This] will be the most memorable epoch in the history of America. I am apt to believe that it will be celebrated by succeeding generations as the great anniversary festival. It ought to be commemorated as the day of deliverance by solemn acts of devotion to Gold Almighty. It ought to be solemnized with pomp and charade, with shows, games, sports, guns, bells, bonfires and illuminations, from one end of the continent to another, from this time forward forever more.”

But beyond the Fourth of July and its attendant celebrations, it is worth remembering the day by its other name – Independence Day. The day we as Americans celebrate the adoption of the Declaration of Independence, when we achieved freedom from Great Britain in 1776.

Although we surely remain independent, having achieved the undoubted status as the most powerful nation on earth, that should not be confused with freedom. We are certainly a free nation, but we must remain ever-vigilant that we remain so. To be clear, the threat is not so much from without, although there are many foreign nations who would no doubt cheer our downfall, but from within, through the slow creep of government.

Now, I don’t mean to portray some left-wing conspiracy to imperceptibly erode our capitalist foundations, only to replace it with some form of socialism. In fact, I tend to believe that their intentions are quite noble; that in many senses liberals and conservatives share common goals – the ability of every American to have the opportunity to achieve their dreams.

But that also doesn’t mean that we can let down our guard. As F.A. Hayek wrote in the foreword to the 1956 edition of The Road to Serfdom,

“Though hot socialism is probably a thing of the past . . .If few people in the Western world now want to remake society from the bottom according to some ideal blueprint, a great many still believe in measures which, though not designed completely to remodel the economy, in their aggregate effect may well unintentionally produce this result.”

What remodeling was Hayek speaking of? “That hodgepodge of ill-assembled and often inconsistent ideals which under the name of the Welfare Sate has largely replaced socialism as the goal of the reformers needs very careful sorting out if its results are not to be very similar to those of full-fledged socialism.

America would never think of itself as a welfare state. For some reason we reserve that title for Europe, continuing to overlook our incredible steps toward, and in some cases beyond, the European cradle-to-the-grave approach to governance. We tend to cast a wary eye on big government and yet look comfortably toward the biggest of the big government programs – Medicaid, Medicare, and Social Security.

These programs have grown, if only imperceptibly, with the passing of each successive governing generation. Voters are appeased (whether they asked for it or not), politicians are reelected, government is grown, and freedom is eroded.

And when it is all said and done will be have moved one step closer to de Tocqueville’s prediction that,

“Having thus successfully taken each member of the community in its powerful graps, and fashioned him at will, the supreme power then extends its arm over the whole community. It covers the surface of society with a network of small complicated rules, minute and uniform, through which the most original minds and the most energetic characters cannon penetrate to rise above the crowd. The will of man is not shattered but softened, bent and guided; men are seldom forced by it to act, but they are constantly restrained from acting. Such a power does not destroy, but it prevents existence; it does not tyrannize, but it compresses, enervates, extinguishes, and stupefies a people, till each nation is reduced to be nothing better than a flock of timid and industrial animals, of which government is the shepherd.”

As we celebrate this Fourth of July, we must realize that we are not yet the flock of timid animals that de Tocqueville spoke of. But that doesn’t mean we can’t become them. So today, celebrate freedom, and in the days that follow make sure to keep a close eye on its preservation. For as Ronald Reagan said, “Freedom is never more than one generation away from extinction.” Let us not be the generation that ushers it into nonexistence.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Monday, July 4, 2011 - 10:48

The Fourth of July has its many pleasures, among them, friends, family, barbecuing and fireworks, but it also has its drudgeries, namely, ridiculous interpretations of the Declaration of Independence.

This year is no different as venerated liberal columnist E.J. Dionne composes an article entitled “What Our Declaration Really Said.” It should have been an incredible short column. In fact, in a perfect world it would have merely been a link to the text of the Declaration of Independence.

Unfortunately, in endeavoring to enlighten people as to what the Declaration really said, Dionne apparently finds it impossible to simply point to what the Declaration really said. Instead, he editorializes.

It is an utterly ridiculous attempt to highlight certain clauses and completely ignore others in order to show that our Founders “were concerned about “consent,” i.e. popular rule, not taxes” and were certainly not “anti-government zealots.”

To achieve this conclusion, Dionne resorts to using some serious interpretive gymnastics. For instance, in arguing that concern over taxation wasn’t that important he says “in the long list of ‘abuses and usurpations’ the Declaration documents, taxes don’t come up until the 17th item.” As if there is any indication in history that the order of the list was meant to provide a measure of importance.

Yet a simple reading would tell you this is not the case. Under this strained interpretation, “transporting large Armies of foreign mercenaries to complete the works of death, desolation and tyranny, already begun” is “ranked” the 25th most important grievance; whereas “he has called together legislative bodies at places unusual, uncomfortable and distant” would be the fifth most important abuse. Somehow I tend to believe that the lives of American citizens would take precedence to the comfort of our legislators in the minds of our Founders. But not according to Dionne’s reading.

Sadly, he relies on this patently false rubric more than once. “The document doesn’t really get to anything that looks like Big Government oppression (“He has erected a multitude of new offices, and sent hither swarms of officers to harass our people, and eat out their substance”) until grievance No. 10,” Dionne writes. As if abuses one through nine are really the only ones that really matter, the rest are just filler.

But Thomas Jefferson was no high-school student, simply stuffing words into the document to meet some teacher-imposed length. Everything in it is important!

Sadly, it is this fundamental misunderstanding of one of our founding documents that jades the entirety of Dionne’s views. The core of Dionne’s confusion is desire to see everything in black and white rather than shades of gray. The choice is not between no government and big government, it is an ongoing debate over the correct amount of government.

And what is the correct amount? A careful reading of the writings of our Founders would suggest a bias towards too little, rather than too much. “A wise and frugal government, which shall restrain men from injuring on another, shall leave them otherwise free to regulate their own pursuits of industry and improvement, and shall not take from the mouth of labor the bread it has earned” is, as Thomas Jefferson said, “the sum of good government.”

Or to be more blunt, “Most bad government has grown out of too much government,” wrote Jefferson.

To be sure, our Founders were “not anti-government zealots,” but who said they were? Dionne is merely tilting at windmills, setting up straw men in order to knock them down. The reality is much more nuanced. Our Founders encouraged the creation of a republic with a central government, but they also encouraged Americans to remain deeply suspicious of it.

Dionne may wish to define the parameters by which we read and judge the Declaration of Independence, but be wary, for as Jefferson said, “The price of freedom is eternal vigilance.”


Tierra.Warren
Posted: Thursday, June 30, 2011 - 17:23

 

Vandalism, riot police, teargas, and mass protest; this sounds like a war zone, but it is the current situation in Greece. Citizens are protesting the colossal debt that currently wreaks havoc on the Greek economy, which in turn is dragging down the world’s financial markets. Greece’s debt built up from decades of a poorly managed economy. Greece was warned that it could not continue on the same path without falling into bankruptcy, but officials did not take the situation seriously. And despite additional warnings that the private sector was too large to maintain, the government just did not listen. This too, will be America’s future unless we take immediate action to control spending and reduce the debt. “The deadline for dealing with the national debt ceiling has to create a deeper sense of urgency than we see in Washington. Watch Greece. Watch closely,”according to a Chicago Tribune editorial.

Greece landed in its current situation because the government spent uncontrollably, paying for cushy social programs and employing a massive public sector workforce. Here in the United States, benefit programs like Social Security and Medicare contribute largely to our long-term debt. Unfortunately, the Democratic Party refuses to acknowledge the consequences these entitlements are going to have. On the Republican side, Congressman Paul Ryan’s plan is a realistic vision of the future of Social Security and Medicare. Although, the Democrats do not have a plan of their own, they are not willing to accept the Republican solution.

When economic disaster struck in Greece, the European Union was forced to bail them out. But here in the United States, we do not have the E.U. to rescue us. As Americans we value our independence—it’s what we fight for and we do not want to rely on others to bail us out. This time let’s fight for our financial freedom, reign in our debt and control spending, then we will truly have our independence.

By: Bronwyn Haltom


Zach.Howell
Posted: Wednesday, June 29, 2011 - 21:31

Phew! I was getting a little worried that solving our $1.6 trillion deficit was going to be a very difficult proposition. But apparently not. All we have to do is focus on eliminating on tax breaks for corporate jet owners! Presto, problem solved.

That sounds ridiculous right? Yet a tax break on corporate jets seemed to be the main focus of President Obama’s press conference on deficit reduction. All told, the word “corporate jet” was mentioned 12 times. By comparison Medicare was mentioned five times, Medicaid twice, and Social Security twice. For those of you counting at home, eliminating a deduction on corporate jets, which would do damn near nothing to solve our deficit, was mentioned three more times than all of the entitlement put together.

What made his statements all the more ridiculous was that the corporate jet tax break which he continually harped on was created by his own stimulus bill!

As the Heritage Foundation explained,

“The president’s statement today – and his call to repeal the tax break generally – is either a tacit admission that the stimulus included projects that did not, in fact, stimulate the economy, or an attempt to “soak the rich” without regard for the policy’s effects on the economy.”

To me, it is clearly the latter. And lest you believe I’m merely some rightwing ideologue who is attempting to see things how I want to see them rather than how they really are, consider this review of the speech from uber-Lefty Greg Sargent:

“The primary goal of President Obama’s presser, which just wrapped up, was obvious: He was clearly out to pick a major public fight with Republicans . . .

. . . Obama’s mention of [the corporate jet credit] seemed deliberately designed to provoke howls of outrage and cries of “class warfare” from Republicans – with the obvious goal of maneuvering Republicans into the arch defenders of the interests of the wealthy.”

Sigh. So we’re picking fight now are we? Might not be the best time since, ya know, we’re supposed to be negotiating towards a compromise on the debt ceiling. I can’t help but imagine America clinging perilously onto a root, trying to hold on with all its might lest it fall into the chasm of default. And then there’s President Obama, peeling our fingers away one at a time.

Even if Obama’s speech was “deliberately designed” to “pick a fight,” I’m happy to take the bait. That’s because I can’t idly sit by and listen to his faux-populist rhetoric, while he does absolutely nothing to solve our real problems.

In speech after speech and campaign stop after campaign stop President Obama has gone after “millionaires and billionaires, oil companies, hedge fund owners, and corporate jet owners.” Or as Salon’s Andrew Leonard called it, “a murderer’s row of top-hatted icons that average Americans are likely to have sympathy for.”

But singling out villains gets us nowhere, especially when you’re conveniently neglecting some of the most notoriously wasteful tax breaks. Can anyone say so-called “green” technology?

The simple truth is that this whole class warfare shtick is a diversion from the underlying problem; namely, that we are spending too much money. The fact is, and this simply cannot be repeated enough, even with the extension of all the current tax breaks, tax revenue will grow higher than historical norms within the next decade. It is spending that has grown out of control. It is spending that the CBO estimates will cause our debt to rise to 190 percent of GDP within the next 25 years.

“Leaders rise to the occasion and do the right thing,” said President Obama. “Call me naïve, but my expectation is that leaders are going to lead.”

How sad then that today’s speech demonstrated that Obama is neither ready to do the right thing, or lead. Instead, he’s only ready to stick to his partisan talking points and pick fights with Republicans. I guess I’m naïve.

And don’t even get me started on the ‘question and answer ‘portion of his presser. The part where he essentially said:

  • Libya is constitutional under the War Powers Act because we’re winning, whereas Vietnam wasn’t because we were losing (what do they teach you these days at Harvard law!)
  • Forget the Constitution, I’ve got the support of two failed presidential nominees, John McCain and John Kerry, for my actions in Libya, and by golly isn’t that enough?
  • That he wouldn’t comment on the NLRB complaint against Boeing
  • “I’m not going to make news on that today,” in response to a question on gay marriage. Uh, isn’t this a press conference? Isn’t the whole point to inform the news?
  • He was going to take credit for the pending free trade agreements, despite the fact that Republicans have been pushing for them since the first day Obama took office
  • That he’s amused by comments that he’s not showing enough leadership because “I called the leaders together. I said we’ve got to get this done. I put Vice President Biden in charge of the process. . . At a certain point, they need to do their job.” Translation: I’m leading, ya know, by, uh, putting someone else in charge. And ya know, my leadership would have totally worked if these people weren’t so unleadable.

Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, June 28, 2011 - 20:01

It sure seems like Sweden has a lot going for it these days. Best known for their attractive blondes, the Swedes, have now come to dominate the all-important arenas of crime novels and stylish yet affordable home furnishings. Okay, so The Girl Who Kicked the Hornet’s Nest and Ikea may still not be enough to make up for a 67 degree average high temperature in July or the fact that they barely see daylight in the winter, but at least their economy is humming!

As the Washington Post writes today,

“This Scandinavian nation of 9 million people has accomplished what the United States, Britain and Japan can only dream of: Growing rapidly, creating jobs and gaining a competitive edge. The banks are lending, the housing market booming. The budget is balanced.”

It’s tough to draw too many conclusions from the land of ABBA. After all, Sweden is small both geographically and in population, is ethnically and culturally homogeneous, and has almost no military presence. All of those serve as serious confounding factors that should prohibit us from glancing quickly at their success and wondering aloud, “Why don’t we just copy them?”

Nevertheless, I was intrigued by the Washington Post’s story, “Five economic lessons from Sweden, the rock star of the recovery.” I mean, who doesn’t wanna be a rock star (even if the closest thing Sweden has actually had to a rock star is, um, well…Ace of Base)?

I, the intrepid reader, read on, expecting to find a snide rebuke of our capitalist ways and urging the United States to adopt a Scandinavian-style welfare system as the only way to solve our problems. This was the Washington Post after all, a paper known for its left-wing bent. So consider me shocked when I read these five lessons:

  1. Keep your fiscal house in order when times are good, so you will have more room to maneuver when things are bad.
  2. Fiscal stimulus can be more effective when it is automatic
  3. Use monetary policy aggressively
  4. Keep the value of your currency flexible
  5. Bankers will always make blunders; just make sure they don’t doom the economy

Remarkably Republican sounding! In fact, with the exception of numbers two (which still is at its core a rebuke of one-off infusions of government cash) and four (which is just impossible given the dollars status as the world’s reserve currency) it reads like a conservatives playbook for the economy.

I’d like to take a moment to focus on two of these recommendations, numbers 1 and 5, in the hopes of shedding some light on the power of Republican arguments.

As the Washington Post points out, in 2007, the U.S. ran a deficit equal to 3 percent of its economy while Sweden had a 3.6 percent surplus. This allowed them to spend modestly without ever being threatened by default.

Sadly, Republicans in the United States can’t even get Democrats to agree to cut our budget deficit in half, much less actually run a surplus. And yet think of the freedom that this would provide us. In good times it would minimize the market-distorting impact of government deficits and give private businesses the certainty and cash needed to invest up to their full potential. In down times it would (although I still disagree with the principle of stimulus) provide flexibility to pass stimulus-style measures without pushing the harmful effects of debt to future generations.

As for lesson 5, the Swedish banking system shows the power of free-markets if they are allowed to truly work. The Washington Post writes,

“Swedish financial officals don’t point to any single magic bullet in their regulatory approach. Rather, the Swedish banking system seems to have held up okay because the pain of the early 1990s was severe enough as to scar both bank executive and regulators, leaving them with little temptation to go into risky real estate lending.”

In other words, let private companies take their lumps and learn from their mistakes. We did the exact opposite. Through TARP, the US government bailed out the banking system, ensuring that no lesson was learned other than that there really is such a thing as “too big to fail.” More top-down bureaucracy is not a substitution for capitalism – a lesson we’d be wise to learn.

Who would have thought we’d be learning conservative economic lessons from a welfare state. I guess that goes to show just how far to the left we’ve moved.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, June 28, 2011 - 20:01

Barack Obama’s presidency has been predicated on speeches, not actual plans. Given his unique oratorical ability it’s been an incredibly smart strategy. Unfortunately, we have problems that cannot just be talked away.

The largest of those problems is the looming debt crisis posed by our historic deficits and mounting debt. President Obama can wax eloquent to bond investors all he wants. If America can’t pay its bills, the investors who lend to us so cheaply will be asking for more cash. Because as they say in the movies, “it’s not personal, it’s business.”

In other words, it’s time for President Obama to lay out a comprehensive deficit reduction plan. House Majority Leader Eric Cantor (R-VA) said as much when he dropped out of the debt talks earlier this week. “We’ve reached the point where the dynamic needs to change,” said Cantor to the Wall Street Journal. “It is up to the president to come in and talk to the speaker. We’ve reached the end of this phase.”

Senator Charles Schumer (D-NY) rejected Rep. Cantor’s suggestion that President Obama should step up and put his own plan on the table. According to The Hill, “[Schumer] said Obama has put out a blueprint in his April speech on the deficit and said details are for closed-door negotiations.”

Using the word blueprint is an insult to architects. If Obama’s speech was a blueprint it would be for a fiscal house of cards that is about to tumble down.

Remember that President Obama did actually offer a budget in February. Of course it increased the deficit, drove spending upwards, and id nothing to eliminate the main drivers of government growth.

Then, in the speech Schumer was referring to, President Obama completely retracted the budget he had offered just two months prior. In its place he laid out a “plan” that he said would save $4 trillion over 12 years, but provided a few unremarkable proposals on how to achieve that figure. The “ideas” included reducing waste in Medicare and Medicaid, continuing the course with Obamacare, eliminating the Bush-era tax policies, and making $750 billion in unspecified cuts to discretionary spending.

Nevermind, that this doesn’t come close to being a comprehensive plan, it doesn’t come close to solving our deficit. Nevertheless, Sen. Schumer insists that this grab-bag of weak ideas is a sufficient “blueprint” to work from.

The CBO has a different idea. When asked to determine the budgetary impact of President Obama’s deficit reduction ideas, CBO Director Douglas Elmendorf issues a terse rejoinder, “We don’t estimate speeches.”

Ouch. The question then becomes: Why don’t Democrats just put their plan on the table? Why are they so hesitant to offer anything substantial and so reliant, as Sen. Schumer said on “closed-door negotations?”

The answer is simple…they are much more keen on demagoguing Republicans’ entitlement reform plans than to reveal that their plan focuses on raising taxes on all Americans.

To solve the enormous problems we face would take an incredible amount of revenue. The CBO recently revealed that if taxes continue their historic ascent they would reach 23 percent of GDP within the next 25 years. That will be the highest they have ever been in history, but it still wouldn’t be enough, our deficit would continue to rise.

So we dare Democrats to reveal their proposal. If you’ve got such good ideas then stop hiding behind closed doors. If you truly believe that higher taxes are the path to future prosperity then at least have the guts to be honest with the American people. I can only figure out two reasons why you would hide your proposal: (1) you’re scared of voters reactions to higher taxes or (2) you’ve run the numbers and your plan isn’t sufficient to eliminate the deficit. Maybe I’m wrong. But somehow I feel Democrats aren’t brave enough to prove me wrong.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, June 28, 2011 - 20:01

There is a growing orthodoxy amongst Democrats that the Bush-era tax cuts are the entire reason for our budgetary troubles. The goal behind this growing chorus is simple – to make it seem like the answer to solving all of our problems is as easy as getting rid of the Bush-era tax cuts.

But is this correct? Could it really be that simple.

Well, no. For proof we look to the Congressional Budget Office’s just-released Long-Term Budget Outlook. The CBO uses something called the “Extended-Baseline Scenario” in which they examine the budget outlook using policies closely adhering to current law.

It sounds simple, but the actualities are much more complicated. First, off it would meant that the Bush-era tax cuts are not extended. Second, it would mean that the Alternative Minimum Tax, which was designed to ensure that upper class households could not dramatically reduce their tax liabilities by taking advantage of exemptions and deductions, would gradually hit more middle class homes since it is not indexed to inflation. Third, it would mean that the Obamacare tax on premium health insurance plans would increase revenues.

Together, the CBO predicts that if these three things are allowed to occur, “by the 2020s, [revenues] would reach higher levels relative to the size of the economy than ever recorded in the nation’s history.” They predict that tax revenues would jump to about 19 percent of gross domestic product in 2013 and would reach 23 percent by 2035. For comparisons sake, remember that since WWII, federal revenues have averaged slightly more than 18 percent.

Of course, percentage of GDP is kind of a hard measure to truly understand. Let’s try and personalize it.

The economy of the United States was the world’s largest in 2010, with GDP estimated to be around $14.7 trillion. Using historic averages, government revenue would have equaled about $2.6 trillion. But if we look at the levels that many Democrats would like them to be at – 23 percent by 2035 – then revenues would reach $3.4 trillion. That’s an $800 billion difference! That increased tax burden, spread equally across every taxpayer, equals about $7,140.

As you can see, that 5 percent of GDP makes a huge difference when it comes to individual tax burdens.

But according to the CBO, not even that will be enough to solve our underlying problem.

“Even with revenues rising to those projected levels, however, the federal government would still experience substantial budgetary shortfalls. By 2035, the deficit (including interests costs) would equal about 4 percent of GDP, and federal debt held by the public would equal 84 percent of GDP.”

In other words, even if the federal government manages to collect the most taxes that it has in the history of the United States, our budget still will not be on a sustainable path. And sadly, that debt figure is optimistic because the CBO doesn’t take into account a number of likely events on the spending side – such as continued use of the Medicare doc-fix.

So no matter how much Democrats fantasize about tax increases, remember, it’s not enough! There simply is no way around it, government spending must be reduced and entitlements must be reformed.


Tierra.Warren
Posted: Monday, June 27, 2011 - 16:33

 

July is right around the corner, and both Republicans and Democrats alike know that our nation is in great need of a new budget. While in the past, Republicans warned of the ever-increasing debt and Democrats sat back and viewed it as a non-issue, it seems that both sides can agree on one thing: our country is currently in desperate need of a new budget. But that doesn’t mean they share a plan to tackle the issue!

It is unarguable that our debt continues to grow exponentially, and will continue to do so if no initiatives are taken. Economists predict this staggering level of debt will hurt the market in years to come, and while the Federal Reserve has maintained a hands-on approach to reducing the amount of private debt, their assistance has proven to be of little help, if any. Even after the federal government spent trillions to “jump start” the economy, Americans still have 37% more debt than in the last decade. This level is a good indication that the federal government’s massive spending has once again, failed to solve economic problems.

While the administration believed increasing spending would help the recession pass, it only worsened the already difficult economic situation. According to the Washington Post, the deficit is not the long-term problem. Rather, it is the interest we are paying on additional debt that will truly set our nation back. Although we cannot turn back time and reverse the debt that has already accumulated in the private sector, we certainly must work to prevent the Federal Government from gaining more debt for future generations to endure.

It is our generation and the future generations to come that will feel the effects of these long-term issues most strongly. According to the Wall Street Journal:

“The repercussions are likely to play out for years to come in the form of patchy economic growth, further government market intervention—such as last week's decision by oil-consuming nations to release more oil onto the markets—and frequent financial-market swings.”

While the President claims to have a plan to work on decreasing the deficit through budget cuts, we’ll believe it when we see it!

 

By: Judy Frankel and Bronwyn Haltom

 
Tierra.Warren
Posted: Monday, June 27, 2011 - 13:51

 

With a continued streak of low job approval, President Obama used his weekly address to unveil his administration’s new $500 million partnership, and it couldn’t come at a worse time! Dubbed the “Advanced Manufacturing Partnership,” the new program will work to “renew the promise of American manufacturing” in attempt to promote job-creation and stay competitive in the global marketplace. Among the projected undertakings is the National Robotics Initiative—a $70 million project to create robots and fund other robotics developments.

While Republicans have proposed reducing regulations, expanding domestic energy production, and requiring the government to consider the effect of federal rules on hiring, President Obama has a different idea of what is good for our economy. Following his visit to RedZone Robotics, a company that built a robot to explore water and sewer pipes, Obama held that: “We can’t simply cut our way to prosperity.” Alright, then what do you propose—spending our way to prosperity? It sure seems that way. Now, despite our ever-growing national debt, America is taking on a new endeavor: backing robotics research (clearly our #1 priority for fixing the economy).

Funding for the National Robotics Initiative will come from several government organizations, including the National Science Foundation (NSF), the National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA), the Department of Agriculture and the National Institutes of Health (NIH)—many of which could not exist without taxpayer money. These expensive, low-priority robotics projects need to be supported by entrepreneurs and the private sector—not the taxpayers! And in order for private investors to cover the costs of robotics innovations, the government will need to lessen its regulations and restrictions—just as the Republicans have proposed. It is clear that too much government involvement only prevents Americans from making these investments.

Instead, President Obama said: “We need to do what’s necessary to grow our economy, create good, middle-class jobs and make it possible for all Americans to pursue their dreams.” But do Americans truly believe that building robots (that will ultimately replace many employees) can somehow save our economy, or better yet, create more jobs? Perhaps one day, investing in the manufacturing of robots will be a good idea—maybe it will even create more jobs. But for now, our nation certainly cannot fund these projects, let alone at the taxpayer’s expense.

 

By: Blair Hart Newman


Zach.Howell
Posted: Thursday, June 23, 2011 - 12:33

The AARP (no longer known as the American Association of Retired Persons because apparently they’re membership has spilled the banks of retirees) is a group most famous for providing discounts on everything from coffee to movie tickets. Of course, they happen to also be one of the most powerful lobbying organizations in the United States. With over 40 million members and more than $1.4 billion in annual revenue, a significant portion of which goes towards lobbying activities, legislators tend to listen when the AARP talks.

And recently, when they’ve talked, it has been in favor of liberal policies. Over the years they have opposed a balanced budget amendment, supported Obamacare, opposed private accounts for Social Security, and, most conspicuously, supported the continuation of the death tax. How an organization which purports to represent the interests of older Americans can support a 35 percent tax triggered upon someone’s death is beyond me.

So consider the Left’s surprise when the AARP came to their senses on Friday and decided to support fundamental Social Security reform. “The ship was sailing,” said AARP policy-chief John Rother, “I wanted to be at the wheel when that happens.”

Of course, liberal activists, who have come to rely on the AARP’s support for maintaining some semblance of support amongst older generations of voters, threw a complete hissy-fit. Among the most outspoken has been Erik Kingson of FireDogake, who wrote that he’s burning his AARP card. That’s right, “No more AARP discounts, free magazines with Katie Couric, Sally Field, Michael Fox, Goldie Hawn, Condoleezza Rice, Robin Williams, Robert Redford, Harrison Ford and others emblazoned each month on its cover – all fine people but hardly typical of the nation’s very diverse population of boomers and elders.” You tell em’ Erik!

Keeping their political finger firmly in the wind, the AARP backtracked slightly, saying “stay tuned – our position has not changed on Social Security.” But then saying that “The reality is, we have more people older and who are living longer, so we need to make changes. Everybody recognizes that. And we’re certainly willing to talk about a package of changes that will keep Social Security strong.”

Translation: We understand things have to change, but we’ll try and smooth things over with liberals by couching any statements in “we’ve felt this way all along” gibberish.

But once you cut through all the silly politics of it all you must realize that this is an enormous step forward in the fight to reform entitlements. It is explicit recognition of what everyone else already knew, that Social Security is facing financial realities that necessitates changes. Moreover – it is only by taking the wheel now that we can begin to steer Social Security to a sustainable place. If we wait it will be too late, Social Security will have developed too deep a deficit to slowly phase in changes or maintain adequate benefit levels.

The impact of the change was best summed up by moderate group Third Way, which has been pushing for a bipartisan deal for entitlement reform.

“Today marks a watershed moment in American politics,” said Third Way President Jonathan Cowan. “For decades, AARP has stood against any substantial changes in Social Security. Now that they have opened the door to reform, it is time for lawmakers to walk through it.”

There’s no question that they should walk though it. For the first time since Social Security was last overhauled in the 1980s, the program ran a deficit last year. This year alone Social Security is projected to run a $45 billion deficit as it pays out retirement benefits far in excess of its collections. Moreover, these deficit appear to be permanent; the Congressional Budget Office has calculated that the program will run permanent deficits until its “trust fund” runs out completely in 2037. At that point the program would only be able to pay out 78 percent of benefits to retirees, despite their having paid in a lifetime’s worth of payroll taxes.

Hopefully, the AARP’s decision to finally admit that the present reality is unsustainable will be a kick in the pants to the ongoing talks over how best to solve the deficit. As the AARP said, it is only through reform, that we can achieve the “long term solvency [that] is key to protecting and strengthening Social Security for all generations.” Young Americans, take heart.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Thursday, June 23, 2011 - 12:33

“We’re running out of time,” said Ben Cardin, a Democratic Senator from Maryland. Finally! A Senate Democrat who understands how the average person feels, who gets the fact that people are already stretched to the breaking point and can’t afford not to work. A guy demanding action.

Oh wait, he wasn’t talking about the average American? According to Politico, the “we” Senator Cardin was referring to were his Democratic colleagues, not your average struggling American.

“Senate Democrats are beginning to fear that the country’s increasingly dim economic outlook will cost them their seats in 2012 and are trying to craft a new agenda aimed at spurring job creation,” reports Politico.

What the bleep! The last time I checked, the recession started in 2007, it’s now 2011, and Senate Democrats are just now trying to cobble together a jobs agenda? And even then only because they’re afraid a woeful economy will negatively impact their reelection chances. They couldn’t be more out of touch if they moved to rural America and only had AT&T cell phone.

But don’t you worry, they say. They’ve caught on to the problem. We’ve been lurching from bill to bill without a broader strategy to address the economy, said Sen. Mark Begich (D-AK). But now, that they’ve finally caught on to this pesky unemployment problem they’ve got a plan to fix it. Well kinda…

According to Politico, “While there is no shortage of ideas of what a plan could include – from a payroll tax holiday to increased infrastructure spending – Democrats haven’t settled on the details.”

“There’s no easy answer to this,” said Sen. Joe Lieberman (I-CT).

You can almost hear them doing an impression of a five year old, whining “this is haaard.” No one is saying it is easy, but c’mon, you’re not even trying. The only thing the Senate has done in the past six months that may even remotely create a job is a patent reform bill. And unless it’s going to spur inventors to patent ways to double the intelligence of these Senate buffoons, consider me skeptical.

Among the details Democrats are noodling over is whether to “craft one large package or push through a series of narrow measures” and “how to sell their plans to the public.” Really guys? You’re arguing over the logistical details of a plan you haven’t even created yet for a problem that has been around for nearly four years! Only in the Senate ladies and gents.

Of course we’ve heard all of this before. This time last year we were enjoying a hiring renaissance known as the “Recovery Summer.” When David Axelrod proclaimed that “this summer will be the most active Recovery Act season yet, with thousands of highly-visible road, bridge, water and other infrastructure projects breaking ground across the country, giving the American people a first-hand look at the Recovery Act in their own backyards…”

Yea, we got a first hand look. Except it looked a lot less like a recovery and a lot more like a load of horse crap. And even then the so-called “Recovery Summer” entailed no real plans, instead choosing to repackage and reheat the stimulus bill that was passed more than a year earlier.

Fortunately, for their sakes (and my sanity), Democrats have chosen (thus far) to eschew giving this summer an official title. But if I was going to give it a name it would have to be the “We’re Going to Look Into This Summer.” So far the President has convened a “Jobs and Competitiveness Council” (whose initial results were met with “a big yawn” from Carnegie Mellon professor Allan Meltzter), Senate Democrats plan to meet for a policy lunch to talk strategy, and Senator Begich “has initiated a series of meetings with business groups to communicate ideas…on how to foster job growth.”

At some point you have to step out from behind the “we’re looking into it” excuse and actually do something. Senate Democrats have had more than three years to figure out the problem, come up with a plan to fix it, and put it into action.

Sen. Cardin was wrong. Senate Democrats aren’t running out of time, it’s already run out.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Thursday, June 23, 2011 - 12:32

The Tiger Woods melodrama took yet another interesting turn this past weekend at the U.S. Open, and oddly enough, he wasn’t even playing. A young upstart named Rory McIlroy burst onto the scene, shattering numerous golf records, and grasping firmly to the title of “The Next Tiger.” The storyline made me think, who is the next Obama?

Of course, Tiger Woods is a uniquely complicated situation. Americans simultaneously hate him as a person and yet cheer for him to break the major’s record of one of sports’ ultimate good guys – Jack Nicklaus.

I’m convinced nobody knows what to think, Americans’ psyche is just built to robotically cheer for greatness. Oddly enough, we’re also apparently programmed to ruthlessly attempt to tear any person down on their road to greatness.

President Obama has also felt Americans’ schizophrenia. Large majorities loved and supported him in 2008, feeling he was a different kind of politician that would carry America into a political and economic Renaissance. More than two years later, Washington has chewed him up and spit him out, mashing him into a cookie-cutter politician who speaks with grandiloquence and acts with timidity.

Much of the criticism is deserved. Obama is very comfortable talking about problems, or better yet, convening groups of people to talk about problems, but flails wildly when it comes to actually put words into action.

There was no clearer example than in the President’s Job and Competitiveness Council. The Council, one of many job panels created by the Administration, recently released its recommendations after three months worth of research and work. The Council’s chairman, Jeff Immelt wrote, “we analyzed which actions are critical to accelerating job growth in high potential sectors, while also addressing areas of concentrated unemployment.” Sounds promising enough. That is, until you actually look at the recommendations.

“Put construction workers back to work,” was one idea. But as former Senator John Sununu wrote, “Why not just recommend ‘put everyone back to work’ and be done with it.” Another was to “streamline permitting” by “cutting red tape.” Did we really need to put twenty-six very smart people together in a room for three months in order to figure out that we needed to cut red tape? No. Which is why Robert Reich, the former Labor Secretary under President Clinton, called the recommendations “puff balls.”

It doesn’t take a genius to figure out the problems. We’ve had three years of up-close-and-personal study into exactly what the issues are. We need someone who is willing to usher those ideas through a divided House and Senate and into law. And I’d put the chances for President Obama doing that somewhere between zero and nil. After all, recent weeks have revealed that the President has switched into campaign mode, traveling to key battleground states to cover up his apparent failures on the economy. Add fluff filled speeches to his puff-ball plans.

What happened to the excitement? I mean the definitive book about the last election was called “Game Change” for chrissakes. Like Woods, Obama has faded from shooting star to fading supernova. Woods was a once-in-an-era golfer, a fantastic athlete who changed the way the game was played. But he wasn’t the man we wanted him to be. He was a butthead on and off the course. He threw clubs along with temper tantrums. He was unlikeable, rude, and, as it turns out, morally corrupt.

That said, I don’t feel duped. I’m just hopeful that Rory McIlroy is the next big thing, because I’m ready for it. He’s young, a phenomenal talent, and (gasp!) looks like he actually enjoys playing the game.

I feel the same way about President Obama. Not at all for the same reasons, mind you. He seems like a genuinely good guy who is just in over his head. Nevertheless, I’m ready to move past the Obama era, fondly remember it as a time of great hope but no results, and find someone who can really shake up Washington.

With so many candidates vying for the Republican ticket it is hard to say who that will be. But who knows, could there be a Rory McIlroy in the mix?


Zach.Howell
Posted: Thursday, June 23, 2011 - 12:32

Every once in a while I come across a news story that makes me question whether it was intended as satire. I often get confused, as if somehow my Washington Post had been transmuted into The Onion.

That happened today in a story about an online dating service called BeautifulPeople.com being attacked by a virus. Not just any virus mind you. One that allowed (gasp) ugly people to join.

If you haven’t heard of BeautifulPeople.com, it is an online dating site that only accepts applicants its members deem attractive. Hilariously, the site was hit last month by something dubbed “the Shrek Virus,” which allowed 30,000 “unattractive” people to join its dating rolls. The company has since revoked those memberships and told The Guardian newspaper, and I’m not making this up,

“We have to stick to our founding principles of only accepting beautiful people – that’s what our members paid for. We can’t just sweep 30,000 ugly people under the carpet.”

It would be funny if it weren’t such a damning indictment of humanity.

The lesson is (or at least should be) to not judge a book by its cover. Well, a similar rule applies to legislation. The ideas was best elucidated by famed economist Milton Friedman who said, “One of the great mistakes is to judge policies and programs by their intentions rather than their results.”

That principle is what made the debate over Obamacare so infuriating. From the very start of the debate, it was clear that the media was so enthralled by the idea of reforming an obviously broken health care system that they completely failed to actually study what the bill did.

Then again, I shouldn’t lay the blame solely at the feet of the media. They weren’t the only ones who didn’t really have a fundamental grasp of what was in the monstrosity of a bill. In fact, the chief architect of the plan, Sen. Max Baucus (D-VT) told his constituents, “I don’t think you want me to waste my time to read every page of the health care bill.”

And then, as if in competition for who can say the most profoundly out of touch thing, Nancy Pelosi (D-CA) said Congress “[has] to pass the bill so you can find out what’s in it.”

Never mind all those details, they told us, they’re not really important; the key thing is, we’re reforming health care! Well as it turns out those details are crucially important. And as with any 2,000 page bill there’s gonna be a lot of details.

The latest of these hidden aspect of the bill, is an enormous Medicaid glitch that will allow more than 3 million middle-class Americans to qualify for Medicaid.  It is a problem that Medicare’s chief actuary Richard Foster says “keeps him up at night.”

I don’t generally comment on the pros or cons of policy,” said Foster, “but that just doesn’t make any sense. This is a situation that go not attention at all . . . And even now, as I raise the issue with various policymakers, people are not rushing to say . . . we need to do something about this.”

Sadly, this is merely the latest in a long line of unintended consequences, glitches, and oversights that have arisen as the details of Obamacare come to light. Among the many problems have been a 1099 reporting requirement that would have cost small businesses a fortune had it not been repealed, a finding that most businesses will drop employee coverage which will raise the law’s cost, handing out thousands of waivers to employers because they couldn’t meet the law’s burdensome requirements, and a study showing that one of Obamacare’s chief savings ideas, Accountable Care Organizations, actually don’t work.

Of course, it was impossible to have known any of this before the bill was passed. It was rushed through a secretive process and subject to a quick vote. Neither lawmakers nor citizens had any real clue what was in it but we were told to love it anyway.

In hindsight they were telling us to judge a book by its cover. Sadly, the cover read “savings” while the plot read “costs continue to skyrocket.” It may not have been as egregious a violation of decency as BeautifulPeople.com, nevertheless, I wish I could just sweep those 2,000 pages under the carpet.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Thursday, June 23, 2011 - 12:31

Today I reached Nerdvana. Around this time every year the Congressional Budget Office releases its annual Long-Term Budget Outlook – a document that lays out the fiscal path we’re on.

Its release day is as close to Christmas as it gets for budget wonks and bloggers (or if you’re like me…both). It’s 100-or-so pages of budget graphs, debt-to-GDP ratios, historical charts, and data. Lots and lots of data.

But the main reason for excitement is that it is an agenda-free document that serves as a nonpartisan reference point in the budget debate. And in recent years it has become an invaluable tool for those of us trying our best to drill it into the minds of Democrats that our present course is just unsustainable.

That’s right! It’s not just us “crazy right wingers” who believe that Washington is spending us into oblivion, it happens to be fact. Got a problem with it? Don’t come to me, go talk to the Congress’ budget scorekeepers down at the CBO.

This year, the document begins ominously.

“Recently, the federal government has been recording budget deficits that are the largest as a share of the economy since 1945. Consequently, the amount of federal debt held by the public has surged.”

If the document was a sports car it just hit zero-to-depressing in record time. But that was just an appetizer for the utter dystopia they project unless something is done soon to alter our fiscal trajectory.

In showing just how screwed we are the CBO lays out two scenarios: (1) the rosy scenario in which we leave everything as it is now, which would mean the Bush-era tax cuts expire, the Medicare doc-fix is not patched, and the Alternative Minimum Tax is not revised, meaning a larger number of earners will be pushed into higher marginal rates; (2) a realistic scenarios which realizes that unless Washington either grows a pair, or a brain, they’re not gonna make any hard choices.

Regardless of which scenario you choose…it’s ugly. Under Scenario One, tax revenues would rocket to 23 percent of GDP, well above the 18 percent postwar average. Not even that would do much to our trajectory as by 2035 our federal debt held by the public would equal 84 percent of GDP. For comparisons sake, that number was around 40 percent of GDP just three short years ago.

Which brings us to Scenario 2. In this future, tax revenues would remain around 18.4 percent (that’s right…taxes would exist above their historical average even if we continued the Bush tax cuts). Despite that fact, our debt-to-GDP ratio would soar to nearly 190 percent by 2035, a level which the CBO, in all its blandness, labels “unsustainable.”

Sadly, these problems have grown substantially in just the past year. The ratio of debt to GDP grew by 7 percent in Scenario One and 14 percent in Scenario 2, indicating that even as we have come to realize our car is quickly veering off a fiscal cliff, Washington has seen fit to jam on the accelerator.

The cause of these enormous budgetary gaps is easy enough to see.

“In the Congressional Budget Office’s long term projects of spending, growth in noninterest spending as a share of GDP is attributable entirely to increases in spending on several large mandatory programs: Social Security, Medicare, Medicaid, and (to a lesser extent) insurance subsidies that will be providing through the health insurance exchanges.”

In other words we have an entitlement problem. Each and every one of them, including the newest entitlement – Obamacare – is in desperate need of reform.

Hopefully this document will serve as a wake up call to Washington. The CBO labels the problem “daunting,” but even that may fail to truly describe our dire situation. The enormity of our debt could spell the end of America’s reign as the greatest nation on earth. They are enough to cripple the hope for prosperity for the foreseeable future.

Changes must begin now and they must be in proportion to the vastness of our fiscal hole.


Tierra.Warren
Posted: Monday, June 20, 2011 - 16:48

 

Last Friday marked the one-year anniversary of President Obama’s announcement that our nation was entering “Recovery Summer.” A six-week attempt to promote the $787 billion American Recovery and Reinvestment Act (a.k.a. the “stimulus”), “Recovery Summer” was projected to create new jobs and restore the state of the economy. Yet the efforts last summer were a bust. “Recovery Summer” provided a mere snapshot of the failures that would continue to arise as a result of the stimulus project: 300,000 jobs were lost last summer—a fifth of the 1.5 million jobs lost since the “stimulus” was signed in 2009.

But enough is enough, Obama! Looking back on the past year, “Recovery Summer” was only the beginning of a terrible path toward big spending and even bigger government. Employment levels have come nowhere near those promised by the administration from the start, and we have seen very little job creation. Thus, the one-year mark from the “Recovery Summer” is a strong reminder to Americans that real recovery has yet to take place. According to House Speaker John Boehner:

“The anniversary of President Obama’s “Recovery Summer” publicity stunt is a good reminder that families and small business in Ohio and across the country can’t afford more spending and more debt – they need more jobs. And Republicans are listening.”

Fortunately, House Republicans have a plan to dig our nation out of this big mess—and that’s more than we can say for the Dems! The House Republican Plan for America’s Job Creators is a pro-growth agenda that encourages job creation and economic growth, and NOT at the taxpayer’s expense: “It will address our economic challenges, foster innovation and investment, and help job creators without raising taxes on working families and small business owners.” Most of all, the plan makes clear the efforts and successes of House Republicans over the last year, all of which have brought our nation closer toward liberating the economy from the “shackles of debt and big government.”

The plan addresses several key issues, five of which are listed below:

1. Reducing regulations to ease the hiring process for small businesses,

2. Reforming tax codes to foster competition and enable Americans to pay lower rates,

3. Paying back our national debt, while simultaneously stopping Washington from spending,

4. Expanding energy production and lowering the cost of gas for Americans,

5. Opening new markets for American-made goods.

While our economy needs more than lessened regulations and expanded energy production to get back on the right track, the plan is at its very least, a strong step in the right direction. If we want to create jobs, what better way than to empower job creators? And as Rep. Fred Upton put it, “Last year’s Recovery Summer fizzled, but with the right policies, our economy can begin to sizzle once again.”

 

By: Blair Hart Newman

 
Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, June 14, 2011 - 12:04

Can we finally put to bed Obama’s promise that “If you like your health plan, you can keep it, the only thing that will change is that you’ll pay less”?

It’s been disproven time and time again. At this point it’s even more ridiculous than the argument that LeBron is better than Jordan. I mean did you see the last game?!? This is the championship series and he scored a whopping 8 points. Eight points! You can’t be the greatest of all time if you only take one shot in the fourth-quarter of a close game!

Similarly, Obama can’t claim his bill allows people to keep their plan when his plan is forcing businesses to stop offering health care coverage. A new study issued by the consulting firm McKinsey & Company finds that 30 percent of employers “will definitely or probably stop offering” coverage after 2014. Sadly, the real number will likely be significantly higher than that because a whopping 60 percent of employers who were more aware of Obamacare’s provisions say they will “pursue some other alternative” to existing plans.

“The shift away from employer-provided health insurance will be vastly greater than expected and will make sense for many companies and lower income workers alike,” says the report in McKinsey Quarterly. “[Our] research points to a radical restructuring of employer-sponsored health benefits”

This makes the Congressional Budget Office’s estimate that nine to 10 million people would switch from employer-sponsored to government-subsidized healthcare look quaint. The reality, according to McKinsey analyst Alissa Meade is much different. Meade says a more realistic estimate is “something in the range of 80 million to 100 million individuals” making the change within the next two years.

The results, in terms of cost to the taxpayer may be astounding. As Galen Institute President Grace-Marie Turner wrote in the Wall Street Journal,

“In a study last year, Douglas Holtz-Eakin, a former director of the Congressional Budget Office, estimated that an additional 35 million workers would be moved out of employer plans and into subsidized coverage, and that this would add about $1 trillion to the total cost of the president’s health law over the next decade. McKinsey’s survey implies that the cost to taxpayers could be significantly more.”

If Holtz-Eakin’s estimates are right and Meade’s prediction comes true that would add $3 trillion to Obamacare’s 10-year pricetag. To get a sense of just how enormous that is consider that as recently as 1990 our entire national debt was around $3 trillion!

That cost does not even factor in the deadweight loss on the economy

It gets a little tricky here, but here’s what I’m talking about. Beginning in 2014, comapanies with more than 50 employees will have to provide insurance or pay the government a fine The McKinsey survey shows that many companies are realizing that paying the fine is cheaper than providing their employees with health care coverage. Typically, money not spent on health care and other perks would be returned to the employees through higher salary, but in this case it’ll just be gobbled up by the government in fines. That means the money which may have otherwise been used to purchase goods in the economy becomes a deadweight loss.

This is not what we were promised. Not only is Obamacare doing nothing to improve the health insurance system, it is actively working to destroy it from within. Americans are struggling to find jobs, now is not the time to threaten them with an additional $3 trillion in debt that will have to be made up in higher taxes. You may have promised that if we like our health care plan we can keep it, well we hate your plan, so why don’t you take it back.


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, June 14, 2011 - 12:03

Washington just can’t help itself. Like a man who just has to have that new big screen TV or a woman who wants, no needs, a new pair of shoes, Congress just likes to spend money.

Given that fact, it wasn’t all that surprising to read former Senate Majority Leader Tom Daschle’s column in the Wall Street Journal which he bashes the idea of a balanced budget amendment (BBA) to the Constitution. The fact is, a requirement to balance the budget scares the dickens out of Democrats because it puts a stopper on the flow of taxpayer cash that they just love to spend.

The fear is almost palpable in Daschle’s article. “The proposed Republican amendment would limit total federal outlays to 18% of our economy,” he whines, “a level of spending last witnessed in 1966.”

Is that really supposed to be an argument against the BBA? What Daschle doesn’t mention is that average tax revenues have averaged around 18% since the end of World War II. The very fact that spending hasn’t been at that level is the entire reason we’ve had deficits 44 out of the last 50 years! It’s the entire reason Washington is faced with a $14.2 trillion deficit and finds itself on the edge of default.

But then again, I wouldn’t expect Mr. Daschle to know too much about the revenue side of things; after all, it was just last year he had to withdraw his nomination for Health and Human Services Secretary for failing to pay income taxes. Whoops.

“Tying the hands of lawmakers” would be a “disaster” writes Daschle, seeming to indicate that leaving them to spend money hand over fist has been something wonderful. But in reality it is anything but wonderful, it is ruining the American Dream for our generation.

Young Americans future grows darker by the day, blotted out by the growing shadow of government and the dimming chances that the social welfare programs will be around for us to enjoy. Washington has provided little hope. In 2011, our budget is more than twice as large as in 2011 and our $1.6 trillion deficit is about the size of the entire federal budget of 1982.

It is not as if spending is some newfangled problem; a fad, or passing trend, that Congress’ will soon reign in. No, Washington’s addiction may be reaching fatal levels, but its substance abuse began long ago. After all, it was Mr. Daschle himself who said,

“In 1993, we made a decision. No more living beyond our means. No more borrow-and-spend and piling up mountains of debts to leave to our children and grandchildren. From that point on, we decided, everything we did had to fit into a new framework of fiscal discipline.”

Nearly 20 years later little has changed other than to have gotten worse. And yet Daschle now says that a BBA would be “an unprecedented abdication” of authority.

No, Mr. Daschle, the real abdication of authority has been Washington’s fiscal malfeasance, its constant desire to promise voters more and neglecting to find ways to pay for it. It has been the willingness of Congress to throw money at problems rather than truly attempting to fix them. Washington has already abdicated its responsibilities to the taxpayers, and now something must be done to reign them in.

Senator’s Jim DeMint and Mike Lee have argued as much, writing that “the only ‘difficult choice’ Congress ever makes is how much more to spend. A balanced budget amendment would ‘tie the hands’ of Republicans and Democrats to finally force them to prioritize spending and stop the debt.”

The only thing I can agree with in Sen. Daschle’s entire piece is that “all of our elected leaders [must] demonstrate genuine fidelity to the Constitution, to the American people, and to future generations.” Unfortunately, the last 50 years has proven Washington incapable of accomplishing those three things. That’s exactly why we must have a balanced budget


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, June 14, 2011 - 12:03

If a tree falls in the forest and no one hears it, does it make a sound? Or how about, if the Belmont Stakes was this weekend and there is not a chance for a Triple Crown, does anyone really watch it? Or, if a boxer who is most famous for biting off someone’s ear is inducted into the hall of fame, but few people care, does it really matter?

For better or worse, boxing and horseracing are quickly becoming irrelevant. Two sports whose best days are far behind them as consumer tastes have largely changed. Although any fading trend, especially ones that were the social events of bygone, and perhaps more glamorous eras, evokes some nostalgia, I’m not terribly sad they’re gone. After all, we’ve still got football, which doesn’t need fantastically ridiculous hats to make news.

The main reason I won’t mourn their decline is that it happened naturally. Consumers wanted something different and they were provided better options. Boxing failed to attract the best athletes and became an inferior product, while horse racing was always a bit of a novelty – more of a reason to throw a party than a spectator event in and of itself.

Natural evolutions in tastes are acceptable, mandated, top-down changes are not. So it is with the incandescent bulb, which will slowly fade from the marketplace, the result of Congress’ slowly turning off their dimmer switch.

Take a stroll down the light bulb aisle and you’ll slowly see the effects of the Energy Independent and Security Act of 2007. The law requires that all light bulbs producing between 310-2600 lumens of light be 30 percent more efficient than current incandescent bulbs.

The laws supporters are claiming that this isn’t a ban, it isn’t even a mandate, it’s just a standard. Of course, for anyone with a brain, such a pedantic argument seems silly. Of course it’s a ban! It’s as if Washington, in a move to reduce obesity, banned any carbonated beverage from containing more than 5 calories per 12 fluid ounces (your average can). You may not call it a ban on regular sodas, but I guarantee all you’d see on your grocery store aisles would be diet drinks.

The thing is, there is no reason for the nanny-state to reach its hands into our homes to screw in their newfangled light bulbs. All they need to do is work better, or be cheaper than our current incandescents.

But they aren’t. They’re more expensive. A comparable fluorescent bulb costs at least six times as much as an incandescent, and “dimmable” (because many new bulbs don’t work with dimmer switchest) LED bulbs can cost upwards of $90.

Despite claims that they last longer, it hasn’t been the experience of most people. In fact, the Energy Savings Trust says that the lifespan of energy-saving bulbs can be reduced by up to 85 percent by switching it on and off. What good is a light bulb that discourages me from turning it on and off? It’s the entire reason we have them.

But perhaps the main reason they haven’t caught on is the dreadful color of light that they emit. Making my home look like a hospital ward is not exactly a style choice I’m in for. So I wasn’t exactly surprised to read a New York Times story telling the story of John Warner, a Washingon restaurateur who has begun hoarding incandescent bulbs.

He has signed a 15-year lease on the place, which is layered in warm woods, with lots of art and photographs and 50 light fixtures, 16 of them designed to hold a 40-watt soft-white G.E. incandescent bulb. By estimating that his lights will be on for 15 hours a day, and factoring in the package’s promise of a 2,000-hour life span per bulb, Mr. Warner has calculated that he will need 600 of these bulbs to last through his lease.

Of course, then there is the issue of disposal. Because the bulbs contain mercury, breaking a bulb turns your home into a mini bio-hazard area where vacuuming, and even running the air conditioner, is actively discouraged by the EPA. The mercury also means you can’t just toss them in the trash, lest groundwater be poisoned, and instead must be taken to a specialty recycling center for disposal.

These are all factors that consumers should be able to take into account. And in fact, it appears most people have. A recent Energy Department estimate finds that 80 percent of residential light sockets continue to use incandescent bulbs. But soon we won’t be able to choose. By government fiat, incandescents are out and CFLs and LEDs are in. The magic of the marketplace is once again subverted, undermined by technocrats who just love to determine what is best for us.

Like boxing and horse racing I would love to bid a fond farewell to the era of the incandescent. I would not have minded permanently dimming the lights on their era, if only an option that existed was worthy of taking its place. Sadly, it is not consumer preference pushing us towards the harsh-white light of CFLS, it’s Washington.


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, June 14, 2011 - 12:01

Liberals are very touchy about their health care plans. Mumble anything about “rationing,” “death panels, or “socialism” and watch in awe as their heads explode in indignation.

Paul Krugman has labeled these concepts “zombie lies” – false beliefs that “just keep coming back, no matter how many times they’re killed by evidence.” Kind of like, well…Paul Krugman.

One of these so-called “zombies” is the notion that it would be an infringement on our freedom of choice if the government restricts what procedures it will pay for. Krugman argues,

“But nobody is proposing that the government deny you the right to have whatever medical care you want at your own expense. We’re only talking about what medical care will be paid by the government And right-wingers, of all people, shouldn’t believe that everyone has the right to have whatever they want, at taxpayers’ expense. The Declaration of Independence did not declare that we have the right to life, liberty, and the all expenses paid pursuit of happiness.”

Besides being an incredible bit of word acrobatics (he manages to actually sound like a fiscal conservative!) Krugman happens to be dead wrong.

As brilliant economist Greg Mankiw points out on his blog, the Center for American Progress (CAP) has introduced a health care plan that would do just that.

The CAP plan was introduced as part of “The Solutions Initiative,” a project by the Peter G. Peterson Foundation, which invited six ideological heavyweights from across the political spectrum to introduce plans to solve the budget deficit. Although there were many good ideas and a few terrible ideas, one part of the CAP plan was downright frightening.

The Center for American Progress’ plan to lower health care costs is simple to the point of being simplistic – they will “aggressively implement” Obamacare. Of course no one really believes that Obamacare will actually lower costs. As we wrote about last week, one of its key cost saving innovations – Accountable Care Organizations – have proven ineffective at bending the cost curve. Likewise, a brand new study suggests that employers will push more of their workers into government-run health care exchanges than previously thought, upping the price tag considerably. The point is, Obamacare was so big, so new, and so risky that it was hard to predict what the results would be. But simple economics, backed up by early results, suggest that it may increase rather than decrease the cost of health care.

Which makes the next part of CAP’s plan that much more terrifying:

“Our failsafe would be triggered if, starting in 2020, total economywide health care expenditures grow at a faster rate than the economy. Should that happen, we would empower the IPAB to extend successful reforms in Medicare and other public programs to insurance plans offered in the health care exchanges and then potentially to all health care plans, such that the target is met. This will ensure that costs are constrained across the health care sector, preventing cost shifting and maintaining access for all.”

Did you catch that italicized bit? If health care costs keep rising under Obamacare then the government, through an unelected panel of bureaucrats, would be granted the power to stop people from purchasing the plan of their choice. It’s like saying that if car companies can’t manage to raise fuel standards then nobody will be allowed to purchase an SUV, regardless of whether or not you can afford the gas.

Not to mention they throw in some phony argument about “successful reforms in Medicare.” In fact, inflation-adjusted Medicare spending per beneficiary has risen more than 400 percent over the last 40 years. It may be better than the private sector, but it sure isn’t deserving of the title “successful.”

Nevertheless, this should scare you. The Center for American Progress, of which Time magazine stated “not since the Heritage Foundation helped guide Ronald Reagan’s transition in 1981 has a single outside group held so much sway,” is actively advocating taking away patient’s ability to choose.

The notion that the government is intruding into our health care decisions is not some “zombie lie” as Krugman would have you believe. Zombies aside, it is still terrifying.


Tierra.Warren
Posted: Monday, June 13, 2011 - 15:11

 

With the 2012 Election less than 17 months away, Obama’s campaign is finally coming to terms with reality: incremental job creation was not enough to help millions of Americans across the country regain employment. While the President has touted the successes of the 2009 stimulus plan and even portrayed the economy far worse off without his help, the economic facts and figures just don’t support his claims. If unemployment hovers around its current rate of 9.1 percent next November, Obama will face re-election with a higher jobless rate than any other post-war president.

In 2009, the Obama Administration promoted the stimulus spending bills as necessary measures to cap unemployment at 8.5 percent. Now, with more than 9 percent of Americans out of work, the predictions of Obama’s economic “experts” clearly did not occur. Moreover, it can be anticipated that the continued loss of membership in President Obama’s “dream team” of advisers will have a negative impact on the economy. It seems that the main purpose of the economic team is insisting to the American people that the Obama plan to recovery is working. As a result, jobs are likely to be a key issue in the upcoming election with Republicans turning to the hard facts and data that disprove the alleged successes of the President’s 2009 stimulus. On the other side, Obama has already begun his sales pitch—peddling the benefits of his 2009 stimulus to the American people. In his second attempt to “turn a negative, in this case the stimulus, into a positive,” Obama will head to North Carolina today with hopes of winning the support of the “former red state turned blue.”

But don’t forget that earlier this month, when President Obama was visiting a Chrysler plant in Toledo, Ohio, he said, “You know, it’s just like if you had a bad illness, if you got hit by a truck, it’s going to take a while for you to mend. And that’s what’s happened to our economy. It’s taking a while to mend.” It’s funny how Obama’s tone has changed recently when talking about jobs. For months we have heard how his economic policies have saved our economy from complete destruction. Let’s be honest, we all know that if we hadn’t elected this savior of a president, then unemployment wouldn’t be a kajillion percent right now.

Sorry Obama, but the American people are smarter than that. We know that when unemployment continues to hover around 9 percent, there just aren’t enough jobs to put Americans back to work and get our country moving forward again. True, the economy will take some time to “mend.” But that poor little kid you mentioned who got hit by a truck? It’s your economic policies, Mr. President, which have thrown that truck in reverse and run over that kid again. The economy can’t survive under your job-killing policies. So please; stop trying to sell your policies to people who aren’t buying them. We now know that while you’re in the White House you won’t be able to fix our economy. But you can, however, stop driving that darn truck and stop contributing to our problems.

 

By: Blair Hart Newman, Michael Lesko, Matthew Hurt, Bronwyn Haltom


Tierra.Warren
Posted: Thursday, June 9, 2011 - 14:54

In the Eleventh Circuit Court of Appeals, a three-judge panel heard nearly 2 ½ hours of arguments regarding the Patient Protection and Affordable Care Act. Yesterday, the twenty-six states that brought about massive lawsuits appeared before the Court in Atlanta to challenge the constitutionality of the Obama-backed health care reform. The three judges, two Clinton appointees and a single Bush 43 appointee, all openly expressed concerns with the reform. Now, people are asking: Can the health care reform law survive the vast constitutional scrutiny?

The only precedent that attorneys defending the law have been able to use is Wickard v. Filburn. The federal government had set limits on wheat production and Filburn was growing more wheat than was allowed by law, even though he argued it was for his own personal use and would not be sold on the market. The Supreme Court however, ruled against Filburn and essentially gave the government the power to regulate economic activity. Unlike the Wickard case, which granted government the power to regulate activity, levying fines on individuals who do not purchase health insurance is regulating inactivity. That is exactly where the judges disagree with the defenders of this law, that the government cannot regulate this inactivity.

Among the twenty-six states arguing that “the requirement that states expand Medicaid coverage amounts to compulsion and coercion of the states, in violation of the 10th Amendment to the Constitution,” Florida’s personal case shocked Americans most as it revealed Obama’s intention to raise taxes to fund his program. In Florida v. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, a lawyer for the Obama Administration revealed that the bill increases taxes—a complete contradiction to what Obama previously maintained. With approximately 450 components comprising ObamaCare, it really does not come as a surprise that the President would try to slip new taxes into the bill. But come on Obama, did you really think we wouldn’t notice?

If we truly live in a free country, why is the government allowed to mandate that we purchase unwanted healthcare? Bush appointee, Judge Joel Dubina, questioned: “If we uphold the individual mandate in this case, are there any limits on congressional power?” The two Clinton appointees, Judges Frank Hull and Stanley Marcus, also expressed concerns: “The law went too far in mandating that states expand various Medicare health coverage requirements.”

Let’s all remember, a judge in Florida ruled the entire bill unconstitutional because, according to him, the bill could not stand without the healthcare mandate. The Democrats were so caught up in all the backroom deals that helped create this law that they failed to include a proper severability clause so that if the mandate is declared unconstitutional, the rest of the law can still stand. If the Democrats can’t even follow that simple procedure, do we really trust them to take over our healthcare?

 

By: Bronwyn Haltom, Matthew Hurt, Blair Hart Newman


Tierra.Warren
Posted: Wednesday, June 8, 2011 - 16:00

While our parents’ generation believed their financial futures were secure when they gave away a percentage of their weekly paychecks, that same sense of security no longer comforts our generation. As young Americans see money taken from their paychecks to fund entitlements, they understand the disappointing truth: they will probably never see that money again. In the years to come, Social Security faces a big problem as baby boomers leave the workforce. Our generation will have to provide for this surplus of retirees. According to Federal Reserve Chair, Ben Bernanke:

“To avoid large and unsustainable budget deficits… the nation must choose among higher taxes, modifications to entitlement programs such as Social Security and Medicare, less spending on everything else from education to defense, or some combination of the above.”

Although economists warned politicians that by 2024 Social Security would default into bankruptcy, there are disagreements over how to prevent this. Many leading Democrats argue that initiating a tax increase is the solution, but history shows that raising taxes for Social Security will greatly damage the economy. According to Bloomberg,after the Great Depression the economy was steadily growing. That is, until new taxes were instated to fund Social Security.

In 1937, leading economist George Soule, stated: "Certainly it is unjust to make workers pay for their future security against unemployment and old age by losing their jobs now.  And that is precisely the result that the present social-security (sic) program is bringing about." Even a key White House advisor to President Franklin Delano Roosevelt, Randolph Paul, agreed that increasing taxes harmed the economy by taking away money that otherwise would have likely been privately invested into the economy. Now, Democrats continue to argue for an even greater tax increase to meet the needs of Social Security—a proposition that will drastically slow economic growth. As College Republicans, we certainly do not want to put even more money into a fund from which we will be unable collect in our later years.

Aside from instituting a new tax on wages above $106,800, (currently exempt from additional Social Security taxes) the Democrats have yet to put forth a comprehensive plan to fix the government’s ever-expanding deficit. This includes failing to introduce a plan to save Social Security. Granted, the Democrats had complete control of Congress and the White House for two years and couldn’t even pass a budget, so we can’t expect much out of them. One fact still remains: they may have called the Republicans “the party of no,” but the Democrats are “the party of we don’t know.”

Despite Democratic inability to propose a solution to Social Security, Republicans have already made great strides in developing successful and more efficient ways to manage the crisis. On Friday, House Republicans proposed a new Social Security reform. The bill, introduced by Congressman Pete Sessions (R-TX), would allow employees to transfer 6.2 percent of their earnings into a personal account- referred to as Savings Account for Every American (SAFE). Further, workers would be able to make tax-free deposits into their personal SAFE funds for later usage during retirement. On the other hand, the bill also allows employees to continue with the existing Social Security program, should they so desire.

Critics of this legislation assert that if such a program were implemented, Social Security funds might run dry as workers could pick and choose where their post- retirement funds are stashed. However, Rep. Sessions’s bill provides for both the current Social Security system and the revamped SAFE account. Under Sessions’s plan, employers would make contributions to Social Security that would match those distributed to an individual employee’s SAFE account. Only after 15 years could an employer deposit solely to a private SAFE fund.

Consider this: A hallmark of the American Dream is economic freedom. Rep. Sessions’s proposal would give us more control over our earnings and financial future. Under this reform, we would be saving and spending our own money rather than simply subsidizing the retirement of others. As employees, we have a right to the money we earn and should be able to spend and invest it as we see fit.

Nevertheless, Republicans are walking a potentially dangerous political route by trying to reform Social Security, as it is often unpopular among the American public. However, we should take responsibility for our financial future now, instead of when it is too late. We would not want to pass up an opportunity to reform the program and later regret it when the time comes for us to collect our benefits. If we save Social Security, our generation might actually have a future return on its modern investment.

 

By: Bronwyn Haltom, Matthew Hurt, Blair Hart Newman, Lisa Rafdal


Tierra.Warren
Posted: Wednesday, June 8, 2011 - 15:59

 

While our parents’ generation believed their financial futures were secure when they gave away a percentage of their weekly paychecks, that same sense of security no longer comforts our generation. As young Americans see money taken from their paychecks to fund entitlements, they understand the disappointing truth: they will probably never see that money again. In the years to come, Social Security faces a big problem as baby boomers leave the workforce. Our generation will have to provide for this surplus of retirees. According to Federal Reserve Chair, Ben Bernanke:

           

“To avoid large and unsustainable budget deficits… the nation must choose among higher taxes, modifications to entitlement programs such as Social Security and Medicare, less spending on everything else from education to defense, or some combination of the above.”

 

Although economists warned politicians that by 2024 Social Security would default into bankruptcy, there are disagreements over how to prevent this. Many leading Democrats argue that initiating a tax increase is the solution, but history shows that raising taxes for Social Security will greatly damage the economy. According to Bloomberg,after the Great Depression the economy was steadily growing. That is, until new taxes were instated to fund Social Security.

 

In 1937, leading economist George Soule, stated: "Certainly it is unjust to make workers pay for their future security against unemployment and old age by losing their jobs now.  And that is precisely the result that the present social-security (sic) program is bringing about." Even a key White House advisor to President Franklin Delano Roosevelt, Randolph Paul, agreed that increasing taxes harmed the economy by taking away money that otherwise would have likely been privately invested into the economy. Now, Democrats continue to argue for an even greater tax increase to meet the needs of Social Security—a proposition that will drastically slow economic growth. As College Republicans, we certainly do not want to put even more money into a fund from which we will be unable collect in our later years.

 

Aside from instituting a new tax on wages above $106,800, (currently exempt from additional Social Security taxes) the Democrats have yet to put forth a comprehensive plan to fix the government’s ever-expanding deficit. This includes failing to introduce a plan to save Social Security. Granted, the Democrats had complete control of Congress and the White House for two years and couldn’t even pass a budget, so we can’t expect much out of them. One fact still remains: they may have called the Republicans “the party of no,” but the Democrats are “the party of we don’t know.”

 

            Despite Democratic inability to propose a solution to Social Security, Republicans have already made great strides in developing successful and more efficient ways to manage the crisis. On Friday, House Republicans proposed a new Social Security reform. The bill, introduced by Congressman Pete Sessions (R-TX), would allow employees to transfer 6.2 percent of their earnings into a personal account- referred to as Savings Account for Every American (SAFE). Further, workers would be able to make tax-free deposits into their personal SAFE funds for later usage during retirement. On the other hand, the bill also allows employees to continue with the existing Social Security program, should they so desire.

Critics of this legislation assert that if such a program were implemented, Social Security funds might run dry as workers could pick and choose where their post- retirement funds are stashed. However, Rep. Sessions’s bill provides for both the current Social Security system and the revamped SAFE account. Under Sessions’s plan, employers would make contributions to Social Security that would match those distributed to an individual employee’s SAFE account. Only after 15 years could an employer deposit solely to a private SAFE fund.

 

Consider this: A hallmark of the American Dream is economic freedom. Rep. Sessions’s proposal would give us more control over our earnings and financial future. Under this reform, we would be saving and spending our own money rather than simply subsidizing the retirement of others. As employees, we have a right to the money we earn and should be able to spend and invest it as we see fit.

 

Nevertheless, Republicans are walking a potentially dangerous political route by trying to reform Social Security, as it is often unpopular among the American public. However, we should take responsibility for our financial future now, instead of when it is too late. We would not want to pass up an opportunity to reform the program and later regret it when the time comes for us to collect our benefits. If we save Social Security, our generation might actually have a future return on its modern investment.

 

By: Bronwyn Haltom, Matthew Hurt, Blair Hart Newman, Lisa Rafdal


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, June 7, 2011 - 19:33

From the very beginning, Obamacare has been sold to us as something that it is not. We were told that its goal was to bend the cost curve when in reality its focus was on increasing coverage. We were told it would reduce the deficit, when in fact it adds trillions to it. We were told it would fundamentally change Medicare, when all it really did was chop an imaginary $600 billion from its balance sheet. But although most of it was a mirage, there did appear to be a small oasis sitting in the middle, something that may really be an idea to build off of. That idea was creating accountable care organizations (ACOs) as a way for hospitals to band together, coordinate care and cut costs. Unfortunately, even this last hope for savings appears dashed.

The idea behind ACOs is so innocuous, so obvious, so, well, simple that it’s amazing that it could be considered the secret weapon to battle health care costs. Despite the fancy name, straight out of the bureaucrat’s handbook of making straightforward things sound complex, all accountable care organizations really are is a group of doctors and nurses that talk to each other (gasp!).

The idea behind this radical concept is that when doctors share information they can reduce duplication, improve diagnoses, and streamline the patient’s travel through the health care maze. And it may have worked too, if only the government hadn’t gotten their grubby little hands on the idea.

The government is like Chris Farley’s character in Tommy Boy, who has the best of intentions and tries so hard to be the perfect salesman. But in the end, his obsession with succeeding sabotages his ability to succeed.

 

Washington is the exact same way, only the result is immensely less humorous. In fact, the government’s history with ACOs is long and disastrous. Over the past several decades, Medicare has actually financially discouraged coordination of care. According to a report compiled by the Medicare Payment Advisory Commission, “when an entity makes improvements that decrease overall health care costs, often the resulting savings do not go to the entity that made the investment. [Instead] the savings would go to the Medicare program.”

Now, the government says it has seen the light! They’ve had their hallelujah moment and they’re ready to change. But their response to the problem shows their just as clueless as ever.

The problem was, and has always been, government’s intrusion in a transaction that should have been governed by market forces. And yet their “solution” is to go place more government into the mix.

Michael Cannon, the Director of Health Policy Studies at Cato, breaks down the problem,

Medicare’s idea of encouragement is this: If doctors and hospitals invest substantial resources to form an ACO, and better care coordination reduces the amount they bill Medicare, then the ACO will get to keep part of the savings.

“Here’s a flash for the policy wonks pushing ACOs,” writes industry expert Robert Laszewski. “They only work if the provider gets paid less for the same patient population. Why would they be dumb enough to voluntarily accept that outcome?”

Results from an experiment with ACOs, begin by the Bush Administration (what’s that you were saying about Republicans having no healthcare ideas?), bear out Cannon’s point. Gail Wilenksy, who ran the Medicare program, told the Washington Post that the results of the study, which showed very little cost containment, “astounding.” She said the teams of doctors which had worked together for a long time “should have blown it out of the water. . . If it was this tough for this group that I had just assumed would be hands-down winners, what does it say for groups that don’t have a long history of coming together?”

The answer to the problem is as obvious as ACOs – get government out of the way. Stop savings from flowing to Medicare and allow them to flow to doctors. Otherwise there is simply no incentive to participate. Allow health care consumers to choose among providers, so that they can comparison shop in quality, cost, and efficiency. Finally, stop with this ridiculous fee-for-service model that essentially rewards overconsumption.

Of course that entire paragraph can be boiled to four words, the takeaway from this whole ACO debacle: LET THE MARKETS WORK. Sadly, Obamacare is just the opposite of the markets – it’s government intervention – a force capable of turning ven the best of ideas into worthless garbage.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, June 7, 2011 - 19:32

It’s been a rough week for the economy. We’re talkin’ rough. Take a look at just some of the stories that came across my newsfeed today:

  • “Reports Wednesday on manufacturing and company hiring were so weak that many economists immediately downgraded their forecasts for Friday’s jobs report” – ABC News
  • “Stocks were slugging on Thursday’s opening after tumbling hard Wednesday with the Dow Jones industrial average dropping at its sharpest pace since June and the Standard & Poor’s 500 index showing its steepest decline since August” – Washington Post
  • “The prices of single-family homes have dropped to their lowest level since 2009, creating a “double dip” as values fell below where they were when the housing market collapsed” – Washington Post
  • “Private businesses added 38,000 jobs in May, a sign that job growth may have hit a sluggish patch” – The Hill

A lot of this isn’t Washington’s fault. All of Obama’s hot air still would have never been enough to stop the hurricanes, tornadoes, and floods that has had a serious economic impact. Nobody could have predicted the tsunami that put Japan under more water than the average American homeowner. And it’s nobody’s fault that investors are getting some serious jitters over Greece’s looming default. After all, those clowns’ debt was enough to make even the leftiest of liberals blush.

Nevertheless, Obama is catching a lot of the blame. And just like LeBron James needs to win the NBA Championship to shake his “villain” persona, Obama needs to do something to shake voters’ brewing antipathy. Many liberals at this point are throwing up their hands and saying “What do you want him to do?!? You Republicans won’t let him spend anymore money!”

Darn right we won’t. We’ve tried that. It turns that stimulus is about as good at fixing the economy as Jim Tressel is at cheating.

The fact is, our government doesn’t need to spend any more of our money in order to pull us out of the recession, they just need to clear a path for more money to be made. How you ask? By passing the three pending free trade agreements with Colombia, Panama, and South Korea.

Now before you scoff at the thought that these relatively small countries hold the keys to our economic recovery, hear me out. Over the past 25 years, the United States has entered into free trade agreements with 17 countries, which in total represent just 7.5 percent of global GDP. But free trade can make big markets out of small economies. In fact, those 17 countries bought 40 percent of U.S. exports in 2009!

Still not buying it huh? Alright, well consider that the U.S. International Trade Commission estimated that passage of a free trade agreement with South Korea alone would increase GDP by $11 billion annually and add 70,000 U.S. jobs. The Colombia deal is expected to add another $4 billion to GDP, not to mention put an end to the $3.5 billion in tariffs collected by Colombia since the agreement was signed. And it never hurts to have great trade ties with Panama, you know, with their canal and all (which I hear is a great way to get to the Chinese market).

Will passing these deals immediately cause our problems to recede faster than Prince William’s hairline? No. This is not a magic bullet, a cure-all, or philosopher’s stone (and no, Harry Potter fans, I’m talking in the alchemical sense). But it is something. And something is something we haven’t had very much of lately. The closest things to a jobs bill that has made it through the Democrat-held Senate is, well, nothing.

These agreements have already been negotiated and approved – some of them years ago – but can’t be acted upon until Obama sends them to Congress. So c’mon Mr. President. Do us all a solid. Stop playing politics with jobs and economic growth. Stop demanding concessions for labor unions in return for sending the free trade agreements to Congress. If you don’t want to see more weeks like this one, with headlines filled with economic doom and gloom, it’s time we do something about it.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, June 7, 2011 - 19:32

We’ve entered double-dip territory. And while that may sound good thing at say, Ben and Jerry’s, it is awful, terrible, no good, very bad news for the housing market.

The S&P/Case-Shiller house price index fell by 4.2 percent in the first quarter of 2011. Apparently, the housing market fell apart faster than the Miami Heat in the fourth quarter of Thursday’s NBA Finals game.

But if you, like me, have no idea real concept of what the S&P/Case-Shiller index means, let me put it in simpler terms – housing prices are now 33 percent below their 2006 peak. That represents a larger drop than the Great Depression. The Great Depression!

The problem figures to get worse before it gets better. Around 2.25 million homes are now in foreclosure and 1.8 million mortgages are more than 90 days past due. According to the New York Post, 12 million homes are mortgaged for more than they are worth, a figure sure to rise as prices continue to fall.

Why are we seeing such a big dip now? After all, the recovery isn’t exactly going as planned, but that’s no reason for housing prices to fall. One of the main reasons is the government’s wrongheaded housing “stimulus” in the form of the homebuyers tax credit.

The tax credit offered $8,000 dollars to first time home buyers and $6,500 to current home owners. The problems were easy to see. Although the program may have attracted several buyers who were not otherwise thinking of buying a home, it mainly benefited those who were going to make the purchase anyways. The result was a huge cash windfall for a lot of people, a huge waste of money, and worst of all – a net harm to the recovery.

This somewhat confusing result is explained by Economics 21, on online economics think-tank,

[B]y inducing prospective buyers to move purchases forward to take advantage of the credit, the tax credit spared sellers from having to lower prices to generate sales. Eventually, those first-time buyers who were intending to buy had done so, which necessitated expanding the credit’s reach to cover all homebuyers to maintain buying activity. At that point, so many sales have already been transferred forward in time that maintaining current price and sales activity levels would have required making available an even more generous tax credit to an even greater universe of taxpayers. Congress decided against further extensions and expansions, resulting in the inevitable downturn in prices and transactions we are currently witnessing.

In other words, all Washington accomplished was condensing years and years worth of purchases into the span of a few months as people jumped at the opportunity to take advantage of free money. While it may have made for a great few months, it has largely sapped the strength of today’s housing market. Now, with the market flooded with foreclosed upon houses, in addition to normal turnover, there are simply no buyers. An excess of supply combined with a dearth in demand has led to the ugly market we’re seeing now.

This sad fable reinforces a moral that conservatives already knew – government is not the solution to our problems; government is the problem. The trouble is that Washington is so politically attuned to the public that they feel the need to act quickly in every situation. This rush to act always leads to side-effects that are significantly worse than the cure.

Markets work, if we let them. Unfortunately, Washington’s meddling inevitably disrupts supply or demand, doing more to delay a recovery than speed it up. So as our economic wounds attempt to heal themselves, as the markets work, albeit slowly, to repair itself, we hope that Washington does nothing to restrain it. Despite their best of intentions, government overreaction will only push us ever closer to the dreaded double-dip.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, June 7, 2011 - 19:31

For sports fans the prospect of an NFL lockout is maddening. It just seems absurd that as millions of Americans struggle paycheck to paycheck in order to make ends meet, that we can’t even watch a football game because millionaires and billionaires can’t decide on how to split up the vast pool of cash.

That’s a union battle where both sides are winners no matter what the outcome. But across the country, the fight between public-sector employee unions and the average taxpayers are continuing to boil over. Wisconsin may have dominated the headlines, but it appears the next front is going to be in Ohio, where organized labor is spending $25 million in an effort to repeal a state law that reconfigured union benefits.

Ohio, like many states, is in a world of financial trouble. The state is facing an $8 billion budget gap over the next two years with not much hope of a turnaround on the horizon. One of the prime long-term problems is the severe underfunding of state and local employees’ pensions. A recent study by the Pew Center on the States found that Ohio’s pension system is the fifth most underfunded, with $20 billion in looming debt. With such huge budget gaps looming large, state legislators were searching for savings wherever they could. Given that government employee pensions and wages had grown dramatically over the preceding decade, far outpacing the private sector, that seemed to be a good place to start.

In a rust-belt state that topped out at 11 percent unemployment, the number of government employees earning more than $100,000 continued its steep rise. As the chart below shows, in 2001 there were less than 300 public employees who made more than $100,000, today there are more than 1,800 – a 600 percent increase in 6 years!

 

Moreover, the sky-high salaries haven’t been concentrated at the top. The nonpartisan Buckeye Institute has calculated that the median government worker in Ohio earns 24.6 percent more than his or her private sector counterparty. The gap is further exacerbated through a lush compensation package in which they only have to pay 17 percent of their health care costs (versus 23 percent in the private sector) and the government chips in 14 percent of pension costs (versus 5 percent in the private sector. Simply amending these benefit levels to reflect the private sector would save the state of Ohio more than $330 million annually!

While organized labor is marshalling their ranks and raising millions of dollars in an effort to maintain their lavish pensions, average taxpayers must continue to highlight the benefits of a right-to-work economy. The facts are laid bare in a 2008 Wall Street Journal editorial comparing Ohio, a heavily unionized state, with Texas, the preeminent right to work state. The results are astounding.

In the decade prior to the recession, Texas gained more than 1.6 million jobs while Ohio lost more than 10,000. Partially as a result, Texas gained 667,000 in state population while Ohio lost 362,000. Texas residents also saw enormous per capita income growth of 55 percent, while Ohio rose at a slower 43 percent.

Texas is not the only beneficiary of right-to-work laws. Check out these statistics courtesy of Senator Jim DeMint:

  • From 1993-2009 private sector employment increased 37.9 percent in right-to-work states but only 19.6 percent in forced-union states
  • Individual income grew 39.5 percent in right-to-work states compared to 35.7 percent in others
  • Right to work states experienced a net increase of 497,041 new private sector businesses – 46 percent more than the 339,834 businesses in forced-union states

The economic case is open and shut. State governments should do whatever they can to model themselves on right-to-work states, not only as a means of reducing their budget deficit but for kick-starting a sagging economy. The only thing crazier than the NFL unions arguing how best to divvy up billions of dollars is state governments failing to reap the rewards of right-to-work laws.


Tierra.Warren
Posted: Tuesday, June 7, 2011 - 15:21

The bin Laden honeymoon period is over, and unfortunately for President Obama, so are his high approval ratings. Late Monday night, the Washington Post and ABC News released their most recent poll revealing that the inflated approval ratings have come to a close, perhaps earlier than the President intended.

In the wake of bin Laden’s death, 56 percent of Americans approved of Obama’s job performance, and only 38 percent disapproved, according to a poll conducted by the Pew Research Center for the People & the Press, and the Washington Post. In a poll conducted just last week, the Washington Post and ABC News reported that Obama’s job approval had fallen to 47 percent and his job disapproval had jumped to a high 49 percent.

In terms of the President’s work on the economy, disapproval ratings have ricocheted to an all time high, 59 percent, as growing concerns of the economic crisis face the American people. In handling the deficit, President Obama’s ratings are even worse, with 61 percent of Americans disapproving, and only 33 percent approving.

Of the surveyed Americans, 89 percent voiced that the economy was in bad shape, and a striking 57 percent felt that the recovery had not yet begun even! Two-thirds also felt the country was headed on the wrong track. And to top it all off, top White House economist Austan Goolsbee announced yesterday that he was stepping down from his position, during a time in which more and more indications of a weakening economy continue to surface.

Young voter support of President Obama is also waning. While Obama was once the popular choice among America’s college students, his ratings have dropped to 56 percent, a 10 percent decline compared to the 2008 exit polls, according to the National Journal's Ronald Brownstein report. While this rate is actually higher than the national average, it should not make or break the 2012 election if voter turnout among young adults looms around the 49 percent turnout in 2008, as reported by the Census Bureau.

So what else do the numbers mean in terms of the upcoming 2012 election? According to Talking Points Memo, “As a whole, the survey shows broad discontent with the pace of the economic recovery, and it serves as a reminder that the economy's health will be a major factor heading into next year's elections.” While Americans were far more content with President Obama in the aftermath of bin Laden’s death, the latest poll readings show that this honeymoon period is over, and the President will have to work hard to bring up his numbers if he hopes to be reelected in 2012. For now, it is important that Republicans do not and underestimate the President’s ability to strike back, despite his low approval ratings. We must instead, keep our eyes on the prize: winning back Washington!

By: Blair Hart Newman


Tierra.Warren
Posted: Tuesday, June 7, 2011 - 14:33

 

75 Congressional Republican freshmen signed U.S. Representative Diane Black’s (R-TN) letter to President Obama, asking him to "stop the political rhetoric" in an attempt to find real solutions to our pending debt crisis. The letter, a response to a sit-down with the Treasury Secretary held with the House freshmen in the Capitol last week, requests a specific plan to reduce debt and reform entitlements before the debt ceiling negotiation deadline of August 2.

The question of the debt ceiling has plagued policymakers since the inauguration of the 112th congress.  According to the US Treasury, the debt limit must be raised by August, otherwise the government will have to suspend about 40 percent of all payments. Last week Senator Harry Reid (D-NV) forced a vote to reject House Republicans’ 2012 budget, defeating it 57-40 in the Senate. However, Senate Democrats have yet to introduce a budget of their own. Refusal to introduce a “plan b” is a source of contention with GOP freshman. Many feel President Obama is sitting “in the backseat” of the debate, unwilling to provide a better alternative plan.

“After meeting with both President Obama and Treasury Secretary Geithner this week, I and my colleagues are not confident that the administration has a credible plan to reduce our debt, so it’s time to demand one,” Black said in a statement accompanying the letter.

“In light of now multiple credit ratings agencies threatening to downgrade American bonds without significant long-term steps toward deficit reduction, it is time for the president to stop sitting on the sidelines of this debate.”

The letter notes the President's remarks at the Republican Retreat last year, where he said, "At what point can we have a serious conversation about budget and debt in which we're not simply trying to position ourselves politically?"

It is clear that the meeting has left the GOP freshman, who campaigned on the promises of fiscal stability and not raising the debt ceiling, frustrated. Many complained that Secretary Geithner argued for revenue increases in the form of tax hikes. Earlier that week, the GOP conference met with President Obama, and also voted overwhelmingly to reject a clean debt ceiling hike.

Whether President Obama will listen or continue to play political theatre until August 2, remains to be seen.

 

By: Kelsey Callahan


Tierra.Warren
Posted: Monday, June 6, 2011 - 14:22

On Friday, the United States Labor Department’s Bureau of Labor Statistics released its Employment Situation Report, sparking heated debates among the politically involved, and aiming a great deal of criticism at the White House. While Obama has notably talked up the successes of his plan to foster confidence, the report clearly indicated quite the problematic economic reality: the economy is backsliding, higher unemployment rates face our nation, and growth has slowed. Yet despite the most recent report and its indication that the recovery is wavering, California Democrat and House Minority Leader Nancy Pelosi defended the President’s economic position.

The Labor Department’s report calculated that in May 2011, the unemployment rate climbed from 9.0 percent to 9.1 percent, the number of unemployed persons rose from 13.7 million to 13.9 million, and to top it off, the nation added only a mere 54,000 jobs. According to an evaluation of the report published in The Examiner, aside from professional and business services, healthcare, and mining, there was little change in other major private-sector industries and local government employment continued to decline with the loss of 28,000 jobs.

On CBS’s “Face the Nation,” Pelosi acknowledged that the latest unemployment figures were“very disturbing.” So why would the House Minority Leader defend the failing policies of the Obama administration? Even more puzzling is the fact that in 2008, Pelosi complained about the economy under the Bush administration, citing that the President’s policies had “failed our country’s middle class.” At that time, the unemployment rate stood at a “mere” 5 percent! Yet according to Pelosi, the economic situation would be far worse had Obama not taken action during the first years of his presidency. It is for that reason she supported and continues to support the policies of the Obama administration.

“He pulled us from the brink of a financial crisis, an economic crisis, and now we have to dig us out of a deep debt, and we also have to make it clear that we’re not getting into this situation again.”

Austan Goolsbee, chairman of the Council of Economic Advisers, sided with Pelosi on the issue and suggested that the data from May 2011 signifies a “bump on the road to recovery,”and when looking at the bigger picture, “the economy has improved dramatically over the past two years.” Yet consumer confidence is deteriorating, manufacturing growth is slowing and home prices are in a confirmed double-dip. Additionally, CNN Money reports that the Dow Jones Industrial Average dropped almost 5% in the past month! It’s a trend that should be setting off alarm bells at Obama’s 2012 campaign headquarters.

 

By: Blair Hart Newman


Tierra.Warren
Posted: Wednesday, June 1, 2011 - 12:24

President Obama’s plan for economic recovery celebrates its two-year anniversary this month, leaving individuals across the nation to determine for themselves how, if at all, the national economy has improved since the administration’s reforms first took off. All across the nation, Americans are asking the question: “Are we really better off than we were two years ago?” The general consensus is NO.

In February 2009, Obama ensured the American public that his $830 billion stimulus plan would spark “a new wave of innovation, activity and construction” and also “ignite spending by business and consumers.” If left with any doubts of Obama’s ability to turn the economy around, his continuous promises about the growing state of the economy most certainly should have alleviated concerns of the skeptical. In June 2010, President Obama informed Americans that the plan was “well under way” and that it was “getting stronger by the day.” It is now June 2011 and reportedly, many Americans have not felt the effects of Obama’s economic recovery.

Why? Putting the stock market and corporate profits aside, few places have shown much improvement. In terms of employment, the number of people with jobs has shown only a slight change since June 2009: +0.4%. While the rate of unemployment has declined slightly, the number of long-term unemployed Americans (defined as individuals who have been unemployed for 15 or more consecutive weeks) has jumped up a third, and the currentaverage length of unemployment is 38 weeks! In addition, while house prices have fallen (reaching their lowest level this March since April 2009) CNN reports that “weak sales continue to plague the housing market.” Put simply, while many homes are being offered at staggeringly low prices, high unemployment combined with stricter lending standards has made it harder, if not impossible, for some families to purchase homes. Based on data from the National Association of Realtors, Bloomberg reports:

“Sales of previously owned homes, based on closings, fell 0.8 percent in April to a 5.05 million rate, with demand for distressed properties accounting for 37 percent of the total.”

With high unemployment and a housing market still in disarray, it’s no wonder that Americans fail to see the meager effects of Obama’s economic recovery plan! Now, after 24 months, little improvement can be seen outside of the stock market and corporate profits. But even so, while the Dow Jones Industrial Average is now at its highest level in three years, Americans have not felt the growing wealth of stock as they face an extraordinarily tough job market! According to CNN, the market’s rally was simply based on an assumption that the economic recovery would gain momentum in 2011 and boost jobs (which it has yet to do). And while corporate profits have soared, companies have increased their layoffs to please shareholders, which in turn, contributed a great deal to the unemployment problem.

The failure of the Obama Administration to grow and recover the economy will certainly play a role in the 2012 election. It will offer the Republicans an opportunity to propose more efficient, effective and realistic plans for restoration and growth. We’ll just have to wait and see how the Grand Old Party tackles this issue next November!

By: Blair Hart Newman

 

 


Zach.Howell
Posted: Wednesday, June 1, 2011 - 09:34

The Iceman Cometh, the inspiration for our title, is a decidedly depressing play. It’s set it an old Greenwich Village saloon populated by lowlifes of every sort. The group of men who serve as the focus of the plot spend their lives attempting to drown their sorrows in the company of a good stiff drink. Their only hope in the world is the anticipation of a visit by a traveling salesman, Theodore Hickman, who often turns up at the saloon after a sales trip and becomes the life of a party.

But when Hickey finally arrives it becomes clear he’s a changed man. He has become a convert, finding salvation in places decidedly north of the bottom of a bottle of whiskey.

President Obama is our Hickey. We, the struggling masses, looked on with doe-eyed anticipation that he would lead our nation out of its doldrums and back toward prosperity. Displaying our naïveté, we expected him to accomplish it through sheer force of will and charisma.

What we received was decidedly not what was advertised. We hoped that Obama would bring change to the way Washington worked. That it would be smaller, more efficient, and spend less of our money. Instead, government continues to grow larger, and the only change that appears imminent is higher taxes.

The taxman cometh. And he cometh with a vengeance.

As economic writer and policy analyst Stephen Moore wrote in this week’s Wall Street Journal,

If the Democrats’ millionaire surtax were to happen—and were added to other tax increases already enacted last year and other leading tax hike ideas on the table this year—this could leave the U.S. with a combined federal and state top tax rate on earnings of 62%. That’s more than double the highest federal marginal rate of 28% when President Reagan left office in 1989. Welcome back to the 1970s.

How does he arrive at that astounding figure?

Well first you take today’s top income tax rate of 35 percent, then you:

  • Remove the Bush-era tax policies which lowered the rates for almost all tax brackets
  • Reinstate the “personal exemption phase-out” which prevents certain people from taking itemized deductions
  • Add Medicare payroll taxes which contain no wage cap
  • Factor in the new 0.9 percent surtax on anyone with any family earning more $250,000 contained in Obamacare
  • Add in the President’s proposal to eliminate the income ceiling in the Social Security tax
  • Insert a new 3 percent millionaire surtax that has been proposed by Democrats

Put it all together and you have a tax rate north of 60 percent, and that doesn’t even include the White House’s plan to dramatically raise taxes on investment income.

This enormous tax burden poses a real threat to economic growth. People respond to incentives. The higher the marginal tax rate (the tax on the last dollar of income earned) the lower the incentive to increase productivity, raise investment, or engage in entrepreneurial activity.

This has been proven in study after study. Economist Robert Barro found that the world’s twenty fastest growing economies either all had low marginal rates or cut their rates in half prior to 2002. After surveying many studies Karabegovic found that, “The evidence from economic research indicates that . . . high and increasing marginal taxes have serious negative consequences on economic growth, labor supply and capital formation.” Nobel Laureate Robert Lucas found that high marginal tax rates on capital dramatically reduce economic growth by reducing the stock of capital. There’s plenty more, but I think you get the point.

The Taxman Cometh, not to bring us good news or kick off the economic boom needed to get this country back on track, but to tell us the sobering fact that he intends to raise taxes. Like the characters in the famous play, the Taxman’s arrival is enough to drive me to the drink.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Wednesday, June 1, 2011 - 09:34

Like almost everyone, I ponied up the $10 to see Hangover II over the weekend. As with so many summer movies, I went with lowered expectations, hoping for just pure schlock entertainment, and yet still left the theater feeling less than satisfied.

I get it. The summer is not Oscar season. Nobody is gaining or losing tons of weight for a role. There are no plots examining gender identity, drug abuse, or growing up in a broken home. The closest thing you get to a period piece is Pirates of the Caribbean and the only wars you are likely to see will involve robots or aliens. It’s pure dumbed-down entertainment, and I know that going in, but I still can’t help feeling let down.

It was much the same emotion as when I saw the recently released economic numbers. I knew they were not going to be good, but dang, did they have to be this bad?

According to the Commerce Department, gross domestic product (GDP) grew at an annual rate of 1.8 percent in the first quarter. Not only is that well below the 3.1 percent pace from the last three months of 2010, that’s considerably less than the 2.2 percent growth that many experts expected.

Now I learn that even that measly figure, the movie equivalent of say, Transformers 3: Dark Side of the Moon (don’t even try and argue with me that this will be good), is actually more like Freddie Got Fingered (possibly the worst movie evah). Business Insider explains the reason for the hearty downgrade:

The way the government calculates real GDP is to start with nominal GDP–the actual change in the output of the economy as measured by adding up all the actual sales prices (“nominal”)–and then “deflating” this number by subtracting an estimated inflation rate. Thus, the government backs into the real GDP growth number, starting with nominal prices and then adjusting for inflation.

Well, the “GDP deflater” the government is using right now–the estimated rate of inflation–is only 1.9%. As anyone who has been to a supermarket of gas station recently can attest, this assumption is preposterously low.

The government’s actual estimate of quarter one inflation was 5.7 percent, not 1.9 percent. According to Business Insider’s calculations, using this inflation number you see that first quarter GDP “growth” was actually -1.82 percent.

Negative! This is a recovery for goodness sakes! We’re supposed to be seeing economic growth numbers north of 5 percent, certainly nothing less than that, and in the name of all things holy, not negative. That just seems downright impossible. It’s like bringing Steven Spielberg, George Lucas, and Harrison Ford back to make Indiana Jones 4 and finding a way to screw it up. Oh wait, that’s not impossible, it already happened.

For comparison’s sake let’s take a look at another director, Ronald Reagan, aka the Scorcese of economic recoveries. After the end of the 1981-82 recession economic growth shot to as high as 9.3 percent, spent the next few quarters hovering around 8 percent, and then settled back into a normal rhythm of around 4 percent annual growth. By contrast Obama – aka the Michael Bay of presidents (loud, flashy, often pretty, but always terrible) – has eked out one quarter of 5 percent growth, and then averaged around 2.5 percent growth.

Different results are matched by contrasting strategies. Reagan pushed spending restraint, Obama massively increaesed spending; Reagan deregulated entire industries, Obama has overseen massive regulatory expansions; and Reagan focused on free markets, while Obama continues to sit on three pending free trade agreements.

Fortunately, the House Republicans just released a jobs plan, including great ideas like lowering the corporate tax rate and reducing government regulations. But it will take the White House and the Senate Democrats to really achieve the policies we need for lasting growth.

Otherwise our economy will be stuck in a disappointing hangover, one that might even overshadow my disappointment in the Hangover.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Wednesday, June 1, 2011 - 09:32

On this day 152 years ago, Big Ben rang across London for the first time. The clock has become one of the most famous historical landmarks in the world. It has truly lived up to its creator’s desire for a “noble clock, indeed a king of clocks, the biggest the world has ever seen.” They got their wish. It’s big. But the clock itself is not Big Ben. Though often confused with the clock tower itself, Big Ben actually refers to the bell – a 13.5 ton monstrosity that roars the hour to all of London.

An equally loud roar emitted from Congress tonight as a bipartisan majority in the House of Representatives overwhelmingly rejected a blank check debt limit increase. If Big Ben rings out the hour in impressive style, 318 Representatives chimed loudly in opposition to continuing with business as usual.

This is what Obama wanted from the beginning. For months the Administration has consistently argued that Congress should not attach any spending reductions or structural reforms to a vote to increase the debt ceiling. And why would he want anything attached? This is a White House whose existence is seemingly predicated on spending money. It knows how to do very little else.

Viewed through that prism, a “clean” debt limit increase would have provided the President with $2.4 trillion in additional budgetary leeway. It means that Washington would have once again kicked the can down the road, pushing off the difficult decisions that lay ahead until after the next election. Because that is what this boils down to – perceptions and elections.

Many Democrats simply don’t want to talk about this kind of stuff. They don’t want to produce a budget because it would include unpopular cuts or even more unpopular tax increases. They don’t want to fix Medicare because they are content to demagogue and vilify the Republican plan. They don’t want to come up with a jobs plan, because the only plan they got involves massive amounts of politically perilous deficit spending.

And they want nothing to do with a debt limit fight because truth be told, they’re pretty damn content with where we’re headed now.

Where we’re headed is straight off a fiscal cliff. It’s often forgotten that the debt limit was created to help Congress control spending. It was meant as a periodic reminder of our spending habits, forcing our legislators to step back and view the nation’s direction. Unfortunately, it hasn’t served its purpose. Just as Big Ben chimes every hour, Congress has consistently raised the debt limit and then just kept right on spending.

Since March 1962 the debt limit has been increased 74 times. Ten have come in just the last ten years. On average we’re hitting the debt limit every year and yet our annual deficits have only grown. That is madness, but it is what Democrats have embraced as ideal.

Fortunately, not all Democrats are so shortsighted. A lot understand that a massive increase in the debt limit makes absolutely no sense unless some types of cuts are reforms are enacted to ensure we don’t find ourselves back here again next year, once again looking to increase the deficit, and once again hoping that our investors will give us a free pass.

In tonight’s vote, 82 Democrats voted against the blank-check debt limit increase, while 97 voted in favor. To clarify, 82 Democrats voted against the Obama Administration’s stated position.

Although they are still miles apart on the details of what types and amounts of spending reduction they would like to see, Republicans and some Democrats agree that something must be done to alter our fiscal course. Hopefully tonight’s vote provides the leverage these responsible legislators need to reduce our deficit as part of any vote on the debt limit. After all, I don’t think it could be any more clear that a “clean” increase to the debt limit is simply unacceptable, not only to Americans, but to huge majorities in Congress.

Tonight Big Ben first announced the time. Tonight, a bipartisan coalition announced that it’s time to get serious about deficit reduction. It was a chime for change.


Tierra.Warren
Posted: Tuesday, May 31, 2011 - 15:45

When the government hit its debt limit earlier this month, the Treasury Department warned of the desperate need for a vote to increase the debt ceiling by mid-August. Leaders on both sides have speculated that without the vote, the U.S. would likely default on its debts, triggering a massive financial crisis and causing widespread panic among global markets.

Today, the House is expected to reject the administration’s request to lift the $14.3 trillion national debt ceiling. The voting will take place well after Wall Street closes for the day, according to Fox News, and will begin no earlier than 4:45 pm ET. This late afternoon/early evening voting is a precautionary measure to avoid impacting the market as the House did in September 2008 when it failed to approve the TARP/bailout bill and more than $1.2 trillion in market capitalization washed away.

The GOP House majority has brought up a “clean” bill, under which there would be an increase to the limits on government borrowing, without also making large cuts to federal spending. According to CNN, “The bill would ensure Washington’s ability to keep paying its bills through the end of 2012.” This “free-of-spending-cuts” proposal seems to be exactly what many Democrats have called for, so why would the Republicans provide them with the opportunity to vote on it? The reality is far more strategic than it appears! According to USA Today:

“No Republicans are expected to vote for the “clean” debt limit increase and Democrats, with 192 members, don’t have enough votes to pass the measure by Rep. Dave Camp, R-Mich. In addition, the GOP leadership has structured the vote so that it would require a two-thirds majority to pass.”

The vote is intended to expose fault lines within the Democratic caucus, and Republicans are depending on a large number of Democrats to vote with them tonight. Despite the fact that House Democratic leaders have long advocated for the conditions presented in the “clean” debt limit increase, their support of the proposal is expected to fall short in tonight’s vote. According to CNN:

“The vote was scheduled by GOP leaders to show that any attempt to divorce an increase in the debt ceiling from deficit-reduction efforts — a move initially favored by the Obama White House — is a political non-starter.”

GOP leaders believe the failure of the debt limit vote to pass will send a clear message to the White House about the unity of the Republican caucus– and just in time for their meeting with President Obama! Tomorrow, Obama plans to speak with Republican House members about the administration’s ongoing budget negotiations, which include the debt-ceiling. Perhaps the GOP will successfully demonstrate their unity and determination in dealing with budget crises and impress even Obama himself? If only!

By: Blair Hart Newman


Zach.Howell
Posted: Saturday, May 28, 2011 - 12:23

When Bill Clinton talks, Democrats tend to listen. And for good reason. Despite his personal foibles, Clinton still ranks as the most popular political figure in the country. Despite his liberal views on many issues, he’s come to enjoy a deep respect across the ideological spectrum, a sage voice of reason in a sea of crazies.

Thus, Clinton’s words carry a certain currency that has only appreciated in the inflationary political dialogue of our times. That’s what makes his stern words to his fellow Democrats on the issue of Medicare so deeply important.

At a fiscal summit put together by the Peter G. Peterson foundation Clinton said, “I think the Democrats are going to have to be willing to give up, maybe, some short-term political gain by whipping up fears on some of these things – if it’s reasonable Social Security proposal, a reasonable Medicare proposal. We’ve got to deal with these things. You cannot have health care devour the economy.”

It was a stunning statement that sliced to the very heart of the political problem we face. Washington has spent so long buying votes by adding benefits to Medicare, Social Security, and the like, that they’ve become as popular as they are bloated. As Republicans have bet their fortunes on reform, Democrats have made a Faustian bargain. They’ve chosen to defend the status quo, not because they believe it to be a sustainable fiscal course, but because they know it is an easier sell to the voters.

This, Clinton says, is a strategy Democrats must leave behind if America is to truly step back from the debt abyss.

His advice is even more important given Republican’s loss in the New York special election. Democrat Kathy Hochul, an early longshot in a solidly conservative district, came from behind to win. Although there were many reasons for the upset, most notably a fake Tea Party candidate, Democrats have seized on the results as a referendum on Paul Ryan’s Medicare reform plan.

At the fiscal summit, ABC News John Karl overheard a candid conversation in which Ryan expressed his fear to President Clinton that the election results would cause the debate to “sink into a paralysis.” “You know the math,” and then almost despondently concluded, “we knew we were putting ourselves out there.”

Ryan can foresee the tough times ahead. His plan was already on the receiving end of a blunt attack campaign and the election results would only strengthen the opposition’s resolve. His bold and brave plan to save Medicare from going bust threatened to wilt under the weathering heat of Democrats’ hot air.

Hopefully Ryan was heartened by Clinton’s speech. Clinton told the crowd, that “You shouldn’t draw the conclusion that the New York race means that nobody can do anything to slow the rate of Medicare costs. . . [B]ut I’m afraid that the Democrats will draw the conclusion that . . . we shouldn’t do anything and I completely disagree with that.”

Sadly, Clinton’s sage words have already been proven true. The morning following the election results, Guy Cecil, the executive director of the Democratic Senatorial Campaign Committee issued a statement arguing that “Democrats will be able to play offense in Senate races across the country by remaining focused on the Republican effort to end Medicare.”

Senate Majority Leader stepped up the rhetoric even further, using his time on the floor to say, “The Republican plan to kill Medicare is a plan to make the rich richer and the sick sicker.”

Apparently Bill Clinton’s voice of reason no longer holds sway among Democrats. They’re become too enamored with the trappings of power to consider ceding a political advantage, even for the good of the nation. Democrats may have tuned him out, but here’s hoping Americans are still listening, because his words simply can’t be repeated enough “We’ve got to deal with these things.”


Zach.Howell
Posted: Saturday, May 28, 2011 - 12:22

“We can’t play under two sets of rules . . . I don’t think this is healthy. But it is the system we have. And you can’t expect one side to operate under one set of rules and the other side to operate under another.” – David Axelrod, Senior Communications Adviser to the President

Axelrod was talking about the emergence of Democratic organizations designed to pump millions in anonymous contributions to candidates in the upcoming elections. If Republicans were going to do it and get away with it, then screw the moral high-ground, Democrats were going to do it to.

And that pretty much sums up how I’m feeling about the Medicare debate right about now. Republicans have tried to have an adult conversation on how to reform our broken entitlement system. We’ve tried to speak honestly and responsibly about the need to get government spending under control.

Where has it gotten us? Nowhere.  For God’s sake just this past week Democrats released an ad portraying Paul Ryan as literally throwing an elderly woman out of her wheelchair and off a cliff. How can you expect to have a genuine debate when that is what you’re up against?

So screw it. I’m pulling a Tony Montana from Scarface. “You wanna play rough? Okay. I play rough. Say hello to my little friend!”

Maintaining the status quo wouldn’t just push grandma over a cliff, it would pile the entire family, children and all, into the car and jam on the gas. We’re going out Thelma and Louise style.

But don’t take my word for it. In a Wall Street Journal op-ed, former Medicare Trustee, Thomas Saving, and president of the National Center for Policy Analysis, John Goodman, explain just how Obamacare will kill Medicare.

“Almost no one familiar with the numbers thinks that the planned brute-force cuts in Medicare spending are politically feasible . . .

But suppose the law is implemented just as written. In that case, according to Medicare Trustees, Medicare’s long-term unfunded liability fell by $53 trillion on the day Obamacare was signed.

But at what cost to the elderly? . . . In terms of sheer dollars involved, the law’s reduction in future Medicare payments is the equivalent of raising the eligibitliy age for Medicare to age 68 for today’s 65 year-olds, to age 71 for 55-year-olds and to age 73 for 45-year olds. But rather than keep the system as is and raise the age of eligibility, the reform law instead tries to achieve equivalent savings by paying less to the providers of care.”

It’s such an important piece that I urge you to read it in it’s entirety (HERE), but hopefully that snippet gave you a since of the sheer idiocy that Democrats are attempting to pass off as saving Medicare.

All Obamacare did was wave a magic wand and essentially mandate that costs be lower. That’s not reform, that’s madness. For Democrats to achieve any of the savings that they propose, doctors and hospitals would see enormous cuts in the amount of money they receive for accepting Medicare patients. At best, elderly patients would receive reduced quality of care or fewer treatment options; at worst, doctors will refuse to accept Medicare patients at all.

This is the reality that Republicans have been fighting tooth and nail to try and avoid. We’ve offered a plan that would fundamentally stabilize Medicare’s finances, using market forces and the freedom of choice to keep health care costs in check. Is it a perfect proposal? No. Is it the only proposal out there? Yes, because Democrats are more happy to demagogue any proposed solution rather than present their own. Is it akin to pushing grandma off a cliff? Hell no.

But maintaining the status quo is. The precious present, which Democrats seem to be fighting to hard to keep will inevitably push America into default. It would make the recent recession look like childs play. Trillions of dollars in wealth would likely be lost, our debt interest payments would skyrocket by untold billions, and millions of people would be unemployed. You wanna talk about scary. Beat that.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Saturday, May 28, 2011 - 12:21

If you’ve read this blog long enough (or at all) you’ve likely come away with the feeling that the government isn’t really good at doing much of anything. Well, after some deep searching we’ve finally come across something that the government is good at; no, spectacular at! It’s a field in which they are innovative enough to put Steve Jobs to shame, successful enough to make Mark Zuckerburg blush, and wily enough to make Warren Buffet fall down in praise.

What field is this you may ask? Why, finding incredibly dumb ways to spend our money of course!

Fortunately, if the government has proven itself to be the Moriarty of waste then Senator Tom Coburn has revealed himself to be Sherlock Holmes. He’s issued report after report detailing the ridiculous ways Washington has distributed our tax dollars. He’s found everything from $1 million to build a guardrail around a lake that doesn’t even exist, to $144,000 to see how monkeys react to cocaine, to $18 million for a sports complex for the town of Lakewood Village (pop. 3,050).

And now the spending sleuth is back with another damning report. Entitled “Under the Microscope,” Sen. Coburn takes a deeper look into the National Science Foundation (NSF).

Now, let’s begin by saying that the NSF has a very important mission. With $6.87 billion in funding, the NSF represents approximately 20 percent of all federally funded research conduced in U.S. colleges and universities. It’s in large part responsible for the creation of the internet for goodness sakes!

There is also a growing fear that America is falling behind the rest of the world in math and science. That can have dramatic economic impacts as new technologies, innovations, research, and the products that those processes lead to, begin to shift overseas.

That said, our government has become conditioned to the idea that more money is always the best solution to any problem. Unfortunately, history rarely bears that out, especially in the field of education where billions more is spent but academic achievement remains stagnant. So when the President proposes to increase the NSF’s budget by 18 percent, it’s healthy to wonder…is that money being spent wisely and effectively? And as Sen. Coburn’s report shows, it’s hard to believe the answer is “yes.”

According to Sen. Coburn,

“The good news for taxpayers is there is no question NSF has contributed significantly to scientific discovery.

The bad news is a significant percentage of your money is going to what most Americans will consider fraud, waste, and abuse, and there are many areas where NSF could contribute far more with better management and smarter targeting of resources.”

Among the $3 billions in waste that Coburn finds (note: that’s almost half of their budget):

  • Mismanagement of Funds: The agency currently has $1.7 billion in undisbursed grant money, calling into question the $1 billion in additional funds under the President’s budget
  • Lack of Accountability: The Office of Inspector General has found that the NSF’s grant management activities have been poor, including monitoring awardees’ financial accountability, performance, and results.
  • Duplication: The government has 17 different science programs, each with different reporting structures and metrics. As just an example of the problems this creates, one University of Florida researcher was found to have received funding from three federal agencies for the same exact proposal
  • Questionable Projects:  Among them – A $79,998 grant to discover that “the best players will tend to choose winning programs.” Brilliant! A$3 million study to determine whether sick shrimp could run on a treadmill as long as healthy shrimp. Genius! And a $315,000 grant to figure out whether playing Farmville helps develop relationships. Eureka!

America must improve its educational foundation in math and science. But after reading this report it’s clear that spending our money more wisely is the answer, not simply spending more money.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Wednesday, May 25, 2011 - 19:05

Solving the Medicare quandary has transfixed Washington for years. Sadly, Democrats have got nothing. No ideas, no plans, no guesses, nada. When asked what their plan was to fix the fiscally broken program, House Minority Leader Nancy Pelosi said, “It is a flag we’ve planted that we will have to protect and defend. We have a plan. It’s called Medicare.”

It’s a very interesting strategy. Democrats plan to fix Medicare, is, well, Medicare. Don’t worry it doesn’t make sense to us either.

Such stunning closed-mindedness is reminiscent of an story from ancient Rome. Master craftsman Filippo Brunelleschi was bidding for a commission to build what would have been the largest domed structure in the world – the Duomo of Florence. At a meeting with the other artisans trying for the job, they became furious with his mysterious design that seemed to rely on nothing for support.

After continual pestering, Brunelleschi finally pulled out an egg and challenged them all to stand the egg on its end. They looked at him as if he was either insane, or a genius who had figured out how to accomplish the impossible. Each of them tried and failed repeatedly to get the egg to stand up. Finally, in exasperation, Brunelleschi grabbed the egg and tapped it firmly on the table, cracking the bottom, and getting it to stand upright. The others protested saying that had they known that’s how he intended to it, they could have easily accomplished the same thing. Brunelleschi retorted that they also would know how to create the enormous dome if they were just allowed to view his plans.

Republicans, are the Brunelleschi of Medicare. Just as Brunelleschi had meticulously figured out a way to support a ceiling with no visible supports, Republicans have figured out how to fix Medicare without raising taxes. They’ve discovered a plan to make it solvent not only for this generation, but for the foreseeable future, without bankrupting the Treasury.

This has only made Democrats more incredulous. Like the competing sculptors from the story, obviously piqued that they lacked the creativity to come up with an answer to the problem, Democrats are pointing fingers and claiming that rules were broken.

“It would end Medicare as we know it,” has become the consistent refrain. Yes, and Brunelleschi had to change the egg “as he knew it” in order to get to stand on its end. There was just no other way to solve the problem.

Medicare is much the same quandary. No matter how much you search for little tweaks that would, as if by magic, right the otherwise sinking ship, Medicare continues to drown in its debts. So what it needs is a firm hand and a brilliant mind. It needs to be broken, if only a little, to get it to stand up straight without rolling over.

That firm hand is Paul Ryan’s reform plan. Ryan would transition Medicare into a premium support system that provided generous payments to seniors, allowing them to purchase health care services on their own. To allay any fears about the size of the payments, seniors would receive just as much as today’s Medicare beneficiaries indexed to inflation.

Although Democrats are vociferously opposing this much-needed change, the term “premium support” was actually coined by two Democratic economists. In fact, a similar proposal was the chief recommendation made by the Commission on Medicare reform, chaired by Democratic Senator John Breaux. The liberal think-tank Brookings Institute has even extolled the numerous benefits of a premium-support system,

Why would premium support produce better care for Medicare beneficiaries at more sustainable rates of growth? First, with competition among the plans on the Exchange and improving information about plan outcomes, seniors can be expected to migrate to lower cost and higher quality plans. Second, capping the subsidy’s growth at a sustainable rate would make the government’s contribution predictable and incent movement to more efficient health care delivery.

With their Medicare plan, Republicans are trying to build something momentous and beautiful. Something that will stand the test of time and be rivaled by other nations. Something like the Duomo! Sadly, the other “architects” have consistently failed to think outside the box. All the while, our Medicare program has begun to crumble to the point where economists have already foretold its inevitable collapse.

They just don’t understand that sometimes you have to break a few eggs…


Zach.Howell
Posted: Wednesday, May 25, 2011 - 19:04

 

Congressional Democrats and the online Left have found the One Graph to rule them all

The graph shows that the Bush-era tax cuts and the Iraq and Afghanistan wars account for a hefty chunk of the debt in 2019. Influential liberal blogger Ezra Klein writes, “In other words, cut the financial crisis and the major initiatives from the Bush-era out of the picture, and we’d be in pretty good shape. In fact, we’d be in great shape.”

There are several things wrong with this analysis that I’d like to deal with in turn:

  1. The graph hides the truth of what would have happened if the Bush tax cuts had not have been passed,
  2. It misleads the reader as to Democrats stance on the Bush-era tax policies
  3. It provides a favorable snapshot that fails to tell the underlying story of our problems, and
  4. Just stop with the “Bush-era tax cuts” name game

Hiding the Truth

 

Since World War II tax revenues have averaged around 18 percent of GDP. The CBO predicts that if the Bush tax cuts are not continued, tax revenues will jump to 23 percent of GDP by 2035. In CBO’s words, “the tax system would be quite different from what it is today. Households at all points in the income scale would pay a higher share of their income in taxes than similar households pay today.” In fact, without tax relieft, taxation would have increased by more than 30 percent as a share of the economy!

By contrast, passing and extending the Bush tax cuts put tax revenues much more in line with their historical norm. In fact, the CBO predicts that even with a permanent extension of the Bush-era tax policies, “revenues as a share of GDP after 2020 are roughly 1 percentage point higher under . . . than the average share observed over the past 40 years.

So when the graph hints at the notion that the Bush-era tax policies are a main contributor to our deficit, they are comparing that to a reality in which never-before-seen tax burdens would have been thrust upon Americans.

Democrats Support the Bush Tax Cuts Too

The graph points to the Bush-era tax cuts as the main offender in causing our current fiscal woes. If only we’d have got rid of them last August we’d be on our way towards a balanced budget. That’s pure revisionist history.

Neither party was advocating for getting rid of all of the tax cuts. Sure, Republicans wanted to keep all of them in place, realizing that the more money taxpayers got to keep in their pockets, the better it would be for the economy, but Democrats wanted to keep the vast majority of them in place.

The problem is that when people hear “Bush tax cuts” their mind automatically drifts to the wealthy, when in fact, most of the cuts went to the middle class. According to the Treasury, extending the Bush tax cuts for everyone costs the federal government $3.8 trillion over the next 10 years. Only $680 billion of that is for the wealthy, $3.1 trillion of that is for the middle class.

The graph touts a supposed cure, but it’s important to remember that its one Democrats never pushed for.

Misleading Snapshot

Let’s remember that the graph only looks through 2019. This happens to conveniently be just prior to the explosion in entitlement costs as the Baby Boom quickly falls into retirement. When Ezra Klein says “we’d be in great shape” if we took the Bush-era policies out of the picture, he’s completely off-base. A correct statement would be “our nation’s balance sheet may look a little better for a few years, in large part because everyone is paying enormously higher taxes, but soon Medicare and Medicaid costs will push us towards default.”

Stop with the Language Tricks

As Keith Hennessey has tried his best to hammer home, “At some point a policy flips from extending a tax cut to preventing a tax increase. The top marginal income tax rate has been 35% for almost ten years . . . Most DC Democrats try to have it both ways; they talk about preventing tax increases on the middle class but oppose extending tax cuts for the rich. This rhetorical inconsistency masks a parallel situation in law and policy. Either they’re both extending tax cuts, or they’re both preventing tax increases.”

But why stop with Bush? Liberal icon John Kennedy cut the top tax rates from 91 percent to 70 percent. Why don’t we have a graph looking at how much those increased the deficit? Something tells me it has a lot more to do with demonizing a Republican president than serving as a sensible dividing line.


Jeremy.Hagen
Posted: Wednesday, May 25, 2011 - 12:15

Congressional Democrats and the online Left have found the One Graph to rule them all

The graph shows that the Bush-era tax cuts and the Iraq and Afghanistan wars account for a hefty chunk of the debt in 2019. Influential liberal blogger Ezra Klein writes, “In other words, cut the financial crisis and the major initiatives from the Bush-era out of the picture, and we’d be in pretty good shape. In fact, we’d be in great shape.” There are several things wrong with this analysis that I’d like to deal with in turn:

  1. The graph hides the truth of what would have happened if the Bush tax cuts had not have been passed,
  2. It misleads the reader as to Democrats stance on the Bush-era tax policies
  3. It provides a favorable snapshot that fails to tell the underlying story of our problems, and
  4. Just stop with the “Bush-era tax cuts” name game

Hiding the Truth

Since World War II tax revenues have averaged around 18 percent of GDP. The CBO predicts that if the Bush tax cuts are not continued, tax revenues will jump to 23 percent of GDP by 2035. In CBO’s words, “the tax system would be quite different from what it is today. Households at all points in the income scale would pay a higher share of their income in taxes than similar households pay today.” In fact, without tax relieft, taxation would have increased by more than 30 percent as a share of the economy! By contrast, passing and extending the Bush tax cuts put tax revenues much more in line with their historical norm. In fact, the CBO predicts that even with a permanent extension of the Bush-era tax policies, “revenues as a share of GDP after 2020 are roughly 1 percentage point higher under . . . than the average share observed over the past 40 years. So when the graph hints at the notion that the Bush-era tax policies are a main contributor to our deficit, they are comparing that to a reality in which never-before-seen tax burdens would have been thrust upon Americans.

Democrats Support the Bush Tax Cuts Too

The graph points to the Bush-era tax cuts as the main offender in causing our current fiscal woes. If only we’d have got rid of them last August we’d be on our way towards a balanced budget. That’s pure revisionist history. Neither party was advocating for getting rid of all of the tax cuts. Sure, Republicans wanted to keep all of them in place, realizing that the more money taxpayers got to keep in their pockets, the better it would be for the economy, but Democrats wanted to keep the vast majority of them in place. The problem is that when people hear “Bush tax cuts” their mind automatically drifts to the wealthy, when in fact, most of the cuts went to the middle class. According to the Treasury, extending the Bush tax cuts for everyone costs the federal government $3.8 trillion over the next 10 years. Only $680 billion of that is for the wealthy, $3.1 trillion of that is for the middle class. The graph touts a supposed cure, but it’s important to remember that its one Democrats never pushed for.

Misleading Snapshot

Let’s remember that the graph only looks through 2019. This happens to conveniently be just prior to the explosion in entitlement costs as the Baby Boom quickly falls into retirement. When Ezra Klein says “we’d be in great shape” if we took the Bush-era policies out of the picture, he’s completely off-base. A correct statement would be “our nation’s balance sheet may look a little better for a few years, in large part because everyone is paying enormously higher taxes, but soon Medicare and Medicaid costs will push us towards default.”

Stop with the Language Tricks

As Keith Hennessey has tried his best to hammer home, “At some point a policy flips from extending a tax cut to preventing a tax increase. The top marginal income tax rate has been 35% for almost ten years . . . Most DC Democrats try to have it both ways; they talk about preventing tax increases on the middle class but oppose extending tax cuts for the rich. This rhetorical inconsistency masks a parallel situation in law and policy. Either they’re both extending tax cuts, or they’re both preventing tax increases.” But why stop with Bush? Liberal icon John Kennedy cut the top tax rates from 91 percent to 70 percent. Why don’t we have a graph looking at how much those increased the deficit? Something tells me it has a lot more to do with demonizing a Republican president than serving as a sensible dividing line.


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Saturday, May 21, 2011 - 09:40

Aha! I’ve finally figured it out. I knew those dastardly Democrats must have known something that the rest of us didn’t. Why else would they continually refuse to face up to our nation’s fiscal challenges or at the very least offer a budget! It’s because they knew the world was ending.

Surely you’ve heard by now, because the media has become utterly fascinated with a small, but vocal sect of Christians who have read and interpreted passages of the Bible to mean that May 21, 2011 is judgment day. That’s right. Hope you didn’t have plans for Monday, because this weekend is it folks…the end of the world.

But while many simply find the prophecy amusing, amiably shrugging off the multitude of billboards, ads, and news stories that proliferate by the day, it seems that Democrats have really taken the message to heart. Since the world is apparently ending, they’ve decided to let out their inner bon vivant. The deficit be damned they say, let’s spend like it’s 2009, we’ll pay it back when we’re dead.

Of course, I’m only kidding. Although it wouldn’t be the craziest thing to ever happen. OK, actually it would be the craziest thing. I’m pretty sure not even Charlie Sheen could top the end of the world in terms of “crazy,” although I’m not sure I’d dare him to try.

But I am serious about the Democrats hedonistic behavior in the face of what is certain to be some very dark times for the United States, end of the world or not. Sure, it may not be the rapture, but a sovereign debt crisis, is not going to be much fun either.

Yet that is exactly the path we are headed down. No one disputes that our entitlement spending is sustainable. Ever-rising health care costs are pushing Medicaid and Medicare cost growth well beyond the rate of inflation. A broken Social Security formula combined with an aging population has already forced the Social Security program into permanent deficits. And as for everything else in the bloated Washington budget, well, Congress hasn’t exactly been too good at keeping those costs down either.

Despite these quickly rising costs Democrats have failed to even present a budget! In fact, it has been 752 days since the Senate Budget Committee, led by Democrats, have introduced a budget document. 752 days!

What’s more, they’ve recently said that they have no plans to introduce one anytime soon. On Thursday,  Roll Call reported, “Senate Democrats are punting for now on a budget resolution,” citing Budget Chairman Kent Conrad’s statement that “after broad consultation, we have decided to defer a budget mark-up.”

Producing a budget is not only a statutory duty, one in which Democrats have consistently ignored, but it is also an opportunity to present a vision for government. Their opportunity to lay out a plan for what America should look like – how to fix entitlements, the proper size of government, how much to raise taxes, etc.

Long ago, Representative Paul Ryan introduced the Republican budget vision. A bold plan that gradually eliminates our deficit through free market reforms of our government’s biggest and most broken programs. Democrats didn’t waste any time trying to rip the plan to pieces, labeling it as “extreme” and engaging in partisan scare tactics aimed at the elderly and poor.

Of course, it is easy to attack someone else’s plan when you don’t have one of your own. Likewise, its difficult for Republicans to be able to criticize a plan that doesn’t even exist. But early details of the Democrats unreleased budget plan show it is going to be worthy of derision.

The Washington Post reported that the Democrats plan would raise taxes by nearly $2 trillion over the next decade. It also hinted that entitlement reforms were likely to be off the table, meaning that as their costs continue to grow rapidly over the next decade, taxes will likewise continue to grow. With so many taxes it is no wonder Democrats were loathe to introduce the plan. That strategy allows them to ignore tough votes on their own budget, while continuing to lambast Republican’s vision from their untouchable ivory tower.

How long will the Democrats continue to ignore their statutory and societal duty? How long will they prevent America from engaging in a true debate over competing visions for the role of government? How long will they attempt to hide the fact that their plan is simply to raise taxes? Well that depends. I have a feeling that their waiting to see if Saturday really is the end of the world. If so, it may ultimately come as a relief.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Thursday, May 19, 2011 - 15:45

Americans are dot connecters. We like to take disparate elements of any given situation and attempt to round them into a cohesive whole. The reason, I believe is an innate desire to have things make sense. This often allows us to see a larger picture that we would have otherwise missed, but sometimes it can do the opposite, create an image of something where nothing should exist.

As a very clear example of this tendency toward dot-connecting is steroids in baseball. In an interesting article in yesterdays Sports Illustrated, writer Joe Posnaski takes a look at the amazing statistical drop following the post-steroid era. From 1994-2010 hitters in April batted .264, had an on-base percentage (OBP) of .345, and slugged .421 (total bases divided by at-bats). By comparison, this April players are hitting .249 (down 15 points), have an OBP of  .319 (down 26 points), and a slugging percentage of .382 (down nearly 40 points).

Those appear to be huge statistical regressions. Players just aren’t peeling the cover off the baseball like they did in the late-nineties, early aughts. But this simple comparison doesn’t tell the whole story. To get a full picture you have to go back to before the steroid-era, where you’ll find that today’s numbers are almost exactly in line with those prior to 1994. Posnanski lays it out:

To remind you, this year’s core numbers: .249/.319/.382 From 1981 through 1993: .252/.322/.378

In that context today’s players do not look so statistically challenged. As it turns out we’ve simply regressed back to the comfortable place baseball existed for decades prior to the most pervasive cheating scandal in sports history.

Similar context is needed to provide voters with the entirety of the budget situation. Sadly they are only getting part of the story.

Recently, spending and deficits have been mired in a steroid era. As recently, as 2007 our budget deficit was $160 billion – still not balanced, but a figure that we would literally laugh off as insignificant today. From 1982 through 2007 our deficit ranged from a 69.3 billion surplus to a $412 billion deficit and mostly hovered in the mid $200s. As I said, by no means comfortable, or even sustainable, but at least consistent and sane.

By comparison, our 2009 deficit was $1.4 trillion, our 2010 deficit was $1.3 trillion, and our 2011 deficit was $1.6 trillion. All astounding sums.

Now, Republicans have introduced plans to make significant cuts to our current budgetary baseline. The reforms they have proposed would reduce spending in the order of trillions, not billions. Democrats have demagogued these reforms as an “extreme” attempt to cut services and fundamentally change the role of government in our lives.

This argument works, at least if you begin with the notion that $1.4 trillion deficits or $3.5 trillion in spending is the norm. But as you have hopefully seen through a comparison of the earlier numbers, recent deficits and spending are anything but the norm. They, like statistics in the steroid era, are the outliers, swelled like Barry Bonds head by ego, hubris, and the misbegotten desire to please their constituents.

To fight against the wrong-headed notion that Republicans attempt to cut the budget is in some way, abnormal, we must redraw the picture. We must realize that there is a whole host of dots that we have failed to include. And when you connect the true dots of Democrats plan, I think you’ll find that the picture is not one of prosperity, but of inevitable decline.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Thursday, May 19, 2011 - 15:44

“Ending ______ as we know it.” That is quickly becoming the most overused phrase in all of political punditry.

Paul Krugman’s Friday column argued that “one of the funniest political stories” was freshman Republicans sending a “letter urging President Obama to stop Democrats from engaging in ‘Mediscare’ tactics – that is, to stop saying that the Republican plan released early last month, which would end Medicare as we know it, is a plan to end Medicare as we know it.”

The liberal think-tank, Center for American Progress, recently issued a press-release stating that “Paul Ryan (R-WI) would end Medicaid as we know it by converting it into a block grant program.”

And Senate Majority Leader Harry Reid held an event in March where he said that Republicans’ “use words like ‘privatize’ and ‘personalize.’ But they’re all code words for the same thing: ending Social Security as we know it.”

You get the picture. “Ending _____ as we know it,” is supposed to be a terribly frightening concept, because the status quo is so hunky dory, you see. In reality (sadly, somewhere liberals rarely seem to inhabit) each of these programs are in dire need of reform.

A new report from the Social Security and Medicare Board of Trustees said, “The financial conditions of the Social Security and Medicare programs remain challenging. Projected long-run program costs for both Medicare and Social Security are not sustainable under currently scheduled financing, and will require legislative modifications if disruptive consequences for beneficiaries and taxpayers are to be avoided.”

“Legislative modifications” is a more palatable way to say “reform.” Of course, since it is the programs’ Trustees, and not Republicans saying the dirty words, you’re not likely to hear any liberals pointing fingers and arguing that the Trustees want to “end Medicare and Social Security as we know it.”

But that is exactly what they are saying. For the first time in history, the Social Security program ran a deficit in 2010, to the tune of $49 billion. But things are not going to get brighter anytime soon. After 2014, the program’s deficits are expected to grow rapidly, until its already-imaginary “Trust Fund” is exhausted in 25 years.

Medicare and Medicaid fare even worse. The CBO reports that the “total outlays for these health programs would roughly double as a share of GDP over the next 25 years.” Of course, such increases would lead to catastrophic deficits that would necessarily lead to a fiscal crisis. Thus, the CBO argues that to put us on a sustainable path, “lawmakers would have to substantially reduce the growth in outlays for those programs.”

You know what that sounds like? Yep, another all-too-nice code word for “ending Medicare and Medicaid as we know them.”

And that shouldn’t be scary! In fact, I would be scared if our government would ignore these problems and continue with our welfare state “as we know it.” Especially since what we know, is that it’s an actuarially unsound piece of crap. Our spending is like a speeding car quickly on its way towards veering over a cliff. Democrats will say, “the view as nice.” Republicans are screaming, “Uh. Hello! I think it’s time to end this trip as we know it.”

So let liberal pundits keep shouting their new favorite phrase, thinking that they are unwittingly lulling people into the comfort of the status quo. Smart voters will know differently. Anyone who is paying attention will know that “ending _____ as we know it” is the best thing that could happen.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Thursday, May 19, 2011 - 15:43

It doesn’t take a genius to figure out we haven’t been fans of President Obama’s economic stimulus package. We’ve long called it a wasteful, inefficient, waste of taxpayer money that did next to nothing to create jobs or put us back on the road to recovery. Well as it turns out we were too nice. New research from economists Timothy Conley and Bill Dupor finds that not only did the stimulus not create jobs, it actively destroyed them.

According to the authors,

“Our benchmark results suggest that the [stimulus] created/saved approximately 450 thousand state and local government jobs and destroyed/forestalled roughly one million private sector jobs. . . The majority of destroyed/forestalled jobs were in growth industries including health, education, professional and business services.”

Since the paper largely made its way through the interwebs during the weekend, I can only imagine liberal bloggers are itching to get into the office to eviscerate these findings. I can almost imagine Paul Krugman sitting in a leather chair, sipping a glass of red-wine, and laughing maniacally at this new opportunity to talk down to anyone who disagrees with his vision of the world.

And I know just what they’ll say. But, but, but, they’ll whine, there is just no way that the stimulus could have destroyed jobs! Interest rates remain too low for any crowding out effects to have occurred.

Okay, I may have lost a few of you there with that last sentence, so I’ll back up. The debate over the effectiveness of fiscal stimulus generally centers around the concepts of “crowding out.” That happens when the government borrows money by issuing bonds. Those bonds create a more competitive market for credit, thus putting upward pressure on interest rates. Still with me? When interest rates go up, demand for goods and services go down. In effect, government spending has crowded out the market for private capital

Using this argument, if interest rates are low, crowding out could not have happened. You can almost hear them say, “So there!’ Or if they were in a less childish, and more hob-nobbish mood, “Put that in your pipe and smoke it!”

The problem is, this is a liberals attempt to eliminate their perception of the world and instead squeeze economics into equations. It’s the old, “if it’s not in a textbook, it’s not worth knowing” line of thinking that has so hampered the growth of macroeconomics. Such an elitist view, holds that central policymakers following carefully thought out models know better than the masses and the market. What they once attempted to only measure, they now believe that they can control.

To truly understand, we must look to what John Meynard Keynes labeled “animal spirits.” One of the more “newly discovered” of these is “patterns of sustainable specialization and trade.” Though complicated in name, it’s a simple enough theory. We essentially do what we’re good at and like to do. For instance, a brain surgeon may pay someone to mow their lawn or even clean their house, providing them more free time to do what they want. In modern society this has become so vastly intricate – with literally millions of different distinct jobs – that it has become increasingly impossible for government to align the natural order of things.

In other words, the government has tried to squeeze a square peg through a round hole, and the more they try, the bigger the peg becomes. The stimulus created much the same effect, attempting to channel money to very specific purposes, which did not especially align with the needs or desires of our complex society. The result was very highly trained people flocking to the public, rather than private sector which could have resulted in more products being created.

Regardless of whether this theory is correct, the bottom line remains the same – the stimulus has been an utter failure. In fact, it has been so bad, that merely saying that it was ineffective is incorrect. As Conley and Dupor’s new study shows, it was actively harmful to our recovery


Zach.Howell
Posted: Saturday, May 14, 2011 - 15:28

Americans are dot connecters. We like to take disparate elements of any given situation and attempt to round them into a cohesive whole. The reason, I believe is an innate desire to have things make sense. This often allows us to see a larger picture that we would have otherwise missed, but sometimes it can do the opposite, create an image of something where nothing should exist.

As a very clear example of this tendency toward dot-connecting is steroids in baseball. In an interesting article in yesterdays Sports Illustrated, writer Joe Posnaski takes a look at the amazing statistical drop following the post-steroid era. From 1994-2010 hitters in April batted .264, had an on-base percentage (OBP) of .345, and slugged .421 (total bases divided by at-bats). By comparison, this April players are hitting .249 (down 15 points), have an OBP of  .319 (down 26 points), and a slugging percentage of .382 (down nearly 40 points).

Those appear to be huge statistical regressions. Players just aren’t peeling the cover off the baseball like they did in the late-nineties, early aughts. But this simple comparison doesn’t tell the whole story. To get a full picture you have to go back to before the steroid-era, where you’ll find that today’s numbers are almost exactly in line with those prior to 1994. Posnanski lays it out:

To remind you, this year’s core numbers: .249/.319/.382 From 1981 through 1993: .252/.322/.378

In that context today’s players do not look so statistically challenged. As it turns out we’ve simply regressed back to the comfortable place baseball existed for decades prior to the most pervasive cheating scandal in sports history.

Similar context is needed to provide voters with the entirety of the budget situation. Sadly they are only getting part of the story.

Recently, spending and deficits have been mired in a steroid era. As recently, as 2007 our budget deficit was $160 billion – still not balanced, but a figure that we would literally laugh off as insignificant today. From 1982 through 2007 our deficit ranged from a 69.3 billion surplus to a $412 billion deficit and mostly hovered in the mid $200s. As I said, by no means comfortable, or even sustainable, but at least consistent and sane.

By comparison, our 2009 deficit was $1.4 trillion, our 2010 deficit was $1.3 trillion, and our 2011 deficit was $1.6 trillion. All astounding sums.

Now, Republicans have introduced plans to make significant cuts to our current budgetary baseline. The reforms they have proposed would reduce spending in the order of trillions, not billions. Democrats have demagogued these reforms as an “extreme” attempt to cut services and fundamentally change the role of government in our lives.

This argument works, at least if you begin with the notion that $1.4 trillion deficits or $3.5 trillion in spending is the norm. But as you have hopefully seen through a comparison of the earlier numbers, recent deficits and spending are anything but the norm. They, like statistics in the steroid era, are the outliers, swelled like Barry Bonds head by ego, hubris, and the misbegotten desire to please their constituents.

To fight against the wrong-headed notion that Republicans attempt to cut the budget is in some way, abnormal, we must redraw the picture. We must realize that there is a whole host of dots that we have failed to include. And when you connect the true dots of Democrats plan, I think you’ll find that the picture is not one of prosperity, but of inevitable decline.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Saturday, May 14, 2011 - 15:27

Most of the sitcoms I grew up with had that annoying character that always showed up at inopportune times and never went away. Kimmy Gibbler on Full House, Screech on Saved by the Bell, Steve Urkel on Family Matters, and Kramer on Seinfeld. They would always run into a generally harmonious scene and wreak havoc for all the characters involved.

Mortgage giants Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac are the Kramer’s of the Washington sitcom (a more apt genre may be horror). They have no visible means of support, they often rely on the charity of those around them, and they leave a trail of destruction in their path. Funny if you’re a sitcom, terrifying if you’re a taxpayer.

That’s right, Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, the government sponsored entities that exist in the ethereal netherworld between the private sector and the federal government are back asking for yet another bailout. These two mortgage giants used their federal guarantee to dominate the market. Their implicit taxpayer backing allowed them to pay fewer taxes, borrow at below market rates, and operate under more lax standards. They gambled on the subprime mortgage market knowing that if they won, their shareholders would reap the rewards, and if they lost, taxpayers would make up the difference.

As it turns out, they lost…big time. But rather than admit any wrongdoing, they threw up their hands, and in their best nasally Urkel voice shouted, “Did I do thaaaat?” Sadly, they’ve popping through the taxpayer door every so often asking for more and more taxpayer cash in order to pay their bills.

This month’s quarterly “earnings” report is no different (is it still called an earnings report if you consistently lose billions of dollars?). Fannie Mae showed losses of $6.5 billion – the result of $11 billion in credit losses on their mortgage portfolio. They’re asking taxpayers for $8.5 billion, the extra $2 billion being owed to the Treasury for past loans.

If this month’s dramatic fall in housing prices is any indication, Fannie and Freddie will be back next quarter asking for more. According to the Association of Realtors the U.S. median home price fell 4.6 percent from the previous year. In fact, “we’re seeing prices dropping faster than they did in 2010,” said analyst Pat Newport of IHS Global Insight. Furthermore, 28.4 percent of homeowners were in negative equity, that is, they owed more on their mortgage than their home was worth.

The doom and gloom carried over to Fannie Mae’s quarterly report in which they implicitly say the mortgage giant will never be able to pay back its debt.

“It will increase to $99.7 billion upon the receipt of funds from Treasury to eliminate the company’s first quarter 2011 net worth deficit, which will require an annualized dividend payment of $10.0 billion. This amount exceeds the company’s reported annual net income for each year since its inception.”

In other words, the amount they’ll owe each year to the Treasury is greater than the amount they’ll ever earn. That’s an awful thought when you consider that we, the taxpayers, are the ones ultimately on the hook for the Treasury’s promises.

Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac are little more than leeches, bleeding money from the government to pay for its own bad bets. Fortunately, Republicans have taken on the challenge of getting rid of these annoying characters once and for all.

Representative Jeb Hensarling (R-TX) has introduced a comprehensive reform bill that would gradually wind down Fannie and Freddie to ensure that they no longer pose a threat to taxpayers. With the understanding that there is little appetite for comprehensive legislation, House Republicans have also introduced eight bite-size bills which would do everything from eliminate Fannie’s “fair housing goals” that encouraged giving loans to unqualified borrowers, to demanding the mortgage giants steadily decrease the size of their loan portfolio.

Sadly, these bills will likely never see the light of day in the Democrat-held Senate, meaning we’re likely to see Fannie and Freddie continue to pop-up, with their hands out, wreaking havoc on taxpayers. I’m sure the Seinfeld writers could somehow make a funny episode out of all of this, but in reality it seems downright maddening.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Saturday, May 14, 2011 - 15:26

Winston Churchill famously said “You can always count on America to do the right thing, after it has exhausted all the other possibilities.”

Sadly, when it comes to our deficit, we are quickly exhausting the possibilities. And that’s despite the only possibility we’ve really explored is, well, doing nothing. Yes, the Republicans have come up with bill after bill to reduce the size of government and the debt it is producing. But whatever Republicans think up and pass is immediately squashed by the Democratic-led Senate and White House.

The reason, or so Democrats say, is that we must not cut spending in the short run because it would short circuit our recovery. With this flawed principle as their guide, they argue that we must spend now until the economy is fully healed and then, and only then, can we talk about reducing our deficit.

Perhaps my time in Washington, DC has made me cynical, but this seems to be a two-part ploy to protect their political hides. They realize that with the stimulus they’ve committed to a strategy of government intervention; wavering now would simply affirm that conservatives had been right all along. Not exactly a concession you’d like to be making with the 2012 presidential race potentially hanging in the balance. Secondly, it seems that they are betting on an economic recovery to cover up their profligacy. Deficits have risen to the forefront of our collective political conscious, in no small part because the economy is in the crapper. But rising employment, comfortable GDP growth, and real-wage increases, and you’d be amazed at how much fiscal tomfoolery we as voters are willing to overlook.

But push is quickly coming to shove. A debt crisis is quickly approaching and the question of the century is…what is Congress gonna do about it?

George Mason professor Paul L. Posner, in a paper called “Will It Take a Crisis,” explores that very question. In doing so he highlights the importance of not only acting, but acting soon.

“Herbert Stein long ago suggested that if something is unsustainable, it will stop. Butere there is a corollary – how it stops matters. Will these trends be reversed through a gradual process brought about by policy interventions or by a rude shock caused by economic forces over which we will have little control.”

Unfortunately, there is little indication that we will act soon. Paul Ryan’s comprehensive plan has been completely ignored by liberals, but given that he’s a Republican, that’s almost to be expected. The truly scary part is that the report produced by President Obama’s own bipartisan deficit commission was deemed to be a nonstarter. The President ignored his own commission!

The problem is the Democrats’ utter refusal to touch entitlements. Without significant changes to these programs, there is simply no tax burden high enough to meet the ravenously growing costs of Medicare, Medicaid, and Social Security in their current form.

As our debt grows, our problems grow. In his paper Posner points out that to realistically have a chance to solve our debt problem (without suffering a dramatic crisis) we must act now. The reason – compounding interest costs.

“As deficits and debt grow during years of no action, intrest costs escalate in the budget, prompting even higher deficits and debt in a vicious cycle. In addition, higher deficits over longer periods of time gradually reduce economic growth and push up interest rates, against contributing to a vicious cycle where deficits and slow growth become mutually reinforcing.”

As the chart above shows if we fail to act by 2025 the amount of annual deficit reduction we will need is three times higher than if we acted currently. If we need to cut a trillion this year, we’d need to cut three trillion in 2025.  Not only would government services have to be dramatically scaled back, our social safety net would have to be cut to shreds, and despite the dramatically reduced role of government, our taxes would still likely have to be raised.

That is the future that lays before us if inaction is our chosen course. So wake up Washington, we’re quickly exhausting all the possibilities of solving our debt crisis, it’s time you do the right thing and act.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Saturday, May 14, 2011 - 15:25

Much of the debate between conservatives and liberals centers around the idea of wealth redistribution. Liberals tend to look at the growing wage gap and say that the government must step in to equalize the results. Conservatives tend to look at the enormous reduction in the inequality of personal well-being which has derived, in large part, because societies’ producers are incentivized to succeed. Economist Greg Mankiw clarifies exactly what I mean by “equality of well-being”,

“Bill Gates is much, much richer than I am, yet it is not obvious that he is much happier if, indeed, he is happier at all. I have access to penicillin, air travel, good cheap food, the Internet and virtually all of the technical innovations that Gates does. Like the vast majority of Americans, I have access to some important new pharmaceuticals, such as statins to protect against heart disease. To be sure, Gates receives the very best care from the world’s top doctors, but our health outcomes are in the same ballpark. I don’t have a private jet or take luxury vacations, and—I think it is fair to say—my house is much smaller than his. I can’t meet with the world’s elite on demand. Still, by broad historical standards, what I share with Bill Gates is far more significant than what I don’t share with him.

This is as important a debate as exists in our current political discourse. In fact, it is so woven into the fabric of our political ideologies that it colors almost everything.  It has become an especially important discussion in the debate over the future of our government. Whether we choose to follow the path President Obama has begun to lead us down; that is, to a redistributive welfare state that, to one degree or another, attempts to equalize results. Or whether we choose to walk the road of Representative Paul Ryan whose plan trims the size of our entitlement programs to ensure we remain an opportunity society.

Each side is vying for the title of “fair.” Liberals say it is only fair that those who earn more should greatly subsidize everyone else. Conservatives say that there can be nothing fair about taking what someone has earned and giving it to someone else.

Their quest has led them to some interesting theoretical debates. The newest, and perhaps most entertaining, is an attempt to highlight the utter absurdity of redistribution in other settings.

For instance, Robin Hanson, asked the question, if we can redistribute wealth, why not apply the same principle to grades?

First, a little bit about Mr. Hanson. He first received a B.S. in physics from the University of California Irvine, then went on to earn an M.S. in physics and an M.A. in Conceptual Foundations of Science from the University of Chicago, then a Ph.D. in social science from Caltech, and then a Ph.D in artificial intelligence, Bayesian statistics, and hypertext at Caltech. All that is to say…this guy knows a little bit. He’s also been through the educational ringer enough to understand the parallels between earning grades and earning money.

Hanson argues,

Most people believe that redistributing money within a nation is good, but that redistributing GPA within a school is bad, and if asked why these should be treated differently, have little to say. My point isn’t to say one can’t come up with reasons to treat these differently.  One could, for example, argue that we prefer differing school signals to help employers sort people into jobs, to achieve higher productivity so that the pie is bigger when we redistribute money. My point is that most people can’t think of such reasons, making it pretty unlikely that such reasons are the cause of their opinions.

It’s a pretty powerful point. There are a lot of similarities between grades and income. Presumably they are both reflective of merit, having been earned by labor or intelligence. They serve as important signals, money incentivizes work, grades incentivize study. And they are the product of value judgments on behalf of the earner, that is, we can sacrifice grades or income to pursue other interests.

The comparison also provides a useful tool for college students, who often haven’t earned wages, to engage in the debate over the desirability of distributive systems on something more than an academic level. And it should come as little surprise that few liked the idea of shaving points off their 4.0 to provide some GPA help to their less academically successful classmates.

This led blogger Megan McCardle to conclude that “most of us want to redistribute income because, well, we wanna…not because we have any particularly good reason.” Shouldn’t redistributing someone’s earned money require a better reason than “we wanna”?


Zach.Howell
Posted: Saturday, May 14, 2011 - 15:25

Much of the debate between conservatives and liberals centers around the idea of wealth redistribution. Liberals tend to look at the growing wage gap and say that the government must step in to equalize the results. Conservatives tend to look at the enormous reduction in the inequality of personal well-being which has derived, in large part, because societies’ producers are incentivized to succeed. Economist Greg Mankiw clarifies exactly what I mean by “equality of well-being”,

“Bill Gates is much, much richer than I am, yet it is not obvious that he is much happier if, indeed, he is happier at all. I have access to penicillin, air travel, good cheap food, the Internet and virtually all of the technical innovations that Gates does. Like the vast majority of Americans, I have access to some important new pharmaceuticals, such as statins to protect against heart disease. To be sure, Gates receives the very best care from the world’s top doctors, but our health outcomes are in the same ballpark. I don’t have a private jet or take luxury vacations, and—I think it is fair to say—my house is much smaller than his. I can’t meet with the world’s elite on demand. Still, by broad historical standards, what I share with Bill Gates is far more significant than what I don’t share with him.

This is as important a debate as exists in our current political discourse. In fact, it is so woven into the fabric of our political ideologies that it colors almost everything.  It has become an especially important discussion in the debate over the future of our government. Whether we choose to follow the path President Obama has begun to lead us down; that is, to a redistributive welfare state that, to one degree or another, attempts to equalize results. Or whether we choose to walk the road of Representative Paul Ryan whose plan trims the size of our entitlement programs to ensure we remain an opportunity society.

Each side is vying for the title of “fair.” Liberals say it is only fair that those who earn more should greatly subsidize everyone else. Conservatives say that there can be nothing fair about taking what someone has earned and giving it to someone else.

Their quest has led them to some interesting theoretical debates. The newest, and perhaps most entertaining, is an attempt to highlight the utter absurdity of redistribution in other settings.

For instance, Robin Hanson, asked the question, if we can redistribute wealth, why not apply the same principle to grades?

First, a little bit about Mr. Hanson. He first received a B.S. in physics from the University of California Irvine, then went on to earn an M.S. in physics and an M.A. in Conceptual Foundations of Science from the University of Chicago, then a Ph.D. in social science from Caltech, and then a Ph.D in artificial intelligence, Bayesian statistics, and hypertext at Caltech. All that is to say…this guy knows a little bit. He’s also been through the educational ringer enough to understand the parallels between earning grades and earning money.

Hanson argues,

Most people believe that redistributing money within a nation is good, but that redistributing GPA within a school is bad, and if asked why these should be treated differently, have little to say. My point isn’t to say one can’t come up with reasons to treat these differently.  One could, for example, argue that we prefer differing school signals to help employers sort people into jobs, to achieve higher productivity so that the pie is bigger when we redistribute money. My point is that most people can’t think of such reasons, making it pretty unlikely that such reasons are the cause of their opinions.

It’s a pretty powerful point. There are a lot of similarities between grades and income. Presumably they are both reflective of merit, having been earned by labor or intelligence. They serve as important signals, money incentivizes work, grades incentivize study. And they are the product of value judgments on behalf of the earner, that is, we can sacrifice grades or income to pursue other interests.

The comparison also provides a useful tool for college students, who often haven’t earned wages, to engage in the debate over the desirability of distributive systems on something more than an academic level. And it should come as little surprise that few liked the idea of shaving points off their 4.0 to provide some GPA help to their less academically successful classmates.

This led blogger Megan McCardle to conclude that “most of us want to redistribute income because, well, we wanna…not because we have any particularly good reason.” Shouldn’t redistributing someone’s earned money require a better reason than “we wanna”?


Zach.Howell
Posted: Monday, May 9, 2011 - 15:39

They’re at it again! Those damn corporations are making money again. The nerve! And it’s at a time when the unemployment rate remains at 9 percent. Have they no heart? Have they no shame?

Well, no and no. Corporations aren’t people. They don’t have a heart and thus aren’t created to act altruistically. They’re created to make as much money as possible in a legal and socially responsible way. They also have no shame, at least not when it comes to the American voters. That’s simply not who they answer to, they’re responsible to their owners, the people who have invested money in the hopes of a return.

That may rub you the wrong way, but it’s the truth. And such as system has done more to bring prosperity to the world than any system otherwise devised by man. Nevertheless, liberals have taken the chance to jump on the bad optics of the situation, pointing to very good profits for businesses while American workers continue to struggle.

And to be quite honest, it does look pretty bad. Blogger Ezra Klein points to an especially telling statistic from the Fortune 500 press release: “The combined profits of the Fortune 500 increased by 81% – $318 billion – this year, the third largest percentage gain in history.” High profits at a time of such dramatic unemployment?

Of course, he does leave out some facts that would otherwise take away from the argument he’s trying to make – businesses are succeeding while people are suffering. For instance, Klein fails to note that the “Fortune 100 employers have at least 350 openings each, totaling more than 96,000 jobs,” so it’s not as if they’ve stopped hiring. The argument also ignores other economic realities such as the fact that hiring tends to lag behind profit growth and that supposed “record corporate profits” are in actuality an illusion.

Nevertheless, even if we buy into the big-bad companies and their dastardly profits storyline, shouldn’t we be asking why? It seems a far more productive course to ask, why companies aren’t hiring given that they’re reeling in big bucks, rather than vilify them for doing so.

I get the feeling liberals aren’t asking mostly because they’re scared of the answer. But I’m more than happy to give it to them: profits are translating into jobs, just not here.

A significant portion of those reported “profits” are due to what are called “rest of world” profits – money made by U.S. based corporations overseas. Of course, since we have the highest corporate tax rate in the developed world, corporations are none too keen on bringing those foreign profits back onto our shores or back into our economy.

The world economy is becoming increasingly globalized. Technology, most notably the internet, has essentially broken down the barriers which previously stood between nations. Businesses no longer have to be adjacent to the biggest markets, they can make location decisions based on the affordability of labor and the friendliness of their tax code.

And on those points, the United States and other Western nations are falling behind. A lot of that has to do with our growing government. Over the past several decades many traditional economic powers have developed intricate, and expensive, social safety nets. Now the bill for those gaudy purchases is coming due in the form of higher taxes.

Developing nations like India and China aren’t dealing with those fiscal concerns and are free to attract businesses with low labor costs and low tax burdens.

It’s not too late to reverse course. The disconnect between corporate profits and domestic job growth is one of the clearest examples we have of our failing economic policies. That evidence is being ignored. Instead, it’s being used to further paint corporations as villains who deserve higher taxes. Such wrongheaded rhetoric threatens to further alienate corporations from the United States. Instead of saying “damn those corporations are at it again,” why don’t we say “damn, why haven’t we done anything to fix it?


Zach.Howell
Posted: Monday, May 9, 2011 - 15:38

Celebrate good times, come on! (Let’s celebrate)

There’s a party goin’ on right here

A celebration to last throughout the years

So bring your good times, and your laughter too

We gonna celebrate your party with you

Celebrate…

Oh wait, you’re still unemployed? So I guess you don’t me to keep singing Kool and the Gang? Sorry, I was just reading the analysis following this week’s jobs report and assumed the recession was over.

To be fair to the many know-nothings who cheered that Obama’s jobs plan (what plan!?!) was finally showing results or that the stimulus was finally working, there was some good news to cheer about. Friday’s jobs report showed that 244,000 jobs had been created over the past month, the biggest job gains in over a year, and if you exclude Census hires, the most encouraging report we’ve seen since the start of the recession.

But before you pop the champagne, or more likely, since you’ve been unemployed for months, open that last can of Beanie-Weenies, let’s take a deeper look at what’s going on. Despite the job gains, the unemployment actually rose to 9 percent. On its face, that seems to be as inexplicable as Rose Huntinton-Whiteley (WHO?!?) topping Maxim’s annual Hot 100 List.

The problem is that each month the population grows. For the unemployment rate to go down, we cannot just add jobs, we have to add jobs at a faster rate than people are entering the workforce. Even with 244,000 new jobs, we couldn’t get over the hump this month. And as CNN astutely argued, “most people agree that a 9% unemployment rate is too high.” Most people? Pretty sure everyone would tell you that 9% is too high. No wonder more people watch ESPN 37: All Croquet All the Time, than tune in to CNN.

Jokes and inanity aside, the bottom line is that we still have 7 million fewer jobs than we did in 2007. We’ve got a long ways to go, and we’re going to need Washington to stop patting itself on the back and get to work in fixing the problem.

Unfortunately, our two parties have diametrically opposed views of the problem. Democrats believe we must unyieldingly pump money into the economy through government spending, regardless of its impact on the long term. This “the future be damned” approach is surely to the benefit of today’s politicians, who when asked in pre-election town halls what they’ve done to create jobs, could point to the innumerable programs they’ve created to channel taxpayer funds into doing something. Unfortunately, this doesn’t work. One would have thought we learned that lesson following the utter failure of the stimulus bill, but alas Washington is full of slow-learners.

On the other hand, Republicans believe that we must immediately begin to address our deficit that is slowing business investment because of the uncertainty created in the long term. Government debt has serious long term consequences. Eventually interest rates will go up, meaning foreign investment goes down and businesses will suffer. Taxes will also likely have to be raised to make up for the spiraling deficits, adding a further dose of uncertainty to businesses’ bottom lines.

Some, such as Paul Krugman, are attempting to adopt the language of conservatives and use it against them. In a recent article Krugman wrote, “D.C. economic discourse is saturated with fear: fear of a debt crisis, of runaway inflation, of disastrous plunge in the dollar. Scare stories are very much on politicians’ minds.”

He’s right, fear, or perhaps more accurately, uncertainty, is dominating the discourse. The thing is – it’s warranted. Imagine if someone had the foresight (and cajones) to get up before the dot-com bubble and say, “can’t you see, these internet companies are being overvalued, we need a course correction!” Or if someone stood up in 2005 and said, “Perhaps we shouldn’t be encouraging everyone to buy $500,000 homes, after all, what if the market falls?” Would those people likely have been labeled fear-mongers and told to just shut-up and enjoy the party?

Well, pardon conservatives if we’ve learned from the past. Excuse us, while we stand up, unafraid, to say “Perhaps we shouldn’t spend trillions of dollars we don’t have and should instead think about what it will mean for the future.”

So while everyone else sings “Celebrate good times, come on!” we’ll sit back until we’re assured there is really something worth celebrating. Namely, when our government stops spending more money than it has.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Monday, May 9, 2011 - 15:37

The federal government is now trying to tell a company where it can and cannot locate. The National Labor Relations Board (NLRB) has filed a complaint against Boeing for its decision to build a plant in South Carolina rather than in Washington. The idea that the government could wield such power would be absolutely terrifying if it weren’t so downright absurd.

The problems started in 2008 when unionized Boeing workers in Washington went on strike over because the union wanted, among other things, a seat on Boeing’s board. This was not the first time Boeing had to deal with lost production due to worker strikes. In the past 20 years, Boeing union workers have gone on strike four times, the longest being 69 days. As you can imagine, when your workforce doesn’t show up, it can really impact your bottom line. Analysts estimated that the 2008 strike cost Boeing as much as $120 million per day and could have soared higher if orders for their popular plane, the 787 Dreamliner, were canceled.

Unless you worked at Enron or Wall Street you probably recognize that losing billions of dollars is not the soundest of business strategies. The goal of any business is to minimize risk and maximize profits. Of course, the near-constant strikes in Washington were doing the exact opposite. They were forcing Boeing throw money down the drain faster than our spend-happy lawmakers in the nation’s capitol.

Forced to use every ounce of their college education, business acumen, and God-given wisdom the head-honchos at Boeing had an idea – why don’t we build a plant somewhere that we don’t have to stop work every five years. So they did. After looking into some business friendly locales they decided on South Carolina whose right-to-work laws ensured that their plant could actually operate uninterrupted.

More than one thousand jobs and $2 bilion in investment later, the NLRB decided that this simple business decision was in fact a nefarious plot to screw workers and they filed a complaint.

In so doing our government is essentially testing its ability to strong-arm companies into staying in union states. In reality, all they’re doing is making companies’ decision to move investment and jobs overseas that much easier. The outcomes of such a decision would ripple throughout the economy. Business owners will not only be hostages to the demands of their workforce, they’ll be servants of the government. Since their movement will be restricted, businesses ability to “vote with their feet” will be diminished, giving state and local governments the ability to raise tax rates without fear of companies leaving. Prices will rise, businesses ability to compete in the global economy will be diminished, and companies will no doubt flee to less repressive international regimes.

Not even big labor’s most vehement proponents can seem to muster the bluster necessary to defend the NLRB. I laughed out loud after reading a New York Times editorial which began,

“It may be a difficult case to prove, but the complaint filed last month by the NLRB against Boeing is a welcome effort to defend workers’ right to collective bargaining.”

But then the author begins to actually break down the facts. First, he admits that “the company can [legally] decide to locate production in South Carolina because it makes business sense and may include “production stability” as a factor in its decision.” Translated, that means, “even though we really, really want to bend the law to make companies stay in unionized states, it’s gonna be hard to get a judge to buy the turd of an argument we’re trying to sell.

Next, he explains that proving Boeing acted with the necessary “retaliatory” intent may be hard to prove. “Further complicating the NLRB’s case,” the author writes, “Boeing says opening the line in South Carolina will not lead to layoffs in Washington, where it is adding jobs, too.” In fact, it’s adding a lot of jobs. The New York Times reports that Boeing has increased its unionized employment by 2,000 workers since its decision to expand in South Carolina.

Whoa. Back up. Boeing continues to add jobs in the Puget Sound? And the Obama Administration still saw fit to file a complaint? What, are we the United States of the Puget Sound now? Are we going to demand every job created must be created in Washington state. Gimme a break.

In fact, the best argument the proponents of the case can muster is based on a statement made by Boeing officials that supposedly clearly show their decision to locate their new plant in South Carolina was retaliatory. The damning statement –  “We cannot afford to have a work stoppage, you know, every three years,” said a Boeing executive.

That’s it! That’s all you got? That’s not retaliation, that’s a business official with a pulse and a brain in his head! And frankly, those are two qualities I’m not sure apply to the Obama Administration and the NLRB. Obama’s appointments were made with a clear intend of transforming the NLRB into a more liberal, pro-union entity, but presumably they would follow the rule of law. Now, not even that appears a certainty.


Jeremy.Hagen
Posted: Friday, May 6, 2011 - 13:07

 

It’s Friday. Today, millions of Americans woke up, got dressed and ate breakfast, but instead of going to work they are spending another day looking for it. As Americans, we used to celebrate Friday as the end of the workweek – and many of us still do – but to millions of unemployed, Friday has sadly become just another day they don’t have a job. But there is always a chance for a better future, and this point in history is no exception.

Yesterday, Republicans released a “jobs” plan that would make Friday mean something again to millions of unemployed Americans. The plan would create jobs and put Americans back to work by:

  • Cutting government spending to substantially reduce the deficit;
  • Reforming the tax code to lower taxes for businesses and individuals;
  • Freeing the economy from burdensome Washington regulations;
  • Creating a competitive workforce through reforming worker retraining programs;
  • Increasing exports to create more jobs; and
  • Adopting common sense solutions to healthcare, such as allowing small businesses to form “risk pools” and individuals to purchase health insurance from other states.

Read more about the Republican “jobs” plan here.

Americans need a plan that will get government off their back and instead put them back to work. What we don’t need is more taxes, more spending and more regulation. Unfortunately, however, that is the only thing Democrats in Washington D.C. are offering.

Just a couple of days ago, while Republicans were putting the finishing touches of their plan to put America back to work, Democrats were calling in unison for a TWO TRILLION dollar increase in the limit on the national debt. Don’t they understand that we don’t need more government debt in America? 

We don’t need more debt, we need more jobs!

The bottom line is: Americans deserve better and Republicans are trying to make sure they get better.

 


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, May 3, 2011 - 13:57

Two roads diverged in a wood, and I –

I took the one less traveled by,

And that has made all the difference

-   Robert Frost

No, you’re not back in high school English class. We won’t be studying its use of metaphor, breaking down its meter, or even looking studying its deeper meaning. America is faced with a profound choice, a choice of two destinies, and there has been perhaps no more eloquent description of that than in Frost’s “The Road Not Taken.”

America, like the traveler, did not take the one with the “better claim.” We chose to forge our own path, distinct from the most successful nations on earth at the time. Alexis de Tocqueville marveled at American exceptionalism during his travels throughout our nation in the early 1800s, during which he wrote the seminal “Democracy in America.” Tocqueville wrote, “The position of the Americans is therefore quite exceptional, and it may be believed that no democratic people will ever be placed in a similar one.”

What made us exceptional, he found, was our free market ethic, where the individual pursuit of wealth created an egalitarian society where anyone could succeed. Our dignity was tied to our individual success in making our way in the world, not land, titles or even class. There were no such things as commoners or elites except insofar as someone had earned them. Little was given, much was earned, and everyone seemed to be the happier for it.

But are we still exceptional? Recently Paul Ryan asked the same question another way, “Do we still want our traditional American free enterprise system, or do we prefer a European-style social democracy?”

Our nation is older. More mature in more ways than one. And perhaps those Europeans had it right after all. A cradle to the grave welfare state that equalizes economic rewards is the best choice after all.

A recent study compiled by USA Today seems to confirm that American exceptionalism is fading into just another big, wealthy, western nation. They find that,

“A record 18.3% of the nation’s total personal income was a payment from the government for Social Security, Medicare, food stamps, unemployment benefits and other programs in 2010. . . Americans got an average of $7,427 in benefits each in 2010, up from an inflation-adjusted $4,763 in 2000 and $3,868 in 1990.”

Now don’t take any of that as a lecture. This is in no way any individuals’ fault. Politicians were all too happy to expand existing entitlements, create new programs, and increase benefits in the name of appeasing their constituents, but in reality to gain more votes. Who can blame Americans for now holding Washington to its word?

The question is, is this the society that we want? America is the world’s most powerful nation, it’s freest democracy, and biggest economy in no small party because past generations would have answered that question in the negative. As investor and economics blogger Jeff Harding wrote recently,

“Today it is acceptable to rely on government to solve our problems instead of taking responsibility for solving them ourselves. We borrow more, spend more, save less, and rely on government to bail us out in old age. We want government to “take care of us” when it comes to medical care. We have become a culture of entitlement. And our rhetoric is more about victimhood and entitlement than initiative and self-reliance.”

Maybe that is the society we want. But I hope not. It means the death of an exceptional America. Just as it will equalize economic results in society, it will equalize us among other nations. Unwilling to take the chances provided in an opportunity economy, we will slide into a blissful malaise, where we are all happy to be where we are, if only because we never knew what we could become.

Two roads diverged in a wood, and we are now at the moment of choosing. One path is well worn and well marked, the other is overgrown and twisting. I hope we take the one less traveled by, for as our own history shows, that makes all the difference.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, May 3, 2011 - 13:57
Lemonade Stand Nostalgia - How Government Regulation is Squashing EntrepreneursSun. 05.01

Posted by: admin

The American people deserve a regulatory system that works for them, not against them: a regulatory system that protects and improves their health, safety, environment, and well-being and improves the performance of the economy without imposing unacceptable or unreasonable costs on society; regulatory policies that recognize that the private sector and private markets are the best engine for economic growth; regulatory approaches that respect the role of State, local, and tribal governments; and regulations that are effective, consistent, sensible, and understandable. We do not have such a regulatory system today. – Executive Order 12866 issued by President Bill Clinton in 1993

Are things any better today? No. According to a recent report by the Heritage Foundation, 43 major new regulations were put in place in 2010, with compliance costs topping $26.5 billion – far more than any other year. With Obamacare’s dozens of new regulations being slowly implemented, it’s a pretty safe bet 2011 will also finish as a banner year for the regulatory state.

President Obama recognized the growing backlash to big government, so he, like his predecessor Bill Clinton issues an Executive Order to deal with the problem. “It orders a government wide review of the rules already on the books to remove outdated regulations that stifle job creation and make our economy less competitive,” Obama said in an accompanying op-ed. “It’s a review that will help bring order to regulations that have become a patchwork of overlapping rules, the result of tinkering by administrations and legislators of both parties and the influence of special interests in Washington over decades.

Read in its entirety, Obama’s op-ed reads as a rip off of Clinton’s statement on the regulatory state – we need government regulations that “strike the right balance.” One that “preserves the freedom of commerce” while also “protect[ing] the public against threats to our health and safety.” But it is more clear than ever that we do not have such a regulatory system today.

I was drawn to this topic after reading an op-ed in today’s Los Angeles Times. It is written by the father of an 8-year-old who has embraced her inner entrepreneur and wants to open a lemonade stand. Surely this brings back memories for a bunch of us. I remember going to the store, buying some vegetable seeds, starting my own garden, and then going door to door to sell fresh tomatoes and other produce. Little did I know that I was a criminal.

Selling lemonade seems about as innocent a childhood pursuit as one could imagine. And then the government gets involved. The father describes his “three-day phone trek through the maze of government agencies that regulate businesses and food sales,” after which he watched as his “child’s All-American plan crumble like fresh-baked cookies.”

First, he called the Parks Department, which maintains the pedestrian trail where his daughter wanted to set up her lemonade stand. They said the couldn’t allow it because it would be “dangerous.” He then called the Health Department which tolld him that “no child can legally operate a lemonade stand” in their city. The father recalls,

“A practical woman as well as a killjoy, she said that near her home, she wouldn’t prevent a kid from operating a stand: “The neighbors would hate me.” But if her department got a complaint about a kid in another neighborhood, the enforcement team would be dispatched. The kid would be instructed to shut down his stand. If he refused to obey, the police would be called to cite the child for violating the health code, which applies to children no less than to adults.”

Even if his child could have navigated those mazes of bureaucracy, zoning laws would have prohibited the lemonade stand in residential neighborhoods. Of course, they may have been able to operate it elsewhere, but would have had to pay business and vending licenses.

What no doubt began as a lesson in entrepreneurship and money management ended with a lesson in governmental inefficiency.

The escalating bureaucracy has massive costs. The Small Business Administration estimates the annual cost of federal regulations to be $1.76 trillion. That’s nearly double the amount collected in federal individual income taxes! Hundreds of billions of dollars are being added on to that each year. While the economic drag can be quantified, their true cost, in terms of their impact on things like entrepreneurship is much larger.

We’re not just talking 8 year olds and limited stands. We’re talking the next Steve Jobs or the next Bill Gates who is sitting in a garage building the next great product. They should be thinking of how to change the world, not whether or not they are in compliance with some unheard of government regulation. President Obama has talked a big game on striking the right balance in our regulatory state. For all the eight-year-old lemonade stand entrepreneurs out there, I hope he follows through.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, May 3, 2011 - 13:56

President Obama should look older. A few average years in the White House is generally enough to make a President appear to age faster than the villain at the end of Indiana Jones and the Last Crusade. And this presidency has been anything but average. A recession unlike anything we’ve seen since the Great Depression, a health care debate that was enough to give Bill Clinton PTSD flashbacks, two wars, countless natural disasters, an oil spill, spiking gas prices, the list goes on and on.

Now I’m not saying the President couldn’t softened the impact of a lot of those blows, but c’mon he’s been through a lot. And all we get is a few gray hairs. Either he spends every second in between meetings doing yoga or he’s a pretty cool customer, but either way it’s impressive. In fact, I’d put him right at the top of the career lead in “Ratio of Wrinkles and Gray Hairs to Crisis Level Events Managed.”

His latest headache may be the straw that breaks Obama’s back. I’m speaking about the looming vote on the debt limit.

Obama was doomed from the start on this. His entire strategy was built around three simple steps: (1) Make it sound like a failure to raise the debt limit would equal a world directed by Michael Bay – an Armageddon-ish, end of civilization scenario with lots of explosions and no direction, (2) whenever possible use a hostage taking metaphor, and (3) paint any attempt by Republicans to cut the deficit as a clear and unequivocal attempt to shoot that hostage. Of course that whole plan kind of went down the crapper when it was discovered that President Obama voted against raising the debt limit just five years ago. At the time Obama said,

“The fact that we are here today to debate raising America’s debt limit is a sign of a leadership failure . . . Leadership means that the ‘buck stops here.’ Instead, Washington is shifting the burden of bad choices today onto the backs of our children and grandchildren . . . Americans deserve better.”

Yea, pretty tough to recover from that. The only response Obama could come up with was to send his Press Secretary Jay Carney out to say, “He now believes it was a mistake.” He couldn’t even say it himself! That’s right next to “I didn’t inhale and never tried it again” and “It depends on what the meaning of the word ‘is’ is” (both by Bill Clinton) in the “Lamest Excuse or Attempt to Deflect Blame Without Actually Addressing the Issue” Award.

Now the President is being put in the even more awkward position of having to tell Senators that they absolutely must vote to raise the deficit (and while they’re at it they shouldn’t do anything to reduce spending). Good luck with that Jedi Mind Trick: Yes, I voted against the debt limit for much the same reason you are, but that isn’t the history you’re looking for. This time is different. It could be Armageddon. Did I mention it’s like uh, a hostage situation…

To nobody’s great surprise, some levelheaded Democrats are immune to Obama’s wiles.  The Washington Post reports,

Sens. Kent Conrad (D-N.D.), chairman of the Senate Budget Committee, and Joe Manchin (D-W.Va.), a freshman who is running for reelection next year. Sen. Mark Pryor (D-Ark.) told constituents during the Easter recess that he would not vote to lift the debt limit without a “real and meaningful commitment to debt reduction.”

They’re not alone. Senator Amy Klobuchar (D-MN) a faithful White House ally is now saying she’s “hopeful” a debt ceiling vote will come with a plan to cut the deficit. Given that she says almost everything with a smile (oh those Midwesterners!), that’s pretty much the equivalent of yelling “Hey, Obama! Get your butt in gear and do something about this!”

Senator Mark Udall (D-CO) has been a little less cryptic in his criticism. “As catastrophic as it would be to fail to raise our debt ceiling, it’s even more irresponsible to not take this opportunity to own up to our unsustainable spending path,” said Sen. Udall, “If we don’t take action to reduce our deficit spending, Congress will be facing this same debt ceiling vote in the near term – still with no end to our deficits in sight.”

Somewhere Obama is buying a “Touch of Grey” by the caseload and praying that something, anything would go right for him. Of course, he could make this easy on himself and simply own up to the fact that we absolutely must have a workable plan to reduce the deficit. Given that seems unlikely, our President will have to live with the stress that he’s governing to the far left of even his own party. But hey, at least the “birther” thing is behind him.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, May 3, 2011 - 13:55
What a Slow British Recovery Means (and Doesn't Mean) For UsSat. 04.30

Posted by: admin

What better day to talk about the British economy than the day of the Royal Wedding between Prince William and Kate Middleton?

The hype has reached epic heights of ridiculousness. Here’s just a sampling of the Royal Wedding stories I’ve seen over the past few days:

  • A British beer distributor created “Viagra ‘Royal Virility’ Beer,” with three beers equaling one little blue pill. Its advertising slogan? “Arise Prince Willy.” Sigh.
  • A British plumber named Barmy Baz (you can’t make this stuff up) got a tattoo on his teeth of the Prince William and Kate Middleton. I wish I were a fly on the wall when he goes for a job interview, “Excuse me, I think you have something stuck in your teeth.” “Oh, you must mean Kate Middleton.” “I’m sorry?” “I have Kate Middleton tattooed on my teeth.” “Ah, I see. Well, there’s the door.” Perhaps I’d feel a little more sorry for him if it actually looked anything like the royal couple, but instead it looks like a bad portrait of Jodi Foster.
  • For those of you who, like me, are literally nauseous at the thought of reading one more Will and Kate story, you’re in luck because they’ve made Royal Wedding sick bags! That’s right, for a little under $5 you can have a barf bag, I’m sorry, apparently they’re called “Throne Up” bags, so you can upchuck in style.

But I digress, there are actually things happening in Britain beyond a wedding, things that may have great importance to something other than the tabloid industry on our shores. You see, the United Kingdom, where politicians aren’t so scared of their own shadow that they actually do things, passed an austerity budget in order to avert economic collapse due to their huge deficits.

Conservatives in the United States have been attempting to do something similar. It’s little wonder then why we’ve been looking on anxiously to see how budget cuts are going over across the pond. Today’s GDP report provides the first indication, and, much to the chagrin of the Lefties, it was decidedly mediocre. The report showed that GDP grew by 0.5% in the first quarter, a 1% improvement over the 0.5% contraction seen in the fourth quarter of 2010.

Liberals will no doubt crow at the result. “See! See!” they’ll yell, “we told you more government spending is what we needed.” They’ll once again go to their closets, dust off their Keynes’ bobble-heads and proclaim that they were right all along.

To which I say, bollocks! These bloody liberal blighters have cocked-up the economy for years now with their dodgy deals. If these prats think one GDP report is enough to make us turn-tail then their gormless gits. Alright, now that I’ve used up every British insult I know, on to some true analysis.

First off, it’s not as if they didn’t try the big-government thing for a long. As British Labour (the equivalent of Democrat) Prime Minister James Callaghan once said,

“We used to think that you could just spend your way out of a recession and increase employment by cutting taxes and boosting government spending. I tell you, in all candor, that option no longer exists; and that insofar as it ever did exist, it only worked by injecting bigger doses of inflation into the economy followed by higher levels of unemployment as the next step. That is the history…”

They had their chance, how about we give something new a try.

Second, quit pretending as if they even had an option. Unfortunately, not even the best economists in the world have quite figured out how to continuously spend more than you take it without terrible long-term consequences. It reminds me of the scene in Willy Wonka and the Chocolate Factory when Wonka tells the children he was trying to do the impossible – create a candy that tastes like a four course meal. The problem was he couldn’t get it to work and told the kids not to try any. A spoiled brat named Violet jumps up and does it anyway. Next thing you know she turns into a blueberry. Confused by the idiocy around him Charlie asks his Grandpa Joe why she didn’t listen to which grandpa responds, “Because, Charlie, she’s a nitwit.”

That’s exactly what all these big-government liberals are – nitwits. It’s more likely that we’ll find a way to turn children into blueberries than it is that we’ll find a way to rack up deficits with no economic consequences. As economist Tyler Cowen explained on his blog,

“The case for the cuts is not that they will spur growth, but rather forestall a future disaster. That’s hard to test . . . It’s fine to call the case for the cuts underestablished, but that’s distinct from claiming that poor GDP performance shows the cuts to be a mistake.”

Finally, give it some time people! Brilliant economist Milton Friedman used the analogy of a recovering alcoholic to explain the difficulty of weaning ourselves off of big government spending. “The cure for alcoholism is simple to state: stop drinking. It is hard to take because. . . the bad effects come first, the good effects come later. The alcoholic who goes on the wagon suffers severe withdrawal pains before he emerges in the happy land of no longer having an almost irresistible desire for another drink.”

The economy will need time to adjust. When the government isn’t artificially pumping money into the system the markets will eventually reach a healthier equilibrium, but not before a period of lower economic growth. Patience my friends, you’re on the path to prosperity.

And that concludes the economic lesson. You may now go back to consuming endless coverage of a real British story you care about – the Royal Wedding.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, May 3, 2011 - 13:55

In hindsight the collapse of the housing bubble should have been very easy to see. The price of homes was skyrocketing year after year. The seemingly endless growth led politicians to push policies encouraging homeownership as the pathway to wealth and led lenders to feel complacent about giving homes to people they would have laughed out of their office 20 years before. Or, as Oprah would say, “you get a house, you get a house, you get a house, everybody gets a house!”

But then it all fell apart. As it turns out not everyone can afford a $400,000 house. Who knew! The result were numerous foreclosures as people figured out that their home was worth immensely less than they were going to have to pay for it. Banks, who had purchased and bundled all of these bad loans into “mortgage backed securities” either went under or were bailed out by taxpayers. The economy tanked, unemployment soared, and an entire generation of Americans may never recover.

Given that it’s pretty hard to imagine how the past three years could have gone any worse, one would think we would be keeping a close eye for any other bubbles in our midst. But as the immortal Harry Dunne from Dumb and Dumber said, “Just when I thought you couldn’t possibly be any dumber, you go and do something like this . . . and totally redeem yourself.” Of course, that “something like this” was trading a van for a small scooter when they had to travel from Nebraska to Colorado.

It’s hard to feel that we’ve done any better. We’re on the brink of trading one crisis for another. I’m talking about student loans.

Malcolm Harris analyzes the eerie similarities between the two situations in the fledgling political magazine N+1. He finds, that “since 1978, the price of tuition at US colleges has increased over 900 percent, 650 points above inflation.” That makes the housing bubble, in which home prices only increased 50 points above inflation, seem relatively benign by comparison. Perhaps that would be sustainable if the wages of college graduates was at least doing something to keep pace. But alas, salaries have largely stagnating, which has helped make student loans the single largest source of debt.

Nevertheless, just as the Department of Housing and Urban Development pushed Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac to lend to more low-income buyers in the name of meeting “affordable housing goals,” the Obama Administration is pushing more at-risk students into expensive colleges. And not just a few more; he has set a goal of adding 11 million more college graduates by 2020. Although that may sound like a laudable goal, so to did providing homes for the poor, the problem is that in both cases we may end up pushing people into debt burdens they simply can’t afford

The parallels don’t end there. Harris explains:

“During the expansion of the housing bubble, lenders felt protected because they could repackage risky loans as mortgage-backed securities . . . [to] theoretically spread the risk of default . . . But since this wouldn’t be America if you couldn’t monetize your children’s futures, the education sector still has its equivalent: the Student Loan Asset-Backed Security.”

With default rates rising, this situation will eventually turn disastrous. The default rate has gone up every year since 2005. We can’t provide true default numbers because statistics aren’t even kept for loans that default after the first two years of payment. To hide just how bad things have gotten, lenders have been handing out deferments and forbearances quicker than Democrats can spend money. In fact, a mere 40 percent of student loans are in active repayment. A new study by the Higher Education Policy, finds that 41 percent of recent borrowers are either delinquent or in default on their payments.

So what needs to be done? Sadly, there’s so much that it goes beyond the scope of this blog, but here are a few quick suggestions to get things back on the right track:

  • Eliminate the bureaucracy: In his article (this guys good!) Harris points to a Department of Education estimate that by 2014 there will be more administrators than instructors at four year colleges. If you’re wondering why tuition is skyrocketing, thereby driving up student loan debt, there’s a big chunk of your answer.
  • Get government out of the student loan business: In 1993, Congress established a “public option” for students in an attempt to achieve lower rates for students. By 2007, Congress was back to tinkering, mandating that lenders maintain interest rates so low they couldn’t make a profit. To compensate the federal government began purchasing loans and never looked back. Now, with the passage of the student loan reform as part of the healthcare bill, the Department of Education is the exclusive originator of student loans, meaning that if the market collapses a bailout is in store. But risk-free loans could provide further incentive for colleges to continue to jack up the rates, knowing that Uncle Sam won’t shut off the tap to meet its education goals
  • Utilize the free markets: A college degree used to give you a leg up in the job market. Now, with diplomas as ubiquitous as the Kardashians, a grad degree is the supposed ticket to success. This one-size fits all approach to education has to end. Some career paths need not include a college degree, much less four more years of graduate school. We need to encourage things like trade schools, apprenticeship programs, and community colleges so that young adults can truly shop for an educational opportunity that best suits their wallets and their career goals.

The looming student loan crisis is easy to see. Then again, so was the housing bubble. The question is, are we as a society ready to set aside our blind altruism and greed in the name of avoiding it.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, April 26, 2011 - 09:17

It’s been far too long since I’ve had a good Krugman-bashing column. For those of you who don’t read regularly enough to understand that first sentence, first off, why not!?!?, and secondly, it’s become a mini-hobby of ours to read and dispel the myths that uber-liberal economist and columnist Paul Krugman attempts to pass off as fact. Just how long has it been? Well, if our count is right then it’s been since October and a lot has happened since then. Republicans took the House, protesters shook the Middle East, Prince William and Kate Middleton reigned the tabloids, and Rebecca Black was the bane of the internet.

In other words, we’re due for another Krugman-centric column. Fortunately, the Nobel-winner turned fallacy-spinner always provides some sort of ridiculousness deserving of our attention. This week’s “it-would-be-funny-if-liberals-didn’t-take-him-deathly-serious” comment by Krugman was this:

Here’s my question: How did it become normal, or for that matter even acceptable, to refer to medical patients as “consumers”? The relationship between patient and doctor used to be considered something special, almost sacred. Now politicians and supposed reformers talk about the act of receiving care as if it were no different from a commercial transaction, like buying a car — and their only complaint is that it isn’t commercial enough.

What has gone wrong with us?

Us? Is this one of those attempts to pass off your own ideological weaknesses onto the unsuspecting public? It’s like when your girlfriend breaks up with you with the pseudo-compassionate “It’s not you, it’s me” line. You both know it’s not true. So pardon us if we refuse to indulge in Krugman’s attempt to lump us into some faceless gang of wrong-headed John Does.

Krugman’s lament, that health care has eroded its focus on relationships to one of bottom-lines, is aimed at Republican’s plan to “make government health care programs more responsive to consumer choice.”  This, we are told, is not only a terrible idea, but the “idea that all this can be reduced to money – that doctors are just ‘providers’ selling services to health care ‘consumers’ – is, well, sickening.”

Pardon me while I gag. What is truly sickening is the utter hypocrisy of Krugman’s argument. One need look no further than Democrats’ own plans for health care to understand how preposterous this argument is. The Democrat-passed Obamacare plan’s entire attempt at cost-saving was predicated on the idea of driving a wedge between the doctor-patient relationship. The idea was for a panel of government bureaucrats to make decisions on what treatments were worthwhile, which procedures cost to much, and weigh the number of lives saved versus the cost to the taxpayer. This was Democrats best idea for savings.

To see but one example of this gross distortion of the doctor-patient relationship look no further than the George-Orwell-cound’t-have-named-it-better-himself “Independent Payment Advisory Board.” The board is tasked with finding and implementing savings in Medicare, including designated procedures that the program will and won’t fund.

Now members of both parties are expressing unified dislike of the idea. Representative Paul Ryan (R-WI) said Congress should not “delegate Medicare decision-making to 15 people appointed by the president.”  Democrats, such as Rep. Allyson Schwartz (D-PA) are equally as upset, “It’s our constitutional duty, as members of congress, to take responsibility for Medicare and not turn decisions over to a board. Abdicating this responsibility, whether to insurance companies or to an unelected commission, undermines our ability to represent our constituents, including seniors and the disabled.”

Rather than put the decision-making in the hands of government-goons, the Republicans had the idea of simply allowing the government to write a check to Medicare beneficiaries. This money could then be used by seniors to pursue whatever treatment options they preferred.

Somehow in Krugman-land, this patient-centric plan is “sickening” for its preservation of consumer choice, but Obamacare’s Board is somehow right as rain. The fact is, it is Democrats, not Republicans, who are pushing the “idea that all this can be reduced to money.” Of course, Krugman even admits this in his post, saying

“We have to do something about health care costs, which means that we have to find a way to start saying no. . . Before you start yelling about “rationing” and “death panels,” bear in mind that we’re not talking about limits on what health care you’re allowed to buy with your own money. We’re talking only about what will be paid for with taxpayers’ money.”

So I guess the money you pay in taxes is no longer “your own money.” Now that though really is, to steal a word from Krugman, “sickening.”


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, April 26, 2011 - 09:17

For something called “The People’s Budget” I’m finding very few people actually have any idea what it is. I’m endeavoring to change that. Mind you, that’s not because it is particularly good, but because for something that we, the people, have apparently given our endorsement to, it is terrible.

The inaptly named “People’s Budget” is a product of the Congressional Progressive Caucus, i.e. the left wing’s left wing. These people are so liberal, Lyndon B. Johnson rolls over in his grave at the mere mention of them.

That said, their budget rests on a positive premise – the elimination of the deficit – but accomplishes that task by completely ignoring Medicare, Medicaid, and Social Security and relying almost exclusively on tax hikes. And boy, are we talking tax hikes! Although the Progressives tell us that their budget “eliminates the deficit in a way that does not devastate what Americans want preserved,” they apparently don’t believe worker’s income should fall into that category. They allow the Bush-tax cuts to expire, the majority of which lowered middle-class taxes; introduce a millionaire tax rates in which they add tax rates up to 49 percent; increase taxes on capital gains; drastically increase the death tax, with a top rate of 65 percent; dramatically raise payroll taxes to pay for Social Security; and introduce a rash of new taxes on businesses including higher rates, a “financial crisis responsibility fee” and a “speculation tax.”

Of course it is difficult to understand just radical that last paragraph is because although the tax hikes are clear enough, their effect on the average person’s wallet is less discernable. Unfortunately, it appears the authors of “The People’s Budget” intended it that way

In fact, the authors talk about taking “millionaires and billionaires” but completely ignore the effect their budget will have on the middle class. Could they possibly pull this off? Can they expand the welfare state (they add the public option to an already-broken Obamacare), increase spending by around $1.5 trillion over the next decade, and still maintain taxes for the middle class? Unless they can work miracles, then no, this is patently absurd.

But lo and behold they can work miracles! If you take a look in the budget’s appendix you find an assumption that the plan’s net effect on economic growth would be a positive .3 percent! As brilliant economist Tyler Cowen writes on his blog Marginal Revolution, the idea that a 70 percent income tax rate and a 50 percent capital gains rate could lead to economic growth is just, well, silly.

There have been some good criticisms of the funny assumptions behind the Ryan plan, but actually this budget isn’t better, either in terms of its final conclusions, its adherence to best scientific practices, or its transparency in getting to its results.  Should we not apply equally high standards to both the Ryan budget and this?  There are plenty of good arguments that taxes have to go up, but this particular proposal isn’t one of them.

Although Cowen doesn’t exactly spell it out, instead choosing to poke fun at the assumptions, the dramatically higher taxes in “The People’s Budget” would spell doom for the economy.  Chief among the plan’s problems, especially for the middle class, is dramatically higher payroll taxes. These are among the most economically harmful taxes imaginable because they make it directly more expensive for businesses to hire new workers. Unemployment would necessarily skyrocket and jobs would flock overseas.

A higher capital gains rate would contribute to the problem.  By taxing investment and capital formation we diminish economic growth, reduce the incentive to save, and hurt productivity growth. Of course, that’s if businesses for some unknown reason decide to stay in the United States under this senseless budget plan. In fact, following the people’s budget would give us the highest capital gains tax rate in the world, higher than Denmark (45%), Sweden (30%), the UK (18%) and economic powers like Germany, India, Hong Kong, and Singapore, all of which have a zero percent rate.

Liberal economist Paul Krugman, who drools like a toddler at the thought of raising taxes, obviously loves this plan. Although his adoration is obviously misplaced, he does ask a good question: “Why does this plan get no attention, while the cruel fantasies of the right get headlines?” I don’t know the answer, but I’m happy to do my part to share this merciless plan of the Progressives with the rest of the world. Only then will people understand just how sane Paul Ryan’s Path to Prosperity really is.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Tuesday, April 26, 2011 - 09:16

There is just not enough time in the day to dispel every liberal myth that pops up. Most days I feel like I’m playing whack a mole. Fun, except for the fact that I’ve been playing for years now, have developed the equivalent of tendinitis in both elbows, and those darn moles just keep popping up faster-and-faster. I need a bigger hammer.

Typically, I attempt to dispel one dumb liberal myth per blog post, but with the misconceptions flying fast and furious around Republicans’ deficit reduction plan, new measures must be taken. So here I’ll attempt to break down three: (1) That poor polling of the Medicare plan should derail attempts at reform, (2) that the Ryan plan’s tax cuts fly in the face of his deficit reduction attempts, and (3) that we don’t even need to discuss entitlement reform to solve the deficit.

The first problem is the biggest. Nothing gives politicians the heebie-jeebies like bad poll numbers. And admittedly, polls show that Paul Ryan’s Medicare proposal is going over about as well as Rebecca Black’s Friday music video. A Washington Post-ABC News poll found that 65 percent of Americans think Medicare should “remain as it is today” rather than be changed so that “people over 65 would receive a check or voucher…they can use to shop for their own private health insurance.”

Liberals have attempted to adopt the same line that conservatives took when Obamacare was polling poorly. They’re calling Republicans hypocrites for using poor poll results to argue vociferously against Obama’s health reforms while ignoring them to push their own Medicare reforms. What they fail to understand is the dramatic difference between the two.

Obamacare promised something for nothing. It created another entitlement and hid the pricetag. That should have been a fairly easy sell. It wasn’t – a reflection that it was a pretty terrible idea. Paul Ryan’s Medicare reform does something much harder. It takes another program, like Obamacare, in which the federal government has overpromised, and makes it fiscally sound. To do so, it has to cut through the politician-created illusion of a free lunch.

Given the need to bring us back down to reality, it is little surprise that Medicare reform doesn’t poll well. The real surprise is that Democrats couldn’t sell people on another government program.

The next myth, propagated by writers like Jonathan Chait of The New Republic is that Ryan’s plan not only cuts Medicare, but it does so in order to provide tax cuts for the rich. That’s more ridiculous than the sad fact that the Snuggie – a blanket with arms – actually made someone rich. There is no tax cut in Paul Ryan’s plan. He maintains the current rates, which have been law for more than a decade. When you dig past this patent ridiculousness, it’s easy to see that Ryan’s plan seeks to restrain Medicare spending growth in order to avert a tax increase on everyone.

The final myth that I’ll dispel here is one that makes me sad. Sad that time must be spent, words must be typed, and gigabytes must be forever wasted to rebut such a ridiculous notion. The idea, a growing one among liberal wonks, is that there is a very simple plan that will solve our budget problems – do nothing.

A normal person would stare at $14.3 trillion in red ink and $1 trillion deficits as far as the eye can see and say that’s preposterous, but not this vanguard of American liberalism. Their position can be summed up in one graph, or as Ezra Klein called it “The graph all budget discussions should start with:

The graph shows that if the tax code is left alone, in that the Bush tax cuts expire and the Alternative Minimum Tax continues to creep downward, revenues will somewhat coincide with the growth of Medicare, Medicaid, Social Security, and other spending. Liberals like to use this graph to show that the budget can be balanced without radically reforming entitlements.

What this graph also shows, but what liberals fail to mention when explaining it, is that balance is only achieved through massive tax increases. Historically, taxes have averaged 18% of GDP, under this scenario taxes would nearly double, to 31% of GDP. Moreover, this huge new tax burden would be carried by the middle class, as the Alternative Minimum Tax, gradually expands to hit lower earners. Ross Douthat explains in the New York Times,

Today, for instance, a family of four making the median income — $94,900 — pays 15 percent in federal taxes. By 2035, under the C.B.O. projection, payroll and income taxes would claim 25 percent of that family’s paycheck. The marginal tax rate on labor income would rise from 29 percent to 38 percent. . . Such unprecedented levels of taxation would throw up hurdles to entrepreneurship, family formation and upward mobility.

I won’t even get into the multiple reasons why the graph is wrong (it doesn’t discuss exploding interest costs, for instance), suffice it to say that it still paints an unsustainable future. Entitlements must be reformed, the question, and one that rightly deserves debate, is how to go about doing it. Sadly, if liberals continue to rely on tricks like these, it doesn’t appear that adult conversation is forthcoming anytime soon.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Wednesday, April 20, 2011 - 15:45

It’s springtime in America, which means baseball is back in full swing. Whether you love or hate it, hard-ball is a national pastime, as American as apple pie. In fact, baseball has been a part of our DNA as early as the 1850s and has reflected, and often led cultural shifts in the United States.

During its centuries-long tenure as one of America’s most popular sports, it has undergone its fair share of problems. From the Black Sox, to Pete Rose, to the cancellation of the ’94 World Series, baseball has often had to regain the trust of America. But among these problems the Steroid Era may pose the biggest threat. It’s easy to see why steroids became popular among players and ignored among management. Scoring jumped, salaries soared, and records fell, and, as the saying went “chicks dig the long ball.” But it was a short-lived high, followed by scandal, legal trouble, and declining attendance. It was the ultimate black-eye for America’s game.

Our government faces much the same problem. Deficits are their steroids. For years Washington has been spending, and spending, and spending in a desperate attempts to buy voter interest. It has largely worked. Voters, like the MLB, has largely been willing to turn a blind-eye from our representatives spending habits in return for more and bigger government benefit programs. But just as Mark McGwire, Barry Bonds, and Sammy Sosa’s demolition of Roger Maris’ home run record was an illusion, so too was the notion that Washington could give us something for nothing.

Now that fantasy is coming crashing down. Our deficits, brought on by an addiction to big-government spending now threatens everything America has built. The latest sign of our imminent decline came today when prominent credit rating agency Standard & Poor lowered its outlook on US bonds. In a statement, S&P said,

“Because the U.S. has, relative to its “AAA” peers, what we consider to be very large budget deficits and rising government indebtedness and the path to addressing these is not clear to us, we have revised our outlook over the long-term rating to negative from stable.”

Perhaps more alarming was the White House’s response. “We simply believe that the prospects are better,” said Jay Carney, the President’s chief spokesman. That would be like baseball commissioner Bud Selig getting up in the middle of 2005 and saying, “Rather than consider these steroid allegations, we choose to believe that player’s are simply eating better and working out harder.” But just as Americans saw Barry Bonds’ head grow to the size of a watermelon, we can see that Washington has an enormous spending problem.

The impacts of our fiscal hubris are already coming to fruition. Brazil, Russia, India, China, and South Africa, the so-called “BRICS” nation, just concluded a meeting to discuss the inadequacies of the current monetary order – namely, one dominated by the dollar.

Leaders of the BRICS nation cited Washington’s neglect over its global monetary responsibilities as necessitating a global shake up. In a statement they argued a “broad-based international reserve currency system providing stability and certainty” was needed given new realities. Essentially, the BRICS are worried that our enormous deficit is going to debase the dollar, hurting not only us, but disrupting the world economy.

Losing our status as the world’s reserve currency, as the BRICS nations hope, would be economically disastrous for the United States. Since the dollar is universally accepted, there is a far larger market for dollar-denominated debt than with other currencies. Effectively, that means we are able to sell our debt with lower interest rates. If that ends, and interest rates on our $14.2 trillion debt skyrocket, not only will we immediately have to curtail our spending habits (not a bad thing) but we’d have to pay hundreds of billions more dollars annually in interest payments. That’s our tax dollars we’re talking about.

So if we’re sticking with the baseball analogy it losing our status as the reserve currency because of our deficit would be as if sports-fans decided that they had had enough of the steroids and betting scandals in baseball and were going to change allegiances to football. Oh wait. That actually happened. Baseball hasn’t completely faded from the American psyche. It’s still raking in money. But it has lost its place as the American game.

Much the same thing is happening to the United States. Unless something drastic happens, we’ll always be a world power, our economy is just too big for that to change. But our place at the top is not assured. Deficits, like the steroid controversy, has the ability to gradually erode support in the world. The question is, will Obama be like Commissioner Bud Selig, stick his head in the sand, and act as if all is well with the world? Sadly, that appears to be the case.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Monday, April 18, 2011 - 16:25

As budgetary plans go, Obama’s speech was a bunch of crap. It was a highly polished and thickly deodorized piece of crap, but crap nonetheless. But the more I think and ponder about how on Earth our President could be so thick-headed as to go up against uber-wonk Paul Ryan, armed with nothing but four ideas that a kindergartener would find simplistic, the more I realize this wasn’t a speech about the budget at all. This wasn’t about beginning the serious conversation about our deficit that Republicans have been longing for. This was nothing more than the first campaign speech for the 2012 presidential race. What a shame.

That realization becomes even clearer when you go back and look at the scorecard over the past four months:

First, President Obama proposed a budget. It was a god-awful monstrosity of a budget that was so ridiculous in its unwillingness to tackle spending that it is now only remembered by its initials – WTF (Winning the Future…although upon seeing the details we all mumbled the more common meaning of those letters).

Second, House Republicans under the leadership of Representative Paul Ryan created and introduced a budget. Although views are widespread, it is uniformly praised for being an honest attempt to solve our most difficult budgetary problems. No sacred cows were spared, no punches were pulled, and every liberal screamed in terror. President Obama’s budget reportedly packed up its bags and caught the first Greyhound bus outta town, shaking his head and whispering “I know when I’m beat”

Third, Senate Democrats have continued to punt on producing a budget document. It’s as if Senate Majority Leader Harry Reid was at the blackjack table, got dealt a pair of threes and, thinking himself very bold, decided to stay. No, it’s just dumb. You can’t win if you don’t even try. Sadly, in Washington-style gambling Democrats think they can take the pot solely by making fun of Republican’s hand, which in this case happens to be blackjack. They might be right.

Fourth, President Obama gives a speech. Remember he’s already presented a budget, one that didn’t mention entitlements, ignored all of the deficit commission’s proposals, and focused on making “investments,” a sadly obvious euphemism for spending. Rather than a budget, this was a meandering collection of idealistic thoughts, bad economics, and rosy assumptions. Compared to Paul Ryan’s detailed plan for saving our future, it’s clear that the only thing Obama’s “four pillars” are good for is stringing up our social safety net and turning it into a hammock in which we can all while away the days before our financial collapse.

So if last night wasn’t President Obama’s budget, what was it? It was the opening salvo in the 2012 elections. Washington Post reporter Dan Balz summed it up, saying:

Obama knows that reaching an acceptable deal with the Republicans would allow him to claim that he had tamed the partisan beast in Washington. Absent such a bargain, Wednesday was all about laying the foundation for a grand debate between the president and his Republican challenger in 2012.

I actually think Balz gives President Obama too much credit. There was nothing in that speech that signaled compromise. In a sentence I daren’t try to improve on, columnist Jonah Goldberg called the speech “A farrago of distortions, self-righteous non sequiturs, and ideological fatwas in the cause of extending his presidency at the expense of both the country and his honor.”

It was a speech that was solely aimed at shoring up, then firing up, his liberal base. Yee-haw you could hear em’ scream, we’re back to the good ol’ days of Bush-bashing, Progressivism-praising, big government, where there a tax-hike and Washington-dollar can solve all our ills. It was one hell of an election speech. The problem was that in the process of getting reelected, the country, and its finances, will go to hell.

But winning liberals will not be enough to win the election. President Obama knows this, which is why by the end of this debate he will inevitably begin pushing for a deal between the two warring factions. In doing so he will appear to have elevated himself above the partisan bickering which he just instigated. It’s a brilliant strategy for winning elections. There are no doubt many people who will fall for it. So in the days leading up to the elections, when you hear President Obama call for the parties to cease fire for the good of America, remember this speech. Remember that it wasn’t a budget, that it wasn’t the foundation for a true debate, it was picking a fight knowing he would be the only winner.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Sunday, April 17, 2011 - 22:55

Imagine spending one-sixth of your annual income on something and then walking out of the store without asking for a receipt. Actually, you walk away less informed than that. You walk away without even knowing what it was you purchased at all.

That would seem to be an insane proposition. After all, nobody, regardless of the state of the economy is prepared to spend that kind of cash without knowing what they were getting. Yet that’s what we do every single year with our taxes. We get our paycheck, enjoy a fleeting sense of pleasure that we now have money in our bank accounted, which quickly switches to a moment of shock and awe about how much of the federal government took as its share, and then we go about our daily lives.

That’s a fairly incomplete chain of thought when you think about it. After all, we have no clue indicating how we should feel about where our tax dollars are going. Should we be utterly pissed that the government is frittering away more money than they should on certain programs. Or should we be pleased that the government’s priorities fall fairly in line with our own. We aren’t given enough information to make these judgments. Instead, in truly paternalistic fashion the IRS does the bureaucratic equivalent of patting us on the head, telling us everything is OK, and sending us back to bed so the grownups can talk.

I’m pleased to say that bipartisan legislation in the House and Senate seeks to pull back the curtain and reveal what the government is doing back there. The idea is for a taxpayer receipt – an itemized breakdown of exactly where your tax dollars of going. A picture is worth a thousand words in this case, so here’s an example of a receipt for someone making around $35,000:

This is a great idea. The only sad thing is, the only reason it is getting any action in Congress is that both sides believe it will benefit them. Democrats believe two things: (1) If we break down the larger deficit picture into bite-size pieces, to show exactly what we spend money on, then Americans will be much more loathe to cut and (2) That it will make Republican attempts to cut smaller things like the EPA seem more trivial, and thus more difficult. Republicans believe the exact opposite, that Americans in general have no idea just how big a portion of their paycheck goes to paying for our largest programs. It will also allow them a powerful visual to show just how much taxes must be increased to pay for the operating deficits in all of these programs.

It’s tough to tell who is right, though if I had to bet, I’d say it would benefit Republicans more. Regardless, this initiative should be supported no matter which party it helps or hurts. A more open process is not a partisan issues, it’s a matter of providing accurate information about how the government spends our money. And with Washington spending more and more of it, racking up tens of trillions of debt in the process, the need for transparency will grow increasingly important.

In the beginning I asked you if you would ever make a thousand dollar purchase without asking for a receipt in return. Now that it appears taxpayers are finally on the verge of being treated as intelligent consumers, perhaps its time they start demanding a return policy. After all, there’s little doubt that Washington is broken.


Zach.Howell
Posted: Wednesday, April 13, 2011 - 22:44

 

President Obama gave another one of his now-patented speeches – full of seering jabs at Republicans mixed in with soaring platitudes about what American can be. It was heavy on rhetoric and light on specifics. The kind of speech that was an absolute joy to listen to, at times making you question if you’re voting for the right party, but at the end you’re left wondering what the heck the point was. I was looking around for the Principal from the movie Billy Madison to stand up and say:

“What you’ve just said is one of the most insanely idiotic things I have ever heard. At no point in your rambling, incoherent response were you even close to anything that could be considered a rational thought. Everyone in this room is now dumber for having listened to it. I award you no points, and may God have mercy on your soul.”

But what makes Obama so good, is that he gets away with it every time. His plan for every crisis is to eventually come up with a plan. The problem is, eventually never happens, and by sheer luck or circumstance the public always forgets that Obama was going to come up with a plan in the first place. That won’t be the case this time because this debt isn’t going anywhere so it will be interesting to see what he comes up with. But as for now, let’s just say I’m not impressed with the bare bones he’s laid out thus far.

To be fair, Obama started strong. He laid out the problem that young people face in no uncertain terms.

“Some of you, particularly the younger people here . . . might be wondering, “Why is this so important?  Why does this matter to me?”

Well, here’s why.  Even after our economy recovers, our government will still be on track to spend more money than it takes in throughout this decade and beyond.  That means we’ll have to keep borrowing more from countries like China.  That means more of your tax dollars each year will go towards paying off the interest on all the loans that we keep taking out.  By the end of this decade, the interest that we owe on our debt could rise to nearly $1 trillion.  Think about that.  That’s the interest — just the interest payments.

Then, as the Baby Boomers start to retire in greater numbers and health care costs continue to rise, the situation will get even worse.  By 2025, the amount of taxes we currently pay will only be enough to finance our health care programs — Medicare and Medicaid — Social Security, and the interest we owe on our debt.  That’s it.”

The troubles arose when he actually attempted to lay out a four-part solution to the problem: cut domestic spending, trim the defense budget, reduce healthcare spending, and reduce expenditures in the tax code. Boil it down and get rid of all the namby-pamby rhetoric and there’s really only two new things here: expand Obamacare and raise taxes.

That, he says is the cure for all that ails us. Yea right. Here’s just some of the flaws in the President’s logic:

  • It’s not a plan, it’s a list of nice talking points. Unfortunately, the CBO doesn’t score speeches, meaning the President can throw around nice big round numbers without the slightest bit of fear that someone will prove him wrong. Case in point: Obama says, “We believe the reforms we’ve proposed to strengthen Medicare and Medicaid will . . . sav[e] us $500 billion by 2023, and an additional $1 trillion in the decade after that.” And I believe that the solution to our deficit is to convince the tooth fairy to give out more than a quarter per tooth. Gimme a break.
  • This is a ten-year “plan.” The trouble is, America’s biggest challenges won’t arise until after that time frame. The baby-boomers are only starting to retire and the vast bulk of their Social Security, Medicaid, and Medicare expenses won’t come for another decade. What will the President do then?
  • The ten-year flaw has two enormous corollaries. First, Obama’s plan saves $400 billion less than the Ryan plan despite its grandfathering of those 55 and older. That fact should tell you everything you need to know about the phony savings of Obama’s “plan.” Second, if Obama would have written a multi-decade plan the explosion in entitlement costs would necessitate not only raising taxes on higher incomes, but those in the middle class as well. Nobody will be spared if our spending trajectory isn’t dramatically altered.
  • Of the $4 trillion President Obama says his plan will save, he’s already prepared to mark $2 trillion of as “mission accomplished.” Between the $1 trillion in deficit reduction he’s claiming in his budget and $1 trillion in anticipated savings from Obamacare, the President is already halfway to his goal. Except nobody really expects the $1 trillion in cuts to come to fruition and fewer than nobody believes that Obamacare will save $1 trillion.
  • Labeling the fourth step as “reducing spending in the tax code” is disingenuous and untrue. If we’re going to have an honest debate, call things what they are. “Reducing spending in the tax code” is just Washington jargon for raising taxes. And while we’re on the subject, I don’t see anywhere in Obama’s “plan” that accounts for the negative impact higher taxes will have on economic growth. Guess he’s really trying to focus on the positives.

Then again, it’s hard to provide substantive criticism of President Obama’s plan because there it has no substance. I have a feeling that’s exactly what Obama wanted. As Representative Paul Ryan said of Obama’s less than tangible critique, “He’s basically a pyromaniac in a field of straw men.” Sadly, unless he comes back to the bargaining table with a real plan, all of America might end up getting burned.


Tierra.Warren
Posted: Wednesday, April 13, 2011 - 10:35

Given the critical success of The King’s Speech you know Hollywood producers are searching President Obama’s past for some speech impediment. You’d not only get one movie, you’d get a series that would make the James Bond franchise look like the model of brevity. If there is a problem you can’t count on Obama to act, but you can take it to the bank that he’s gonna give a speech.

And so it goes with the deficit. On the past week’s Sunday shows, White House adviser David Plouffe announced that President Obama would be making a speech in the near future about deficit reduction and laying out the groundwork for Medicaid and Medicare reform. Someone should tell him he’s a little late to the party on these issues, the GOP has been talking about them for more than a year now, and won back the House based on a promise to reduce spending.

Nevermind any of that, when Obama talks people listen. But Obama’s team appears to be relying on more than just that fact, they’re also hoping you’ve developed a selective memory. That you’ll forget everything he’s done in the past and focus solely on what he’s saying now.

This, of course, requires a lot of forgetting. Forget that he just sent in a $3.7 trillion budget proposal with the highest annual deficit in the nation’s history. Forget that we’ve set record deficits in each year of his presidency. Forget that rather than reform entitlements, he created an entirely new one with Obamacare. Forget that his reckless spending is one of the main reasons he’s now having to give a speech about the need for fiscal responsibility.

So why the sudden about face? Because this man is not change, he’s the consummate politician, consumed not with the idea of bringing a breath to fresh air to Washington, but with ensuring that his brand of stale politician stays around for four more years.

He’s a used car salesman to the core. After all, he’s spent the past four weeks attempting to lead his party’s charge against the modest budget cuts proposed in the Republican’s continuing resolution. Now, after narrowly averting a government shutdown by unwillingly giving in to Republican cuts, Obama turned right around and attempted to sell it as his own! This guy has no shame.

In his weekly radio address, Obama sold the compromise as “an agreement to invest in our country’s future while making the largest annual spending cut in our history.” He also argued that “beginning to live within our means is the only way to protect the investments that will help America compete for new jobs.”

Who is this guy? It certainly doesn’t sound like the same man who has racked up more debt than any President in history. Oh that’s right! It sounds like a guy who is up for reelection in less than two years and is running scared at the thought of running on his record.

We could criticize him for this very clear attempt to play to voter’s concern, nay, fear over our looming debt crisis. You simply don’t spend the way he has over the past three years if you are truly concerned about the impact the growing debt will have on future generations. He simply senses a political opportunity and is ready to exploit it to its fullest. We could nail him for it, but fortunately our job has already been done for us.

Liberals have picked up on Obama’s change in tone and are wondering where oh where their fearless leader went. New York Times columnist Paul Krugman asks, “What happened to the inspirational figure his supporters thought they elected? Who is this bland, timid guy who doesn’t seem to stand for anything in particular?” The Washington Post’s Greg Sargent wonders, “How much are Dems going to be asked to trade away in core liberal priorities in the execution of [Obama’s political] strategy.” And The New Republic’s Jonathan Chait questions, “Why didn’t President Obama at least fight the Republicans to a draw? Why, if he had to move in their direction, did he wind up adopting deeper cuts than even John Boehner originally proposed?”

The answer is: Obama senses that he’s been too liberal for the past two years and now must course correct. It’s probably the smart political thing to do given voters obvious concern with his lurch to the left. It’s definitely the economically correct thing to do given our looming debt crisis.  So despite his questionable motives, and all-too-obvious switcheroo, we’re still happy to have him engage in the deficit conversation.


Jeremy.Hagen
Posted: Tuesday, April 12, 2011 - 13:57

Tiger Woods has elevated himself from an athlete to a cultural phenomenon. His results on the golf course matter far less than his actions off of it. Who he is dating is a much more interesting question than what he shot on the third round of a golf tournament. In much the same way, if not for the same reasons, Barack Obama has followed a much similar path.

There are more similarities between the two than most people think of. Both Tiger and Obama ushered in a new racial era in their respective fields. Golf was the ultimate white man’s game and the men who filled the White House were as white as the house they lived in. Beyond race, both men also expanded their reach to a demographic that golf and politicians had long assumed would be impossible – young adults. Young people followed the rise (and subsequent fall) of Tiger Woods, bringing a newfound interest in the entire sport of golf with them. Suddenly it was no longer just football and basketball that carried the banner of youth appeal, golf, of all sports, was firmly vying for the attention of young adults. President Obama achieved much the same thing in the realm of politics, making it cool to be up on the latest political news, to have Obama bumper stickers, and to, dare I say, vote.

Now they are all consuming entities. The black holes of their genres in that nothing can escape their gravitational fields. If it’s a discussion of politics you can be sure President Obama’s name will somehow find its way into the conversation. If golf is on, you can be sure Tiger’s every shot will be shown, dissected, and likely praised.

The question nobody seems to be asking is, “do these two men still deserve it?”

Tiger’s infidelity, divorce, and subsequent implosion of his golf game has dominated headlines. That’s fine for People and US Weekly, but is that what the readers of Golf Digest should want? Woods has become a pop-culture side-show and yet this past weekend’s Masters was still the Tiger-show. The trouble is, he came in fourth. Given the coverage, you wouldn’t have known it, but the real story was a trio of youngters – Charle Schwartzel, Jason Day, and Adam Scott – who finished atop the leaderboard.

Unfortunately, their run was completely blotted out by the shadow Tiger Woods’.  In my mind, that is a sad thing. Tiger Woods is one of, if not the greatest player of all time, but in charting his decline are we missing the next great thing?

I’m worried the same overshadowing effect is happening with President Obama. There is no doubt he is a cultural icon; a phenomenal politician with a buttery voice and a gift for oratory. His meteoric rise through the ranks, from Illinois Senator to bestselling author to President of the United States, is one for the history books. But he is not without his faults.

Granted, that his mistakes are of a wholly different variety than Woods. We’re talking ill-advised economic policy, not porn stars, Ambien addiction, and custody battles. Nevertheless, President Obama’s policy foibles have begun to impact people’s views about his job performance.

The latest Pew Research Poll shows some troublesome numbers for President Obama. Among the results – by a 56% to 39% margin, Americans disapproved of Obama’s handling of the economy, and by a 59% to 33% margin, voters disapproved of the job he is doing on the federal budget deficit.

Perhaps the most surprising result was the growing divide between President Obama, and his most loyal of followers, young adults. Pew writes,

Even some groups that have generally positive opinions about Obama, such as young people, are critical of his handling of the federal budget deficit. Overall . . . nearly twice as many young people disapprove as approve of his handling of the federal budget deficit (57% to 29%). On this issue, the views of young people are similar to those in older age groups.

In fact, young people’s approval of Obama’s handling of the deficit was the lowest of any age group. The dislike of his policies doesn’t show in the early discussion over the 2012 presidential election. Obama still dominates the field, with no other up-and-comer garnering nearly as much coverage or interest.

The cult-of-personality that surrounds Obama and clouds the field, hides the field of worthy challengers and their solutions to America’s greatest challenges. People like Paul Ryan, Mitch Daniels, and Marco Rubio, who are young, if not in age, but in their relation to the political discourse, are overshadowed in favor of the tired ideas of our President.

Obama had his moment. In it he accomplished quite a bit. But in three short years the challenges our country faces have immeasurably changed and unfortunately he has not adapted to them. It’s time for some new faces and some new ideas; however, that seems impossible given the slavish devotion we, or at least our media, has with our current President.

Tiger and Obama both brought their fields to new heights of public interest and popularity. Overall, the public has been blessed to have seen them leave their mark. But it’s time for the next generation of stars. It’s time for the Rory McIlroys and the Paul Ryans to have their chance in the spotlight, not off in the wings, waiting for the aging stars to exit stage left.


Jeremy.Hagen
Posted: Thursday, April 7, 2011 - 14:14

Representative Paul Ryan’s daring plan to solve America’s debt problem has arrived, bringing with it a rash of criticism from the left.

  • “A path to poverty for America’s seniors and children” – Minority Leader Nancy Pelosi
  • “Pulling the rug out from under seniors” – Sen. Debbie Stabenow (D-MI)
  • “Waging a war on American workers” – Rep. Xavier Becerra (D-CA)

And in reality, those were the nicest things they had to say. I couldn’t find anything written on the liberal blogs that was family friendly enough to post here. As you can see, Democrats are working the political angles to the best of their ability. Their criticisms will inevitably focus on three groups – children, seniors, and the poor (and when they have time left in their soundbite, the middle class).

It all makes for very good politics, but if you peel back the righteous indignation you’re left with a very clear picture – these guys are scared out of their minds.

Why? Because they literally have no substantive response. Nothing. Zip. Nada. They can boo-hoo all they want about how bad the Ryan plan is, but as of now the only plan I’ve seen from Democrats is to spend more money and hope things work themselves out. That’s not a plan, it’s a death wish. We may as well all become Druids and start practicing child sacrifice, it would arguably do less damage to future generations than ignoring the debt burden today’s government is leaving them.

Now don’t get me wrong. Paul Ryan’s budget is tough medicine. It means Americans get less from their government with the understanding that they will be able to provide more for themselves. It fundamentally changes popular programs – a politically tricky exercise, even in this unique fiscal climate.

It transforms Medicare from a defined benefit plan, to provide premium support payments to all beneficiaries. That is, seniors will receive a check equal to what current Medicare beneficiaries receive plus inflation that they can then use in the marketplace to make their own healthcare decisions. Medicaid would also get a facelift, changing the current system to one, which provides states with block grants to cover the costs of health coverage for the poor.

All of that is political dynamite. Don’t handle it properly and you’re liable to blow you and your party’s future straight into oblivion. But use it correctly and you can begin the process of clearing the rubble from our broken entitlement system so we can get to work on laying a new foundation. Regardless, it’s going to be hard, mostly because Democrats will make sure it’s as painful as possible.

But it’s also necessary. That is the key point that we must not lose sight of. The criticisms of the plan will be hard to hear and some of them (OK, probably only a few of them) may make us question whether this is a good idea after all. But when that doubt arises, ask yourself, what is the alternative? If we don’t reform these programs now, our debt won’t allow them to exist in their current state for much longer. The status quo is no longer an option. We either begin the process of negotiating real reforms, or we watch our crumbling entitlement programs collapse. And who benefits from that? Surely not the poor, the elderly, or the children, whom the left are using as human shields to defend their big-government agenda. Years of free-spending have pushed us into a situation where waiting and hoping are no longer options. The times demand action.

Democrats should also be afraid because it puts an end to the notion that tax increases are absolutely necessary in order to balance the budget. Democrats were very clever about their desire for tax increases. They would never say it directly. In that, they learned from the foibles of George Bush Sr. and his “Read my lips” moment. But the fact is they were content to watch government and deficits grow to the point that it would be impossible to disagree with the notion of raising taxes.

But as Ryan’s budget makes clear, not only do we not need to raise taxes in order to balance the budget, we can functionally cut taxes and still achieve a fiscally responsible outcome. That’s right, the plan includes no tax hikes, and yet despite all the warnings by the chicken little’s on the Left, the sky doesn’t fall. Instead it averts a debt crisis, eliminates our deficits, and lowers our debt-to-GDP ratios to below historic levels.

So the next time you hear anyone say, we’re going to need to raise taxes to solve this problem, don’t say a word, just kindly point them to the Republican’s 2012 budget.

The next few days, weeks, and months will be filled with political attacks over this ambitious plan to solve our debt crisis. But like those who vigorously defended the idea that the Earth was flat or violently fought the notion that the sun was the center of the solar system, these debt-deniers will eventually fade into intellectual oblivion. Everyone deep down understands that our government has a spending problem, it just so happens we now have a plan to fix it.

 


Tierra.Warren
Posted: Wednesday, April 6, 2011 - 12:25

You’re a bad person. What? You didn’t know. Sorry you had to find out by reading a blog. Not exactly the best place to make deep personal revelations. What exactly am I talking about? Why, the fact that you hate poor people of course!

What’s that? You say you don’t really hate the poor? Impossible! I’ve read it splashed across nearly every media outlet – Republicans are doing everything they can to take from the poor to give to the rich.

Consider this thoughtful analysis written just today from some of our Lefty friends: Economist Joe Stiglitz wrote an article entitled, “Of the 1%, by the 1%, for the 1%.” Blogger Kevin Drum wrote “congressional Republicans don’t care about poor people. But then, that’s hardly anything new.” And Washington Post columnist Ezra Klein wrote a blog entitled “Republican policies don’t care about poor people,” which actually begins with the line “I’m not saying that congressional Republicans don’t care about poor people.” Oh really? Interesting choice of title then.

So there you have it, if you’re a Republican, and given you’re reading this, you likely are, then you don’t care, and possibly don’t like, poor people. Ergo, you’re a bad person. Sorry I had to be the one to break it to you.

Of course, this is all ridiculous. Republicans, unlike Democrats, don’t rely on invoking class warfare in order to sell their brand of politics. To us it is not about poor or rich (or black and white for that matter), it’s about freedom and opportunity.

You see, when Democrats try and paint the picture of Republicans they always point to the same things – their desire for tax cuts, their disdain for big government programs, and occasionally, their call for elimination of the death tax. The argument goes that Republicans spend all of their time pushing tax cuts for the wealthiest ___ percent of the population, want to eliminate such and such program for the poor, and want millionaires to be able to pass on tidy little trust funds to their children.

Democrats point to the fact that all of these things would raise the deficit. And couldn’t that money be better spent on giving more tax cuts for the poor!

So is that all there is to the story? Is it true that we, or at least our policies, discriminate against the poor. No. Don’t buy that hooey.

We fight for tax cuts for everyone because we believe that it is your money, not the government’s. It just so happens that Republicans have been really good at securing tax cuts for the middle and lower classes. People always forget that the Bush-era tax cuts also lowered rates across the board (including for the middle class), increased the deduction for married couples, and created a child tax credit, among many other cuts and credits.  So when liberals like Ezra Klein write, “If the GOP had wanted, they could’ve used that money for more tax cuts for the poor, or even the middle class,” ask him how that’s possible considering 47 percent of Americans don’t pay federal income tax. Forty-seven percent!

Of course Republicans will be the first to tell you that’s not ideal, but neither is the assumption that the wealthy, who are deserving of as much freedom from government control as everyone else, deserve to pay the entire tax bill for America.

The deeper reason we fight for tax cuts is our fundamental belief in the limited role government should play in our lives. That conflicts with the liberal notion that government has an active role to play in redistributing wealth in order to raise the general welfare.

As conservatives expected all along, and as should have been made clear to everyone over the past five years, weaving an enormous social safety net merely serves to trap us all beneath it. Governments the world over have found the hard way that they simply cannot support big government. Our three largest entitlements, Medicaid, Medicare, and Social Security, are the primary drivers of our historic deficit. They’re finances will only get worse unless something is done to change them. That seems to be the inevitable result of any big-government program.

As these programs finances worsen, their ability to help the poor will be diminished to irrelevance. Is that the outcome that liberals envisioned? Helping one generation of poor at the cost of leaving future generations to flap in the wind? That seems to be a short-sighted and counterproductive way of achieving your stated intent.

Republicans, on the other hand, promote policies that are not only fiscally sustainable, able to help future generations of poor achieve self-sufficiency, but that are full of optimistic individualism. We believe that if provided not with hand-outs, but with the tools to succeed, individuals can thrive on their own hard work and character. It’s the same principle as “Give a man a fish and you feed him for a day. Teach a man to fish and you feed him for a lifetime.” Republicans not only want to teach you to fish, we want to make sure the government doesn’t require a lengthy permit process before you can fish.

Unfortunately, Democrats likely can’t be made to see that. They are blinded in the best cases by their altruism, and in the worst cases by their deserve for class warfare. Either way, they’ll continue to drone on about how Republicans hate the poor. They couldn’t be more wrong.


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, April 5, 2011 - 10:47

 

It’s time. The biggest political battle, potentially of our lifetimes, begins today with the release of Republicans 2012 budget proposal. Now, I’m not one for pep-talks, inspirational speeches, or stirring monologues, but I could this would be the time to bust one out.

This will not be an easy argument to win. Republicans have met the problem head on – taking on not one, but a million, political third rails. Medicaid, Medicare, defense spending, if there is a special interest group with money to spend, you can bet the Republicans’ budget will have offended it. And that’s where we come in.

We are the general interest. The many, but often the silent, who recognize that we’re likely going to have to give a little in order to prevent losing a lot. Unfortunately, the loud minorities will try and drown out our reason. They will say we’re hurting the poor, the elderly, children, the middle class – damn near everyone except the rich.

Influential liberal thinker and writer E.J. Dionne fired his opening salvo yesterday, a clear attempt to get a head start on bashing the budget proposal before it has even been unveiled.

“This is all extreme and irresponsible stuff,” Dionne writes. “The president knows it. The coming week will test who he is. When Ryan releases his budget, will the president finally engage?”

“’This is our time,’ Obama liked to say during the 2008 campaign. This most certainly is his time to stand up for the vision of a practical, progressive government that he once advanced so eloquently.”

What liberals won’t admit is that they haven’t advanced a vision of practical, progressive government. In fact, they’ve done the exact opposite. The Congressional Budget Office’s latest “Long Term Budget Outlook” showed just how impractical big-government progressivism is. According to the CBO, if current trends continue, “the growing imbalance between revenues and noninterest spending, combined with spiraling interest payments, would swiftly push debt to unsustainable levels. Debt as a share of GDP would exceed its historical peak of 109 percent by 2012 and would reach 185 percent in 2035.”

Except it wouldn’t. Global investors would never let it reach that point. A debt crisis would ensue, our economy would tumble, and we would enter a recession that would make this one look like a period of prosperity.

The reason for our deficits is not hard to see. Beyond the ridiculous one-time payments for things like the bailouts of Fannie and Freddie and the stimulus, the main drivers are Medicaid and Medicare. Don’t believe me. The CBO says, “all of the projected growth in primary outlays as a share of GDP in coming years stems from increases in mandatory spending, particularly in spending for the government’s major health care programs: Medicare, Medicaid, the Children’s Health Insurance Program, and insurance subsidies.”

We must reform these programs if we ever want to get a handle on a deficit problem that is quickly spiraling out of control. This is exactly what Republicans will propose today. Yet it is exactly the thing that will cause liberals to heap scorn upon them. It is this that will pose the biggest threat to our party’s political chances in 2012.

To be honest the Republican’s plan is a difficult sell. It asks for fundamental changes to programs that Americans have become very comfortable with. But it is a fact, not an opinion, not a preference, a fact, that these programs cannot continue in their current form. Maintaining them would require doubling the historic level of tax revenue in United States history. It has often been tried, mostly by tinkering with the top tax rate, but it has never succeeded. Tax revenues always hover around 18 percent.

So if the status quo is demonstrably unsustainable, and Democrats are ready to bash the every living daylights out of the conservative vision for reform, the question becomes…what’s their plan? Higher taxes won’t work. If cutting Medicare is an unpopular proposition, just wait until you offer to double tax rates. There is not enough defense cuts a liberal could make to come close to balancing the budget. Entitlements must be dealt with. They cannot just imagine them away with cute phrases like “we must stand for the vision of a practical, progressive government.”

If Democrats really want to engage in this debate, and not just undermine Republican attempts at true change, then we demand a plan. Conservatives are prepared to present their vision for a better, more sustainable future. We should be prepared to defend it from the baseless attacks it is sure to be confronted with.


Tierra.Warren
Posted: Thursday, March 24, 2011 - 13:03

Well, it has been one full year since President Obama signed into law his healthcare plan, and lets just say that things have not been going smoothly for the President.  Last year, when the bill finally passed Congress, it had a favorable support, 46% of American’s supported the bill, and 40% did not according to the Kaiser Health Tracking Poll. One year later, things have changed a great deal. This past week in the same poll issued by the Kaiser Family Foundation, only 40% of American’s supported the President’s legislation while 46% opposed it.

And there is good reason why so many people in America who once supported the President’s main policy initiative are now changing sides.  The reason is that many things that President Obama promised us are not coming to fruition.  Here are just a few:

  • President Obama claimed that under his healthcare plan, premiums for citizens would be reduced $2,500 by 2012. However, according to data released by the nonpartisan Congressional Budget Office (CBO) this past week, that in fact will not happen. Instead, according to the CBO, premiums will be raised $2,100 for families over the next five years. For middle class families already struggling to meet basic needs, an increase in healthcare spending over the next several years will break the bank for many across the U.S.
  • Many American’s already have existing coverage through their employers, and many like the doctors they have gone to for years. The President claimed that under his new law, you could keep your existing coverage and doctor. However, one year in we see that this will not be the case according to the Department of Health and Human Services. They estimate conservatively that 51% of small businesses in the U.S. will be forced to change health insurance providers. In turn, they believe this will mean that 80% of employees working for small businesses would lose their current coverage. Well there goes keeping the doctor you and your families have been going to for over 25 years.
  • President Obama also promised the American people that his health care proposal would ‘ONLY’ cost $1 trillion over the next decade. The CBO while reporting on the President’s annual budget believes that the President and his administration are completely lowballing the actual figure by billions of dollars. They figure that over the next decade, Obamacare will instead cost taxpayers $1.45 trillion, $40 billion higher than what the President had originally stated.

By looking at these three points, its no surprise then why so many people in America are finally seeing the huge burden that Obamacare will have on our already deficit sicken country.

Starbucks CEO Howard Schultz is one of those people. He originally supported President Obama’s healthcare overhaul as his company spent hundreds of millions of dollars on health insurance costs. However, now he is singing a different tune.  He was quoted recently as saying that Obamacare requirements will place “too great” pressure on small businesses across the country.

Let us not forget that Obamacare is still in its infant stages, and has a lot of growing to do. So what does that mean for the next several years? We will most likely see burgeoning costs associated with the law, which will add to our already massive deficit. This will in turn force us to borrow more money from foreign countries like China, and to increase taxes here in the United States. Neither of those options sounds good to me.

By: Peter Benton- Sullivan


Tierra.Warren
Posted: Thursday, March 24, 2011 - 12:50

Entitlement programs are usually thought of as Social Security and Medicare not to mention a host of others.  However there is one entitlement program soaring under the radar: U.S. interest payments to foreign governments to finance out $14 trillion national debt.

For a short recap, every time government expenditures exceed its’ income, a deficit is created.  In order to allow for the government to continue spending, the Treasury Department must give the go ahead for the use of Treasury securities.  However, the use of Treasury securities flips the switch and turns our deficit into debt.  Not to mention that if the U.S. were to forego payment on interest, the economic results would be disastrous.

The government is continually charging its’ spending to our plastic and only paying off the minimum balance on the bill each month.  That leaves all Americans, yes children are included, to pay a $2,500 lump sum a piece just to pay off the current interest due.  Just a reminder that the $2,500 would not take an ax at the deficit, it would only cover the costs the debt is accruing yearly!  And the interest payments for the national debt are rising.  “According to the President’s budget, interest payments for the national debt will quadruple from $186.9 billion in 2009 to $768.2 billion in 2020.”

Instead of continuing to add to our national debt and pay off the minimum balance each month, let’s revert back to the simple yet powerful economic policies that were enacted during the Reagan administration.  These ideas included a “free market unencumbered by barriers, government regulation and taxation that created the most growth-friendly economic environment.  As well as supply-side economics: lower taxes, less regulation, and less government spending, as well as a monetary policy focused on ridding us of the seemingly incurable disease of ever-rising inflation.”  These economic ideas allowed the U.S. to ricochet out of recession and spring into an economic boom.

Reagan’s simple economic policies were able to pull America out of a greater recession than we are in currently.  “Higher unemployment, catastrophic interest rates (18% for mortgages) and a stock market that in real terms had fallen 60% from its mid-1960’s levels.”  It is necessary that we revert back to these economic policies so Americans do not drown in debt.  Mr. Obama needs to take a lesson from his predecessor and stop the exponential grown of the U.S. government.  In this case less is really more.

 

By: Christine Sawyer


Tierra.Warren
Posted: Wednesday, March 23, 2011 - 12:48

At least someone in the Obama administration can tell the truth. Last week, during a confirmation hearing, the nominee for Deputy Director of Office and Budget Management (OMB) made some surprising statements for a political appointee. They admitted that their boss had lied.

Heather Higginbottom faced some very tough questions from ranking members of the Senate Budget Committee including Senator Jeff Sessions. Senator Sessions grilled Higgenbottom and bluntly asked her whether or not President Obama and Director of the OMB Jacob Lew had lied to the American people when they stated that the current administrations budget would not add to the deficit.

Video here: Obama Nominee Crumbles Trying To Defend WH Budget Deception

President Obama and Director Lew had sugar coated their spending plan, claiming that it would not raise the deficit at all. That was a gross understatement. What Senator Sessions was alluding to was that the interest payments on the debt, would obviously increase our deficit. Higgenbottom reluctantly told the Senate Committee that “the interests payments on our debt will add to our debt.” Her comments during the hearing completely contradict those of President Obama saying that he would not add on to our debt. That was obviously a lie.

In addition to Obama misleading the public about his budget proposal not adding to the national deficit, his predictions were also completely wrong about how large the national deficit would be…by $2.3 trillion. I’m no math genius, but being off by over two trillion dollars is ridiculous.

The nonpartisan Congressional Budget Office (CBO), made these statements last week during the release of a report on the President’s budget for fiscal year 2012.  In the report, Senator Sessions also found that this past year President Obama increased the deficit by $26 billion, and will raise it again next year by over $80 billion. He stated during the hearing “This confirms the White House isn’t serious about the budget, there are no cuts and his budget makes the problems worse.”

What the CBO’s report really demonstrates to the American people is that the Obama administration is still not taking our mounting deficit seriously. President Obama and OMB Director Lew mislead the nation when they said that the White House’s budget proposal for 2012 would not raise the deficit when its obvious it will, especially after Higgenbottom’s comments. It also shows their complete disregard for the staggering dollar signs American taxpayers are facing by underestimating the deficit by $2.3 trillion, and that is no joking matter.

By Peter Benton-Sullivan


Tierra.Warren
Posted: Thursday, March 10, 2011 - 13:52

“Many people are in denial around here,” said Senator McCaskill as she addressed her colleagues. “Any plan to tackle our fiscal crisis must make a material difference in reducing the deficit,” said Senator Bennett. What do these two Senators have in common? They are both Democrats who voted against their party’s spending bill. They know that the unsustainable spending that has plagued Washington is no longer acceptable and that it must stop.

So why is it that other members of the Democratic party cannot get the point that their fellow members are trying to get across- the spending blitz in Washington needs to end.

Yesterday, Democrats in the Senate blocked a Republican backed spending bill that would have reduced spending for the remainder of the fiscal year by $57 billion dollars. Senate Majority Leader Harry Reid described the GOP bill as “one of the worst pieces of legislation in the history of Congress.” Why is it then that his bill failed by a worse ratio that the Republican alternative?

Democrats countered the GOP offer by trying to pass a spending bill that cut the annual appropriations by a measly $6 billion from President Obama’s budget. Lets not forget that every day the U.S. government adds on $4 billion to our national debt. So in the grand scheme of things, $6 billion dollars worth of cuts is an absolutely ridiculous figure, especially when compared next to the $1.6 trillion deficit that the U.S. is expected to rack up this year.

What we can expect to see over the next month is a compromise between competing spending bills that target cuts in specific areas that President Obama has allowed for. However, the areas that Obama has targeted are still very small and do not put a dent in our debt. Time and time again, they have failed to fix the three cash cows of the American government, Social Security, Medicare, and Medicaid.

It is obvious that the Democratic leadership in the Senate has failed to take the lead on this issue, and we still don’t know if President Obama will either. But given his track record it is unlikely that he will hunker down to make the real tough decisions. We must keep our hope up and give support to the members of Congress who will actually fix what has often been called the ‘third rail’ of politics, the Entitlement Programs. If no one in Washington takes these issues seriously, the debt burden will only grow and be left solely on the taxpayer’s shoulders.

By: Peter Benton-Sullivan


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, February 22, 2011 - 10:10

Franklin D. Roosevelt was an unabashed friend of unions. One of his signature pieces of legislation was the National Labor Relations Act, which encouraged the creation of labor unions and severely limited employer’s ability to respond to the demands of unionized workers. The bill, along with other favorable legislation, made labor unions a dominant group in the so-called New Deal Coalition that carried Democrats to victory for decades. Roosevelt went so far as to say that, “If I went to work in a factory the first thing I’d do is join a union.”

Sadly, things have changed since Roosevelt’s time. Private sector unions have outlived their usefulness and are doing more to harm then help the middle class. Regardless, it is interesting to note that Roosevelt, the stalwart supporter of private sector union rights, was adamantly opposed to public sector unions.

Daniel DiSalvo, a political science professor at the City College of New York, wrote recently in National Affairs,

“Meticulous attention,” the president insisted in 1937, “should be paid to the special relations and obligations of public servants to the public itself and to the Government. . . .The process of collective bargaining, as usually understood, cannot be transplanted into the public service.” The reason? F.D.R. believed that “[a] strike of public employees manifests nothing less than an intent on their part to obstruct the operations of government until their demands are satisfied. Such action looking toward the paralysis of government by those who have sworn to support it is unthinkable and intolerable.” Roosevelt was hardly alone in holding these views, even among the champions of organized labor. Indeed, the first president of the AFL-CIO, George Meany, believed it was “impossible to bargain collectively with the government.”

Roosevelt’s fears about public sector unions are being played out in Wisconsin. In an effort to protect their unsustainable pension system and bargaining practices, many public sector unions have gone on an unofficial strike. Moreover, they’re enlisting other’s help. ABC News reported that “Wisconsin doctors threw their support behind teachers protesting the Republican governor’s attempt to strip unions of their bargaining powers, saying they would write sick notes for teachers to skip work to demonstrate.” Fox News has reported that union workers “obtained the notes from alleged doctors standing on street corners handing them out to whomever asked.”

Classes are being cancelled, school days are being missed, many government functions are at a standstill because of union protests. To reiterate Roosevelt, “such action looking toward the paralysis of government” is “unthinkable and intolerable.”

Wisconsin unions, and the Obama administration who has taken to supporting them, should heed the AFL-CIO’s (the largest federation of unions in the US) historic advice: “In terms of accepted collective bargaining procedures, government workers have no right beyond the authority to petition Congress – a right available to every citizen.”

Then again, unions have shown through word and deed that they think they are above the average citizen.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, February 22, 2011 - 10:09

This White House just can’t get it right.

Earlier this year President Obama’s team was lambasted for their slow and uncoordinated response to the oil spill in the Gulf of Mexico. Now, they are being taken to task for how quickly and forcefully they jumped in to stop Wisconsin’s attempt to solve their budget deficit. It’s a sad indictment of a broken Washington when a President is quicker to try and stop deficit reduction than to stop oil from spilling onto our shores.

Nevertheless, the President has held nothing back, deploying his powerful political operation in an effort to thwart Governor Scott Walker’s proposed legislation, which would reduce the state’s debt burden by lowering union benefits. As we detailed on Friday, under Gov. Walker’s bill Wisconsin public employees would still contribute less of their salary to healthcare and pension benefits than the average government worker, much less private sector employee.

Facts unfortunately matter little to Democrats, who see an opportunity to cement the support of a key contributor of both votes and money in the lead up to the crucial 2012 presidential race. Politico reported that, “Organizing for America, Obama’s 2008 grassroots campaign effort posted a statement on its website late Thursday, announcing it “is mobilizing on the ground in Wisconsin to defend the rights of public employees from an attempt by the governor to take away their right to organize.”

Obama himself didn’t hold back from criticizing the legislation, saying “they’re just making it harder for public employees to collectively bargain generally, seem like more of an assault on unions.”

Nevermind, the fact that public employees in Wisconsin must either join the union or pay dues; somehow that fact always gets left out in the discussion over the “right to organize.” And despite President Obama’s attempt to make this an issue of “us versus them” battle, this is not a fight with unions, it’s a fight to fix the deficit.

To his credit, Gov. Walker has avoided attempts to reduce an honest debate to partisan yelling. He told Fox News that, “I’ve said repeatedly [that] good, decent people work for the government. But they shouldn’t be excluded from what everybody else in society is going through in these tough economic times – we’ve all got to be in it together.”

“I think we’re focused on balancing our budget,” Walker said. “It would be wise for the president and others in Washington to focus on balancing their budget, which they are a long ways from doing.”

Sigh. Our President just released a budget that completely ignores the fact that we have an enormous debt crisis, instead adding $7.6 trillion to our debt over the next 10 years. Now, he directs the resources of the Democratic National Committee and his outsized political clout in an attempt to demonize states that are attempting to deal with their own budget concerns. What’s wrong with this picture?

It’s as if Obama’s ego is getting in the way, saying if I can’t reduce the deficit, than nobody can. Sadly, his thought process is not likely so juvenile. Instead, it’s a political play with very high stakes for the American taxpayer. On the one side you have big-government lackeys who create or foster dependence on government programs. They hope is that once people have had their first taste of government spending they will fight tooth and nail to ensure that it’s not removed. On the other side you have the average taxpayer, the one who works hard, creates his own success and pays his taxes.

Over the past few decades the first group has grown in relation to the second. Government and the amount it spends has continued to skyrocket upwards. Now the bill is coming true and so too is the first real test of “progressive” (read: big-government policies).

Gov. Christie in New Jersey has already fought this battle, winning concessions from teachers unions in order to balance his budget without raising taxes. Gov. Walker is now facing the same struggle. But Democratic power players like President Obama weren’t caught off guard this time. They now understand that their worldview is coming under attack by the forces of budgetary prudence and plain old common sense.

Simple concepts like, we can’t spend more than we take in, and, government workers should be paid in line with the private sector, are finally taking root.

The ideological argument to follow will be heated; so it goes when a party’s foundation is threatened. But it is an argument the Wisconsin’s citizens deserve to have because their future is literally at stake. Their state budget is an unmitigated disaster and the status quo is unacceptable. In order to have the adult conversation necessary, Obama and his team of operatives need to turn their attention to Washington, and get to work solving our nation’s problems.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

Crossposted: http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/02/20/obama-must-address-national-deficit-leave-wisconsin-to-address-theirs/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, February 22, 2011 - 10:08

“What we have done is kicked the can down the road. We are now at the end of the road and are not in a position to kick it any further. We have to signal seriousness in this by making sure some of the hard decisions are made under my watch, not someone else’s.” – President Obama to the Washington Post in December of 2009.

So what has President Obama done for the last two years? Kicked the can down the road further and faster than any president in history. Actually, it’s probably safer to say he hired Colts kicker Adam Vinatieri to an exorbitant government salary, with a sweet pension package, to kick the can for him.

And now that we are at the end of the road, or should I say, the end of our rope, President Obama had his last chance for a Hail Mary touchdown for the win. Instead, his budget was a complete whiff. It didn’t touch entitlements and its sole accomplishment was freezing spending at this year’s levels (which are the highest in history.) It’s akin to going for a 70 yard field goal when you need 7 points to win.

Nevertheless, he’s still preaching patience. As if two years of spending record amounts of money was somehow an indicator that at his core he truly cared about the deficit. As David Brooks writes in today’s New York Times,

He started making the promise back when he was in the Senate. In “The Audacity of Hope,” published in 2006, he expressed alarm at the “mountain of debt” caused by $300 billion annual budget deficits. (They’re now $1.6 trillion.) During the presidential campaign, he pledged to put away childish things and tackle the tough budget issues.

During the transition, he said the time to act on the debt is now. . . He said he would start a budget initiative in February 2009.

He made the [deficit reduction] pledge yet again at a press conference this week. Right now is not the time, the president always says, but tomorrow we will get serious.

But tomorrow never comes.

So the mantle of leadership has passed to Capitol Hill. While Obama asked for patience yet again, Eric Cantor announced that Republicans will put entitlements on the table. It may be politically risky, but it looks more like leadership to me.

To us as well.

Crossposted: http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/02/18/obama-continues-kicking-the-can-down-the-road/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, February 22, 2011 - 10:08

Looks like President Obama’s deficit commission may not have been a complete waste after all. Sure, Obama himself attempted to pretend it didn’t happen, completely ignoring their recommendations in his recently released budget.

But a bipartisan group, being named the “Gang of Six,” is apparently working behind closed doors to come up with a deficit reduction package that hews closely to the recommendations of the deficit committee. Wait, haven’t we already used “Gang of Six” this year. Weren’t they the Max Baucus-led group of Senators who worked on a compromise for the healthcare bill?

Apparently politicians who form in groups of six must be titled a “gang.” Much like a gaggle of geese and a school of whales, six congressmen is a “gang.” Seems like we could come up for a better name for this. Maybe the “Six Squad.” No, sounds like an early 90s hip-hop group. The “Syndicate of Six”? No, sounds like they’re about to put someone in cement shoes and put them in the bottom of the Potomac, not negotiate a deficit reduction deal. The “Cutters Clique.” No. Alright, I’ll stop there.

But I digress, Budget Chairman Kent Conrad (D-ND), Majority Whip Dick Durbin (D-IL), Tom Coburn (R-OK), Mike Crapo (R-ID), Mark Warner (D-VA) and Saxby Chambliss (R-GA), have come together to hopefully kickstart the discussion on getting our debt under control.

The Washington Post reports,

The group hopes to advance the commission’s recommendations, which would reduce deficits by $4 trillion over the next decade. Doing so would require lawmakers to embrace some politically perilous policies, however, including raising the retirement age to 69, charging wealthy seniors more for Medicare and ending some cherished but expensive tax breaks.

Taking the commission’s report as its template, the group is drafting legislation that would direct congressional committees to find a way to put it into effect. On taxes, for example, the legislation would have tax-writing panels in the House and Senate develop a tax overhaul that would raise hundreds of billions of dollars in additional revenue and lower the top tax rate, which stands at 35 percent.

While the group’s tax treatment requires a closer look to ensure that it is revenue neutral, their forward-thinking approach to entitlements deserves praise. One of the best recommendations is setting explicit annual limits on discretionary and mandatory spending, and if Congress was unable to meet the limits, the White House budget office would be forced to make across the board cuts.

Such a plan exemplifies that the Gang of Six understands the problem – even if difficult decisions are made, future Congress’ may not have the guts to abide by them. The plan would take the pressure off, or should I say, force the hand, of future Congress’ to abide by the deficit reduction measures.

When it comes to the debt we can’t put our hope in future Congress’ or have patience with our current leaders to act. The problem only grows bigger by the day, let’s take the steps to solve it now.

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/02/18/bipartisan-gang-of-six-taking-lead-on-deficit-reduction/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, February 22, 2011 - 10:07

“It’s one thing about the money. We’d be willing to negotiate the money. [But] he’s trying to take away our human rights.”

So says Laurie Bauer, a 51 year old library media specialist in Wisconsin, speaking about the governor’s effort to introduce budget cutting reforms to public sector unions.

Really? You want to make this about human rights while simultaneously arguing against right-to-work laws? Wisconsin is currently a union shop state, meaning that employees must either join the union or pay the equivalent of union dues. It’s either pay up or get out. Such extortionism-lite, is not exactly what I think of when I hear the words “human rights.”

The fact is, it’s all about the money. The state needs to save more of it in order to close a $137 million deficit and public sector employees want to keep more in their pockets. I don’t blame them necessarily, they’ve legally negotiated their salaries with prior elected officials. But that doesn’t mean it isn’t time for some change. After all, are we so quick to forget this episode that happened this past November, as reported by the National Review:

“In a letter [Gov. Walker] asked outgoing Democratic governor Jim Doyle to refrain from finalizing contracts with state union employees. The governor nonetheless continued to negotiate the contracts, and when he finalized them, the assembly pushed ahead, even pulling one Democratic assemblyman out of jail (where he was serving a 60-day sentence for drunk driving) for a day so that he could cast the tie-breaking vote in favor of the contracts. But in a surprise move, Democratic senate majority leader Russ Decker voted against the contracts. Outraged Democrats stripped Decker of his leadership position that same day.”

So don’t let me hear sob stories from unions about how this was a fair deal between them and government. The fact is, the you scratch our back and we’ll scratch yours approach to swapping election votes for hearty concessions leaves the average taxpayer out to dry.

As it stands Wisconsin public sector workers have secured pay and benefits well above that of the average private sector worker. Currently, union workers in Wisconsin pay only 6 percent of their health care premium costs. They also receive a generous defined-benefit pension in which they contribute only .2 percent of their gross pay towards their retirement.

Governor Walker’s bill would raise the average employee contribution to 5.8 percent of salary for pensions and 12percent toward health insurance premiums.

As the Wall Street Journal wrote today,

If those numbers don’t sound outrageous, you probably work in the private economy. The comparable nationwide employee health-care contribution is 20% for private industry, according to the Bureau of Labor Statistics. The average employee contribution from take-home pay for retirement was 7.5% in 2009, according to the Employee Benefits Research Institute.

In other words, even with the changes, they are still doing better than the national average of private sector workers!

Public sector union workers just don’t want to say it’s about the money. They don’t want to admit that even with the changes, not only will they still be substantially better compensated than private workers, but will also still pay less towards pensions and healthcare than the average government worker across the country.

Unwilling to admit that, they’re going to extremes. They’re drawing parallels between Gov. Walker and Hosni Mubarak, the recently deposed dictator of Egypt. They’re calling it a “throwback” to “communist Poland and East Germany.” And if all else fails, they pull out the tired line – it’s all about the kids.

Of course, it’s tough to say it’s all about the kids when 40 percent of the teachers called in sick, in an apparent protest to the proposed cuts. If it’s about the kids, you’ll get in the classroom and teach.

But it’s not about the kids, or human rights, or Gov. Walker being a fascistic dictator, it’s about money. And the bottom line is that the state has to save more of it. Ideally we’d do this through shared sacrifice, but the public sector unions have shown no desire to be a part of it.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/02/18/wisconsin-unions-show-no-willingness-to-share-in-sacrifice/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Saturday, February 19, 2011 - 14:52

The “change” Obama talked about in his campaign turns out to just be chump change.

President Obama’s false hope, best exemplified by a State of the Union speech in which he spoke of how we were going to out-innovate, out-educate, and out-build the world, but provided no plans on how we were going to pay for it, was matched yesterday by Chris Christie’s new brand of hope.

Whereas Obama’s vision is built on more spending, which he carefully labels investment, Christie’s hope is built on his unwavering faith in individuals. The Governor addressed what The President and so many others on Capitol Hill are afraid to: our deficit, driven by unsustainable entitlements, and ignored under President Obama’s budget proposal.

Of course, these issues have been discussed ad nauseum, but the President has refused to solve them. If his words were worth a dollar our entitlements would be running a surplus. Sadly, they’re not; so while Obama keeps on yapping, our entitlement crisis keeps on growing.

That is not hope. Sure, I may be inspired by the words, but I am ever-more discouraged when they do not translate into action. I’m left with a feeling that Obama has no intention to do what he says, but rather than he is content to sit back and wait for someone else to make the politically difficult decision to reform popular programs like Social Security. But as Christie said yesterday, “My children’s future and your children’s future are more important than some political strategy. You’re going to have to raise the retirement age for Social Security. Whoa, I just said it, and I’m still standing here. I did not vaporize!”

Chris Christie can talk, because he’s done it. In his first two years in office he’s tackled problems head-on, refusing to blink in stare-downs with powerful political interests like teachers’ unions.

“Leadership today in America has to be about doing the big things and being courageous,” we have to bring a new approach and a new discipline to this.”

The leadership he is referring to is one that remains to be seen with the current administration. Obama is playing an elaborate shell game with the American people, doing everything he can to draw American’s eyes away from the big problems we face. It comes off as hopeful, after all, who doesn’t want to have a Sputnik-like moment, but when you realize the sleight of hand, it comes off as cynical.

He says the big things are high speed rail, the big things are high speed internet access for almost 80% of America or something by some date. One million electric cars on the road by some date. Ladies and gentlemen, that is the candy of American politics. Those are not the big things. Because let me guarantee you something, if we don’t fix the real big things there are going to be no electric cars on the road. There is going to be no high speed internet access or if there is you’re not going to be able to afford to get on it. We are not going to be able to care about the niceties of life-the investments that Washington wants to continue to make.

The big things Obama needs to be talking about are the budget, the deficit, and how we are going to preserve the American Dream for the next generation. He won’t talk about these things because it’s not a sound strategy according to the political playbook he’s been reading out of for the past two years. It teaches the time-tested principles for politicians – wait, wait, and when pushed, obfuscate.

Well it’s time to toss that thing out the window. We need real leadership and real solutions. So when Obama took to the lectern yesterday and preached patience, call him out on it. He said, “part of the challenge here is that this tow – let’s face it, you guys are pretty impatient. If something doesn’t happen today, then the assumption is it’s just not going to happen. Right?”

Right!

As Christie explained,

“What that means in Trenton and what I suspect it means in Washington also is this. It means we are going to drag our feet for as long as we can until we hope it dies a natural death because God knows we don’t want our fingerprints on it for murdering it, but we also don’t have the guts to do it.”

With a deficit of $1.6 trillion we can’t afford to be patient. With a Social Security system that is going to be insolven in the next 30 years we can’t afford patience. With a broken Medicare system that will run out of money within the next decade we can’t afford to be patient. Patience is part and parcel of the old playbook, we want action.

We’re just the generation to demand it. Leaders like Chris Christie are just the people to see it through.

by Brandon Greife and Jordan Hicks

Crossposted: http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/02/17/christies-speech-gives-obama-a-lesson-in-leadership/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Wednesday, February 16, 2011 - 21:30

Quick quiz: What is the fastest growing portion of the federal budget?

A.     Social Security

B.     Medicare

C.     Medicaid

D.    Interest on our debt

The costs of Medicare, Medicaid, and Social Security are all set to skyrocket in the near future. Our inability to control healthcare costs and the aging of the Baby Boomer generations will strain the finances of our biggest health and retirement programs.

Nevertheless, A through C are wrong. The biggest driver of our deficit in the coming years is actually interest on our debt. Nick Gillespie and Veronique de Rugy explain the problem in an article for Reason,

The main driver of the growth, however, is interest spending—the bar tab for our binge. The CBO projects that in the next 70 years, public money spent on interest will grow from 1.4 percent of GDP (or $204 billion in 2010 dollars) to almost 41.4 percent of GDP (or $27.2 trillion in 2010 dollars). In the short term, the cost of our debt will reach 3.8 percent of GDP by 2020 and 7 percent of GDP by 2030. Today spending on interest represents about a third of the cost of Social Security; in 20 years it is expected to exceed the cost of that program.

Or if you like pictures (also courtesy of Reason):

For some perspective, consider that annual federal revenues have averaged 18 percent of GDP since 1950. This has happened despite wild fluctuations in individual income tax rates. So unless something changes and the government is able to get a firmer grip on our wallets, yearly interest on our debt will grow to more than double annual tax revenues. That of course is complete fantasy, it will never happen, because our creditors will never let it happen. A debt crisis would wrack our nation long before then.

Of course that doesn’t mean that we have the luxury of ignoring entitlements. The deficits they have and will cause are the primary reason we find ourselves with sky-high interest payments. Rather, it underscores the need to address our deficits, the result of unsustainable spending, now.

Unfortunately, President Obama’s just-released budget does very little to control the growth of our national debt. It whittles away at the edges of discretionary spending while leaving the primary drivers of spending alone. Hopefully the Republicans will offer a more serious solution, one that addresses entitlements, and works to erase the debt principle that threatens our future.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/02/16/interest-on-our-debt-prepared-to-skyrocket/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, February 15, 2011 - 10:35

Ever wonder how you can square peg fits into a round hole?  Answer: You can’t.  Ever wonder how you can reduce the deficit while enrolling millions into Medicaid?  Answer: Obamacare!  Oh wait… you can’t.  As it turns out, trying to reduce the deficit with a bill that does nothing to reform the drivers of higher healthcare costs is like trying to slam a square peg into a round hole. It just doesn’t make sense.

Governors across the nation are attempting to rectify this engineering flaw by whittling away at the edges of the Obamacare peg.

In the words of our man Mitch Daniels, Indiana’s Governor, “The president’s health-care reform law is a massive mistake.  It will amplify all the big drivers of overconsumption and excessive pricing… [And] add trillions to the deficit.”

Daniels knows a little something about addressing deficits. When Daniels took office in 2004, Indiana had a long-standing deficit of $600 million deficit and hadn’t balanced the budget in seven years. He balanced the budget in just his first year. After four years he had paid off all of the states’ outstanding debt and had a surplus of $1.3 billion in the bank.

The results have been remarkable. Today, Indiana has a AAA credit rating (the first in state history), which it has maintained despite the economic downturn. Because he used budget cuts and efficiencies rather than tax increases to address the deficit, Indiana has also become a friend to businesses. The Weekly Standard writes,

No other state in the Midwest—all of them, like Indiana, dependent on a declining manufacturing sector—can match this record. Venture capital investment in Indiana had lagged at $39 million annually in the first years of this decade. By 2009 it was averaging $94 million. Even now the state has continued to add jobs—7 percent of new U.S. employment has been in Indiana this year, a state with 2 percent of the country’s population. For the first time in 40 years more people are moving into the state than leaving it.

It is no wonder that CNBC named Indiana the Most Improved State for Business in the country and the state is now near the top of every national ranking of business attractiveness.

Obamacare threatens to undue all of Daniel’s hard work. The healthcare bill will require states to add 15 million more citizens to the Medicaid rolls. Daniels estimates that the “price to [Indiana’s] taxpayers at $2.6 billion to $3 billion over the next 10 years.”

The additional Medicaid burden is not even the worst part in Daniels eyes.

Perhaps worse, the law expects to conscript the states as its agents in its takeover of health care. It assumes that we will set up and operate its new insurance “exchanges” for it, using our current welfare apparatuses to do the numbingly complex work of figuring out who is eligible for its subsidies, how much each person or family is eligible for, redetermining this eligibility regularly, and more. Then, we are supposed to oversee all the insurance plans in the exchanges for compliance with Washington’s dictates about terms and prices.

Not only does Obamacare force states to pick up a chunk of the tab for the enrollment increases, it passes off a huge chunk of the bureaucratic burden as well. It should go without saying that this is probably not the best time to be adding things to state budgets.  State revenues have been hit especially hard by the recession and many are scrambling to find places to cut, often being forced to cut basic governmental services in order to afford their public pensions. Increased healthcare costs could be the straw that breaks the camel’s back.

That’s why forward-thinking governors like Daniels are attempting to get out ahead of the budget-busting Obamacare bill, thinking of ways to introduce free-market principles in what will otherwise lead to a “government takeover of health care.”

Among his proposals are:

  • Waiving all the mandates that force citizens to buy healthcare benefits that they don’t need
  • Eliminating any provisions discriminating against consumer driven plans such as health savings accounts
  • The ability to make changes to Medicaid so that millions of people aren’t simply shuttled into a broken system

Fortunately, governors like Daniels have some leverage. If the federal government needs states to run their exchanges, states have a powerful bargaining chip to force Washington to accede to some demands.

If the federal government is hell-bent on forcing a square peg into a round hole, let’s at least whittle off the sharp edges. It is admittedly not a perfect solution. That could only be achieved by implementing true free market reforms into the healthcare marketplace. Nevertheless, it is a huge step in the right direction and we can only hope more governors follow Daniels’ lead.

by Brandon Greife and Peter Mao

Crossposted: http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/02/08/gov-daniels-demands-changes-to-broken-obamacare-bill/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Monday, February 14, 2011 - 17:49

President Obama’s 2012 budget is set to hit Congress’ desk in the next few hours. Sadly, it appears to be more of a disaster than the Super Bowl halftime show.

The White House predicts that this year’s deficit will be a staggering $1.6 trillion – a full $100 billion higher than the CBO’s earlier projections. Deficits would then hover in the $1 trillion range for the foreseeable future.

The problem is, no one can predict how long that “foreseeable future” will last. With deficits as far as the eye can see, at some point the CBO’s warnings will come true and our creditors will demand some serious changes.

The hope would be that President Obama would begin to instill those changes now, while we still had control over the process, versus waiting until a debt crisis in which our creditors would demand the keys to the budgetary car. Obama’s budget reflects an unwillingness to push for any of these changes.

Earlier this year President Obama put together a bipartisan deficit commission, tasked with coming up with a plan to reduce government spending and put us on a fiscally sustainable course. Their plan would overhaul the tax code, trim spending on Social Security, Medicare, Medicaid, and defense. It was an ambitious plan that would slash deficits by $4 trillion over the next 10 years. And it still didn’t go far enough.

Obama’s budget reflects none of the deficit commission’s recommendations. There’s no tax reform, there’s no entitlement reform, there’s no reform period. There’s just more of the same. Democratic chairman of the fiscal commission, Erskine Bowles, told the Washington Post, that Obama’s proposed budget goes “nowhere near where they will have to go to resolve our fiscal nightmare. “

Alice Rivlin, another Democratic member of the commission, added, “I would have preferred to see the administration get out front on addressing the entitlements and the tax reform that we need to reduce long run deficits. But they clearly made a tactical decision that this is not the best way to get a positive result.”

The question is, a positive result for whom? It is certainly not a positive result for America. Under the Obama budget our national debt is going to continue its steep ascent, creating an even bigger budgetary headache for younger generations. The only person it could be positive for is President Obama himself.

By ignoring politically contentious reforms to cherished programs like Social Security, Obama can avoid potential electoral backlash. Abdicating responsibility is a short-term and shortsighted strategy. Continually putting off necessary reforms while continuing to throw money to pet constituencies may be enough to keep you in office in 2012, but is a sure path to long term ruin.

Young adults overwhelming supported Obama because they believed he would represent their viewpoints and interests in the White House. This budget shows he is doing neither.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

Crossposted: http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/02/14/obamas-3-73-trillion-budget-ignores-our-debt-problem/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Monday, February 14, 2011 - 17:49

College students are pros at procrastination. We have mastered the art of waiting until the very last minute possible to get something done on time. Sure, it may mean pulling an all-nighter in the dorm study lounge or a couple of late nights in a library study carrel, but inevitably, we get it done.

President Obama on the other hand hasn’t quite mastered the fine art of procrastination. To be sure, he’s got the delaying part down pat. The prez can put off hard decisions better than just about anyone. If delaying were an art form he’d be Picasso. Unfortunately, he doesn’t quite grasp the second, necessary, part of procrastination – get it done.

His new budget, which will be sent to Congress today, may have been one of his last best chances to present a plan to deal with our entitlements. Instead, he punted…again.

Sure, Obama’s budget trims a bit here and there. It calls for spending cuts and tax hikes that total about 14 percent of the $8 trillion in projected deficits over the next decade. But it’s tinkering with a problem that requires a complete overhaul.

Think of it this way, the budget deficit in 2008, just a few short years ago, was $407 billion. This year’s deficit will be $1.2 trillion more than that. President Obama likes to ignore this year, arguing that next year the deficit will fall to $1.1 trillion. Progress, they argue. Jack Lew, director of the Office of Management and Budget, had the audacity to say that “this budget has a lot of pain. . . This is a tough budget.”

If this is tough, I can’t imagine what words he would have described the budgets in the 2000s. I mean, does he seriously believe that spending triple the amount we were in 2008 is progress? Did I somehow miss 300% inflation that happened over the last four years, because if not, I think we’re being sold some snake oil here.

The trouble is the president’s unwillingness to focus on the main driver of our deficit problems: entitlements. The Wall Street Journal reports that Social Security, Medicare, Medicaid, and other entitlements will consume 60 percent of all federal spending next year, or $2 trillion. In the next decade the cost of these programs will continue to skyrocket, jumping by more than one-third to $3.3 trillion.

Not only has President Obama scorned Republicans’ attempts at addressing our entitlement problem, he has ignored members of the bipartisan deficit commission that he put together. The Washington Post reported today,

Some who worked on Obama’s fiscal panel were also disappointed by his decision not to endorse any of the major elements of their deficit-reduction plan, which calls for raising the Social Security retirement age, charging wealthy seniors more for Medicare and limiting popular tax breaks such as the mortgage interest deduction. The plan has attracted support from key members of both parties and is the focus of an effort in the Senate to develop a bipartisan spending plan.

“I would have preferred to see the administration get out front on addressing the entitlements and the tax reform that we need to reduce long-run deficits,” said Alice Rivlin, a commission member who served as budget director in the Clinton White House.

Obama’s refusal to adopt any of the commission’s recommendations shows that there may be some growing cracks in the Democratic ranks. Late last week, before the White House Budget had been released, Steny Hoyer, the second-ranking House Democrat, argued that entitlement reform is a must if we want to reduce our deficit.

“I have said and continue to believe that the president . . . need[s] to sit down and come to grips with how we deal with entitlements, defense spending, and discretionary spending, because the deficit is, in fact, a crisis,” said Hoyer. When asked whether the President should take the lead, Hoyer argued that “the president took the lead when he appointed the commission that has reported, the Bowles- Simpson commission. I think the recommendations they made are very useful recommendations. That doesn’t mean I agree with every one of them. But we’ve got to follow a formula similar to the recommendation of not only that commission, but of Domenici-Rivlin commission.”

Hoyer’s faith in President Obama’s leadership was not rewarded. Not only was the deficit commission’s formula not followed, it appears to have been ignored in its entirety.

Under Obama’s budget our entitlements will continue on, as broken as ever, pushing America nearer to a fiscal collapse. Simply put, the stakes are too high to procrastinate any longer. The tipping point on our debt is quickly approaching. If students procrastinate too long, we may fail a class. If President Obama waits too long to deal with our deficit, the world’s largest economy may begin to fail.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

Crossposted:  http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/02/14/obamas-procrastination-on-entitlement-reform-threatening-our-future/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Monday, February 14, 2011 - 17:47

President Obama will soon present his 2012 budget to Congress. With a pricetag of $3.73 trillion and a projected deficit of $1.6 trillion, you have to wonder what Obama was thinking. I mean, is this really the best you can do?

Economists who have gotten their hands on an advanced copy of the budget have been asking similar questions. If there responses are any indication, Obama’s big-spending budget could be the biggest flop since The Last Airbender. (As an aside, is it still possible to call M. Night Shyamalan’s movies flops? His career trajectory looks like our budget deficit in reverse.)

Here’s a sampling of reviews from some non-partisan budget experts:

  • Non-partisan budget experts blasted the budget even before exact details were known. “The entitlement and tax reform agenda will apparently be deferred yet again,” said Robert Bixby, director of the Concord Coalition, a fiscal watchdog group. “It makes you wonder what the point was of having a commission in the first place.” – USA Today
  • Erskine Bowles, the Democratic chairman of the fiscal commission, said the White House budget request goes “nowhere near where they will have to go to resolve our fiscal nightmare.” – Washington Post
  • Maya MacGuineas, president of the Committee for a Responsible Federal Budget, accused the White House of “a political unwillingness to tackle the tough issues” before a fiscal crisis forces action. -  USA Today
  • “It’s a slow train wreck coming and we all know it’s going to happen,” said Bret Barker, an interest-rate analyst at Los Angeles-based TCW Group Inc., which manages about $115 billion in assets. “It’s just a question of whether we want to deal with it. There are huge structural changes that have to go on with this economy.” – Bloomberg
  • “As economists deeply concerned about our nation’s future, we urge a change in direction. To support real economic growth and support the creation of private-sector jobs, immediate action is needed to reign in federal spending.” – Letter from 150 economists to President Obama
  • “The budget confirms that Mr. Obama is not taking the lead in embracing the kind of far-reaching deficit-reduction plan recommended in December by a bipartisan majority of his fiscal commission. It proposed saving $4 trillion over a decade through specific cuts in spending for domestic, military and entitlement programs and new revenues from overhauling the tax code.” – New York Times
  • “With the budget he is to unveil Monday, President Obama has not opted for the bold, comprehensive approach to reining in the fast-growing federal debt that his own fiscal commission has said is needed, now.” – New York Times

President Obama’s budget proposal continues to put off the difficult choices necessary to get our nation headed in the right direction. What good was the bipartisan deficit commission if the budget you put together completely ignores their proposals? We need a change in direction, not this perfect storm of suck that you call a budget.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

Crossposted: http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/02/14/economists-agree-obamas-budget-is-a-flop/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Monday, February 7, 2011 - 22:15

Warning: Economic wonkishness ahead.

This blog has looked extensively at the debt crises that are plaguing many European states.  Greece and Ireland have already received an IMF bailout, Portugal appears to be on the ropes, and Spain could be next in line. The main fear driving each of these nation’s to bailout was the so-called threat of “contagion.”

The question is, what on earth does that mean? We really haven’t had an answer and we were happy to know that the economists were equally stumped. TaxVox, a blog by the Centre for Economic Policy Research, said that “Contagion is one of the more elusive concepts in the current debate about the financial crisis. Indeed, the logic behind it is often unclear.”

When you think of debt, you don’t think of a 28 Days Later style plague that turns government budgets into bloodthirsty zombies. So what gives? Is a debt crisis contagious?

The short answer is yes. The long answer is yes but the Eurozone may have overreacted to the potential bond market crash of small economies like Greece and Portugal.

The contagion effect occurs because when bond markets crash, investors are forced to sell off other assets in their portfolio to meet the demands of their creditors. This leads to a “fire sale” effect in which pain in one type of asset class (bonds) can cause pain in others (non-financial stocks). After research TaxVox found that the most “exposed” stocks, ones that are lumped into equity funds with stocks that suffered big losses in the financial crisis, suffered huge losses. In other words, the poor performance of one type of investment in a mutual fund could have a seriously adverse consequences on other types of investments. Or, in the preferred verbiage of our times, bad investment can be contagious.

In TaxVox nerd-speak,

“For each [equity] fund, we calculate fund exposure to financial stocks as the losses induced by financial sector positions in the initial phase of the financial crisis. . . To capture this selling pressure on non-financial stocks, we define stock exposure as the average fund exposure of all funds owning the stock weighted by the fund ownership shares in the stock. Thus, non-financial stocks held mostly by funds with large fund exposure are considered highly exposed stocks.

. . . The contagion effect is measured as the (cumulative) stock return difference between exposed and non-exposed stocks in the same industry and country.

. . . Exposed stocks are indeed those that suffer the largest stock price drawdown during the financial crisis. The stock price for the 15% most exposed stocks worldwide underperformed relative to non-exposed peers in the same country and industry by 17% at the peak of the stock market downturn.”

So what does this mean for Europe? It means that if a European investment fund had a lot of Greek, Portugeuese, or Irish bonds and the country went belly-up, the crisis could spread to other types of assets, and thus to other nations.

The bigger the nation, the bigger the risk. Greece and Portugal accounted for only 4.7% and 2.1% of all Eurozone debt and thus may have been unable to “trigger large fund redemption calls” that would have spread to other nations.

With Spain, Europe’s fifth largest economy, teetering on the brink of collapse, the threat of asset contagion could become reality.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/02/07/7604/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Monday, February 7, 2011 - 22:14

I’m a generally grumpy guy. Some would even call me a complainer. I’m like the old guy from “Up” without the happy memory montage. But ask me to write down my gripes about Democrats, the state of politics, or even life in general and I may be able to hit five pages. Washington’s winters suck, Comcast customer service is awful, my iPhone is slowing down by the day, and…I’m already running out of steam.

Businesses apparently have a lot more to complain about. Earlier this year, Congressman Darrell Issa, chairman of the House Oversight Committee, reached out to businesses around the country to see what government regulations and red tape were stopping them from growing and hiring. This morning, Rep. Issa released more than 200 of these responses spanning 1,947 pages.

1,947 pages worth of legitimate gripes and groans about the bureaucratic and regulatory burden that is standing in the way of job creation.

One of these responses comes from the American Beverage Association. Their concerns are indicative of what many businesses are currently facing:

“When Congress passed the American Recovery and Reform Act, taxpayer money was allocated for “shovel ready” projects in an effort to stimulate the economy and create or preserve jobs. Instead, in some instances, this money was spent in way which may have the opposite effect-by denigrating particular products which could result in lost sales and lost jobs”

Lost sales and lost jobs…

How long are we going to continue hearing that?

The problem with government created regulations is, as Milton Friedman famously said, “the government solution to a problem is usually as bad as the problem and very often makes the problem worse.” Then, in true bureaucratic fashion the government then creates more rules, hires more regulators, and spends more money to solve the problem they created in trying to solve the problem.

On the plus side, President Obama realizes the threat that the proliferation of government regulation has on continued economic growth. He recently penned an oped in which he spoke of his administration’s efforts to restore the entrepreneurialism and vibrant free-markets that made us the most successful nation in the world. Obama wrote,

We’re also getting rid of absurd and unnecessary paperwork requirements that waste time and money. We’re looking at the system as a whole to make sure we avoid excessive, inconsistent and redundant regulation. And finally, today I am directing federal agencies to do more to account for—and reduce—the burdens regulations may place on small businesses. Small firms drive growth and create most new jobs in this country. We need to make sure nothing stands in their way.

On the down side, he’s done little more than talk about the regulatory burden for two years now. The adage “To say one thing, and do another” seems to apply perfectly. President Obama may be talking a big game when it comes to cutting red tape, but his actions paint a different picture. A report by the Heritage Foundation found that the total cost of the rules promulgated by federal agencies totaled nearly $28 billion – the highest level ever recorded.

Mr. President, it’s time to do more than talk. It’s time to start knocking down the regulatory barriers to job growth. Fortunately, Rep. Issa has done your homework for you. Hundreds of businesses have stepped up to the plate, providing detailed and specific recommendations on how to remove the most redundant, burdensome, or counterproductive regulations on the books.

How about we actually start “Winning the Future” as opposed to scratching our heads and saying “WT…..Heck” We need to decrease the size of the government’s role in business and stop “investing” so much of American’s hard earned money. Of course, I’ve come to expect little more than talk from the Obama administration. One more thing to put on my list of gripes I suppose.

by Brandon Greife and Jordan Hicks

XPosted: http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/02/07/rep-issa-shows-gop-listening-to-main-street/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Friday, February 4, 2011 - 15:48

U.S. Federal Reserve Chairman Ben Bernanke did not mince words in a speech yesterday to the National Press Club: We’re on an unsustainable path.

His speech was odd, focusing most of his scorn on fiscal policy rather than monetary policy which is typically the purview of the Fed. In fact, Bernanke was laudatory of his work at the Fed, arguing that the controversial program of “quantitative easing” has staved off deflation and raised yields on long term Treasuries securities. Bernanke said, “A wide range of market indicators supports the view that the Federal Reserve’s securities purchases have been effective at easing financial conditions.”

Bernanke was not quite so admiring when it came to fiscal policy. “Even after economic and financial conditions have returned to normal, the federal budget will remain on an unsustainable path, with the budget gap becoming increasingly large over time, unless the Congress enacts significant changes in fiscal programs,” Bernanke said. This unsustainable path would eventually “drain funds away from private investment and increase our debt to foreigners, with adverse long-run effects on U.S. output, incomes, and standards of living.”

He also argued that declining confidence in our ability to get our debt under control would “lead to sharply rising interest rates on government debt and, potentially, to broader financial turmoil.”

So what exactly is pushing America onto the brink of this clear disaster? Our broken entitlement system. In that regard, Bernanke leaves no stone unturned.

He says the cost of our healthcare system – including Medicare and Medicaid – “will roughly double as a percentage of GDP over the next 25 years.” Then, seemingly forgetting that this was the supposed goal of Obamacare, argued that “the ability to control healthcare costs. . . will be critical to bringing the federal budget onto a sustainable path.”

I can read that as nothing other than a slap in the face of Congressional Democrats. Pointing out that healthcare continues to be on an unsustainable path despite, or possibly because of, Obamacare, points to the utter failure of the bill to live up to its promises. So much for “bending the cost-curve”?

Social Security also didn’t escape Bernanke’s wrath. “The retirement of the baby-boom generation will also strain Social Security, as the number of workers paying taxes into the system rises more slowly than the number of people receiving benefits,” Bernanke said.

Such warnings should serve as a direct repudiation of deficit deniers like Senate Majority Leader Harry Reid who said last month, “One of the things that always troubles me is, when we start talking about the debt, the first thing people do is run to Social Security. Social Security is a program that works, and it’s going to be – it’s fully funded for the next 40 years. Stop picking on Social Security.”

These problems will soon pose a threat to our nation’s financial stability. “One way or the other, fiscal adjustments sufficient to stabilize the federal budget must occur,” Bernanke said, the question is, will we do it deliberatively by a careful debate of our options, or will external investors demand changes in response to a crisis.

While President Obama continues to spout the need for more government spending, doing nothing but paying lip service to our rising deficit problem, the times demand more immediate change. Bernanke said, “acting now to develop a credible program to reduce future deficits” is needed to enhance economic growth in the long run. Sadly, there is very little evidence to suggest that Democrats in Washington are ready to begin the difficult process to trim the budget.

Such fiscal chiding is surprising coming from the Federal Reserve chairman, but it highlights the enormity of the challenges we face and Democrats lack of action to solve them.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/02/04/bernankes-speech-says-washington-must-act-to-preserve-our-future/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Friday, February 4, 2011 - 15:47

Democrats love to paint the picture of Republicans cozying up to lobbyists. They are always eating lunch in some impossibly upscale place where average folk couldn’t even sniff a reservation, or in some dark, smoke filled, bar smoking cigars and sipping Scotch, their pinky finger stuck out for good measure. The story goes, Republicans are in it for the money, Democrats are the ones left to defend the average people.

Yeah, well get ready to toss that fairy-tale out the window. ABC News reported today that key Democrats are gathering together an army of lobbyists and special interest groups who stand to lose big money from Republican’s proposed budget cuts.

In an e-mail obtained by ABC News, a top staffer for the key Senate Appropriations subcommittee called for a meeting of lobbyists and interest groups that would be affected by expected cuts to the Labor and Heath and Human Services budget. The Jan. 24 meeting was attended by approximately 400 people, sources told ABC, and served as a “call to arms” for those determined to fight Republican budget cuts.

“One thing everyone should be able to agree on now is that a rising tide lifts all boats, and that a higher [Labor, Health & Human Services] allocation improves the chances for every stakeholder group to receive more funding,” the committee staffer for Sen. Tom Harkin, D-Iowa, wrote in an e-mail inviting people to the meeting.

While Republicans are searching for ways to trim our exorbitant budget deficit, Democrats are looking for ways to preserve funding for their pet projects.

Our debt and deficit represent the largest threat to the next generation. Unless our fiscal path changes drastically, the economy will grow more slowly, the job market will become ever-more competitive, and wages will fall.  At the end of the day our American Dream will consist of smaller houses, fewer opportunities, and reduced aspirations.

None of that matters to the special interests and lobbyists that Democrats are currently courting to help them fight to keep the government money train rolling. They care about maximizing their results today.  That means ensuring teachers unions continue to receive cushy pensions, regardless of how they perform in the classroom. That means ensuring that the Health and Human Services budget doesn’t get cut so the hordes of new administrators don’t lose their plum government jobs. It means fighting for their individual interests over the interests of all Americans.

Paul Lindsay of the National Republican Congressional Committee wrote to reporters,

“House Democrats will stop at nothing to block efforts to cut spending and reduce the deficit. To help in this fight, they’ve enlisted their Senate Democrat colleagues and special interest lobbyists to use scare tactics in order to help continue their government spending binge that continues to inhibit job creation throughout the country.”

Normally, I’d say “scare tactics” is taking it a little far. But one of ABC’s sources inside the Democrats’ meeting with lobbyists wrote,

“They said these evil House Republicans are here and they’re going to kill all these programs that support little kids, senior citizens, and health care. They’re trying to instill the fear of God that Republicans are basically going to blow up all these programs, kill these programs, defund them.”

Such hypocrisy must stop. Our deficit is not something that can be toyed with. Republicans’ effort to trim the budget represents a long overdue attempt at clamping down on the massive waste of taxpayer money that has defined Washington over the past decade. If Democrats are not going to join us in an honest discussion over how best to address our nation’s most fundamental problem, instead choosing to talk behind our back with lobbyists, then we will go it alone.

Solving our deficit is shaping up to be a battle between special interests and our future. Democrats are showing what side they are on.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/02/04/democrats-secret-meeting-with-lobbyists-show-they-arent-serious-about-our-deficit/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Friday, February 4, 2011 - 15:46

We’ve said it before, Democrats are proving it again: fiscal conservatism is not a policy preference it is a real-world necessity.

In the past Democrats have talked about all the good things government could do, ignoring completely that it would take taxpayer money to do so. The results were cushy pensions for their public employee friends, uncompetitive wages for union allies, and continual growth in the size of the government bureaucracy. As it turns out, government programs cost money. Lots of it. More money than Democrats were willing to ask citizens to pay.

The results have been disastrous. Our federal government is facing record deficits for the third straight year and our debt is causing bond markets to shudder. Our states are in possibly worse shape since they don’t have the luxury of printing their own money.

The result of all this money mischief is that Democrats are beginning to sound a lot like fiscal conservatives. The latest example comes from the deep blue state of New York where Democratic Governor Andrew Cuomo has presented a balanced budget.

As the Wall Street Journal reported today,

The budget that Mr. Cuomo unveiled this week closes a gaping deficit with major budget reductions, calling for spending cuts in state hiring, education, health care, aid to universities and payments to cities. The plan would balance the Empire State’s $135 billion budget without a dime of new taxes or borrowing. Remarkably, if his budget passed, the state would spend $3.5 billion less than it did last year.

Education cuts? Has this Democrat gone crazy? Doesn’t he know that the DCCC is running ads against Republicans in New York, criticizing them for making cuts to education!

Pushing for cuts to liberal’s once-sacred programs is just the start of Cuomo’s plan to put New York’s budget on a sustainable path.  In an op-ed Cuomo wrote in the New York Post yesterday,

In Albany speak, “deficit” means the amount needed to fund the 13 percent increase (as opposed to a normal rate of increase). For example, if one assumed these programs would increase at the rate of inflation (instead of 13 percent) the $10 billion deficit is really a $1 billion deficit.

A “cut” is then defined as anything less than a 13 percent increase. By forcing the debate to start with such a large hike, the final budget ends up spending much more than the year before — even after the Governor attempts “cuts.”

. . . We need fundamental reform in the budget system that allows us to recalibrate spending this year to a sustainable level and replace “the special interest protection program” of automatic, unrealistic increases.

If you thought that sounds exactly like what Congressional Republicans have been arguing for the past few years, you’d be exactly right. In fact, it might as well have been said by Republican budget-hawk Paul Ryan. Oh wait, it has. In his plan to solve the national deficit Ryan has said,

The current budget process uses a “baseline” to measure the budgetary impact of legislation that instills an upward bias in mandatory spending. For example, the baseline projects the automatic growth in entitlement spending that will occur under current-law formulas, regardless of whether the government has the means to finance this spending. If legislation slows the growth of spending for a program relative to the baseline, it is considered a “cut in spending.”

So what is causing Governor Cuomo to talk and act like a Republican? Is it because he no longer shares liberal’s fondness for a hearty welfare state, Keynesian economic theory, and an active government? Most likely no. The real answer is that he has realized that there is no choice involved. That style of governance led the state of New York into the debt problems it currently faces – only by reducing the role of government will they be able to escape it.

Zach Howell, chairman of the College Republicans said it best, “The facts are utterly indifferent to the hopes of leftist-utopians who think ever-larger government programs can be paid for with humanitarian zeal. Fiscal conservatism isn’t an option – it’s a necessity.”

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/02/03/gov-cuomo-shows-fiscal-conservatism-is-not-an-option-its-a-necessity/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Friday, February 4, 2011 - 15:45

What would you do with $17,903? Buy a car? Put a down payment down on a house? Save for your college education? Put it all on black in a game of roulette?

Any of those things (yes, even the bad odds of roulette) would be a better investment than what the government will be forced to spend it on. You see, that $17,903 is the amount of money per US citizen that the government will spend on interest payments on the national debt over the next decade. And that’s if we’re being the glass-half-full type.

A new report by CNN finds that interest payments on the national debt could range from $5.5 trillion to $7.5 trillion depending on the scenario. When dealing with money and Washington it’s a pretty safe bet we’re going to be in the worse case scenario.

CNN tries to put those numbers in perspective,

Between 14 cents and 19 cents of every federal tax dollar collected over the next decade would be eaten up by interest.

That’s 14 cents to 19 cents of every tax dollar that will not be available to pay for government services and programs, or to aid Americans and states in the event of an economic downturn or natural disaster.

Looked at another way, the cost of interest payments in 2021 alone would trump what the government is expected to spend on defense, Medicare or all of the non-defense discretionary programs.

There is simply no justification for the fact that we’re going to be paying nearly $1 trillion in interest. Democrats like to tick off the beneficial things that taxes go toward – it funds education, maintains Social Security, and helps keep our roads paved. But how can you justify taxpayer money going to pay interest on loans given to us by China?

No jobs are created, no healthcare is provided, no retiree is made more secure by money that is spent to pay interest on our debt. We get nothing, literally nothing, in return for our tax dollars. In fact, it would have a detrimental effect on the very programs that liberals love to gush about. If we are having trouble paying for Medicaid now, imagine just how hard it is going to be with $1 trillion fewer dollars available in the federal budget.

This is not an issue we can continue to put off. The Congressional Budget Office just released a report predicting that the deficit will top out at $1.5 trillion this year – the highest dollar figure in our nation’s history.

It’s time Washington start doing what is in taxpayers best interest so that we can do something with our tax dollars other than simply pay interest.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/02/02/cbo-interest-on-debt-could-hit-7-5-trillion-over-the-next-decade/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Friday, February 4, 2011 - 15:44

In what is possibly the worst idea since green ketchup, Democrats are attempting to leverage the spending debate in their favor.

Earlier this week Washington Post blogger Greg Sargent wrote,

“There are increasing signs that Democrats are adopting a surprisingly aggressive and unapologetic posture in the looming political battle with Republicans over government spending. . . Rather than running from the issue . . . they are treating this as an argument that can be turned to their advantage, if it’s framed in the right way.”

One of those “increasing signs” Sargent was referring to was the Democratic Congressional Campaign Committee’s decision to launch an ad campaign in 19 congressional districts targeting Republicans for wanting to cut spending.

I’m not Karl Rove, but it doesn’t exactly take a skilled political operative to figure out that doubling down on spending is probably not a sound long-term political strategy. The CBO just released a report that the deficit would top $1.5 trillion this year and CNN found that even in the most optimistic scenario we’ll be paying $5.5 trillion in interest on our debt over the next decade. In other words, not exactly the time to be arguing we need to spend more.

The conservative group Crossroads GPS, who played a crucial role in the huge Republican victories in last year’s midterm elections, is now firing back. As reported by the Washington Post’s Aaron Blake, Crossroads is going up in the same 19 districts to highlight the stupidity (there’s just no other word) of criticizing Republicans’ attempts to fix our deficit. Blake reports,

“A week after President Obama called on Congress to work together, Pelosi’s gang launched negative ads attacking Sean Duffy for doing the hard work of trying to fix the budget mess she created,” says one ad.

The fact that Democrats would attempt to push public support away from deficit reduction shows the lengths they will go to put politics over principle. It is an unmistakable fact that our nation’s finances are on an unsustainable course. Just last year President Obama said that reducing our deficit “is going to require people of both parties to come together and take a hard look at the growing gap between what government spends and what the government raises in revenue. And it will require that we put politics aside, that we think more about the next generation than the next election.”

That sentiment sure didn’t last long. No sooner had Republicans’ begun offering solutions to our deficit, which will necessarily entail hard choices, than Democrats saw a chance to score some political points. Addressing our spending addiction will not be easy, but it will be made impossible if Democrats continue to play politics. What we need is an adult conversation, not childish finger pointing and misleading ads. What we need is for Democrats to live up to their word – to put the next generation before the next election. Unfortunately, their latest partisan games show they are, as yet, unwilling to do that.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/02/03/dccc-ads-show-democrats-putting-next-election-ahead-of-the-next-generation/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Wednesday, February 2, 2011 - 12:14

High speed rail can travel up to 160 miles per hour. Pretty darn fast. The only downside is, it wastes taxpayer money almost as quickly.

The budgetary history of government rail projects is an ugly one. In fact, after some cursory research, I could not find one single high speed rail project in the world that didn’t receive an enormous government subsidy. Not one!

Japan is often the country most associated with high-speed rail. The state-owned Japanese National Railways has run an operating deficit every year since the opening of its first high speed line. In the late 80s, after continuous deficits led to a financial crisis, the government privatized the railway. Today, private operators are earning a “profit” but only because rail service continues to receive a generous subsidy.

Europe has faced similar problems. France, by far Europe’s number one high-speed rail carrier, has actually seen a decline in use over time. In 1980 rail accounted for 8.2% of passenger travel, according to research done by the Cato Institute, by 2000 it had declined to 6.3 percent despite the advent of high speed rail. University of Paris economist Remy Prud’Homme told Cato that, “Users pay about half the total cost of providing the service,” and estimates that rail service receives about $100 billion in subsidies each year.

Despite this reality, when Obama sold his stimulus plan he said, “I am always jealous about European trains. And I said to myself, ‘why can’t we have high speed rail?’ And so, we’re investing in that as well.” Apparently jealousy trumps sound-economics in this White House.

The United State’s experience with government run rail is similarly disastrous. Amtrak lost money on 41 of its 45 train lines in 2008, according to a study done by Pew Charitable Trust. The average loss per passenger on trains was approximately $32. One train, serving the east cost from New York to Miami, which you would assume would be one of its more profitable lines, had a $145.23 per passenger loss. It literally costs taxpayers hundreds of dollars every time someone stepped on that Amtrak train.

Don’t even get me started on the Washington, DC metro system. We can’t get escalators to work, trains to run on time, or track maintenance done properly and it still operates with a 68 cents per-passenger subsidy!

Despite this ugly reality President Obama has seemed hell-bent on bringing high-speed rail to the United States. He used a major portion of the stimulus bill to kick-start investment in high speed projects. Now he is after more money. President Obama used his recent State of the Union address to make the case for more “investment.” He said,

“Our goal is to give 80 percent of Americans access to high-speed rail. This could allow you to go to places in half the time it takes to travel by car. For some trips, it will be faster than flying – without the pat-down.”

I’d laugh if it weren’t such an awful idea. Now Senator John Kerry is offering a bill to provide more grant funding for high speed rail projects, arguing that, “It’s so obvious that if you can bring trips down in time, we would be wasting less time from families, move products faster, raise property values, and create jobs in a larger area.”

President Obama and Senator Kerry are both focused on the wrong thing – time. But in this case time isn’t money, in fact it’s just the opposite. Saving people’s time is no doubt a good thing, but the question we must ask is: at what cost?

Just ask California. Obama gave them $2.3 billion to help launch a high speed rail line that will connect its most populous areas – Sacramento, San Francisco, Los Angeles and San Diego. Of course that $2.3 billion isn’t going to go along way when some estimates for the project say it will cost as much as $80 billion. Who is going to fill the gap in a state where its budget is in shambles and they had to furlough teachers in order to save money?

The fact is, high speed rail just doesn’t make sense in the United States. We are not Japan, or even Europe, when it comes to the size or population density of our country. With the exception of the Northeast (where we still cannot demonstrate that passenger rail can turn a profit) our cities are too far apart to justify the infrastructure investment required.

Geography is not the only issue. We also have our existing freight railways to contend with. As Steve Forbes explains in a must-read article about the failure of high-speed rail,

“While Europe focused on moving people by rail, we focused on moving freight, which is why the U.S. has by far the best and most efficient freight railroad system in the world.”

Nevertheless, the Administration is undermining this impressive achievement. Transportation expert Robert Poole of the Reason Foundation points out: “[There is an] inherent conflict between high-speed passenger rail and freight rail. Because the service characteristics are so different, you can optimize a rail system for one or the other, but not both.”

High speed rail is simply the wrong choice at the wrong time for America. We are deeply in debt and in dire need of spending discipline. If we really want to “invest” in our future, we should at least do it in something that offers a reasonable rate of return. The history of high speed rail shows that it does not.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

Crossposted: http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/01/30/runaway-train-obamas-high-speed-rail-investments-a-bad-idea/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Wednesday, February 2, 2011 - 12:13

WTF! Those were the words President Obama said almost a week ago in his State of the Union. No seriously, he said WTF. Okay, it wasn’t in the sense your probably thinking. After all, we’re talking about Barack Obama, not Joe Biden. This was still “a big f’ing deal.” Obama’s WTF moment was “winning the future.”

In his State of the Union, Obama issued a four part plan to “win the future.” They run the gamut from encouraging innovation, improving education, to rebuilding our roads. But the final “critical step” in Obama’s WTF plan is “to make sure we aren’t buried under a mountain of debt.” Which leads me to say…WTF (in the traditional meaning of the acronym).

If President Obama was truly concerned about addressing our debt you’d think he’d do something about our unsustainable entitlement structure. Instead, he’s going to extreme lengths to make them worse.

Medicaid is perhaps his worse offense. The difference between word and deed is astounding. In his State of the Union, Obama said we must further reduce health care costs “including programs like Medicare and Medicaid, which are the single biggest contributor to our long-term deficit.”

His actions have sent a completely different message. Approximately half of Obamacare’s much-hyped expansion in coverage is simply the result of expanding Medicaid’s eligibility.

The federal government isn’t the only one’s whose budget is going to get beat up by Medicaid expansion. Medicaid is jointly funded by state and federal governments, so any expansions in Medicaid means enormous costs for state governments. For its part, Obamacare will alleviate some of the budgetary tension by specifying that the federal government will pick up 100% of the costs of the expansion. That’s only until 2020 when states will then be required to pay 10% of the tab.

Nevertheless, states are finding it exceedingly difficult to pay their existing share of the Medicaid tab, much less face any expansions. As Kaiser Health News reported yesterday,

“Financially strapped governors, Congress and the Obama administration could be headed for a showdown over the Medicaid health care program that covers 48 million poor, disabled and elderly people nationwide.

Arizona’s governor has already asked for permission to drop people from the joint federal-state program, which states say is eating up huge portions of their budgets. But to do so, they need the green light either from Congress or the Obama administration.

If they don’t get one? States warn they may need to slash payments to doctors and hospitals and make deep cuts in other programs such as education. They could even thumb their nose at the law and cut eligibility, which would force the Obama administration to decide whether to cut all federal Medicaid funding to those states.”

The problem is that Obamacare eliminates state’s ability to maneuver out of the financial impacts of the Medicaid expansion. A provision of Obamacare mandates that a state will lose its federal share of Medicaid funding if it restricts eligibility. In other words, it’s Obama’s way or the highway on this one.

Obamacare is legislating states into debt. But we’ve already seen how this story ends. When states have difficulty paying their share of the Medicaid tab, the federal government swoops in to help the unsustainable program save face. For an example look no further than the stimulus bill. Among other healthcare spending, the $787 billion package gave $87 billion to the states to help them pay Medicaid costs.

So when states find themselves unable to pay for the increased Medicaid eligibility but the bill doesn’t allow them to fix their bottom lines, who do you think is going to come to the rescue? The federal government. And how will the federal government pay for the increase in the deficit? Inevitably through higher taxes.

Simply pushing states, and ultimately taxpayers, into a broken system is not reform. Expanding costs to the point where states are threatening to drop Medicaid is not the way to increase coverage. This is not the way to win the future. Although it does make me say, WTF.

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/02/01/medicaid-expansioning-threatening-state-budgets/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Wednesday, February 2, 2011 - 12:12

The United States is heading in the wrong direction. Spending is up, productivity is down; a combination most anyone can recognize as dire.

The national deficit in this country is expected to reach $1.48 trillion dollars this year. Now I know everyone is aware this is a lot of money, but can you really even begin to fathom just how much money that is? You could combine the net worth of the Forbes 50 wealthiest people in America, and only reach just over half of the national deficit. (Seriously take a look )

A prime example of what an increasing deficit can do to major world economic powers can be seen in Japan. Last week, financial services company Standard and Poor lowered Japan’s bond rating a notch on their ratings scale. While raising bond rates may not seem like that big of a deal, it is. The raise in rates is a reflection that investors are becoming increasingly worried that the government will be unable to pay back the price of their bond. The higher interest rates are simply a reflection of that increased risk as investors attempt to hedge their bets.

Japan’s problems closely mirror our own. The S&P said the reason it downgraded their bond rating was because of their “appraisal that Japan’s government debt ratios – already among the highest for rated sovereigns – will continue to rise further than we envisaged before the global economic recession hit the country and will peak only in the mid-2020s.”

Now here are some things to keep in mind, courtesy of Kevin Hassett of Bloomberg:

  • Japan’s debt was 135.4% of GDP when the S&P first downgraded it from AAA in in February 2001
  • If the US continues to run its current deficit it will take the US just six years to reach a debt level of 135.4% of GDP
  • Greece’s credit rating was downgraded repeatedly in 2009 when its debt level was 105.6% of GDP

In other words, we’re reaching debt levels which investors may not be willing to bear much longer. That isn’t the only factor working against us. Bond investors may be willing to bear high debt levels if the government presents an ability, or at least a willingness, to deal with the situation. S&P could not find that in Japan. In a statement S&P said that it “expects Japan’s fiscal deficits to remain high in the next few years, which will further reduce the government’s already weak fiscal flexibility.”

The United States seems to be facing a similar problem. Our deficit is creating a dual edged sword in which no matter what path we take to reduce the deficit – declining GDP and thus declining revenues will be the result. On the one hand, the CBO predicts that large budget deficits would reduce national saving and domestic investment that “would lower income growth in the United States.” On the other hand, as the debt grows, it becomes increasingly more difficult to solve the problem without raising taxes to a level that would substantially harm our economy. Our “fiscal flexibility” is being stretched to the breaking point. Unless we act soon, our government will soon be out of policy options.

The United States shares one other scary similarity with Japan – an aging population. In its statement on downgrading Japan’s debt the S&P stated, “Japan’s fast-aging population challenges both its fiscal and economic outlooks. The nation’s total social-security-related expenses now make up 31% of the government’s fiscal 2011 budget, and this ratio will rise absent reforms beyond those enacted in 2004.”

If that isn’t an argument for entitlement reform I’m not sure what is. In fact, the CBO recently warned us of the budgetary threat of our aging population. In their Long Term Budget Outlook the CBO warned,

All told, CBO projects, the aging of the population and the rising cost of health care will cause spending on the major mandatory health care programs and Social Security to grow from roughly 10 percent of GDP today to about 16 percent of GDP

If the United States does not want to share the same fate as Japan we must begin to get our fiscal house in order. A downgrade in our debt would shake the confidence of worldwide investors and potentially lead to the collapse of banks and governments that hold US debt. The S&P has already warned us once. A report from last October said that “absent policy and other changes” the US could be rated worse than Japan’s current status within the next decade. Can we really afford to wait to solve our deficit?

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

Crossposted: http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/02/01/japans-falling-credit-rating-a-warning-sign-for-us/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Wednesday, February 2, 2011 - 12:09

Judge Vinson just placed himself in the upper echelons of liberal’s shit list. Apparently liberal ideologues just can’t imagine that anyone could find a flaw in their greatest of achievements – Obamacare.

“There’s something thoroughly odd and unconventional about the analysis,” said one White House official. Really? The best critique you can come up with is “odd” and “unconventional”? This guy is clearly a legal scholar. I mean c’mon. Attack the precedent its based on, go after the logic used, argue that its interpretation of the Commerce Clause is way off, but if all you can say is essentially that it is weird, do me a favor and shut your yap. All that tells me is that you really, really, really want to find something wrong with the opinion, but can’t think of one darn thing that you is worthy of criticism.

Sadly, calling it “odd and unconventional” seems to be the best liberals could muster. Ezra Klein decided to compare it to Bush v. Gore for the simple, if idiotic, reason that it’s another case that liberals hate. Jonathan Cohn went on a search for clues to some sort of conspiracy theory and came up with a veiled reference to Tea Party groups. Look, look, it’s right there on page 42! Judge Vinson was trying to make the point that it seems ridiculous our founders would rebel against a tax on tea if they were then going to create a government that could mandate its purchase. Cohn loses all nuance, essentially pointing and shouting “He said tea! He said tea!” This he says is an obvious “shout out to the Tea Party.” To my knowledge liberals have been unable to find any hidden references or codes about Sarah Palin or Glenn Beck.

Finally, unable to come up with any of their own critiques, they decided to steal one of conservatives lines of attack – judicial activism. Stephanie Cutter of the White House Blog writes a post entitled “Judicial Activism and the Affordable Care Act” in which she argues, “Today’s ruling – issued by Judge Vinson in the Northern District of Florida – is a plain case of judicial overreaching. “ Jonathan Cohn echoes the argument,

“If judicial restraint means anything, it means deferring to the Congress on matters of policy preference–like, for example, whether it’s better to run a national health insurance system with a system of regulated private insurance rather than via a single-payer, government-run plan”

What liberals like Cohn and Cutter fail to understand is that the measuring stick for judicial activism is not Congress, it’s the Constitution. Obamacare runs so far afoul of the Constitution, by broadening its Commerce powers to the point where Congress could do almost anything, that only judicial activism could interpret it any other way.

So why is Judge Vinson’s ruling getting liberal’s undies in a wad? After all, he isn’t the first judge to rule that Obamacare is unconstitutional. Ah, but he is the first judge to strike the law down in its entirety.  Whereas the previous court found that the individual mandate (perhaps the most Constitutionally odious portion of the bill) could be taken out of the bill without harm, Vinson ruled otherwise.

On this issue, liberals shot themselves in the foot. As Vinson writes in his opinion,

I note that the defendants have acknowledged that the individual mandate and the Act’s health insurance reforms, including the guaranteed issue and community rating, will rise or fall together as these reforms “cannot be severed from the [individual mandate].” See, e.g., Def. Opp. at 40. As explained in my order on the motion to dismiss: “the defendants concede that [the individual mandate] is absolutely necessary for the Act’s insurance market reforms to work as intended. In fact, they refer to it as an ‘essential’ part of the Act at least fourteen times in their motion to dismiss.”

Congress knew that the individual mandate was essential to keeping healthcare costs low. By mandating younger, healthier individuals purchase more comprehensive healthcare than they want, or likely need, the bill could effectively subsidize their planned coverage expansion. Congress even said in the Act that,

[I]f there were no [individual mandate], many individuals would wait to purchase health insurance until they needed care . . . The [individual mandate] is essential to creating effective health insurance markets in which improved health insurance products that are guaranteed issue and do not exclude coverage of pre-existing conditions can be sold.

Now that liberals have spent the better part of the last two days trying, and dismally failing, to argue with Vinson on the merits, the fun part will be watching Democrats argue against themselves. Vinson’s agreement with Democratic legislators on the issue of severability essentially means that their lawyers will have to use their appeal to argue that the individual mandate was not necessary after all. As if their house of cards won’t tumble down when you remove the aces that prop up the entire thing.

Democrats greatest achievement of Obama’s term may also end up being their most spectacular failure. If they can’t do any better than call the decision “odd,” that result seems inevitable.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

 

Crossposted: http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/02/02/obamacare-ruling-has-tied-democrats-in-rhetorical-knots/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Thursday, January 27, 2011 - 21:27

We’re in deep trouble. There is simply no other conclusion you can take away from yesterday’s CBO Report.

In their “Budget and Economic Outlook,” the CBO said that the 2011 deficit will hit $1.48 trillion – nearly 40% higher than estimates the CBO made earlier in the year. That’s even larger than the $1.41 trillion deficit we racked up in 2009. It also represents the second highest percentage of the nation’s output since World War II, lagging only behind last year in terms of size.

How did we get to this point? As Rep. Paul Ryan explained in the Republican’s Response to the State of the Union:

There is no doubt the president came into office facing a severe fiscal and economic situation.

Unfortunately, instead of restoring the fundamentals of economic growth, he engaged in a stimulus spending spree that not only failed to deliver on its promise to create jobs but also plunged us even deeper into debt.

The facts are clear: Since taking office, President Obama has signed into law spending increases of nearly 25 percent for domestic government agencies – an 84 percent increase when you include the failed stimulus.

All of this new government spending was sold as “investment.”

The CBO’s report and Rep. Ryan’s response, make President Obama’s demands for more “investment” all the more absurd. Our government should not be looking for more ways to spend, it should be looking for ways to save. The CBO has already warned that, “a growing level of federal debt would also increase the probability of a sudden fiscal crisis, during which investors would lose confidence in the government’s ability to manage its budget.”

Our growing debt has real consequences. On the one hand, the CBO predicts that large budget deficits would reduce national saving and domestic investment which “would lower income growth in the United States.” On the other hand, as the debt grows, it becomes increasingly more difficult to solve the problem without raising taxes to a level that would substantially harm our economy.

Without immediate action we are approaching a Catch-22 that inevitably leads to dampened economic growth.

So we urge you to call, write, or email your Congressman. Let them know that we cannot afford President Obama’s “investments.” As this year’s $1.5 trillion deficit attests, we simply must stop trying to spend our way out of this recession. It’s time we demand fiscal accountability in Washington, it is clear they are not going to do it on their own.

To find contact information for your Congressman go HERE

by Brandon Greife, Political Director


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Thursday, January 27, 2011 - 21:26

Ronald Reagan famously said, “The trouble with our liberal friends is not that they’re ignorant, but that they know so much that isn’t so.”

President Obama’s State of the Union address seemed to prove Ronald Reagan’s point. Throughout his speech Obama made reference to our growing debt and deficit. He made it clear that he understands that there is a problem that will require a solution.

The bad news is, he honestly (we hope) believes that Obamacare actually helps to alleviate the threat of ever-increasing healthcare spending. In his speech Obama argued,

“[Tackling our deficit] means further reducing health care costs, including programs like Medicare and Medicaid, which are the biggest contributor to our long-term deficit. The health insurance law we passed last year will slow these rising costs . . .”

That simply “isn’t so.” But don’t take our word for it. In testimony before the House Budget Committee yesterday, the Chief Medicare Actuary, Richard Foster, said that the law wouldn’t hold costs down. As the Associated Press reported,

Foster was asked by Rep. Tom McClintock, R-Calif., for a simple true or false response on two of the main assertions made by supporters of the law: that it will bring down unsustainable medical costs and will let people keep their current health insurance if they like it.

On the costs issue, “I would say false, more so than true,” Foster responded.

As for people getting to keep their coverage, “not true in all cases.”

This is not the first time Foster has rebutted the President’s rosy claims about the impact of Obamacare. In his State of the Union Obama once again made the claim if we are going to make cuts “let’s make sure that we’re not doing it on the backs of our most vulnerable citizens. And let’s make sure that what we’re cutting is really excess weight.”

Apparently Obama forgot that the cuts Obamacare made to Medicare may end up hurting “our most vulnerable citizens.” As Richard Foster argued last April,

“A sustained reduction in payment updates…would cause Medicare payment rates to grow more slowly than…providers costs of furnishing services to beneficiaries. Thus, providers for whom Medicare constitutes a substantive portion of their business could find it difficult to remain profitable.”

This, Foster argues, could end up “jeopardizing access to care” for seniors.

President Obama may not be ignorant, but he sure knows a lot that just isn’t so. His healthcare reform bill doesn’t reduce the costs of Medicare and Medicaid, it potentially makes them worse. Obamacare doesn’t “strengthen” Medicare, it makes unrealistic cuts that will hurt seniors. This isn’t reform, this is regression.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/01/27/medicare-actuary-highlights-obamacares-flaws/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Wednesday, January 26, 2011 - 20:17

In last night’s State of the Union, president Obama took a page out of the Republican playbook. Obama said, “If a bill comes to my desk with earmarks inside, I will veto it.” Seems straightforward enough.

In fact, it is something that Congressional Republicans have been doing since March.  As then-Whip Eric Cantor wrote in an op-ed last October,

“House Republicans took an unprecedented stand in March, imposing an immediate moratorium on earmarks for the remainder of the Congress. Yet, because the governing rules of one Congress cannot bind the next, this moratorium will expire on Jan. 3, 2011. I do not believe that should be allowed to happen.

The next Republican Conference should immediately move to eliminate earmarks. Should Republicans be elected as the majority party, I believe that we should extend the moratorium to the entire House – to Democrats and Republicans alike. And I encourage President Barack Obama and the White House to take a similar step.”

President Obama’s comments in the State of the Union suggest he is ready to do just that as part of a “government that lives within its means.”

Not surprisingly, Democrats were furious. As Politico reported immediately after Obama’s speech,

After Obama surprised lawmakers in his State of the Union address with a bold threat to veto all bills with earmarks, Democrats in the Senate grew visibly frustrated, denouncing the president’s call as a power grab that’ll have little-to-no impact on the federal budget deficit.

Perhaps the most vocal critic of President Obama’s plan was Senate Minority Leader Harry Reid. Reid told reporters yesterday, “I think this is an issue that any president would like to have, that takes power away from the legislative branch of government. I think it’s the wrong thing to do. I don’t think it’s helpful. It’s a lot of pretty talk.”

Apparently, the White House couldn’t stand the heat coming from his own party. Just hours after making his no-earmarks pledge, President Obama was already attempting to qualify his statements. As Jim Harper of the Cato Institute just reported,

A “government reform factsheet” circulated by White House staff says, “The President intends to veto bills with special interest earmarks.” (emphasis added) This appears to create a class of earmarks that will bring the president’s veto, special interest earmarks, and a class that will not—national interest earmarks, one supposes.

This just goes to show that President Obama isn’t truly interested in changing the spending culture of Washington. He’s interested in sounding like a moderate who is willing to follow Republican ideas, but in reality continues to act like a free-spending liberal. Sadly, it appears Harry Reid was right on the money when he said that Obama’s pledge was just “a lot of pretty talk.” Well Mr. President, as the 2012 president elections near, remember that actions speak louder than words.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/01/26/obama-already-retreating-from-earmarks-promise/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Wednesday, January 26, 2011 - 20:14

“We can no longer afford to leave the hard choices for the next budget, the next administration, or the next generation.” That is what President Obama said when he unveiled his budget two years ago. Sadly, we’ve been pushing off those hard choices ever since. Yesterday’s State of the Union address was no different. It was Obama’s chance to finally address the unsustainable path we currently find ourselves on. Instead, we got a lecture in American exceptionalism.

It’s not that it was a bad speech. He, better than anyone, knows how to make Americans feel better about the present and downright optimistic about the future. But America didn’t need a doting father who is proud of what we have accomplished and sure we’ll make something out of ourselves. What we needed was a wake-up call.

As the Washington Post editorialized today,  “President Obama entered office promising to be a different kind of politician – one who would speak honestly with the American people about the hard choices they face and who would help make those hard calls.” In that sense, yesterday’s State of the Union can be labeled nothing more than a disappointment.

Instead we’re left with lots of mention of the “investments” our government must make to ensure that our economy continues to grow. What he really means is that he plans on continuing his failed attempt to spend our way into prosperity. But we can’t afford it.

In fact, we can afford nothing less than immediate action to begin addressing our deficit. As Rep. Paul Ryan said in the Republican Response,

“A few years ago, reducing spending was important. Today, it’s imperative.

. . . We face a crushing burden of debt. The debt will soon eclipse our entire economy, and grow to catastrophic levels in the years ahead.

On this current path, when my three children – who are now 6, 7, and 8 years old – are raising their own children, the federal government will double in size, and so will the taxes they pay.

No Economy can sustain such high levels of debt and taxation.”

This is the reality we face and it is the reality President Obama went to great lengths to avoid. Instead, he chose to pay lip service to our debt, promising a five year domestic spending freeze, that would do little but “freeze” our unsustainable deficits in place. He briefly mentioned Medicare and Medicaid, even going so far as to call them the “single biggest contributors to our long-term deficits.” But he provided no solutions, no leadership, other than to plug Obamacare and say he’s “willing to look at other ideas.” He also wants to “find” solutions to Social Security, then categorically rules out everything but tax increases to close the program’s financial gap.

In a Washington where “search” means nothing but “stall,” we are quickly running out of time. We must begin to make the hard choices necessary to confront our deficits before it is too late. This was President Obama’s chance to take the lead and truly pivot to fiscal reform. Instead, Obama has chosen to go the same route he did with the bipartisan fiscal commission. Endorse the search for solutions and then refuse to endorse them if they prove to politically difficult.

Fortunately, Republicans are attempting to fill the leadership vacuum in dealing with America’s fiscal peril. Just last week the Republican Study Committee did what President Obama has consistently refused to – private detailed cuts to our federal budget. Their plan, entitled the Spending Reduction Act, is a package containing $2.5 trillion in spending cuts over the next decade. The bulk of the savings come by returning discretionary spending to 2006 levels and implementing a hard freeze through 2021.

President Obama alluded to the RSC’s plan last night saying, “I recognize that some in this chamber have already proposed deeper cuts, and I’m willing to eliminate whatever we can honestly do without.”

If you’re willing Mr. President, we’re ready. It is time you live up to your promises to be a different kind of politician. It’s time to stop putting off the hard choices for the next administration or the next generation. Last night we didn’t need a pep-talk, we needed leadership. If you’re not willing to provide it, Republicans will be.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/01/26/state-of-the-union-a-missed-opportunity-for-leadership/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, January 25, 2011 - 18:01

Big night tonight! Unless you’re a Bears fan who couldn’t find the willpower to get out of bed after watching Jay Cutler give up in the first half of the NFC Championship Game, you’re probably aware that tonight is the State of the Union. Of course President Obama will be addressing an assortment of topics in this annual rah-rah, pat-ourselves-on-the-back, pep rally of “hey, look how much we did this year.” But for all you potential viewers out there, I’ll bet you dollars to donuts, that the president will spend the majority of his time discussing the budget and the deficit.

The President will use the debt and deficit as a springboard to launch into his great “but” moment. It’ll probably go something like this, “Yes, our deficits have grown too high, but we are America, and America has always found a way to confront and defeat it’s toughest challenges.”

But the debt is more than just the lead-up to a “but” moment (see what I did there?). The debt is a serious problem that will require many difficult decisions. We are currently $14 trillion in debt. That’s an ugly number and it is one that I can almost guarantee that Obama won’t mention.

Instead, he’ll dance around it, talking about how it’s a problem, while never providing any solutions into how to fix it.  He’ll pull out some line like, “We can no longer afford to leave the hard choices, for the next budget, the next administration or the next generation.” In fact, the only reason he won’t use that one is because he already said it…two years ago. So much for following through.

But Obama circa 2008 was right, it’s time we stop putting off the hard choices and start coming up with some solutions.

Unfortunately, the early reports on Obama’s State of the Union show that he’ll do just the opposite. The word is he’s going to be talking repeatedly about the need for “investments” in energy, innovation, education, and infrastructure as a means to stay competitive in the economy. As Senate Minority Leader Mitch McConnell pointed out earlier this week, “With all due respect to our Democratic friends, any time they want to spend, they call it investments, so I think you will hear the president talk about investing a lot Tuesday night.”

We’re investing in job creation, he’ll say. It’s about building a better future, he’ll promise.

Don’t be fooled. Government spending, or investment, doesn’t translate into jobs. As Amity Shlaes of Bloomerg writes,

For the past few years Price Fishback, a University of Arizona economist, and Valentina Kachanovskaya, a graduate student at the school, have been studying the effects of federal domestic spending from the point of view of individual states during the 1930s, a period of dramatic unemployment.

The authors’ findings, published in a National Bureau of Economic Research paper, suggest that the government will suppress private job creation, or possibly kill jobs, if fresh big spending becomes law.

The researchers found that after Hoover and Roosevelt, the stimulative effect of government expenditures took a nosedive. The researchers findings suggest that government money “may have had no effect or even suffocated” private sector employment. They even propose that today, federal money is growing even less likely to spur job creation.

So when you hear President Obama talking tonight about the need to “invest” just substitute it for the words “spend taxpayer money.” Whenever you hear that this investment will “create jobs,” understand that it will do the exact opposite.

by Peter Mao and Brandon Greife

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/01/25/obamas-planned-investment-will-dampen-job-growth/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, January 25, 2011 - 14:46

With the unemployment rate standing stagnate at above 9% over the last twenty months, most would agree that something needs to be enacted to reverse the current situation.  As much as the public would like to believe that Obama and his advisors are on the hunt for a solution to the unemployment crisis, the messy deliberations and relationships between his advisors have created a blockade that is prohibiting anything from getting accomplished.  This argument in solidified in the article “The White House Looks for Work” by Peter Baker.  In the article Baker interviews most of the White House’s main figures and describes their relations with each other.  He states, “..it was like picking through the wreckage of a messy divorce.”  Literally the advisors could be the stars in a new hit high school drama on the CW.

For example, Larry Summers, Former Director of the National Economic Council, during his time at the White House, was more concerned with receiving a car promised by Rahm Emanuel and arguing with Romer over the meetings that he was not invited to instead of the current economic crisis.  “He’s much better at telling you why you’re stupid than creating a system that can produce usable policy solutions,” said one Obama adviser, who, like others, did not want to be named criticizing Summers.  Is this high school drama at its finest or what?

In a further meeting between Austan Goolsbee, Summer, and President Obama, Goolsbee opposed the rescuing of Chrysler and warned Obama that rescuing auto supplies would also lead to the rescuing of auto makers.  Because of the statement to Obama, Summer exploded at Goolsbee because he was “re-litigating in front of the President”.  While Summer, Goolsbee and Romer were combatting invitations and statements made towards the President, Paul Volcker was the lone wolf in the situation; feeling ignored.  Volcker finally got his boost of self-confidence when the President endorsed his suggestion, dubbed the “Volcker Rule”, to lead the new Presidential Economic Recovery Advisory Board.

Peter Orszag also was involved in petty fights with Transportation Secretary, La Hood.  The apparent root of the debate between advisors was what to do about the deficit.  Orszag saw the deficit as the number one priority while others stated, “Yes, the deficit’s important, but not this year”, said one official.  Orszag did not want to cut the deficit too soon or too drastically but he did want to “start planning ahead.” Unfortunately, none of Obama’s other advisers gave much credence to Orszag’s suggestions. It is apparent they never listened to Thomas Jefferson’s advice: “don’t put off ‘til tomorrow what you can do today.”

The story paints a picture of a team whose relationships were more defined by pettiness than production. “Unfortunately,” said Orszag, “I think the environment often brought out the worst in people instead of the best in people. And I’d include myself in that.”  Romer goes on to state, “There’s no question there were strong personalities all around, and at times we were not as united as the president would have liked.”

After reading the testy interactions of the group it is clear their egos got in the way of creating positive policy. It seems they missed the day in elementary school where you were taught to play well with others. Sharing is caring, as they say. But neither sharing nor collaboration seemed to interest any of Obama’s economic team. The group-dynamic was more me-first, give me the credit, I want my name on that. In the selfish struggle to promote their own ideas, the wellbeing of the American people was somehow forgotten. Creating jobs became an academic pursuit, not an empathetic response. In that sense, it was a messaging, and policy failure.

That is one of the unspoken downsides of Obama’s leadership style. He surrounded himself with academics. No one disputed their obvious intelligence, but none of them had ever business experience. We originally criticized him because we thought they didn’t have the private sector experience necessary to know exactly what it takes to create jobs. In hindsight it appears that the problem was more that they had never worked as a team to advance a unified solution. They needed more boardroom arguments than classroom theories.  Without such experience they were left without the capacity to solve problems as a team. The end result was the backbiting, infighting, and political wrangling that churned out individual ideas, but never a cohesive plan.

As the relationship between Obama’s advisers fractured, is it any wonder that they couldn’t mend our broken economy?

by Christine Sawyer

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/01/25/as-obamas-economic-team-fractured-economy-continued-to-fall-apart/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, January 25, 2011 - 14:46

Alice Rivlin, former director of the CBO and appointee to President Obama’s deficit commission, has a simple prescription for what our government should do: Create jobs, not deficits.

It sounds so simple. And yet, in practice it has proved darn near impossible for President Obama and the Democratic majorities that have dominated Congress the past two years. To date, they haven’t been able to come up with a single plan to create jobs without spending massive amounts of taxpayer money.

Although Rivlin provides no hints as to the policies President Obama should follow to achieve the “create jobs not deficits” goal, she does give some important advice.

PRESIDENT OBAMA must use his State of the Union speech to make clear his commitment to two economic imperatives: accelerating job growth and controlling the federal deficit. He must persuade Americans that we do not have a choice between the two. We have to do both, and we have to get the timing right.

That means pushing hard for faster job creation, but also warning about looming federal deficits and their threat to prosperity. It means promising to work actively with Congress to control the rising debt.

Pivoting to deficit reduction is not me-tooing the Republicans. The pivot would have been necessary even if the Democrats had won. Fiscal responsibility is not about smaller government; it is about paying for the government we want.

The problem is, President Obama has long promised he would do just that. In passing his 2009 budget, Obama said, “We can no longer afford to leave the hard choices for the next budget, the next administration or the next generation.” That was two years and two budgets ago!

So in one sense Rivlin is right. President Obama must use his speech to lay out a plan to accelerate job growth while also laying out a plan to reduce the deficit. But ultimately it doesn’t matter what he has to say. Jobs will not spring up spontaneously and the deficit will not slash itself automatically no matter what magic words Obama peppers his speech with. It’s not anything that Obama will say, it is what Obama will do.

He’s said all the right things before. Now it is time to get down to business and follow through.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/01/25/state-of-the-union-only-matters-if-obama-follows-through/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, January 25, 2011 - 14:44

Attempting to decipher the results of the economic stimulus package is about as complicated as understanding the Pittsburgh Steeler’s blitz packages (non-sports fan translation: it’s hard).

Some economists called it a smashing success. Other economists said that the models used to deem the stimulus effective were based upon a flawed model that judges all government spending effective. Most people without an economics degree didn’t care one bit what economists thought and were simply concerned about an unemployment rate that seemed stubbornly high.

To complicate the analysis further, the stimulus wasn’t one big money dump. We didn’t just throw a trillion dollars in the air and say go to town! (Although that would have arguably been more effective) The money was spent in a variety of ways that make it very difficult to judge the stimulus as a whole.

Fortunately, Stanford economists John Cogan and Shirley Ely, have done it for us in a new article for Commentary magazine.

They break it down this way:

Keynesian stimulus packages come in three basic types. In the first type, the federal government puts money directly into the hands of consumers. The hope is that consumers will use the money to increase their purchases of goods and services. In the second type, the federal government directly purchases goods and services, including infrastructure projects, equipment, software, law enforcement, and education. In the third type, the federal government sends grants to state and local governments in the hope that those governments will use the funds to purchase goods and services.

So how did each type of stimulus fare? About as well as Jay Cutler did against the Green Bay Packers yesterday. That is to say….poorly.

The first type, getting money into the hands of consumers, was accomplished by sending one-time checks to households in the hopes that it would boost consumer spending. The researchers find that it didn’t. Instead, people did the smart thing – they either used the money to pay down their existing debt or they saved the money for fear that the economy wouldn’t recover for a while. In other words, families made the economic decisions that the federal government should have made all along – live within your means.

The second type, government purchases, was meant to jumpstart the economy by injecting demand for more goods and services. One of the primary purchases was going to be “shovel-ready” projects to update our “crumbling” infrastructure. Fast-forward two years and President Obama was singing a much different tune. In an interview with the New York Times Obama said, he realized too late that “there’s no such thing as shovel-ready projects.”

Spending on infrastructure and construction takes time because you must first identify worthwhile projects, then plan the project, then make sure it meets laws and requirements, then get the governmental “okay” to proceed, and then take bids from contractors. It’s a process that takes months and often years. What was meant to be a flood of blue-collar jobs, ended up little more than a trickle.

Finally, federal grants to state and local governments, was supposed to function much like the above. The hope was that federal grant money would be used by state governments to purchase goods and services to benefit their state and create jobs. The results were different.

As it turns out, states were more in debt than individual consumers, meaning much of the money was used to pay for existing liabilities. What wasn’t spent was saved to avoid layoffs, pay pensions, or meet healthcare costs. The researchers found that, “Nearly half of all stimulus-program grants to states have been funds for Medicaid, the primary state-government health-care program for low-income families.” In other words, the federal government was paying money to the states in the stimulus, and the state government was turning around and paying it to the federal government to pay for its share of Medicaid costs. Of course, taxpayers had to fund the bureaucracy along the way.

All of this ridiculousness, led to state and local revenues jumping 10 percent, but state and local purchases remained at 2007 levels. It accomplished nothing.

The stimulus was a grab-bag of ideas which shared a similar goal – boost consumer spending. But as you can see when you break it down into manageable parts, it didn’t achieve its goal. On the bright side, it did give economists lots to do.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/01/24/stimulus-varied-paths-all-lead-to-one-place-failure/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, January 25, 2011 - 14:43

Conservatives have spent much of the past week trying to explain exactly why Obamacare is going to bust the budget. We’ve done our best to highlight the unrealistic assumptions, the budgetary gimmicks, and the downright dirty tricks contained in the bill that make it a sur

But Democrats dogmatically kept pointing to the CBO report, conveniently ignoring Republicans critique of that very score.

Fine. There is more than one way to skin a cat. Okay, with PETA out in force these days, perhaps that’s not the best metaphor. How about, there is more than one way to pet a puppy. There, that works.

It’s time to go with Plan B. And frankly, we didn’t want to have to go there, but Democrats have forced our hand.  Even if you set aside reality and believe that Obamacare doesn’t add to the deficit, let’s look more closely at how it “accomplishes” that feat.

In the words of the CBO,

CBO anticipates that enacting H.R. 2 would probably yield, for the 2012-2021 period, a reduction in revenues in the neighborhood of $770 billion and a reduction in outlays in the vicinity of $540 billion, plus or minus the effects of forthcoming

CBO Director Douglas Elmendorf is a world-class economist, but he’s not exactly known for readable prose. So what exactly does the above statement mean? It means that Obamacare doesn’t lower the deficit by cutting costs, it lowers the deficit (if you believe the assumptions) by collecting more revenues.

Harvard economist Gregory Mankiw explains how ridiculous this is on his blog:

I have a plan to reduce the budget deficit.  The essence of the plan is the federal government writing me a check for $1 billion.  The plan will be financed by $3 billion of tax increases.  According to my back-of-the envelope calculations, giving me that $1 billion will reduce the budget deficit by $2 billion.

Now, you may be tempted to say that giving me that $1 billion will not really reduce the budget deficit.  Rather, you might say, it is the tax increases, which have nothing to do with my handout, that are reducing the budget deficit.  But if you are tempted by that kind of sloppy thinking, you have not been following the debate over healthcare reform.

Conservative columnist Charles Krauthammer engages in a similar critique in today’s Washington Post:

Suppose someone – say, the president of United States – proposed the following: We are drowning in debt. More than $14 trillion right now. I’ve got a great idea for deficit reduction. It will yield a savings of $230 billion over the next 10 years: We increase spending by $540 billion while we increase taxes by $770 billion.

He’d be laughed out of town. And yet, this is precisely what the Democrats are claiming as a virtue of Obamacare.

Obamacare doesn’t reduce help to reduce the deficit at all. Spending hundreds of billions of dollars and then subsequently taxing Americans hundreds of billions of dollars more, isn’t a plan to reduce the deficit.  It’s a hidden tax being sold on the premise that we’re actually reforming a broken healthcare system.

We’ve long known Obamacare used gimmicks to appear to reduce the deficit, now we know Obamacare itself is a gimmick to raise taxes.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/01/21/obamacare-a-tax-in-reforms-clothing/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, January 25, 2011 - 14:42

Everyone agrees that our current fiscal path is unsustainable. A recent poll found that 98 percent of Republicans and 94 percent of Democrats said that the US must act soon to address the nation’s long-term finances. Differences begin to arise when we talk about what we must do to raise the deficit.

Over the past year Democrats have attempted to hammer home the point that their preferred solution is to maintain (or even increase) government services to be paid for by tax increases. A few more moderate Democrats believe that the solutions is a mixture of tax increases and spending cuts. But almost everyone of the liberal persuasion agrees that one-way or another the federal government must increase revenues.

Republicans believe this is a false premise. We have a spending problem, not a revenue problem, they often say.

Regardless of which side your on, we’ve been led to believe that coming up with a plan to actually find places to save money was going to be an intellectually difficult, if not impossible task. On Wednesday the Republican Study Committee (RSC) threw that idea out the window completely.

Chairman of the RSC, Rep. Jim Jordan said that, “The national debt has grown from $8.6 trillion four years ago to more than $14 trillion today. This mountain of debt, nearly the size or our entire economy, threatens to create a whole new financial crisis. Every day we refuse to change course and instill some fiscal responsibility, the problem grows even larger. Unless Washington acts soon to cut spending, massive tax hikes, economic stagnation and national bankruptcy will rob our children of the opportunity to reach for the American Dream.”

To help preserve our generation’s future, the RSC has put together a plan entitled the Spending Reduction Act, which shows just how possible, it is to cut $2.5 trillion out of the federal budget over the next 10 years. And they make it look easy!

The main tenet of the plan is to “eliminate automatic increases for inflation from CBO baseline projections for future discretionary appropriations” and impose discretionary spending limits at 2006 levels. This alone will save $2.3 trillion!

The bill also begins the process of spring-cleaning the federal bureaucracy. Government programs, subsidies, and agencies have proliferated over time to the point where it is almost impossible to know exactly what we’re paying for. There is so much redundancy, overlap and waste, that a careful performance review can yield some enormous savings. The RSC plan does just that, cutting more than 100 specific programs that Americans no longer need, or the government can no longer afford. For instance, the bill would:

  • Save $15 billion by selling off federal properties the government doesn’t use
  • Stop Mohair subsidies which were put in place to ensure soldiers during World War II had wool
  • Eliminate duplicative education programs which would save $1.3 billion annually

Taken together the provisions of the bill would have an enormous impact on our deficit. However, this represents just one side of the equation. In addition to dealing with our exploding levels of discretionary spending, we must put forth ideas on how to solve our mandatory spending problems. That means solving our entitlement problem in which the growing costs of Social Security, Medicare, Medicaid, and now, Obamacare, will quickly bankrupt this nation.

The Republican Study Committee’s plan is further evidence that House Republicans are serious about getting our budget under control. We can only hope that their sincerity in dealing with our deficit problem is matched by President Obama and Democrats. Sadly, we have our doubts.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/01/21/rscs-deficit-reduction-act-shows-republicans-serious-about-spending-cuts/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, January 25, 2011 - 14:41

If you read yesterday’s New York Time’s expose on Obama’s economic policy, first off, congratulations on making it through because that thing was longer than the healthcare bill; and second, did you come away feeling like you had just read Soap Opera Digest than the Old Grey Lady?

Good grief. It was seven pages of gossip – not exactly what I’d expected out of the New York Times’ White House correspondent. I went in to the article attempting to understand President Obama’s approach to finding a job creation strategy that worked. I left feeling as if there wasn’t a strategy at all.

Trying to pin down a theme for Obama’s economic strategy is like trying to figure out Jim Carrey’s recent career path. Well, I think I wanna do drama. OK, that flopped, how a return to comedy. No, that’s boring. Now I got it, we’ll do a psychological thriller! By the end we’re left wondering what kind of an actor Carrey is, other than irrelevant?

Obama takes much the same approach “ah, what the hell, let’s try it” approach to the economy. As John Podesta, the former Clinton White House chief of staff said,

“It seemed like they were waking up every day thinking about how to pass more bills. It was like, do something. And if that doesn’t work do something else.”

Of course, the New York Times can’t call it what it is – a schizophrenic approach that had us going in circles rather than making any progress. Instead, they label it “improvisational.”

His approach to economic policy has been as much improvisational as ideological, a blend of Keynesian spending, business tax breaks, bank and auto bailouts, tax cuts for workers — really almost anything he thought could fix the problems.

Except none of it fixed the problems. In case you hadn’t noticed, even after the stimulus and every other piece of craptastic piece of legislation was passed, unemployment is still above 9 percent. The economy still sucks. And Obama apparently has fewer ideas of how to fix it than before.

That hasn’t stopped his current economic team from trying to put something together to please him. Unfortunately, the Times writes,

The ideas presented to him, though, seemed familiar and uninspired. “You know, guys,” he said, according to someone in the room, “I’ve told you before, I want you to come to me with ideas that excite me.” Nothing he was hearing excited him.

This is economics, not the NFL playoffs. Nobody is expecting excitement. We’re expecting a bunch of egg-heads to get in a room, talk about a bunch of numbers, variables, and ratios, and then bang-out a solution.

The fact that his team couldn’t pull a MacGyver (or a MacGruber if you’re too young to remember) and take a coffee mug, a desk set, and some of Reagan’s leftover jellybeans and create some sort of job-creation machine really pissed the big guy off. As one adviser told the New York Times, “He grew frustrated because the economic team didn’t have that magic combination.”

But perhaps this isn’t a problem with Obama so much as it is with the team he surrounded himself with. If we’re picking teams loaded with talent that seriously underachieved, this economic team ranks right up there with the Dallas Cowboys, Minnesota Vikings, and New York Mets. They were all getting their fingers sized for rings before they ever won a game. Turns out they wouldn’t win many.

And to be clear, Obama did assemble a team that would’ve made the Miami Heat blush. Ya had Larry Summers, the former treasury secretary and Harvard President, Christina Romer, a UC Berkeley professor with a kick-ass research background, Paul Volcker, a former Federal Reserve Chairman who is known for a historic beat down of inflation in the 80s, and Peter Orszag, who is only 42 but has the intellectual capacity of a moderately sized country.

What appeared to be a dream team ended up like a badly scripted sitcom. Summers was the overbearing boss that apparently makes Meryl Streep’s character in the Devil Wears Prada (yes, I’m a dude and I’ve watched it) easy to work for. As one colleague told the New York Times,

“He’s much better at telling you why you’re stupid than creating a system that can produce usable policy solutions.”

Then there’s Christina Romer, the character who really, really wants to be part of the cool group but just can’t find a way to fit it. I’m envisioning a Saved-By-The-Bell-style-Screech-like-character. As the Times describes one incident,

“Summers skirmished with Romer over a meeting at which she was not included. ‘I didn’t come here to waste my time,” Romer angrily told him.”

This kind of crap is supposed to go on in elementary school playgrounds, not the freakin’ Oval Office

Then there’s Paul Volcker, the down in the dumps “aw-shucks” character that finally gets noticed. I would say this is a dead fit for Rudolph, but one, Christmastime is over and I went way over my holiday-metaphor quota before we even hit Thanksgiving, and two, I’m not sure how a claymation character would fit in my live-action sitcom. So we’ll go with, Ted Williams! You know, that homeless guy that was recently discovered for having a golden voice.

Volcker was never quite that low, but the Times says that he “felt ignored” and left out of the loop. That is until, the President started using one of his ideas, even throwing him a bone by calling it the “Volcker Rule.” I bet he was insufferable after that. Word is that he goes around introducing himself by saying, “Hey…You know the Volcker Rule? (pause for emphasis) It’s named after me.” OK, I made that last part up, but we all know someone at work who does that.

Finally, you’ve got Orszag. He plays the role of the really smart guy with the really great ideas who gets ignored because he’s too young to know what he’s talking about. It’s like Matt Damon in Good Will Hunting, except this guy was the director of the CBO, not a janitor. The Times described the situation, saying:

At the heart of the friction was the deficit, which Orszag saw as a priority. Other officials tired of Orzsag’s refrain. “Yes, the deficit’s important, but not this year,” said one official. “I think the deficit for him was always most important. He was not winning the argument.”

We listened to ya Pete! We’ve written extensively on the threat of debt and deficits! Sadly, we’re more ignored than you are. In fact, while I’m at it. Hello? Is anyone reading this? Can you hear us out there in conservative land? No? Ok. We’ll keep writing anyways, perhaps our blog will become well read posthumously.

So there ya have it, four widely disparate characters that wouldn’t make a good sitcom, much less a good economic team. And that’s the problem. We couldn’t stick them on TNT at 9pm on a Friday in hopes they’d go away, these were the people who were entrusted with getting our economy going again. This is the group that millions of people relied on to help them get a job to keep food on the table and a roof over their head.

But as Orszag reflected,

“Unfortunately, I think the environment often brought out the worst in people instead of the best in people. And I’d include myself in that.”

Now the team that was self-described “dysfunctional” is defunct. And while the New York Times “pick[s] through the wreckage of a messy divorce,” let’s hope Obama’s new dream team of economic advisers is busy coming up with solutions that excite him. Or better yet…that actually create a damn job.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/01/20/political-infighting-among-no-drama-obama-economic-team-slowed-our-recovery/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, January 25, 2011 - 14:40

This week we started a new series called “Liberal Mythbusters.” The idea is to get you, the readers, involved by asking them to find some myths that have been promulgated in the media. We’ll then do the research and do our best to debunk the flawed liberal logic.

This week, Richie Salata asked the question: “We constantly talk about increasing our national debt when we’re already trillions of dollars in debt. Why do we care if it gets bigger?” His concern that “we really don’t have options. Either we spend ourselves into a deeper hole with democrats or we have the economy collapse on itself with Republicans.”

First, there are significant reasons to care about the size of our national debt. The worry is not so much about the debt itself, but about investor confidence in the ability to pay back our debt.

Congress cannot simply create money out of thin air. Well, it can, but not without significant harm to our currency. Instead, to finance our spending, they offer bonds. These bonds are sold to a wide variety of people, the primary investors being mutual funds, banks, and foreign governments. The government is able to sell these bonds with very low interest rates, which is solely a reflection of the risk of the investment.

If bond-buyers perceive that the US debt is threatening the government’s ability to pay back these bonds, they will begin to ask for higher interest rates to offset the increase in risk. Mind you, that investors aren’t merely looking at our current spending. They are closely looking at our unfunded liabilities, which are promises that have already been made by our government about money that will be spent in the future. This goes for things like Medicare, Social Security, and public sector pensions, that will face an enormous budget gap in the future unless taxes rise enormously.

To understand just how big a worry this is to investors consider that the National Bureau of Economic Research estimated that as of this year we have approximately $79.4 trillion in unfunded liabilities. Credit rating agencies, who are significant players in determining our borrowing costs, recently warned that,

“[The US and other debt-plagued nations face] dramatic increases under their existing policy commitments arising from ageing related pension and healthcare subsidies. These future costs must be brought under control if these countries are to maintain long-term stability in their debt burden credit metrics.

So the reason we care about the debt getting bigger is because bond markets are becoming increasingly more afraid. There is no specific tipping point that we can point to. It is not a situation in which once we hit a magical ceiling, the entire house of cards starts to fall. Rather, it’s a question of confidence. As the Congressional Budget Office explained recently,

“Growing budget deficits will cause debt to rise to unsupportable levels … there is no identifiable tipping point of debt relative to GDP indicating that a crisis is likely or imminent. But all else being equal, the higher the debt, the greater the risk of such a crisis.”

In other words, let’s not press our luck, because if and when the crisis comes, it will be hard to stop.

As to Salata’s second concern, we do have options. Or perhaps it would be more correct to say, we have one option. We must begin to pay down our debt before the threat of defaulting on our obligations becomes really.

Fortunately, paying down our debt does not mean the economy collapses as Salata suggests. Instead, it is just the opposite. As the CBO wrote in its Long Term Budget Outlook,

“If spending grew as projected and revenues did not rise at a corresponding rate, annual deficits would climb and federal debt would grow significantly. Large budget deficits would reduce national saving, leading to more borrowing from abroad and less domestic investments, which in turn would depress income growth in the United States. Over time, the accumulation of debt would seriously harm the economy.”

A paper by economists Carmen Reinhart and Kenneth Rogoff confirm the CBO’s assessment. They found that in nations where the debt-to-GDP ratio exceeded 90 percent, economic growth fell by one percent. That may not sound like a lot, but the cumulative impact can be enormous. Consider this fact from economist Tyler Cowen – “had America grown one percentage point less per year between 1870 and 1990, the America of 1990 would be no richer than the Mexico of 1990.” Now you see why growth is so important! But the private sector can grow, only if government debt doesn’t snuff it out.

In sum, our current deficits coupled with our inability to solve our long-run spending, is creating the conditions for a crisis. Fortunately, this is not a situation where we are cutting off our nose to spite our face. Quite the contrary, getting our spending and debt under control will help stimulate investment and growth in our economy.

We hope this answered your question Richie! Over the next week, be sure to stay on the lookout for any liberal myth’s that need busting!

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/01/20/liberal-mythbusters-our-debt-is-too-important-to-ignore/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Friday, January 7, 2011 - 14:59

One of Republican’s primary promises to voters was to repeal and replace Obamacare. This week, with John Boehner taking over the Speaker’s gavel, they are prepared to have a vote to do just that.

Nevertheless, this hasn’t stopped many media sources from crying hypocrisy. The healthcare reforms actually reduce the budget deficit they claim. Getting rid of the bill will thus increase our national debt. They then, with a smug grin surely spread across their face, ask – didn’t Republican promise to lower the deficit?

In doing so they point to a Congressional Budget Office estimate that repeal would increase the deficit by $230 billion in the next 10 years. OK, they’re not just pointing to it, they’ve made it to a neon sign, framed it in solid gold, and spot-welded it to the Capitol Dome with a note that says “we told you so!”

They think they’ve got us backed into a corner. They believe this is the perfect Catch-22. Either we live up to our deficit cutting promise and break our vow to repeal Obamacare; or we repeal Obamacare and watch as the deficit goes up.

I’d be scared if they weren’t so wrong.

The fact is, we’ve had this debate before. To be more accurate we had about two years worth of debate over the cost. And if I remember correctly, those who said it would bust the budget one

Not because they were more savvy arguers mind you; no, they won because they had the facts on their side. So here’s the facts. According to the Center for Medicare and Medicaid Services (CMS) the federal share of healthcare costs will continue to soar upwards. According to a report last year, by 2019 the United States will spend $4.6 trillion on healthcare, up from $2.6 trillion we spent this past year. That’s much faster than the rate of inflation and faster than if Obamacare had not been passed.

The CBO echoed CMS’s concerns. A blog post released by CBO Director Douglas Elmendorf said that,

“The rising costs of health care will put tremendous pressure on the federal budget during the next few decades and beyond.

In CBO’s judgment, the health legislation enacted earlier this year does not substantially diminish that pressure. In fact, CBO estimated that the health legislation will increase the federal budgetary commitment to health care by nearly $400 billion during the 2010-2019 period.”

To be fair they also said that the legislation will reduce budget deficits by $140 billion. But that figure is subject to an important, and enormous, caveat: the CBO is required to take legislation at face value in all its gimmickry glory.

Obamacare accounting was packed with budgetary gimmicks and tricks designed to hide the bill’s true cost. If you don’t believe me, take Elmendorf’s word for it. He wrote that the, “CBO’s cost estimate noted that the legislation maintains and puts into effect a number of policies that might be difficult to sustain over a long period of time.” The rates that he is talking about are the repayment rates for providers of Medicare and Medicaid services. Obamacare as scored by the CBO magically assumes that physicians services would be reduced by 21 percent this year and then fall further in later years. Good luck getting physicians to buy into that future!

That is not even the worst of the smoke and mirrors. It also ignores $500,000 worth of double-counting in which the bill uses offsets and cuts from Social Security, Medicare, and the CLASS Act and uses them to pay for Obamacare. The problem is that they then can’t be used to pay for their own programs. I think Social Security recipients would be rather upset if you told them they wouldn’t be receiving their promised benefits out of the Social Security trust fund, but don’t worry, we’ve got Obamacare now!

The bill’s coup de grâce is the fact that it artificially lowers the cost of the bill by using a 10-year budget window that begins in 2010, despite the fact that the provisions of the bill won’t start until 2014. As left-leaning blogger Ezra Klein wrote, “This was a deceptive effort to keep the bill’s price tag under $1 trilion, even as the bill’s price tag was really quite a bit more.”

So yes, the CBO scored the bill as a deficit reducer, but only because its hands were tied by funny liberal accounting. In reality, repealing the healthcare reform bill will save us hundreds of billions of dollars over the coming decades. Repealing healthcare is not a Catch-22 for Republicans. It’s a fulfillment of two of their chief campaign promises – ending Obamacare and reducing the deficit.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Friday, January 7, 2011 - 14:58

“The real tension [in the debt limit debate] won’t be between Republicans and Democrats. It’ll be between Republicans and Republicans.”

That was the prescient prediction of Stan Collender, a former staffer for the House and Senate Budget committees and founder of the blog Capital Gains and Games.

Indeed, an intra-party debate is already forming about the wisdom of once-again raising the debt limit. It is lamentable that this has happened.

The reason we are facing the prospect of crashing through yet another debt ceiling is years of fiscal ineptitude from both the President and Congress. We’ve promised well beyond what we can deliver and we’ve spent well more than we can afford.

This spending irresponsibility has put the new Republican majority in the unenviable position of being forced to vote to raise the debt limit, or vote against it and risk defaulting on the national debt.

Some conservative commentators have taken to the blogosphere to ask, well, is a default really that bad? After all, it would absolutely force us to get our books in order.

But to be intellectually honest, it is a terrible idea. When the United States borrows money it uses a variety of debt instruments (for the sake of ease I will generalize all of these instruments by the term “bond”). In general, three types of entities purchase these bonds. On a small scale, individuals own the bonds because they are a safe way to spread out the risk of their investment portfolio or mutual fund. If the federal government doesn’t increase its debt limit, and thus defaults, these government bonds would be worthless. People’s savings, hedge funds, and retirements would be flushed down the drain. Americans, who sense themselves to be immeasurably poorer than they were before a default would immediately save rather than spend. A fall in consumer demand of this scale would make our current economic issues look downright juvenile.

More importantly, in terms of scale, banks and other corporations are the largest investor in government bonds. A default would mean the loss of life insurance policies, pension funds, for workers, and a destabilization of the asset base of many corporations and all banks.

The United States financial markets wouldn’t be the only to suffer. Trillions of dollars in debt is owned by foreign governments. Foreign nations would soon be looking to us to recoup, one way or another, the billions in losses they face from a political decision not to live up to our debts. Of course, as we saw with the recent financial crisis, a United States problem, quickly grows into a world problem. Global financial markets would be rocked and a worldwide credit crunch could take hold.

Our nation must get its fiscal books in order, but as I hope I’ve shown, defaulting on our debt is too high of a cost.

So rather than fighting amongst ourselves over whether we should vote on a debt limit increase we should explain why we must vote for the debt increase – because Democrats’ wasteful spending is essentially holding a gun to our head.

Instead of infighting we should use the debate as a public relations lever to achieve the spending cuts that are necessary to reduce our debt over the medium-term. New Speaker of the House John Boehner has already staked his claim on this position saying,

“The American people will not stand for such an increase unless it is accompanied by meaningful action by the president and Congress to cut spending and end the job-killing spending binge in Washington. While America cannot default on its debt, we also cannot continue to borrow recklessly, dig ourselves deeper into this hole, and mortgage the future of our children and grandchildren.”

We cannot default, but that doesn’t mean we can’t change our spending habits. In fact, that is exactly what we must do. The vote on the debt limit has put Republicans in a very difficult spot, but it also affords them a wonderful opportunity. We can hold Democrats feet to the fire on spending, but only if we stop arguing amongst ourselves.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Thursday, January 6, 2011 - 13:58

A new Republican-led Congress has begun its work. Yesterday afternoon, John Boehner was elected Speaker of the House of Representatives.

It is a new majority, but more importantly it is a new era. As Republican strategist Kevin Madden told Politico, “I think John truly believed that we lost a lot of credibility of being a party of reform, and he’s looking to restore that and maintain it and emphasize it.”

He’s right. In the waning Bush years, many Republicans had lost their way. At some point we stopped being the party of limited government and fiscal responsibility and instead fell into the trap of spending. But through the fire of the recent elections, our party has been purified, and is now once again ready to tackle the challenges laid before us by our free-spending friends across the aisle.

The new majority, with Boehner at the helm, aims to change a Congress that is rigged to spend. To that extent, the new House rules will instill a mindset of openness and frugality. Rather than pay-as-you-go rules, Republicans have installed cut-as-you-go, in which any increases in mandatory spending must be offset by spending cuts in other programs. In addition, Republicans seek to do away with omnibus bills, that hide spending, and unnecessary pork projects, in enormous legislative packages.

Perhaps most importantly Republicans will have an open rule on all spending bills. This means that both parties will have the opportunity to offer more amendments and more time for debate – ensuring that everyone will have a voice in ensuring the House passes quality legislation. As Boehner said today in his remarks,

We will dispense with the conventional wisdom that bigger bills are always better; that fast legislating is good legislating; that allowing additional amendments and open debate makes the legislative process ‘less efficient’ than our forefathers intended. These misconceptions have been the basis for the rituals of modern Washington. The American people have not been well served by them.”

In short the Republicans will ask themselves three questions before taking any action. As described by Eric Cantor, “Every day make sure we ask, one, are our actions focused on job creation and the economy; two, are our actions focused on cutting spending; and, three, are our actions focused on shrinking government while protecting and expanding liberty? If we are not focused on those things, the question to really ask is, why are we doing it?”

Speaker Boehner and the rest of the Republican House majority are ready to move forward. It has no doubt been a contentious couple of years. Debating the merits of legislation has often given way to ridiculous and ill-founded attacks on both sides of the aisle. But as Dennis Hastert said when he became Speaker in 1999, “solutions to problems cannot be found in a pool of bitterness.”

But Boehner, who often likes to tell the story of how he grew up in his father’s bar outside of Cincinnati, mopping floors, is the right man to sop up that pool of bitterness. As he said in his speech, “a great deal of scar tissue has built up on both sides of the aisle. . . My belief has always been, we can disagree without being disagreeable to each other.”

It is time we put our differences behind us and focus on moving this country forward again. There is no better person to lead the way, than new Speaker of the House John Boehner.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/01/05/new-house-speaker-john-boehner-ushers-in-new-era-in-washington/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, January 4, 2011 - 18:19

The national debt is on an insane trajectory. Since June, a short seven months ago, the debt has soared $1 trillion dollars to just a hair over $14 trillion (when I say “hair” I mean a measly $25.2 billion). That means the debt is inching perilously close to the statutory debt limit of $14.29 trillion.

Congress will have to vote to raise the debt ceiling, an odious but necessary task if we want to avoid national default. As Republicans talk about the need to use the debt limit vote as a lever to reduce government spending, White House economic adviser Austan Goolsbee is taking a much different, and much louder, tact.

Goolsbee accused Republicans of “playing chicken” with the “full faith and credit of the United States.” “This is not a game. The debt ceiling is not something to toy with,” said Goolsbee, instead saying it “would be the first default in history caused purely by insanity.”

The problem with throwing around such heated rhetoric is that it often backfires. And oh boy is it backfiring. As economics blog e21 first reported, as it turns out both President Obama and Vice President Biden voted against raising the debt ceiling when they were Senators in 2006:

Then Senator Obama called a vote to increase the debt ceiling “a sign of leadership failure” and that “rising debt is a hidden domestic enemy, robbing our cities and states of critical investments… Increasing America’s debt weakens us domestically and internationally.” Biden went even further in making hyperbolic claims.

“Because this massive accumulation of debt was predicted, because it was foreseeable, because it was unnecessary, because it was the result of willful and reckless disregard for the warnings that were given and for the fundamentals of economic management, I am voting against the debt limit increase,” Biden said.

In fact, every single Senate Democrat voted against the debt limit vote in 2006.

Sadly, those same reasons why Obama and Biden voted against the increase in 2006 ring even more true today. We’re robbing our states, not to mention future generations. The accumulation of our debt was unnecessary and ran against the “fundamentals of economic management.” It is certainly weird to hear two of the current managers of our fiscal ineptitude, leaders who have presided over the largest increase in debt over the course of our nation’s history, chide anyone else’s fiscal record.

But while Senate Democrats “insanity” over the debt limit vote apparently knew no bounds, today’s Senate Republicans are taking a much more logical path. As leading conservative voice, Senator Lindsey Graham said, “To not raise the debt ceiling could be a default of the United State on bond and Treasury obligations…But this is an opportunity to make sure the government is changing its spending ways.”

Ah…reason.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/01/04/biden-and-obama-take-hypocritical-stance-on-debt-limit/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, January 4, 2011 - 18:18

Washington Post blogger Ezra Klein and I share a New Year’s resolution for our federal government: “Lose weight and get fit.”

Where Klein and I differ is the exact proportion of diet (cutting the budget) and exercise (investing intelligently). Klein tilts the scale towards investing in things such as education, green technology, and infrastructure rather than cuts and reforms to wasteful programs. In his words, “The government can no more cut its way to a strong economy than a person can starve himself to health.”

I on the other hand, side with most weight-loss professionals and argue for an 80-20 rule. To get our government’s finances in tip-top shape, we need to focus about 80 percent of our energy on putting government on a diet, and 20 percent of our energy in exercising its more useful functions.

To that extent, I agree with Klein, in that our infrastructure, especially our smart grid, and educational system needs serious work. The work required won’t always cost money. In some cases it should save the government money. Especially in educational reform where year after year we spend throw more money at the problem for stagnant results. Take for example, the District of Columbia which spend an average of $28,170 per pupil on education each year. By comparison, Sidwell Friends, the most expensive private school in the district, and educational home to such figures as Chelsea Clinton and Nancy, costs $30,842 per year.

In other words, we don’t need to spend more money, what we desperately need is fundamental reform to make sure that our money is being spent wisely.

Klein argues that investing money in these areas will ultimately jumpstart economic growth. But as the CBO warned not long ago, growing deficits, the result of government overspending, is the primary threat to our economic growth. That is because large deficits reduce national saving, leading to higher interest rates, which leads to less domestic investment and ultimately lower growth.

The CBO’s warning shows us that the focus of our national New Year’s resolution should be putting the government on a diet. Our budget deficit is growing beyond control. Within the next decade our government will be spending nearly $800 billion on our national debt in addition to steadily increasing healthcare and entitlement costs. Unless serious reforms for some of the largest government programs are contemplated our economy will soon be burdened by higher tax rates and less money available for investment.

That doesn’t mean that things cannot be done sooner. Klein recommends taking “one-half of 1 percent for every [government] programs and us[ing] it for evaluation.” This would allow us to trim the fat from many federal programs and get rid of redundant or worthless programs.

I would add another recommendation – prioritization. It’s the “eat this, not that” approach to federal government dieting. If I really want to eat a bowl of ice-cream for dessert, I know I need to eat healthier lunch and dinner. The same goes for federal programs. If citizens, and by extension their government, want to prioritize infrastructure investment then I have to scrimp and save on another portion of the budget.

Failure to prioritize is what led us to our current problem – pure overindulgence. When the federal government sat down to eat it gorged on darn near everything it could get its hands on. The result is a flabby, lazy, system that craves spending. But the holiday binge is over. It’s time we put government on a strict regimen of diet and exercise. But let’s cut the fat before we pack on muscle.

by Brandon Greife

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/01/03/federal-governments-new-years-resolution-lose-weight-and-get-fit/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, January 4, 2011 - 18:17

The New Year’s celebrations have come and gone. The confetti has been swept off Times Square sidewalks, the party hats and noisemakers have found their way to the trash, and all but the worst of hangovers has been slept off. As we wave goodbye to 2010, we usher in several new provisions of the Affordable Care Act, better known as Obamacare.

Chief among the new provisions is a requirement that commercial insurers spend at least 85 cents of every premium dollar on medical costs. This minimum “medical-loss ratio” was created with the intention of forcing insurers to spend money on policyholders rather than administrative costs or profits. But as economist Milton Friedman once said, “One of the great mistakes is to judge policies and programs by their intentions rather than their results.”

The results of Obamacare’s mandated medical-loss ratio are potentially disastrous. This is because the mandate prescribes only one possible explanation for lower medical loss ratios. Liberal policymakers behind the provisions have incorrectly argued that the ratio is a measure of service. That is to say, a lower ratio must be tied to a reduction in the quality of care for patients. This isn’t the only interpretation. In fact, James C. Robinson a researcher for Health Affairs, argues that this understanding is “politically the most volatile and analytically the least valid use of the statistic.”

In fact, lower ratios may actually indicate that health insurers are succeeding in one of Obamacare’s primary stated goals – bending the cost curve. To understand why we must first understand that the medical-loss ratio is a fraction where medical expenditures are the numerator and insurance premiums are the denominator. To “improve” the ratio to fit the mandate, I can influence either of the numbers. In other words, one method of meeting Obamacare’s new guidelines is to let the cost of medical care rise, regardless of whether it improves health outcomes.

This cost creep is avoided in a free market system. In such a system, insurance companies will attempt to maximize profits. One of their prime tools to accomplish this is to keep premium inflation down over time. The more insurers hold healthcare providers’ feet to the fire over cost increases, the more profit they earn. Consumers will likewise benefit because insurers will increasingly have to compete in the marketplace through lower priced plans.

Sadly, Obamacare’s medical-loss ratio mandates destroy this competitive incentive toward lower rates. By establishing a minimum that insurers must spend on healthcare, we are essentially incentivizing cost increases. We’re bending the much-ballyhooed cost-curve upwards!

Obamacare is the latest in string of government policies with the best of intentions but the worst of results. To blindly assume that all medical expenditures are good and all other costs are bad is to simplify into oblivion the workings of a free market. So as the bureaucrats sit behind their desk and tinker with their flawed ratios, know that it is you, the consumer, who may suffer. Sure, your New Years’ hangover may be gone, but don’t put away the Advil just yet; unless something is done soon, the Obamacare hangover looks to be a doozy.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/01/03/obamacares-new-years-hangover-is-a-doozy/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, January 4, 2011 - 18:16

Former Bush advisor and Harvard economics professor Gregory Mankiw has some fantastic advice for President Obama if he wishes to work together with Republicans. He encourages him to focus on marginal tax rates rather than tax credits, to spread opportunity rather than spread the wealth, and to “have a beer with a Republican at least once a week.”

But one recommendation in particular caught my eye: Focus on the long run. In doing so, Mankiw brings up a very interesting piece of history.

“Charles L. Schultze, chief economist for former President Carter had a simple test for telling a conservative economist from a liberal one. Ask each to fill in the blanks in this sentence with the words “long” and “short”: Take care of the ________ run and the _______ run will take care of itself.”

The point is that conservatives tend to focus on the long run, while liberals tend to focus on the short run.

To me this seems like a surprising indictment from a liberal economist like Schultze. Schultze, after all, was one of the architects and directors of Lyndon Johnson’s Great Society that gave us Medicaid and Medicare. These two programs are no doubt helpful to current generations – providing healthcare benefits that far exceed the amount an average earner pays into the programs. Yet they are proving disastrous in the long term. The CBO says these two programs will be the primary drivers of our national deficit in the coming decades. The economics behind the two entitlements has become so flawed that it is an inevitability that taxes will have to be raised or benefits lowered in order to keep them afloat.

The history of our federal government is fraught with such stories. So either liberals are wrong, in that taking care of the short run doesn’t mean that the long run will take care of itself. Or our government is not built to understand the short run. That is to say, it is incapable of stopping at the precise point at which economic policy benefits today without hurting tomorrow. The impetus for such overreach has a simple beginning – politicians desire to get reelected. Overpromising benefits to today’s voters at the expense of the next generation makes for an easy cost-benefit analysis if the goal is reelection.

Either outcome – that the liberal economic philosophy is wrong, or simply doesn’t work in practice – leads to some very bad results. Indeed we’re seeing the problems of liberal myopia firsthand. The near-trillion dollar stimulus, designed to boost employment in the short term, has accomplished little else beyond increasing debt in the long term. Healthcare reform, whose goal is to increase insurance coverage in the short term, does nothing to control costs in the long term. Not to mention Democrats’ complete abdication of responsibility for reforming an entitlement system structure that will eventually push our nation towards default.

We, as young adults, must begin to ask ourselves which economic policy we favor. The liberals’ short term approach, or the conservatives’ long term approach. As you make that choice, remember that we are the long term. We are the ones whose future will bear the burden of today’s economic decisions. That can come in many forms – higher taxes, reduced benefits, a higher deficit, and ultimately a smaller economy with fewer opportunities.

The short term has done an exceptionally good job of looking after itself. It’s time we as young adults, begin looking after the long term.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2011/01/03/young-adults-must-be-the-ones-to-look-after-long-term/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, January 4, 2011 - 18:16

Millennials are running out of hope. The economic crash and the government spending binge which followed it has left us with diminished income opportunities and a sizeable debt to payoff. All-in-all the federal government under the Democrats seemed to forget about us young adults.

So argues a new article by Joseph Lawler in the American Spectator entitled “Millennials and Hope.” Lawler argues that,

“TRAGICALLY, the laws that Obama and the Democrats have passed to counteract the supposed decline of the middle class, such as the health care bill and parts of the stimulus, are at odds with what future generations need to continue moving up the income ladder as Americans have been doing. In other words, to appeal to the middle class, which is not in trouble, the Democrats in power are waging a war on the young workers of tomorrow, who are.

Specifically, the Democrats are committed to serving the interests of public sector workers, and especially teachers’ unions. And this affiliation is just one of many ways in which Democrats support enormous present and structural federal budget deficits.

The Democrats’ neglect of youth-friendly reforms together with their commitment to deficits amounts to what liberal budget expert Isabel Sawhill called a “double whammy” for the younger generations. “On the one hand, the programs they need are not going to be there, and on the other hand they’re going to be stuck paying the bills for the elderly population and for the deficits that we’re creating.”

Rather than a focus on teachers unions, what we need is drastic changes in our education system. Rather than adding a healthcare plan, what we need is entitlement reform. Rather than piling up deficits in the false hope that it will help the economy today, what we need is a dose of concern over future generations.

In short, what we need is a Washington who truly cares about future generations. What we need, is something to be hopeful about. Sadly, Democrats haven’t provided us with much of that.

Find Lawler’s argument intriguing? I encourage you to read the entirety of his argument: http://spectator.org/archives/2010/12/27/millennials-and-hope/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, January 4, 2011 - 18:15

Investing in math and science is the way to solve the economy. A great idea. And somehow liberals have co-opted it to make it sound like their own.

Today’s Los Angeles Times for instance contains an article entitled, “Fixing the Economy the Scientific Way,” arguing that the federal government must spend more money on math and science education. They point to the fact that over the last 40 years the government’s support of science has declined 60% as a portion of GDP. They then argue that Republicans will only make the problem worse, pointing to their pledge to reduce federal spending on nondefense-related science research to pre-stimulus levels.

There is a lot wrong with this argument. For instance, given that the stimulus was a one-off, emergency spending measure, I’m not sure you can call a return to pre-stimulus investment a “reduction.” If we simply kept all stimulus programs intact forever and ever it would be akin to adding $800 billion to our deficit annually, not exactly a financially or politically sound proposition.

The bigger problem is that liberals’ argument ignores the reason governmental support of science funding has been declining relative to GDP. The problem is that the government over the last four decades has been forced to spend on other things. Our mandatory spending, on such things as Medicare, Medicaid, and Social Security, has been driven upwards, leaving less and less to be spent on discretionary budget items. Moreover it is not going to get better without major changes. The CBO predicts that “federal spending on major mandatory health care programs will grow from roughly 5 percent today to about 10 percent in 2035 and will continue to increase thereafter. “

As the following chart from the Heritage Foundation shows, the increase in costs of entitlements and anti-poverty programs are forcing reductions elsewhere.

If we want to increase our investment and math and science as a pathway to future prosperity we must understand one thing: we are not working with unlimited funds. We can’t simply increase science investment because it is a good idea. A budget requires prioritization. Making math and science a priority means making something else less of a priority.

Sadly, prioritization is even difficult given that our budget is being tyrannized by entitlement spending. Now, and especially in the future, these programs are taking up such a large slice of the budgetary pie that there simply isn’t enough money to pay for core government functions, much less science grants. That is why fiscal conservatism, through principled spending, is the true path toward promoting scientific advancement.

For an example as to why, look no further than Texas. Doing research for this post, I googled “math and science investment” in an attempt to find long term trends in how much the government spent. To my surprise one of the top returns was an article entitled “Perry announces math and science investment.” The Perry the article is referring to is the Republican governor of Texas, Rick Perry. As it turns out, in 2009, right in the heart of the recession, Texas announced it was investing $160 million to expand Texas Science, Technology, Engineering and Math academies. But how!?! After all, Texas doesn’t have an income tax and has one of the nation’s lowest overall tax burdens. Yet through shrewd spending and their ability to attract businesses to the state, Texas has weathered the economic storm better than most, even managing to maintain an $8 billion “rainy day “ fund. This financial flexibility, accomplished by keeping government spending relatively low, is what enabled them to increase their science and math spending in response to a need. The federal government lacks that flexibility.

Don’t be fooled into thinking that solving our economic issues are as simple as giving more money to math and science. It would be a good start and a great investment. But Medicare and Social Security, programs liberals love, are stopping us from doing so.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/12/28/investing-in-math-and-sciences-first-requires-entitlement-reform/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, January 4, 2011 - 18:14

I’m not sure Toby Keith or Hank Williams Jr. were thinking politics when they sang, “a little less talk and a lot more action,” but it pretty much sums of the mood of the electorate in 2010. People were tired of Washington paying lip service to our biggest problems while in practice following their own agenda.

The clearest example came from the economy. The economic collapse had led to sky-high unemployment and persistent joblessness for many Americans. Nevertheless, Democrats had their blinders on, focusing like a laser on healthcare reform while the economy continued to decline. Of course, that’s what Democrats were doing, not what they were saying.

Throughout the year Democrats consistently said they were focusing on jobs. In President Obama’s state of the union he said that high unemployment “is why jobs must be our number one focus in 2010.” But as of June, the only plan Democrats had come up with was the so-called “Recovery Summer” that was meant to highlight the success of the stimulus bill. That began a trend for Democrats. Rather than put forth any ideas on how to jump-start the economy, they simply relabeled and repackaged existing ideas into jobs bills. Nancy Pelosi said a cap-and-trade energy bill is all about “jobs, jobs, jobs, jobs.” She also said that passing Obamacare would lead to the creation of four million jobs (almost half of the total jobs lost during the recession.)

Americans grew tired of Democrats’ talk. They wanted results. Frankly, they wanted a party that would live up to its promises. And Republicans made big promises. They promised a smaller, less spend-happy government, a promise that is short in words but long in deed. As new Speaker of the House John Boehner explained it, “it’s pretty clear the American people want us to do something about cutting spending here in Washington and helping to create and environment where we’ll get jobs back.”

So now it is the Republicans’ chance to live up to their words.

They’re off to a fast start. In the month since the elections the Republicans have already:

  • Stopped the omnibus spending bill,
  • Repealed the “Gephardt Rule” which provides automatic increases in the debt limit upon the adoption of a new budget resolution,
  • Changed the pay-go rules so that bills must be offset in longer windows than just 10-years

But one recently unveiled change in the House rules may be their biggest step yet towards reining in our unruly deficit. The rule creates a “lock box” for any money saved through spending cuts passed through the House. The idea is to ensure that the money is put toward deficit reduction rather than simply spent elsewhere. Currently, the House rules and budget process encourage any “savings” in the form of spending cuts to merely be plowed into other government programs. The result is that spending cuts never lead to a smaller government, only to a reorganization of the same big government.

Brenan Buck, spokesman for the House GOP transition team said that,

“The reforms included in this package provide the House with new tools to achieve the goal of reining in out of control spending in Washington. The new spending reduction account allows members to explicitly dedicate savings from an amendment to spending reduction – something that under current House rules can only be done rhetorically.”

Republicans are done with rhetoric. They understand that it’s time we start to get things done. In other words, it’s time for a little less talk, and a lot more action.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/12/27/republicans-spending-lock-box-will-reduce-deficit/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, December 14, 2010 - 11:44

In an op-ed in today’s Washington Post, Democratic Senator Mark Warner has an interesting idea to jumpstart the economy. He wants to eliminate the regulatory uncertainty businesses face by limiting the amount of red tape the government creates.

I was initially skeptical. After all, Democrats’ rarely own up to the fact that business uncertainty is a force holding back the recession. As liberal columnist Paul Krugman recently wrote, “How much truth is there to these [uncertainty] claims? None.” So to see a Senate Democrat that was once touted as a presidential candidate say, “we must address the regulatory uncertainty felt by many of our small and large businesses,” I was waiting to read the catch.

So I dug a little bit into his idea. As it turns out, it is mostly copied from Britain’s Conservative Party. That’s a good sign. Then came the real kicker. I found a post from liberal blog DailyKos that eviscerated Warner’s idea, saying he is “flatly wrong” and his idea “is so ridiculous that it deserves some attention and derision.” Now I’m intrigued! If the DailyKos hates it, that’s as sure a sign as any that it must be a pretty darn good idea.

As it turns out, it is a good idea. He argues that one of the problems in our regulatory system is that it “actually favors those federal agencies that consistently churn out new red tape. In this town, expanded regulatory authority typically is rewarded with additional resources and a higher bureaucratic profile, and there is no process or incentive for an agency to eliminate or clean up old regulations.”

To solve the problem he is promoting a “regulatory pay-as-you-go” system in which federal agencies would have to “identify and eliminate one existing regulation for each new regulation they want to add.” The government simply piles regulation upon regulation, rarely taking a look at the ones they’ve already created. The result is a mish-mash of cobbled together rules that occasionally contradict each other and often overlap. The problem is that many businesses, entrepreneurs, and workers are left to traverse this maze of government red tape, creating an enormous drag on profitable activity. As Warner points out, “According to the U.S. Small Business Administration, the estimated annual cost of federal regulations in 2008 exceeded $1.75 trillion.” Imagine the stimulative effect if even a third of that was injected into the economy!

The idea is not new to Washington, or even to Democrats. Al Gore promoted a red tape reduction program. In an attempt to “reinvent government” Gore cut $28 billion in waste from the budget each year, and in the process stripped 16,000 pages of regulations from the federal register.

But the “regulatory pay as you go” has seen its greatest success in Britain. They viewed regulatory reform not simply as a way to promote economic recovery, but as a “process that can help to meet the broader challenges faced by the United Kingdom” such as climate change and globalization. A report produced by the British government predicts that their effort to reduce administrative burdens would lead to direct savings for businesses and consumers of 0.3 percent of GDP.

To understand just how much savings that is, consider that our 2009 GDP was $14.3 trillion. If we saved the equivalent of .3%, that would equal around $43 billion that would stay in the hands of businesses and consumers. Not bad for the common sense task of eliminating waste and redundancy in our regulatory framework!

If nothing else the measure would require agencies to catalog their current regulations, a task that will enable significant eliminations of stale, duplicative, or harmful regulations that have been overlooked amidst the clutter.

The only concern is that it would create “regulatory churn.” Old regulations would be constantly replaced with new, in an attempt to perfect the system. Overall this would make the framework more volatile in the short term, at least until a balance of size versus effectiveness could be reached. Nevertheless, this result could undermine the goal of creating certainty.

Misgivings aside, the “one-in, one-out” or “regulatory pay-as-you-go” system that Warner advocates appears to be a positive contribution to the debate over how to get the economy going again. Its ability to aid business, all while shrinking government and reducing government spending, should earn it a careful examination by lawmakers.

A pro-growth, small government idea from a Democrat? It seems the recent elections were a wake-up call to at least a few members of the party across the aisle. Now let’s see if we can work together to wake up the economy.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/12/13/warners-idea-to-reduce-red-tape-deserves-closer-look/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, December 14, 2010 - 11:43

After days of Democratic hissy fits and tantrums over President Obama’s agreement with Republicans, a tax deal appears likely to pass. White House adviser David Axelrod said over the weekend, “We have a framework, we have an agreement, and I don’t anticipate that it’s going to change greatly. I think we’re going to get strong support on both sides of the aisle.”

The first hurdle appears to be cleared. The Senate will hold a key test vote today, but Senate Majority Whip Dick Durbin (D-IL) said on Sunday that “Harry Reid and I have been on the phone over the weekend and I can say that we have a good cross-section of the Senate Democratic caucus, from left to right, who are prepared to accept this.”

Even as Democrats appear prepared to accept the deal, many conservatives remain leery. After all, this is a package that well-respected conservative columnist Charles Krauthammer called “the biggest stimulus in American history, larger than his $814 billion 2009 stimulus package.”

To be intellectually honest, he’s right. Overall the federal government will lose around $800 billion in revenue because of the package of tax cuts and credits. Some of those credits go towards extending admittedly bad programs from the stimulus, like windmill subsidies. No, you didn’t misread that. Windmill subsidies. But a majority of the cost is going to keeping more money in the pockets of middle class Americans.

However, we must understand that lost revenue isn’t the same as spending. When the government loses revenue through lower taxes, it means Americans get to keep more of their own money. When the government spends, it means they are allocating your money for their priorities. As Paul Ryan recently said, “keeping tax rates where they are and preventing them from going up is not spending because that is people’s money in the first place.”

They do, however, have the same impact on the deficit – a fact that makes conservatives anxious.

But incoming House Budget Committee Chairman Paul Ryan also had something to say about that.  In a recent interview with the Wall Street Journal, Ryan attempted to allay some of conservatives’ deficit concerns in urging them to support the tax cut deal

“You can’t get the deficit down, get the debt in the right direction, without economic growth, without job creation, and you will stifle job creation – make no two ways about it – if you raise tax rates in January…What we do know is, you will damage the economy if these tax rates occur…For my money pro-growth tax policy combined with spending cuts and entitlement reform are the necessary conditions to get this thing going in the right direction.”

Fortunately, the pro-growth tax agreement between President Obama and Republicans is a good first step towards economic growth. Upon news that the tax cut package was likely to pass, Bank of America boosted its 2011 GDP forecast from 2.3 to 2.8%.

As we wrote last week, Gross Domestic Product, not tax rates, is the true indicator of tax revenues. By boosting GDP, the tax deal has the ability to get the economy going again without a large decline in tax revenues.

So conservatives take heart. Republicans spoken concerns about the deficit weren’t an election year trick. They haven’t forgotten about the long-term threat that our debt poses. Quite the contrary, they understand that addressing our deficit requires a dynamic and competitive economy. Now that it appears we have taken the steps to initiate some pro-growth tax measures, we can begin to solve the other parts of the puzzle – government spending and a broken social safety net.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/12/13/despite-deficit-tax-deal-fits-conservative-economic-model/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, December 14, 2010 - 11:42

Democrats are gamblers. And as it happens, they are bad ones. In gambling parlance they would be called the “fish.” They make bad bets, lose their money, but always come back for more.

It happened with the stimulus. They passed historic levels of new spending, betting that it would help the economy recover to the point voters would be willing to overlook the ridiculous pricetag.

It happened with Obamacare. With Americans having expressed their concern over the size and cost of government, Democrats gambled that once the bill was passed, voters would be so enamored with the benefits that they would ignore its more unseemly elements.

Despite this dismal record, Democrats bought some more chips and are back at the poker table. Their latest bet? Tax cuts. Austan Goolsbee, the chairman of the White House Council of Economic Advisers, said Sunday on “Meet the Press” that, “In 2012, I believe they will have to stand up and defend, on their own merits, that they think that these high-income tax cuts work.”

In essence they are gambling that Republicans will face a much more difficult time defending tax cuts when the economy is back on its feet. They’re betting that voters will no longer be willing to buy the Republican notion that raising taxes on anyone would slow the recovery, since presumably the economy will have recovered.

Interestingly, they already made this very same bet. As the Washington Post wrote in July,

President Obama and Democratic leaders in Congress are setting the stage for a high-stakes battle over taxes in the final weeks before the November congressional elections, betting that their plan to eliminate tax breaks for the wealthy will resonate with voters who have lost houses and jobs to what many see as an era of Wall Street greed.

This past summer Democrats thought that the looming debate over taxes would create the perfect opportunity to paint Republicans as the party of the wealthy. It didn’t work like that. Republicans wanted all the tax cuts extended. They didn’t parse by economic class. Taxes needed to remain low…for everyone.

It was a message that obviously resonated. President Obama eschewed negotiations with his own party, instead choosing to sit down with Republican leaders to hammer out a compromise. A deal was ultimately reached, and despite some initial “rage and frustration,” Democrats appear ready to sign on to the agreement.

They lost their initial gamble, but now say that they are going to double-down on the same bet in an election year? Doesn’t seem like good politics to me. Mainly because it rests on a poor premise.

Democrats’ bet relies on a substantial improvement of the economy. They believe that this will undercut the argument that Republicans offered this year – that raising taxes will harm the recovery. But, if the economy recovers enough to undermine this line of though, doesn’t it simply prove Republicans’ point that tax cuts bolster the economy? Would Republicans actually be in a stronger position?

After all, would Democrats be prepared to stand up in an election year and argue that we must eliminate the very tax cuts that spurred our recovery?

Perhaps. History shows they’re bad gamblers.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/12/13/democrats-making-bad-gamble-on-2012-tax-cut-debate/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Monday, December 6, 2010 - 17:30

Don’t let anyone tell you differently, solving our national debt will be an epic struggle. It is not as simple as making a few cuts or changing a few taxes. Solving the problem will require a fundamental change in what citizens have come to expect from our government.

Year after year Americans are ranked as some of the most generous people in the world. A recent report by the Charities Aid Foundation studied the percentage of people who donate time or money to others and found that the United States tied for fifth. Sixty percent of Americans donate to organizations while close to 40 percent volunteer. As of 2005 Americans donated around $250 billion to charity – more than 2 percent of annual GDP.

And yet when it comes to giving up government benefits in the name of fiscal sanity we say “no thank you.” In a brilliant new article Washington Post, columnist Robert Samuelson calls this “ a new morality.” “Government benefits, once conferred, cannot be revoked.”

The problem is that our government has over promised on what taxpayers can deliver. Notice what I said there. The government isn’t promising what it can deliver. It doesn’t earn anything. Instead, the government is simply an intermediary between what taxpayers promise unto themselves. And in that regard it has failed terribly.

In the hope of getting reelected or to win over interest groups, the government has sold us on the notion that through some bit of budgetary magic, you’ll be able to receive more government benefits than you paid in.

Take Social Security for instance. The problem is that the government indexed the Social Security payment structure to wages rather than inflation. In the long term, wages tend to grow about 1 percent per year faster than inflation. This leads to some crazy results. As the American Enterprise Institute discovered, “a typical worker retiring in 2050 has been promised 47 percent more than today’s retirees, and one retiring in 2080 has been promised more than double today’s benefits.”

Despite knowing that we receive more than previous generations, we nevertheless feel entitled to the higher benefits. As Samuelson explained,

 

“People expect them and consider them property rights. Just as government cannot randomly confiscate property, it cannot withdraw benefits without violating a moral code. The old-fashioned idea that government policies should serve the “national interest” has given way to inertia and squatters’ rights.”

Solving the debt problem, which can only be done by addressing the fundamentally flawed entitlement system, will require Americans to change this belief.  We have to detach ourselves from the fantasy world that politicians have created for us. Samuelson argues that this task should have been the duty of the deficit commission. He argues that their proposal should have been a tool to “discredit this self-serving morality.” Instead they “ducked this challenge” and instead “performed an accounting exercise to shrink the deficit without trying to define what the government should do and why.” But I believe the responsibility primarily relies with us.

Our politicians are too politically afraid. The fact that there is a deficit commission at all is an example of that fact. President Obama wanted a bipartisan, non-political cover to come up with recommendations so that he could quickly divorce himself from them should something go awry.

Washington’s unwillingness to take a stand is somewhat understandable. They are stuck in the middle between a society that on the one hand professes its love for entitlement programs, but on the other hand despises big government. We must provide them a clear path. We must show them that we understand the perils of a large deficit and are willing to adjust our benefits to fix it.

It will require giving up something that we were wrongfully promised. A difficult, if not impossible task. But I would rather place my bets with the American people than with Washington.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/12/06/to-solve-deficit-americans-must-end-self-serving-morality/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Monday, December 6, 2010 - 17:28

Shining, shimmering, splendid, those are three adjectives that will likely never be used to describe the US budget. Our budget is more like grimy, varnished, and bloated. We have the Jabba the Hutt of budgets. One look at it and you will cringe, disgusted with the excess, waste, and just sheer grossness of it. Personified, you could almost envision it sitting in a beanbag chair picking Cheeto dust out of its bellybutton. As Speaker of the House, John Boehner has decided to put our budget on a diet, before it goes into cardiac arrest.

One of Boehner’s main reforms is to move our budget process away from its current “ominous omnibus” system that encourages waste and abuse. Instead of one colossal budget (in which nobody has any clue what’s in it), Boehner wants to divide the budget into 12 sections that will be passed individually.  In other words, the Appropriations Committee would require funding on a department-by-department basis.  The 12 new budgets represent the 12 federal departments, and the budget for reach one would have to be ratified separately. Boehner says this will give more accountability to the legislators in charge of the federal budget and will provide some daylight into an otherwise murky process. The reduced size will also help legislators be able to find and surgically excise the most wasteful portions of each budget.

Naturally, this is disconcerting for many long-term members of Congress, Republicans and Democrats alike. One senior Democrat felt that this measure would not be passed because members of Congress would be worried that it would take up too much of our legislators time. That seems to me to be nothing more than a tacit admission that the current budget process, and the hundreds of billions of dollars it spends, doesn’t currently receive the time it deserves. And in possibly the best sign that this is a good idea, lobbyists and other Washington insiders are worried that they their influenced would be diminished in a new system.

So we have a chance to adopt a new system that puts the budget under a microscope while making the legislators, lobbyists, and insiders who helped run up a $14 trillion tab uncomfortable because they might be left with more bark than bite?

Sign me up.

Boehner is right. Our current, comprehensive budget process is broken. The US passing a budget that continuously runs trillion-dollar deficits is about as useful as continuously drinking with a failing liver. Not only is it dumb, it is going to kill you one day. We need to quit while we are ahead, or should I say, this far behind. While the budget cuts of Boehner’s new plan might allow are not guaranteed to be home runs , the plan will, at the very least, help curb our out of control government growth.

Another budget reform, one that could would work seamlessly alongside Boehner’s, is Eric Cantor’s Cut-As-You-Go plan, or CutGo as it has been dubbed. The idea is to “prohibit consideration of a suspension of a bill if it (1) creates a new program without eliminating or reducing another of a similar size; and (2) increases authorizations without offsets.”

Think of it as a new and improved PayGo for the truly budget conscious legislator.

This will be another layer of accountability placed on lawmakers. The new rule ensures that we are putting a stopper on the size of government. If you want a new program, fine, find an older program that we can get rid of, or come up with a way to pay for it. Voters, of course, are generally leery of things that raise their taxes, so this should make legislators think twice about growing the size of government.

We have before us two complimentary plans that will hold legislators accountable for their votes while fulfilling the voters’ desire for smaller government.  Realizing these ideas, however, is sure to be difficult. As President Obama found out, changing the political culture and traditions of Washington is not the easiest thing in the world. Fortunately the past elections provided Boehner with some back up. A new Republican majority coupled with a mandate from voters to get their house in order could be enough to instigate real change. If nothing else, it could force Democrats into the unenviable task of arguing that we need to keep things the same. Good luck with that in 2012.

With one victory already that has been described as “historic,” if Republicans stand behind Cantor and Boehner they have a chance as a second historic change.

by Justin Williams and Brandon Greife

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/12/02/boehner-and-cantors-plan-to-put-government-on-a-diet/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Monday, December 6, 2010 - 17:27

“Wonkish, crotchety, and mostly bald, the co-chairs of President Obama’s National Commission on Fiscal Responsibility and Reform want you to care about the deficit the way cable television wants you to care about pedophiles.”

So begins Annie Lowrey’s latest column for Slate. The point, once you wade through the metaphor-a-minute muck (and the diss to bald people), is that the deficit commission is attempting to scare you into caring.

This is apparently much different and much more unacceptable than the liberal philosophy of scaring you into not caring.

So while Lowrey uses her column to chide deficit commission co-chair Erskine Bowles for using crazy rhetoric like calling the national debt “dangerous” (gasp!) liberal commentators have stepped up the scare-tactics.

Take for instance AFSCME president Gerald McEntee who said that his organization “will not rest until we defeat these unnecessary and dangerous proposals.” Apparently Bowles isn’t the only one to toss around the word “dangerous” willy nilly. As it turns out, both the problem and the solution are dangerous. Talk about a Catch-22.

But McEntee wasn’t alone in conjuring up the potential disaster that lies in store for America if the commission’s proposals are passed. Upon hearing the commission’s recommendations Nancy Pelosi said that seniors are “going to [be forced to] work to 70, no matter what, so we can give a tax cut to the richest people in America.” Forced? You’d think we’re returning to slavery with that kind of talk. So before you start worrying about spending your retirement in a labor camp rather than on your couch watching The Price is Right let’s understand some context.

First, the commission doesn’t mandate that you work until your 70. You can, at your discretion, still retire whenever you darn well please. What Pelosi was referring to was the commission’s recommendation to index the retirement ago for Social Security to increases in longevity. People are living longer and retiring later, Social Security should be amended to mirror that fact. Second, it doesn’t happen at the drop of a hat. The plan is to increase the retirement age by one month every two years. Under the plan the retirement ago would reach 68 in about 2050. It would reach 69 in 2075. Third, the commission factored in a hardship provision so that if you can’t toil in the supposed salt mines beyond the age of 62, you can still receive Social Security.

The scare tactics didn’t end there. After seeing the proposal one Democratic source said, “What a crazy proposal, what a crazy proposal.” The Huffington Post’s Ryan Grim called it an “assault on Social Security.” And finally, the pièce de résistance, Senator Dick Durbin said there were “some things [in the proposal] that I hate like the devil hates holy water.” Tell us how you really feel Dick.

So when Annie Lowrey chides the fiscal commission for “just want[ing] to talk numbers and to scare the living bejesus out of you about debt” I wonder if she has read her party’s response. The truth is the level of debt is something to be worried about. President Obama said as much on Monday while announcing a pay freeze for federal workers. In his speech he said that, “The hard truth is that getting this deficit under control is going to require broad sacrifice. Going forward, we’re going to have to make some additional very tough decisions that this town has put off for a very long time.”

We face tough decisions because we’re dealing with a real problem. Those scaremongers over at the Congressional Budget Office recently said that,

“A growing level of federal debt would also increase the probability of a sudden fiscal crisis, during which investors would lose confidence in the government’s ability to manage its budget and the government would thereby lose its ability to borrow at affordable rates.”

Pretty doom and gloom. But that’s just the thing. Our fiscal future, fueled by rising deficits, an aging population, and an unsustainable entitlement system, is something to be worried about. Lowrey laments that we have to use scary words when speaking of the problem, but as the CBO makes clear, our deficit necessitates the use of some scary words.

Scare tactics aren’t scare tactics if they are used to describe a very real threat. Falsely yell fire in a crowded room and you’re liable to get people killed, but if there really is a fire, then you may be saving lives. The same situation applies here. By ginning up concern over a real danger, the fiscal commission is protecting our future. The CBO says that if a fiscal crisis occurs, “policymakers would probably need to enact spending cuts or tax increases more drastic and painful than those that would have been necessary had the adjustments come sooner.”

That “sooner” that they speak of is now. So while Lowrey and others are worried about the tone of the warning, forgive the rest of us while we heed it.

by Brandon Greife

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/12/01/democrats-trying-to-scare-americans-into-ignoring-deficit-woes/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Monday, December 6, 2010 - 17:26

The Irish are having another awful year. Not the Fighting Irish mind you, their year could better be described as mediocre, but hopeful. The future prospects of the nation of Ireland on the other hand are anything but hopeful. Having just announced an $113 billion bailout to rescue its banks, Ireland’s economy is still hovering on the brink of collapse. The luck of the Irish has apparently run out.

They are not alone. Earlier this year the EU was forced to bail out Greece whose public indebtedness had grown to crisis levels and the government threatened to default. The debt contagion is spreading fast across the Eurozone. Spanish, Italian, and even German bonds yields have risen sharply, an indicator that investors are reluctant to hold them in the event that the Euro tumbles. With Ireland being the latest domino to fall, the European Union is now resigned to looking around and wondering who is next?

Sadly, it doesn’t take much effort to find that Portugal will likely be next in line to come begging for a bailout. As the New York Times reported, “Investors have been alarmed by Portugal’s inability so far this year to stick to its pledge to cut its bloated deficit. In fact, in the first nine months of the year, the budget deficit of Portugal’s central government widened 2.3 percent from a year earlier to $12.7 billion.” The rising debt will also lead to an increase in spending that must be devoted to maintaining interest payments, which the European Commission has already warned will be the be the fastest-growing spending item and a major factor hindering improvements in the government balance in the coming years.”

Among Portugal’s other problems are poor economic growth and a disastrous unemployment rate. The European Commission found that Portugal’s real GDP growth will actually be in the negatives – about -1 percent – this year before returning to sluggish growth in 2012. Likewise, its unemployment predictions are dire. The unemployment rate is expected to rise from 9.6 percent this year to 11.2 percent in 2012. With economic indicators headed in the wrong direction it could be a fast slide into bankruptcy unless drastic measures are taken.

Massive government debt, poor GDP growth, and an unseemly employment rate – sound familiar?

In response to its enormous deficit Portugal has put forth the beginnings of an austerity plan. Among the government’s proposals to reduce the deficit from 7.3 percent of GDP to 4.6 percent (by comparison the U.S. deficit was 10.6 percent of GDP in 2010):

  • Five percent cut in private sector pay
  • Two percent increase in the national sales tax
  • Selling off state-owned stakes in 32 companies
  • Introduce a new tax on profits made in the stock market
  • Raising the surcharge on companies whose annual profits exceed 2 million euros from 25 percent to 27.5 percent
  • Create a new 45 percent tax bracket on incomes over 150,000 euros a year

This is our future if we do not preemptively work to get our deficit in line. Western governments are falling like dominoes, the result of unsustainable government spending and ever-more burdensome social welfare programs. The national debt is not just a number. It represents very real dollars that our investors would like to be paid back. We must not let our nationalistic pride blind us from the fact that we are not immune from the same fate. Thus far our status as the world’s reserve currency and our place as an economic power have shielded us from bondholder worry. But with our balance sheet bleeding red ink far into the future, how patient will the holders of our debt be?

Unlike Greece, Ireland and Portugal, we shouldn’t wait to find out. In a gesture of good faith to our investors and an act of necessity to our citizens our government, we must begin to make the painful choices necessary to get our debt under control. As one economic researcher noted about Spain, “it is possible that too big to fail becomes too big to bail.” With the largest economy on earth, he might as well have been talking about us.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/11/30/too-big-to-fail-becoming-too-big-to-bail/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, November 30, 2010 - 13:19

Yesterday morning, President Obama made his first move towards addressing our deficit by calling for a two-year freeze on federal worker salaries. Some have called the move “symbolic,” a showing that Washington is willing to make sacrifices at a time when many Americans are being forced to do the same.

As President Obama said,

Small businesses and families are tightening their belts.  Their government should, too.  And that’s why . . . today I’m proposing a two-year pay freeze for all civilian federal workers.  This would save $2 billion over the rest of this fiscal year and $28 billion in cumulative savings over the next five years.

Rather than symbolic, I view the freeze as necessary. A symbol implies that the action has no inherent value other than as a token representation of President Obama’s belief that the government is willing to mirror the sacrifice of the private sector. President Obama’s deficit commission, which first recommended the freeze, didn’t find it merely symbolic. Quite the contrary the commission argued that,

“During the Great Recession, most private sector employees have seen their wages frozen, and some have even watched wages decline. In contrast, federal workers have seen their wages increase due to automatic formulas in law that provide them with step-in-grade and cost-of-living adjustments.”

More than a symbol, these cuts were necessary reductions to realign government salaries with the market for their services. And even then it is only a first step. According to recent analyses by USA Today, total compensation for federal government workers has risen 37 percent over the rate of inflation during the past decade while private worker compensation has risen 8.8 percent in the same timeframe.

In fact President Obama’s proposed cuts don’t even live up to the three year freeze that was proposed by the President’s own deficit commission. More importantly, it fails to follow the commission’s recommendation for a partial hiring freeze that would cut the size of the federal workforce by 10 percent. The growth in the size of the federal government, just as much as the size of their paychecks, is a problem that the President should have addressed. According to research done by the Wall Street Journal, the federal workforce has grown by 17 percent since 2007 to its largest level since 1992 when the government shrunk following the end of the Cold War.

Fortunately, yesterday was merely the beginning of a much longer conversation over the disastrous state of our nation’s finances. President Obama said himself that Going forward, we’re going to have to make some additional very tough decisions that this town has put off for a very long time.  And that’s what this upcoming week is really about.  My hope is that, starting today, we can begin a bipartisan conversation about our future, because we face challenges that will require [cooperation].”

He’s absolutely right on all counts. Using the politics of avoidance Washington has neglected the difficult decisions that must be made to put our nation on a sustainable path. But that leads me to two questions. First, if the President truly understands the stakes why didn’t he follow through with the deficit commission’s recommendations in full. Second, if he truly hopes for a bipartisan conversation then why didn’t the White House use the announcement to reach across the aisle?

Bipartisanship on this issue wouldn’t have been difficult. The GOP pushed the idea for a non-military pay freeze in May of this year. Despite the obvious agreement, President Obama made no mention of the Republican origin of the freeze during his announcement. Instead, the White House blog took the opportunity to play typical blame-game politics with the issue. Writing for the White House, Jack Lew, was pointing the finger at anyone but the current administration for the financial hole our government now finds itself in. Lew said that “[b]ecause of the irresponsibility of the past decade, the President inherited a $1.3 trillion projected deficit” and “we need to turn our attention to addressing the massive deficits we inherited.” Apparently he’s willing to ignore the historic levels of spending and deficits of the Obama administration.

Nevertheless, the two-year pay-freeze is a positive opening salvo in what is sure to be a hard fought debate over the size and role of government in our lives. Small victories must not distract us from the enormous task that lay ahead. The pay freeze is a start, but we must be careful to remember that it is just that – a start.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/11/30/obamas-pay-freeze-is-just-the-start-of-government-belt-tightening/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, November 30, 2010 - 13:18

Medicaid is like your crazy uncle at the Thanksgiving dinner table. He just eats, and eats, and eats, his waistline growing all the time, until finally you make him leave the table or the button on his pants pops off. The costs of Medicaid continue to grow out of control and now many states are threatening to leave the program rather than have it explode in their face.

Governors from nearly 12 states and from both parties have started internal dialogues within their state about ways to limit the ever-growing cost of Medicaid in the face of enormous budget deficits. But while eliminating Medicaid is probably nothing more than an illustrative point highlighting dire budget constraints, the fact that it is even being considered raises some very sharp questions.

To start off, Medicaid is the largest budgetary commitment in state budgets, and it is rapidly growing. While millions of people are dependent on it, Medicaid produces subpar results even when it is not compared to the results from private providers. Numerous studies have found that Medicaid recipients fare worse or no better than those who have no insurance at all. Not exactly the health outcomes you would expect from a program that takes up 1/5 of states’ budgets.

That one-fifth of the budgetary pie will soon be growing. Under Obama’s health care plan, 16 million Americans are set to enter Medicaid programs by 2020. To understand just how many 16 million is, it is the rough equivalent of the added population of the 14 smallest states – West Virginia, Nebraska, Idaho, New Hampshire, Maine, Hawaii, Rhode Island, Montana, Delaware, South Dakota, Alaska, North Dakota, Vermont, and Wyoming. Add all of the population of those states together and that’s the number of people we’ll be dumping into Medicaid. Or better yet, that’s the number of people we’ll be adding to state’s budgets. With Medicaid’s financial viability already under stress just imagine how it will cope with 16 million more recipients.

Such an enormous influx of new patients is dangerous. Even with today’s numbers, the level of care for patients receiving Medicaid is likely to be drastically slashed. To make up for budget shortfalls, states like Washington are proposing to eliminate prescription drug coverage, physical therapy and vision, dental, and hearing treatments for adults next year. Even with the Federal government supplementing, on average, 57% of Medicaid costs for each state, the burden is growing on states to fund a program that, essentially, is subpar.

Expansion of coverage is not necessarily a good thing. For an example of why look at Tennessee’s expansion of Medicaid, nicknamed TennCare. Brian Blase of the Heritage Foundation found that Tennessee’s Medicaid enrollment swelled by half a million people, leading to a decline in the rate of the uninsured. But that positive was drastically outweighed by the negatives. TennCare doubled per-capita spending on patients as compared to the Medicaid program. Despite the increased spending it did not translate into better health outcomes. Quite the contrary, a study found that the mortality rate actually declined at a much slower rate than surrounding states that did not expand Medicaid. Upon scaling back the disastrous program then-Tennessee governor Phil Bredesen said the program was “a disaster,” and he would not “let TennCare bankrupt our state.”

During the past few years, state budgets have made many stomachs drop. States have not been able to balance their budgets, and it does not look like a remedy is around the corner. Between 2010 and 2011, state budget shortfalls are expected to total $350 billion. Every state, except two, will have a budget shortfall in 2011. The numbers do not look much better for 2012. On top of that, state pensions for public service employees are underfunded by $3 trillion.

Expanding Medicaid, especially at a time when states cannot balance their books, is going to force deep budget cuts in other programs. Every state, with the exception of Delaware, has some sort of a balanced-budget requirement. Without higher revenues, or an increase in borrowing, increasing budget allocation for one program requires budget cuts in another. The math is simple, increasing Medicaid spending, while having a $350 billion budget shortfall and a $3 trillion underfunding in pensions, means other imperative programs will be cut. Are these problems worth it for a program whose results are, at best, mixed?

Democrats health care plan predicted the state backlash against higher spending. They wrote in a provision that allows the federal government to shoulder an increased share of Medicaid’s costs. For three years, starting in 2014, Obamacare promises three years of full federal funding to cover the benefit cost of expansion. After 2017, states are expected to pay a “progressively larger” share of Medicaid’s cost. Every year, starting in 2020, states will have to pay for 10% of benefits for new enrollees. What is going to happen in Nevada, Oregon, and Texas when those measures kick in? Those states are already expected to see a 50% increase in their Medicaid populations. The total benefit cost for states is likely to increase by $21 billion between 2014 and 2020.

Once again we will find that the costs do not stop there. While benefit costs are covered for three years, administrative costs are not. The administrative burden is not going to be felt in 2014 when the law actually goes into effect, it will be felt before then. The administrative and bureaucratic expansion has to be in place before the influx of new Medicaid recipients. One study found that the administrative costs due to the health care expansion between 2014 and 2020 will equal $12 billion.

Leary states are coming up with their own cost estimates. Texas concluded that Obama’s Medicaid expansion will increase the Medicaid population in Texas by 2 million people. That increase will cost Texas alone $27 billion over a decade. Florida predicts that Medicaid expansion in their state will cost an additional $5.2b between 2013 and 2019, and will increase by $1 billion year after every year after 2017. California found that the cost expansion for their state will grow by a few billion dollars every year.

No wonder many governors are now considering backing out of the Medicaid program altogether. As Texas governor Rick Perry told the Wall Street Journal, “We feel very comfortable that we could come up with a more equitable, a more efficient, and obviously a more cost-effective way to deliver health care.” With the numbers already deemed unsustainable under the Democrats’ plan, I wouldn’t be surprised if other governors begin to feel the same way.

by Justin Williams


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, November 30, 2010 - 13:18

Washington Post columnist Robert Samuelson recently asked an interesting question: “How much will we let programs for the elderly displace other government functions — national defense, education, transportation and many others – and raise tax levels that would, almost certainly, reduce economic growth.”

On its face it appears to be an easy question. It is essentially asking whether we want to support one demographic group at the expense of all the others? In reality it is a much more nuanced problem. Older generations rightly feel entitled to a certain level of benefits after paying in to them all these years. They also carry significant heft at the ballot box, meaning politicians are careful not to upset them.

Although the answer to such a question will certainly not come easily, it represents a good starting place for a debate that Americans must have. If nothing else, answering, or even debating the question, ends the “politics of avoidance” which Samuelson laments.

While pondering the answer to Samuelson’s initial question I was forced to answer some of my own.

Q: What does America value?

America was founded based on a completely different set of principles than other western nations. Our belief in individual liberty and limited government would be the traditional answers. But at their core, almost all of the oft-cited American values, focus on the idea that the individual is responsible for himself. On the one hand that means that the central government should not be an oppressive force in your life, but on the other it means that it is primarily the responsibility of the individual to succeed.

Q: Are these the values still dominant?

Simply because we were founded on the idea of individual responsibility, it does not necessarily mean that we still hold this as a core belief. America has certainly changed. Have the minds of its citizens likewise changed? Do we still want the traditional American free enterprise system, which allows everyone to grasp success and the risk that some will not, or do we prefer a European-style social democracy with a more limited range of economic outcomes.

The former choice encourages a small central government with few entitlement programs. The latter requires a bigger government, with higher taxes, to pay for a comprehensive welfare state. What we certainly cannot have is our current unsustainable path in which we want most things the government has to offer, we just don’t want the bill to pay for it.

Q: If we prefer a free enterprise system are we willing to give up our sense of entitlements regarding entitlements?

As Paul Ryan and David Brooks recently wrote, “While 70% of Americans told pollsters at the Pew Research Center in 2009 they agreed that “people are better off in a free market economy, even though there may be severe ups and downs from time to time,” large majorities favor keeping our social insurance programs intact.”

We are being pulled in two separate directions. On the one hand it is clear that Americans by and large wish to preserve our heritage of limited government intervention in individual outcomes. On the other, it is clear that Americans, once they get their hands on the benefits of a particular entitlement program, are loath to let it go. Now the push is coming to the shove. We can no longer afford our current entitlement system without either making drastic modifications to it or severely raising tax rates.

There is no middle ground. Regardless of the words of some soothsayers, our present system is collapsing under its own weight. We can no longer skate by, enjoying ever-higher benefit levels without attendant tax hikes.

Q: Will Washington muster the political courage to address our spending?

Changing the existing entitlement structure has been considered the third rail of politics. Those who desire to change Social Security or Medicaid have been swept aside by those accusing them of wanting to take away granny’s retirement. In fact, President Obama’s appointed deficit commission was labeled by some on the Left as the “Cat Food Commission” because any changes to entitlements would supposedly reduce our elderly to eating Fancy Feast.

That is the difficulty reformers face. Will the political will of the population ever rise to the level that Washington must listen. Politicians are opportunistic creatures who, for the most part, will vote in a way that allows them to win. Will they have the courage to face their constituents and sell them on the idea that for future generations to have the same opportunities we had to make our entitlement programs sustainable? Which leads back to Samuelson’s question:

Q: Will older generations agree to consider changes to our entitlement structure?

If we continue on our current path, spending on programs created mainly to benefit older generations will double, while al other spending remains stagnant.

If tax revenues remain 18.2, this graph obviously becomes quickly unsustainable, especially when you consider that our net interest will soar upwards. Young adults do not have the political momentum to address this on their own. A broad coalition of voters must be willing to understand that sacrifices will be have to be made by everyone if anyone is to benefit from government programs. It is a difficult thing, to agree to concede something you feel you have earned so that someone else may benefit. I hope, for my generation’s sake that voters will remind Washington that they are willing to make that sacrifice.

by Brandon Greife

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/11/29/americans-face-tough-question-over-our-financial-future/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, November 30, 2010 - 13:17

Austerity regimes and bailout programs are popping up all over Europe like a whack-a-mole from hell. Failed Keynesian policies are popping up left and right, and are getting whacked by market reality. First Greece nearly collapsed, and might soon collapse again, and then France and the UK enacted austerity measures that were greeted with protests and riots.  Before now, Ireland had been giving its banks a bottomless bailout.  Now, Ireland is the one who needs the bailout. Ireland has to secure its own bailout from the EU and IMF, a bailout that will make Greece’s bailout look like chump change in terms of GDP.

The Irish bank bailouts did not come out of the blue. Many economists had been following the events of the Irish financial sector, holding their breath in fear of the costs of bailout after bailout. In March 2010, it was announced that Ireland’s three largest banks need to raise a combined €28.4 billion to meet new regulations. The Anglo Irish Bank alone needed €18.3 billion. So Ireland issued a “promissory note,” which is really nothing more than an I.O.U., worth €8.3 billion to the Anglo Irish Bank. That €8.3 billion was shortly increased to €18.9b. The rising costs did not stop there either. On September 30, the central bank found that the Anglo Irish Bank needed an additional €6.4 billion, the state-owned Irish Nationwide Building Society needed €5.4 billion, and more than €5.2 billion was needed by the Allied Irish Bank.

Those bank bailouts were costly. Ireland had previously hoped to keep this year’s budget deficit around 12% of GDP.  The Anglo Irish Bank and the Irish Nationwide Building Society government funded injections, however, increased the budget deficit to 32% of GDP. Total public debt was increased to 98.6% of GDP. Now Ireland’s government is the one having to look for someone to bail it out. Having a bottomless bailout saves no one, especially when your GDP is decreasing by 1.2% in just one quarter.

Ireland is now seeking between €80-95 billion in loans from the IMF and EU. To understand just how enormous that is relative to the size of the country consider that the total population of Ireland is about 4.2 million. For perspective, that is roughly equivalent to the Phoenix metropolitan area in Arizona. If Divided amongst the population the Irish bailout is about €22,619 per citizen. Given the current exchange rate that’s the equivalent of about $36,000. We’re talking BIG. Then again, leaders from all involved parties have warned that the initial amount may not be big enough and have said the final amount is likely to be much higher. The final package could equal 60% of the size of Ireland’s entire gross domestic product.

Before Ireland, Greece was the only developed, western nation who needed a bailout. Before Ireland happened, people could allay their fears by arguing that Greece was an anomaly. A fiscal wreck of a country that simply couldn’t get its fiscal house in order. The situation didn’t seem that bad viewed through this lens. After all, Greece’s economy was only 2.5% of the Eurozone’s total economy, the government and financial sectors were corrupt, and then pension system was grossly overburdened. Of course the reasons why Greece was the exception, not the rule, turned out to be the reasons why Greece was the rule, not the exception.

Overextension in the realm of public pension funds and other entitlement programs are not isolated to Greek policy. Look at the protests and strikes that over 3.5 million people participated in France when the government, in an effort to keep the program solvent, announced a plan to increase the retirement age by two years.  Or look at the 50,000 student rioters who took to the streets in London over tuition increases that are the result of austerity measures.  Now the failure of injecting banks and businesses with capital to keep them functioning, without regard to the adverse effect on economic strength and competitiveness, has hit the shores of another country.

The cost of Ireland’s problem looks like it is going to dwarf the Greek figure. The ball is not going to stop rolling there either.  Portugal and Spain both look like they are going to be asking for a bailout before too long. The Portugal bailout, if it accounts for 60% of GDP like Irish bailout is going to, would require about €182.5 billion ($134 billion). Some estimates place the potential cost for a Spanish bailout at €500 billion ($680 billion). Chronic unemployment, an ineffective banking sector, and lack of economic competitiveness paired with bottomless bailouts and unsustainable entitlement programs are the symptoms of this economic plague.

If Greece was not a wake-up call, and neither was the French strike or the London protests, then the lesson of Ireland must surely be. A few years ago no one would have predicted that Celtic Tiger would be dead. From 1995 to 2000, annual GDP growth in Ireland was between 6 and 11%. That is amazing; to have a 6% growth rate in an “off year” is phenomenal. After the 2% blip of 2002, the growth rate until 2007 was around 5%. In slightly more than a decade, Irish GDP doubled.  The 18% unemployment of the late 1980s shrank to 4.5% by 2007. With a low corporate income tax and other pro-business government policies, predicting the Irish debacle of today would have been farfetched.

It all collapsed when the housing market bubble popped. In one fell swoop banks’ balance sheets were wiped out and the federal government swooped in to save them. All told they spent more than €45 billion to rescue the banks, leading to a staggering deficit levels. With their debt skyrocketing international investors downgraded their bond rating meaning that it was wildly more expensive for the government to borrow. Now they are begging for a bailout.

American is not far from becoming the next mole from popping up in this sad global whack-a-mole game. To avoid it we must return to the core concepts that made us different from other nations – our fervent belief that the individual is the one ultimately responsible for himself.

I’m not arguing that we should abandon everyone who falls through the cracks; I am saying that using the government to dictate economic performance is misguided. Our goal should be to move people out of poverty, not to make it easier for them to live in it, through fostering economic growth not by bailing out nearly defunct institutions. In the US, which decade saw the highest rate of growth for real, reproducible, tangible wealth per capita? It was the 1880s. The fact that everyone was able to prosper under the unfettered economic growth created by the industrialists, the same titans of industry defamed by critics as robber barons, should come as no surprise. Economic growth, maintained through individual risk and reward and free from excess intervention, is the economic program that is sustainable and truly benefits everyone.

Excessive entitlement programs create an unsustainable burden and government intervention and regulation hinder economic growth and competiveness. That is why Ireland’s economy, so strong and enviable just a few years ago, is now sinking. You don’t bail a sinking ship out by dumping more buckets of water on it; you have to dump the buckets of water overboard. The Irish deficits and bailouts are tantamount to that.  The Irish government thought by throwing more money at the problem it would go away. The only product of that is a bankrupt government and a parliament that is soon to be dissolved.  With the costs of bailouts for companies like AIG, Fannie Mae, and Freddie Mac rapidly increasing, the US needs to stop bailing out these companies before we get whacked in the head by reality.

by Justin Williams

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/11/23/in-ireland-the-bailout-needs-a-bailout/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, November 23, 2010 - 11:46

A battle is currently raging in Washington. To address our budget deficit should we raise taxes or cut spending. It is assumed that these are two sides of the same coin. Raising one dollar in taxes is the equivalent of cutting one dollar of spending. But is that true?

Although the math may seem clear, history tells us that the two actions produce two different results. The reason is that the government cannot contain itself. Any dollar it takes in burns a hole in its pocket, it just can’t wait to spend it. The problem is, the government can’t stop itself with that dollar. Instead, it takes your tax dollar and then spends $1.58. The result is ever-higher spending levels and unsustainable debt. Higher taxes only work to encourage it.

I didn’t just pull the $1.58 number out of thin air. A 1987 study done by Ohio University economics Richard Vedder, Lowell Gallaway, and Christopher Frenze found that for every one dollar of additional tax revenue the government turns around and spends $1.58.

The reason for the disconnect between revenues and spending is the result of a careful balance made by legislators. On the one hand Congressmen increase federal spending because of its “marginal political benefits” – the concept that voters like what Congress is buying. Any added spending must eventually be financed by taxation and borrowing which impose “marginal political costs” since voters don’t particularly enjoy paying higher taxes. Congress has been willing to cheat the balance, reaping the political reward for spending on preferred projects while delaying (or ignoring) the costs imposed via higher taxes.

In 2007, Richard Vedder and Jonathan Leirer, updated the study. They found many of the same results, namely that the federal government continues to spend more than every new dollar it raises in taxes. The study also contained a very prophetic pronouncement about the current state of politics. They argued that,

“Attempts to reduce the budget deficit will be futile until the “rules of the game” change in a manner that alters the political incentive structure, raising the political costs of deficits, lowering the political benefits of spending, lowering the political costs of taxation, or a combination of the three.”

As the recent election results show, the rules of the game have changed. The political pendulum swung heavily towards conservative candidates who promised to put a stop to the spending habits of Washington and argued for a smaller role for the federal government. In other words, voters’ concern over the deficit (and its impact on the private sector) trumped voters’ desire for the products of government spending.

Today, Richard Vedder is back with yet another update on his groundbreaking research. Using new variable and taking new historical information into account he finds that “over the entire post World War II era through 2009 each dollar of new tax revenue was associated with $1.17 of new spending. Politicians spend the money as fast as it comes in—and a little bit more.”

Given the current debate over higher taxes versus lower spending as a means of curing our budget deficit, these results are more important than ever. They argue that the Democratic argument that tax increases be “put on the table” before they agree to cuts to entitlement programs is nothing but a “sucker play.” That’s because new tax revenues are almost invariably followed by spending increases, not entitlement cuts.

So as we go forth into the debate over how to conquer our deficit we must go armed with the knowledge that higher taxes more often lead to higher spending and not deficit reduction. As the Nobel winning economist Milton Friedman argued, “The only effective way I think to hold [government spending] down, is to hold down the amount of income the government has. The way to do that is to cut taxes.” As the newest studies show, one way that certainly does not lead to holding down government spending is giving them more money to play with.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, November 23, 2010 - 11:45

Some encouraging trends for Republicans have been emerging from Europe. Budget-slashers from Latvia to Britain are being rewarded by a more supportive public.  Who would have thought that the Greek Socialist party (unlike what you may be thinking, it is actually the fiscally conservative party in this case), could have won a massive electoral victory this month. Who could have thought that the party that proposed deep spending and welfare cuts in its bold austerity program could capture the voters’ approval and have one of their members elected as the mayor of Athens for the first time in 24 years? Despite violent strikes and a still increasing debt level that will automatically trigger new budget cuts, Greek voters voted not for the party that would give them short term appeasement but long term security. For how little credit we given them, it is crazy how rational voters can be in the face of a budget crisis.

The Greek voters are not alone in their surprising voting habits. The Latvian party that cut government worker’s pay by 50% was reelected last month. The Conservative coalition government in Britain is leading in the voting-intention surveys by a 42%-to37% margin despite proposing a rigid austerity package including massive budget cuts and slashing the size of the public sector workforce. The conservative’s plan to make the long term unemployed partake in required work programs or risk losing their benefits is supported by 74% of the British. It looks like the students protesting (see picture below) proposed tuition increased by smashing the conservative party headquarters are a hyper-vocal and hyper-violent minority. The majority of the British realize that a failing system leads to a failed system. No matter how much you may enjoy the benefits of the welfare state, it does you very little good if your country is bankrupt.

Countries are taking a look at their massive entitlement programs. Countries like Italy, Greece, and Poland are moving towards sustainable market based systems that use future pensions with investment funds and stock holdings instead of their old Ponzi scheme policies that are increasingly vulnerable to the economic malaise they themselves create. With aging populations that are contributing less and less to pension funds, tax rates alone cannot fulfill the promises that the governments have promised to workers. By 2050 the EU will only have 1.8 workers per retiree. Imagine using the salary of two workers to supplement the pension of the retired one and the pension is 95% of the salary of the two currently producing workers. That system won’t stand long. With people from multiple parties from multiple nations looking to remedy this solution by resending those promises, it looks like reason can transcend national and party lines.

While it is awesome that the pro-austerity parties have been greeted with increased public support, it is unfortunate that it is so surprising. It should be common sense that the majority of people will applaud common sense reform no matter how much politicking is involved in trying to fight it. The CBO estimates the by 2050 the US national debt will equal 344% of the US’s GDP. Before the recession the CBO estimated it would be at 292% of the GDP. Either way, both are bad numbers for Americans. Americans are finally coming to their senses about how unsustainable our fiscal policy is. Like many Europeans, Americans are tired of having their future and the future of their children jeopardized. That is why Republicans made historic gains on November 2 2010.

Republicans did not win because of a failure to communicate. Republicans won because they stood on the side of limited government spending. Republicans articulate their platform in their ‘Pledge to America.’ While the Pledge had some holes and was attacked by the left, the fundamentals that it was based upon were shared with the American people. Americans were tired of watching legislation that limited their rights and prospects of prosperity be passed in their name. Just like in Europe, voters rewarded the party that learned the lessons of the financial crisis. That may have come as surprise to some, but it didn’t come as surprise to the people who voted. Like I said before reason transcends nationality and party, and reason is on the side of Republicans.

by Justin Williams


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, November 23, 2010 - 11:44

Last Saturday the NY Times released a handy tool that allows the common man to SOLVE THE DEFICIT CRISIS.  Ok, not really solve it, unless you have some incredible sway with the President that we don’t know about. But it does provide a useful device to highlight the difficult choices that must be made to get our nation’s spending back on a sustainable path.

It provides users with the option to increase some taxes and cut some government spending in order to create a balanced budget. The options range from raising Social Security eligibility to 70 ($247 billion in savings) to eliminating earmarks ($14 billion saved).  However you chose to calculate your cuts and taxes, though, it all adds up to sacrifice, and we all know what sacrifice equals – someone is going to be left less than happy.

The NY Times headlines this calculator as a tool that makes even the most mathematically illiterate Political Science student into economists (no, I am not talking about myself):

Today, you’re in charge of the nation’s finances. Some of your options have more short-term savings and some have more long-term savings. When you have closed the budget gaps for both 2015 and 2030, you are done. Make your own plan, then share it online.

So what is the answer? There are an infinite numbers of ways to balance the budget but they all have one thing in common – they involve difficult choices. Sacred cows will have to be slaughtered, favored programs will have to be cut, and no doubt, whatever route you choose, people will be left upset.

As I went through the budget calculator two things stuck out. First, how much easier it is to fix the $418 billion shortfall in 2015 compared with the $1.3 trillion shortfall in 2030. The problem is that our current problems are going to continue to grow. Our major entitlement programs, Medicare, Medicaid, Obamacare, and Social Security, will continue to grow much faster than the economy. This means that tinkering on the edges may be able to solve the short-term problem, but will put barely put a dent in our long-term issue. So yes, we should eliminate earmarks, slash the size of the federal bureaucracy, and make some cuts or our military spending, but we cannot let this distract us from our primary problem – government entitlements.

Second, I found it much simpler than many pundits would have you believe to make substantial improvements to the deficit via spending cuts rather than tax increases. The fact is, it is really quite simple to solve the deficit problem by increasing revenue. All ya gotta do is jack up taxes. But here is the trick that no debt calculator can tell you – increasing tax rates is not the equivalent of increasing tax revenue. Higher taxes create more incentives for people to hide, divert, or loophole their way out of taxes. Higher taxes also create disincentives for businesses to incorporate and earn profit in the United States. In other words, increasing tax rates often leads to a shrinking of the taxable base. The trick is finding the revenue maximizing tax rate – something that is far more complex than simply hiking taxes and hoping, in vain, that it will translate into a reduced deficit.

On the other hand, finding places to cut spending to reduce our budget deficit is like finding sand in a desert. The federal government mirrors our tax code. Every once in a while it requires a spring cleaning. That is because year after year, Congress after Congress, the federal government grows. New programs are formed, new agencies are creates, new czars are hired, and old programs grow. Sadly, much of this growth happens regardless of performance. Once created, an old administration’s programs remain intact and a new administration, with new plans and ideas, creates its own. The result is a bloated government whose hallmarks are inefficiency and redundancy.

So it’s time to clean it out. Fortunately, this presents an opportunity to find a lot of places to cut and a lot of potential money that can be saved. The debt calculator highlights many of these cuts, including updating, streamlining, and spring-cleaning our entitlement programs, but it is by no means a comprehensive list.

Nevertheless, the calculator is a worthwhile exercise that takes the concept of cutting our debt out of the abstract and into the specific. I encourage you to check it out, play around, and come up with your own plan on how to solve one of the fundamental problems facing our generation. If nothing else it may allow you to appreciate the difficult choices we face as we attempt to tackle our budget deficit.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Thursday, November 11, 2010 - 12:19

The latest move by Ben Bernanke and his Federal Reserve is rubbing a lot of people the wrong way. Bernanke plans to inject more liquidity into US markets in the latest round of quantitative easing, which is being dubbed QE2 (we’ll get to what it actually means in a minute). While there has been a strong current of dissenting murmurs domestically, the most vocal outcries has come from abroad.  Germany, Brazil, Russia, Turkey, and China have been the loudest critics, with the German finance minister calling the move “clueless.” At a time of increasing globalization, angering our trading partners is certainly not the fastest path toward prosperity.

QE2 is the regime in which the Federal Reserve will be pumping $600 billion into the economy during the next several months. In doing so the Fed will purchase five to ten year Treasury bonds at a clip of $75 billion per month. The idea is to flood the market with cash by buying up U.S. debt.

Now for some background. Typically the Federal Reserve sets the price of money through the manipulation of interest rates. These rates effect the cost of loans paid by companies, the cost of mortgages for houses, and the return on saving money. Higher interest rates make borrowing less attractive and saving more attractive. Lower rates do the opposite. But as of now the Federal Reserve has lowered interest rates as low as they can go. And yet the economy isn’t acting like the Fed wants. The answer to their conundrum has been to come up with the process called “quantitative easing” in which the Federal Reserve creates new money out of thin air. With this new money it will buy government bonds – the result being that the price will rise and the interest rate (yield) will go down. When interest rates go down companies can essentially borrow money at cheaper prices. The hope is that this will encourage spending.

A side effect is that it will likely create a level of inflation that will devalue U.S. exports. While “devalue” is not something that sounds like a benefit – it does boost exports as our prices become more internationally competitive. Bernanke also argues that with the extra cash in the markets, US companies can afford to spend more money on employees and fuel the job growth the US desperately needs right now.

But remember, these are all “ifs.” There are serious risks associated with quantitative easing, including hyperinflation, and a limited chance of success, because to a significant degree it relies on investor confidence in its ability to work.

The international community is against the idea because the end result of the policy appears eerily similar to the same currency manipulation that allowed China to have a favorable trade deficit. Germany has criticized the move saying that it is “indirect manipulation” of the currency. Moreover, they say that the policy won’t work to jumpstart the economy. Germany’s Finance Minister Wolfgang Schaeuble said that, the “U.S. policy is clueless. [The problem] is not a shortage of liquidity. It’s not that the Americans haven’t pumped enough liquidity into the market.”

The stated goal of QE2 is to increase inflation, or layman’s terms to lower the value of one’s currency.  It is the same as a corporation seeking to improve its bottom line by offering new shares. The value of the company remains the same while the number of shares are increased, thus the value of each share decreases. Now, low-to-moderate inflation (less than 2%) is arguably a good thing. With prices going up it is a signal that there is not enough supply – thus it encourages producers to enter the market. It also greases the wheels of the economy by allowing for adjustments that are very hard to make under zero-inflation. But while moderate inflation is arguably good, high inflation, which often spirals into hyperinflation, is inarguably disastrous. Since the U.S. dollar is the reserve currency of choice, any destabilization of its price is a cause for concern from world economies.

Perhaps the deepest worry of the international community is the creation of “bubbles.” The tsunami of money that the Fed unleashed isn’t just isolated to American markets; it is also washing up on the shores of other states.  The triumvirate bubbles – stocks, bonds, and commodities – have serious distortionary impacts on the world economy. The Dow Jones Industrial Average has risen by an average of about 12% since Bernanke hinted about QE2. Stocks, overall, have increased by almost 20%. Portfolios have seen $1.2 trillion in paper gains since then as well.  The dollar has declined in value against the Euro by 10%. Commodity indexes have jumped by 20%. Oil is being traded at a two year high, and gold has reached a nominal high of $1,400 per ounce.

The problem with bubbles is that they pop. When cheap money flows into the hands of investors they put in various investments such as commodities or emerging markets. The increased investment has the potential to drive up prices. The problem is that at their core the asset is being overprices. We saw the formation of an asset bubble in the United States real estate market where prices soared but the underlying value of the house didn’t. When the bubble popped and home prices fell, the economy sunk. The creation of cheap money threatens to do the same thing all over again in other nations, particularly developing ones. That is why Germany and the gang don’t want ‘hot-money excess’ to corrupt their higher yielding currencies, nor do they want artificial bubbles proliferating across the global economy.

The transatlantic and transpacific rifts are growing. President Obama, who won the Nobel Peace Prize, for “extraordinary efforts to strengthen international diplomacy and cooperation between peoples,” is leading the charge for a monetary policy that may spark an economic war. Obama and the Democratic leadership are becoming more ideologically isolated in a domestic sense. Now, his economic policies, which stand in sharp contrast to the majority of the developed world threaten to isolate us from the rest of the world.

The rest of the world has come to the conclusion the majority of America has reached: liberal policy is threatening to destabilize our economy. In attempting to recover from their own Keynesian nightmare, European nations are frozen in fear by the world’s leading economy failing to learn from their mistakes. Last Tuesday the Democratic bubble popped, hopefully the White House and the Federal Reserve will come to their senses before the United States’ days as a world economic power does the same.

by Justin Williams and Brandon Greife

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/11/11/quantitative-easing-a-potential-threat-to-the-worldwide-recovery/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Thursday, November 11, 2010 - 12:18

Wealth redistribution is somehow becoming a vogue topic amongst the intellectuals of this country. Granted only President Obama is brave enough to say it, it hasn’t stopped liberals from veiled discussions of how best to spread the wealth. It comes in the context of raising capital gains taxes, hiking taxes on the upper classes, expanding Medicaid, refusing to reform Social Security, eliminating the estate tax, etc. Now you may look at those and think how well intentioned each of them is. After all, it is simply the government’s attempt to help those who have, for one reason or another, been unlucky enough to secure a middle-class lifestyle. To which I say, the road to hell is paved with good intentions.

Now that sounds a little harsh. To be honest, I share the intentions of President Obama and many liberal thinkers. I want the government to promote policies that will secure the brightest future for the greatest amount of people. But as the brilliant economist Milton Friedman once said,

“One of the great mistakes is to judge policies and programs by their intentions rather than their results.

Almost all government programs are started with good intentions, but when you look at what they actually achieve, there is a general rule. Almost every such program has results that are the opposite of the intentions of the well-meaning people who originally backed it.”

 

As well intentioned as “wealth redistribution” may be I can’t shake the fact that it feels wrong. At its bottom it requires taking money from someone and no amount of “good outcomes” can scrub it of that fact.

Apparently some people do not share my concern. A recent article in the Los Angeles Times argues that wealth redistribution is quickly becoming a moral imperative in our society. Their argument stems from the belief that the “gap between the wealthiest Americans and the poorest is bigger than at any time since the 1920s.” I say “belief” and not fact because the reality is actually in dispute (see here, here, and here).

Nevertheless, the writer uses the widening income gap to argue that there is a need for wealth redistribution. As evidence for this need, the writer provides the results of a study that show that Americans drastically underestimate the current gap between the very rich and the poor. The study also found that when asked what the ideal distribution of wealth was Americans said that they wanted the top 20% to own just over 30% of the wealth, and the bottom 40% to own about 25%. This contrasts with an analysis (again, disputed) that shows that the top 20% of individuals own 85% of the wealth.

Now, let me be the first to say that that doesn’t seem right.  And as the writer points out, in doing so, I join the majority of Americans who want to achieve a more equitable distribution of wealth. The question is, how do we fix it. The easy thought is to use the federal government as a lever to shift wealth from the upper classes to the poor.

In my mind there are a number of things wrong with the welfare state philosophy of “doing good with other people’s money.” The first, as Friedman mentioned is the fact that welfare programs almost always do the opposite of what they were intended to do. One of the primary examples is the minimum wage. The idea sounds great in theory because it, in theory, assures a living wage for people. In practice it has much more pernicious, if unintentional, results. Increasing the minimum wage ends with the unfortunate result that if a workers skills are not worth in the marketplace what employers are forced to pay then they will go unemployed.

Second, as Friedman pointed out, “very few people spend other people’s money as carefully as they spend their own.” This reality is made worse by the fact that when taken people’s money is wrung through two other spenders. The federal government must take the money through taxes. It then decides the best way to spend the money to decide what will do the most “good.” Some portion of this money is then given to those in need through various redistributive programs of the welfare state. Once again, having been given this money rather than having earned it, the recipients of the money are much more likely to spend the money in less economically productive ways. They are incentivized to save little, invest little, and waste much. Even worse, it creates a cycle of dependency that is very hard to break because it destroys the individual will to succeed on their own accord.

(Writer’s note: This is an argument against a redistributive system in the abstract it should not be interpreted as a diatribe against those unemployed during the recession.)

Third, and in my view most important, Friedman argues that “the only way in which you can effectively distribute the wealth is by destroying the incentives to have wealth.” In general, the amount an individual earns is directly in relation to the value of the goods or services he creates.  That is, people are incentivized to increase their skills, improve their products, or improve their efficiency because they know it will contribute to their wealth creation. Arbitrarily taking away the profits of an individual’s work through redistribution eliminates, to some degree, the desire to maximize their wealth creation.

There is no doubt that “redistributionalists” have good intentions. They perceive a problem and believe they have a way to fix it. Unfortunately, a closer examination of the specifics of such a plan reveals that it may have the opposite effect as that intended. In your attempts to shift wealth from the upper to the lower classes, you inevitably end up hurting those you meant to help. Rather than increase the role of government and welfare, we must increase the role of freedom and capitalism. As Milton Friedman concluded, “a society that puts equality before freedom will get neither. A society that puts freedom before equality will get a high degree of both.”

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/11/10/wealth-redistribution-is-not-the-solution-to-inequality/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Thursday, November 11, 2010 - 12:17

Wasting no time from last week’s elections, Republicans are already seeking to prevent the US’s mountain of debt from becoming its Tower of Babel.  The US currently has $13.7t worth of debt, which in May 2011, is excepted to pass the $14.3t limit set by Democrats last February.  With whispers of a government shutdown murmuring through the halls of Capitol Hill, Republicans are seeking to allay those fears while turning them into tangible results for fiscal hawks.

The GOP has decided to take the offensive on the looming issue of the need to raise the debt cap. The debt ceiling is a dollar limit set by the US Congress to determine how much the U.S. can borrow. If it feels like we just had this problem. You’re right, we did. Unfortunately, our spending habits haven’t improved and the new debt limit, set just last year, needs to be raised again to prevent a shutdown of government. The current debt limit is $14.3 trillion, while the national debt is $13.7 trillion and rising fast.

The vote to raise the ceiling will likely be the first test for Republicans to see whether they will live up to their promises to put the federal budget on a diet. Fortunately, the Wall Street Journal reports that,

Republicans are planning to demand major spending cuts next year before they would agree to raise the amount of federal debt that can be issued, setting up a clash between the Obama administration and a Congress stocked with lawmakers who campaigned as deficit hawks.

House Republicans have yet to lay out their exact demands, but have already mentioned the desire to return discretionary spending back to 2008 levels – prior to the spending binge under the Obama administration. Of course, if a compromise is not reached on raising the level of debt, and the debt ceiling is reached, the US could face a perilous situation in which it may default on its loans.

Both Democrats and Republicans are having flashbacks of the 1995 government shutdown.  During a vicious impasse between Treasury Secretary Robert Rubin and House Speaker Newt Gingrich the US actually hit the debt ceiling and had to borrow money from at least two different federal pension funds to avoid defaulting. The debt ceiling was later raised, only after a brief government shutdown and a threat from the Clinton administration that Social Security checks would not be mailed.  That government shutdown was largely blamed on Republicans, who had just made sweeping gains in the 1994 elections, and helped Bill Clinton get reelected in 1996. Nevertheless, the clash represented a key turning point in the battle over federal spending and showed that Republicans had a take-no-prisoners attitude that was ultimately responsible for a balanced budget.

Presumptive Speaker of the House John Boehner dismissed a government shutdown as a possibility this year. In an interview with Diane Sawyer he said,

“Increasing the debt limit allows our government to meet its obligations, and I think that there are multiple options for how you deal with it. But for our team, I think we’re going to have to demonstrate that we’ve got to have reductions in spending. The government’s spending more than what we bring in. We can’t afford it.”

… We’re not quite sure when we’re going to face this increase in the debt limit, but when we do, we’ll be ready to meet our obligations.”

Although refusing to raise the debt limit appears to be on the table, Boehner did hint at one procedural change that should allow a clear distinction to be drawn between the spenders and the savers. Bohner said that he would make the debt limit hike a stand-alone vote, allowing lawmakers to vote straight up on the issue without being able to hide it from the record. Previous votes on the debt limit were accomplished through the “Gephardt Rule” which allowed House members to vote on a budget, but send another bill to Senate, so that they don’t have to ever vote on the budget specifically. But as Boehner promised in his campaign for Speaker, such electoral gymnastics are a thing of the past.

It’s time to get serious about our budget deficit. Constantly raising the debt limit year-after-year does nothing but feed the beast. Unfortunately, Republicans will likely be forced to vote to raise it, but it at least presents an opportunity for Republicans to lower the bar on future spending. The US’s gross debt percentage of GDP was 62% in 2007; the 2011 forecast catapults that percentage to 100%. With skyrocketing growing entitlement spending, a sluggish economic growth rate, and chronic unemployment Republicans look to champion a return to the free market capitalism that has helped America prosper in the past.

by Justin Williams

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/11/09/debt-limit-vote-presents-opportunity-for-republicans/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Thursday, November 11, 2010 - 12:16

The left coast broke for the Left last Tuesday. After the elections, California exists as one of the true havens for Democrats over the next two years. California reelected Barbara Boxer as senator, changed their governor’s seat from RINO to Democrat, only one incumbent Democrat lost their seat in Congress, and the state elected Democrats to be their Lieutenant Governor, Attorney General, Secretary of State, Treasurer, and Comptroller. The state’s liberal tilt was reaffirmed by votes on a series of Propositions that, on the one hand demonstrate the state’s dedication to liberalism, but on the other doom it to further fiscal trouble.

Proposition 23 was a measure that would suspend air pollution laws until unemployment dropped. Under the proposition, California’s greenhouse gas emission targets would be suspended until unemployment, currently around 12%, dropped to 5.5% and remained at that level for a year.  Prior to the election analysts warned that the increase cost of cleaning for refineries would raise the cost of refining to a level that would make the California more susceptible to importing refined products for Asia. This would lead to a drop in Californian revenues from the refining and could lead to job outsourcing.

The vote came mere weeks after a report was issued revealing how the state of California grossly miscalculated pollution levels in a scientific analysis used to determine the state’s clean air standards. The state’s pollution estimate was off by 340%. Independent researchers found that the state’s methods of calculating the pollution was due to both flawed work and a faulty method by the Air Resources Board. The Board claims that the discrepancy is due to calculating the emissions before the economy went into a recession.

The debate over environmental protection is very tricky. On one side, it is clear that we have a responsibility to protect the environment. To that end, finding a balance between protecting the environment and protecting jobs should be the end-goal of government policy. The economic recession has shifted that balance temporarily. There is a dire need to create a policy setting that fosters job creation because we have a moral imperative to help the jobless. Raising California’s greenhouse emissions targets until a return to reasonable levels of employment isn’t a jab at the environment, it’s a stab at trying to stem job losses.

Sadly the measure didn’t pass, forcing businesses to potentially choose between meeting carbon regulations and hiring employees. Moreover, in a state with record levels of public debt and is on the brink of bankruptcy, the loss of extra tax revenues spells potential disaster.

A second ballot measure, Proposition 25, was passed. The Proposition reduces the majority needed to pass legislative acts such as budgets. Previously, the California legislature was divided between Republicans and Democrats in such a way that it took some degree of bipartisan agreement to pass. This meant that the tax-and-spend Democratic majority had a check on their ability to pass a progressive agenda with very little means to pay for it. Proposition 25 will eliminate this check by lowering the requirement for legislation to pass to a point at which the Republican minority is essentially non-consequential.

The results of the elections and the Proposition votes show that California, like many liberals, continue to be deluded into believing that their way is working. The state is facing a $20 billion budget gap. According to Blooomberg, market indices show that worldwide investors believe that California is more likely to default on its debt that Kazakhstan. Hey Democrats, Borat says hi. This is not a sustainable situation and last Tuesday showed that while the rest of the nation is painfully self-aware of its troubles, California continues to exist in its own budgetary fantasyland. I realize that being a contrarian is the cool thing to do in California, but c’mon, we’re talking about the financial future of an entire state.

Across the country, with the notable exception of California, Americans elected officials that get the idea that the government doesn’t always know better and it almost never spends better than private citizens. California may have doomed itself to another two years of more debt, higher taxes and fewer jobs, but should it find a way to remain solvent, we conservatives will be here waiting in 2012.

by Justin Williams

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/11/08/tax-and-spend-please-california-bucks-conservative-trend/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Thursday, November 11, 2010 - 12:15

The house of cards that Democrats have been building over the past two years is teetering precariously. Namely, we have misused our status as the world’s global reserve currency of choice.

Over the past year the Democrats have spearheaded a fiscal effort to jumpstart the economy. The centerpiece of this approach was the $862 billion stimulus bill that was supposed to pump money into the hands of consumers and jumpstart our economic recovery. Except that none of that happened. Instead we were left with historic debt and deficits and an economy that was still sluggish at best.

Despite the lackluster performance of the package, many liberal economists, most visibly Paul Krugman, argued that the President needed to pass another stimulus plan. As he wrote in yesterday’s New York Times, “Mr. Obama’s problem wasn’t a lack of focus [on the economy]; it was a lack of audacity. At the start of his administration he settled for an economic plan that was far too weak.”

These economists argued that austerity was foolish at a time like this. “Right now, investors don’t seem at all worried about the solvency of the U.S. government; the interest rates on federal bonds are near historic lows.

In other words, why should we cut back on government spending if we can continue to borrow money at really low rates? If other nations are willing to fund our extravagance why hold back?

The latest slap in the face to foreign investors is a new round of “quantitative easing.” This is a plan implemented by the Federal Reserve in which they purchase 5-to-10 year Treasury securities in the hopes that it will increase the price of bonds and thus reduce interest rates. The hope is that the lower interest rates will increase liquidity and make corporate financing cheaper.

But as Duke professor and National Bureau of Economic Research associate Campbell Harvey explains,

There is a secondary effect. As U.S. interest rates go down, the U.S. is presumably less attractive for foreign fixed-income investors. This may put downward pressure on the exchange rate. A cheaper exchange rate means exports are more competitive and imports are more expensive.

The combination of these two policy trajectories – fiscal and monetary – is beginning to leave a bad taste in the mouths of some foreign governments. Some are openly resenting the dollar’s preeminent status as the de facto world currency. In their view, such “dollar hegemony” was a “major cause of both the imbalances and the crisis, for it allowed more or less unbounded borrowing by the US from the rest of the world, at very favourable rates.”

The dollar has been the world’s reserve currency since World War II. With many of the world’s financial systems in shambles the Allied nations gathered in Bretton Woods to set up a new system of rules to manage the new international monetary system. One of the primary results of the meeting was an obligation that every nation adopt an exchange rate that stayed within a fixed value. This combined with the newly established ‘gold standard” persuaded other nation to peg their currencies to the price of the U.S. dollar.

For seven decades this system worked fine because the US was the dominant economy, had a sterling credit rating, and was a very stable monetary system. Now some are wondering if that reality holds true. As Jeremy Warner wrote in the UK Telegraph,

America has squandered this advantage on credit-fuelled spending; with the developing world expected to represent more than half of the global economy within five years, dollar hegemony no longer makes any sense.

Warner senses that the United States is leveraging its role as the global currency to address its domestic needs, the rest of the world be damned. And frankly, if you agree with Paul Krugman’s assessment – that we should lap up cheap debt so long as the world is giving it to us – then Warner is exactly right.

Our fiscal impropriety will not last forever. We are still the world’s dominant economy.  But we must not let our hubris blind us from the harsh reality – that our reckless spending has compromised our place at the top.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/11/05/spending-recklessness-threats-americas-spot-at-the-top/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Thursday, November 11, 2010 - 12:14

Pundits are lining up to tell President Obama what he should do after his party suffered a major defeat in Tuesday’s elections.

Some, like Salon’s Robert Reich, suggest that Obama must not “move to the center” but rather “push even harder for what you believe in.” Others suggest that the fundamental change needed is not substance, but delivery. The USA Today argued that he must ditch the “stiff, defensive and clinical” Obama and return to his campaign trail persona which emphasized a “human connection and a common touch.” Still others suggest Obama fundamentally alter his approach and make a sharp move to the center. Former Clinton adviser Doug Schoen best espouses this position, arguing that for Obama “to secure his political future, he need to change his approach in the way that Bill Clinton did halfway through his first term” through a strategy called triangulation.

But his electoral success may center around policy more than approach. As Schoen explained, Obama like Clinton, must turn “around his administration’s reputation: from one of big-spending liberalism to one of fiscal discipline and growth.”

At this point Americans don’t seem to care whether you are a Republican or a Democrat, they are willing to flip back and forth until one of the party’s finally addresses their concern about the size and spending habits of Washington. In that sense, appearing partisan or bipartisan, progressive or conservative, is much less important than appearing concerned about the deficit.

Fortunately, the first press conference President Obama gave following Tuesday’s election results signals that Obama is ready to address the level of spending in Washington.  Although he still does not appear ready to address deficits in the short term he does emphasize the need to sit down and figure out “what kinds of budget cuts we can make that are intelligent, that are smart, that won’t be undermining our recovery but, in fact, will be encouraging job growth.”

That represents a fundamental change in position from our President and many of his advisers. Obama has previously suggested that maintaining the flow of government money is necessary to grease the wheels of this economy. Just one year ago Obama was making the push for a new government stimulus, saying that the nation must continue to “spend our way out of this recession.”

His recent comments at least represent a step forward by demonstrating an understanding that a certain (if unspecified) level of government spending can actually undermine growth by taking money out of the hands of the private sector.  In that regard he suggested that we “arrive at some consensus on some areas where we can eliminate programs that don’t work, cut back on government spending that is inefficient, can streamline government, but isn’t cutting into the core investments that are going to make sure that we are a competitive economy that is growing and providing opportunity for years to come.”

Although the statement leaves much room for conservatives to worry exactly what Obama and Democrats consider “core investments,” it is another positive step. If nothing else it signals a willingness to cut back on the government bureaucracy that has ballooned under his watch. Moreover, it tacitly admits that some government expenditures are inefficient, apparently ditching the Keynesian approach in which the efficiency of spending is secondary, if not inconsequential, in judging desirability.

Finally, President Obama admitted to becoming lax on the enforcement of one of his earlier promises – stopping the tide of earmarks. He acknowledged that “in the rush to get things done” he had to sign “a bunch of bills” containing earmarks despite this being “contrary to what I had talked about.” In fact he claims that he is  “a strong believer that the earmarking process in Congress isn’t what the American people  really want to see when it comes to making tough decisions about how taxpayer dollars are spent.” Admitting a mistake is a rare show of humility for President Obama and a positive sign that business as usual may actually change now that a Republican majority can hold his feet to the fire.

There is still a long way to go until 2012. Nevertheless, with the midterms now in the past, voters will be keenly focused on how the President responds to the historic rebuke he received in these elections. Will he kowtow or will be press on? Obama’s future is still yet to be determined; nevertheless, his first step into a divided government was promising.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/11/04/post-election-obama-shows-willingness-to-compromise-on-spending/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Sunday, October 31, 2010 - 19:47

Fear. It is a powerful election year tactic that Democrats have been leaning on heavily in the days leading up to November 2nd.

They warn that if Republicans live up to expectations and take back the House of Representatives it will be the end for America as we know it. It may sound as if I’m using hyperbole to describe their positions but I’m not. Take liberal commentator Paul Krugman who was made famous by his economics and turned infamous by the ridiculous stuff he says in his New York Times column.

Krugman warns that if Republicans win back the House,

“[It] will be terrible. In fact, future historians will probably look back at the 2010 election as a catastrophe for America, one that condemned the nation to year of political chaos and economic weakness. . . So if the elections go as expected next week, here’s my advice: Be afraid. Be very afraid.”

Catastrophe? Condemned? Chaos? An alliterative triumverate of cowardice. I mean, I understand that horror is en vogue during the Halloween season, but c’mon! You’d think Republicans were zombies straight out of a George A. Romero movie, dripping blood from every orifice and wanting to feed on voters’ flesh.

Yet in his article, Krugman does something very strange. In making the case for why Americans should “be afraid, be very afraid” of Republican control, he explains exactly why they shouldn’t be.

“After, all,” says Krugman, “the last time Republicans controlled Congress while a Democrat lived in the White House was the period from the beginning of 1995 to the end of 2000. And people remember that era as a good time, a time of rapid job creation and responsible budgets.”

Rapid job creation? Responsible budgets? That sounds almost exactly what America needs right now!

As the Washington Post reported yesterday, “The U.S. economy remains stuck in neutral, according to the latest data, continuing a pattern of steady growth that is too slow to bring down joblessness.” In fact many economic forecasters actually expect the unemployment rate to edge up, the result of economic growth too small to incorporate population increases.

Moreover, with Democrats having full control of both houses of Congress and the White House the nation’s budget has been disastrous. For the second straight year the budget deficit has been above $1.3 trillion, the result of enormous spending programs like the stimulus and steady increases in discretionary spending. As the Wall Street Journal recently explained,

CBO shows that over the first three years of the Obama Presidency, 2009-2011, the federal government will borrow an estimated $3.7 trillion. That is more than the entire accumulated national debt for the first 225 years of U.S. history. By 2019, the interest payments on this debt will be larger than the budget for education, roads and all other nondefense discretionary spending.

After the sad reality of the last two years rapid job creation and a responsible budget sounds exactly like what we need!

Nevertheless, Krugman and many liberal pundits argue that Tuesday is likely the first sign of the End Times. As Jonathon Alter wrote in Newsweek, “If Democrats lose control anyway, maybe nothing bad will happen…But a right wing Republican takeover of Congress and state capitals isn’t something to accept with indifference.”

He’s exactly right. When Tuesday rolls around and you go and cast your vote for change, don’t do so with a feeling of indifference. Do it with a feeling of exuberance. Happy that you have provided a check on an out of control government who had no qualms on spending unprecedented amounts of taxpayer money. Happy that you elected a party with a state purpose of restoring certainty to an economy that has been rocked by new regulations and threatened by higher taxes. Happy that we may have finally taken the first step towards getting this nation back on the right track.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/10/31/republican-gains-exactly-what-the-economy-needs/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Sunday, October 31, 2010 - 19:46

As you walk into the voting booth on Tuesday there are a few numbers you need to remember.

  • 3.03 trillion – the increase in the national debt since President Obama took office
  • 14.2 trillion – the projected national debt in 2019 under President Obama’s budget
  • 1.3 trillion – the average annual deficit run in the last two years under Democrats’ leadership
  • 7.9 million- the number of private sector jobs that have been lost despite this spending spree
  • 9.6% – the unemployment rate

The midterms are two days away. Let me repeat, two days. So as you go to vote, in what could be one of the most important elections of our lifetimes, remember those numbers above. Remember, because they are more than just numbers on a page. They are the result, in terms of dollars spent, jobs lost, and people unemployed, of Democratic leadership in Washington.

America continues to struggle, begging for help, while Obama continues to say “hold on” the recovery is surely coming. But Americans are past the point of blind faith. It’s time we see results. The only results to be found are those that show a non-existent recovery, a far cry from President Obama’s promise that better days were just right around the corner. As Politico explained,

Home prices, the Achilles heel of the economy, are falling again.  Consumer confidence remains at levels usually associated with recession.  And on Friday, the government is expected to announce that economic growth was around 2 percent in July, August and September, less than half of what is normal in a modest recovery.

Did you catch that? We are not even growing at half the rate for a modest recovery. We can add that 2% growth in GDP to the expanding list of numbers showing the debilitating effects of the Democrats’ policies.

In the final 48 hours before Election Day Democrats will attempt to minimize the impact of these numbers. These snake oil salesman will have you believe that they’ve done their best to fix a problem they inherited. They will make the argument that they need more time. They will ask you if you are ready to hand back the keys to a party who drove us into a ditch, ignoring the fact that they’ve worked for the past two years to dig the ditch deeper. And as a study by the Wesleyan Media Project shows, they will use personal attacks against Republicans in a last minute attempt to sway voters.

Americans, whose most sensitive organ is not the heart or the brain, but their wallet, won’t be fooled. We are hurting. Our wallets are on life support, drained of money, that element of vitality that keeps our families fed, sheltered, and clothed. We are a patient in an emergency room waiting for an infusion and yet Obama is telling us to be patient. There is no more time for patience. Our economy continues to wither, our families continue to struggle, and our futures look bleaker by the day. It’s time for a change.

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/10/31/economy-continues-to-falter-in-lead-up-to-election-day/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Sunday, October 31, 2010 - 19:44

Quick, get out your pen and paper. We are taking a pop quiz. Ready?

Here are the questions:

A)     Which state has the highest concentration of Fortune 500 companies?

B)     Which state is number one in export revenues?

C)      Which state, of the 20 largest, is the only state to have a net gain in jobs during the last four years?

D)    For the last question, which state is home to the two fastest growing cities in the US

To be honest you looked confused during the quiz. You had that glazed look all over your face. How did you do? What states do you have listed? You wrote down New York, Florida, California, and Arizona. Those seem like pretty solid answer. But still….you failed.

Come on. This was supposed to be an easy quiz. You only needed to know one answer. One state fits the all the criteria of the questions. Which state is that? Texas!

Believe me; I was just as incredulous when I found out. I had no idea that the state of the Alamo, the Rio Grande, and Jerry Jones’s HD Jumbotron was the state that had the most Fortune 500 Companies, was number one in export revenues, had the two fastest growing US cities, and had a net gain of jobs during the last four years.

As it turns out God really has blessed Texas. For six years running, Texas has been named the top state for economic development.  From 2000 to 2010, Texas’s population grew by 480,000. The top two fastest growing US cities are Dallas and Houston, respectively. Being home to 57 Fortune 500 companies definitely helps sustain growth like that. Those companies helped bring in more than $160b in state export revenues last year. Those big businesses also helped create 480,000 new jobs in Texas from January to July of this year.

The Great Recession, as it is being called, hit the US in December of 2007 and ended in June of 2009. The US lost 8.5m jobs during that time period. Though economists have declared the recession is over the US has still been struggling. In June 2009, unemployment was at 9.5%. In the beginning of October 2010 it had risen to 10.1%. Worse, the US economy only grew at a 1.7% rate in the last quarter – not large enough to offset natural gains in the workforce, much less put a dent in unemployment.

Texas is perhaps the state that has weathered that financial storm the best. In Texas, the period of job losses lasted from late 2008 until mid 2009. Compared with the rest of the nation, that’s next to nothing. From September 2009 to September 2010 the US, as a whole, the US gained 321,000 jobs, which equals a job growth rate of .2%. Texas, during the same time span, created 166,600 jobs. That means that one state is responsible for nearly one-half of the nation’s total job growth over the past year! The Texas private sector, the sector which is the key for any long term economic growth, had an annual employment growth rate of 1.9%. Private sector annual employment growth in the US during the same period of time was a whopping .5%.

Economists, journalists, and academics agree that three factors helped Texas to limit the damage from the recession and bounce back, economically, very quickly.

A)     Strong energy prices

B)     Low housing costs

C)     A GOVERNMENT THAT ENCOURAGES ECONOMIC GROWTH

I emphasize that last tenet. Having a government that gives free market enterprises room to grow is integral to having a strong economy. In Texas, adherence to pro-business principles is a bipartisan effort. The last three governors of Texas, Ann Richards (D), George Bush (R), and Rick Perry (R),all followed similar economic platforms.

Texas is big, but Texans know that there is not enough room for economic growth and a colossal government entity. So to make room for this growth, the Texas government has spurned revenues from personal income taxes and capital gains taxes. While the rest of the country is looking for more ways to raise revenues, Texas decided to let money stay in the pockets of its citizens. But the results have been incredible. Businesses and wealthy individuals have flocked to the state, actually leading to increases in the state’s tax revenues. They’re charging less and getting more! As the Guinness guys would say, “Brilliant!”

Texas has done other things to encourage and fortify private sector growth. Their government regulations remain light beyond the required Federal mandates. They’ve implemented tort reform to keep healthcare costs low. And perhaps most importantly their government has simply stayed out of the way.  Businesses love certainty. In Texas there is no worry about a ballooning deficit and higher taxes to pay for it. To the contrary Texas has conquered their deficit and created a $9 billion “rainy day” fund that they are able to tap into rather than increase taxes.

It looks the current model of the former Republic of Texas is the model America as a whole should be following. They’ve bucked the national trend and remained “Texas” instead of “Tax Us.” The only thing the rest of us can do is sit on the sidelines and watch the result of good governance and sound fiscal policy.

Except that is not entirely true.  Fortunately, for the rest of us, we don’t have to be benchwarmers much longer. Let’s get excited, productivity and prosperity doesn’t have to keep passing us by. We have an opportunity to make unprecedented gains in this midterm election. We are a few days away from being able to take Congress back.  We cannot afford to pass up on this event. If we vote the right people into office, our economy, starting in January, begin to look like the Texas model, not the Tax Us model. And that is the best answer I’ve heard in a while.

by Justin Williams

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/10/29/obama-must-follow-the-texas-not-the-tax-us-model/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Sunday, October 31, 2010 - 19:43

I finally got around to seeing the Social Network last night. The movie, a highly dramatized history of the creation of Facebook also functioned as a nuanced morality tale about the success of Mark Zuckerberg. The movie presents a story in which a petulant Zuckerberg got the idea for forming Facebook after being dumped by his girlfriend. In one scene he rails against her on his blog, leading to a rift between the two that spans the length of the movie.

Zuckerberg, shown to be a socially inept genius, never truly understands why his ex won’t simply accept his apology. Fed up she answers, “the internet’s not written in pencil, Mark. It’s written in ink.”

Yes, to the lament of politicians everywhere, the internet is written in ink. This fact has been especially vexing for Speaker of the House Nancy Pelosi who has a very difficult time stating the truth. Take for instance, an interview with Rolling Stone that Pelosi did after President Obama signed the stimulus law.

“We will be accountable. We will answer for this legislation one year from now…We won’t say, ‘Well, that’s just the economy’s fault. No, we will be accountable for the decisions that we make.”

Accountable? That is perhaps the last word that comes to mind after watching the Democrats final push towards Election Day.

Tbe strategy for many Democrats is nothing but a comprehensive cop-out. They’ve taken to saying that the economy and the nation in general was in a deeper hole than they could have ever predicted. They argue that if voters can’t appreciate the Democrats’ accomplishments, it’s just not their problem. In short, it’s the “many great geniuses were unappreciated in their lifetimes” approach.

This strategy was perfectly dissected by New York Times writer Robert Brooks in yesterday’s column in which he explained Democrats’ blame-game technique.

Always remember, many great geniuses were unappreciated in their lifetimes. Democrats are lagging this year because the country appears incapable of appreciating the grandeur of their accomplishments. That’s because, as several commentators have argued over the past few weeks, many Americans are nearsighted and ill-informed. Or, as President Obama himself noted last week, they get scared, and when Americans get scared they stop listening to facts and reason. They get all these crazy ideas in their heads, like not wanting to re-elect Blanche Lincoln.

Blaming the voters for being stupid, especially when they are the same people who carried you into office in 2006 and 2008, seems like an especially poor strategy. It is not voters who are nearsighted and ill-informed, it is Democrats who were willing to spend away our future in a vain attempt to save their political fortunes. Forgive us if we aren’t impressed. As to Obama’s point, we are scared, but it is because the “facts” remain so bleak despite your party’s best efforts.

It’s enough to make you wonder exactly what Speaker Pelosi was talking about after the State of the Union. She said that her party would answer for her legislation when elections rolled around. So consider my surprise when President Obama took to “The Daily Show” last night and said that,

“When we promised during the campaign ‘change you can believe in,’ it wasn’t change you can believe in — in 18 months. It was ‘change you can believe it’ – but you’re gonna have to work for it.”

Vice President Biden has been echoing the message, saying recently that “[t]here was a misreading about just how bad an economy we inherited.”

When you distill the rhetoric the Administration is simply saying that they are not yet willing to answer to voters for their legislation. Well sorry Mr. President, as Speaker Pelosi said, it’s time that Democrats be accountable for the decisions that they made. Those decisions imperiled the financial future of young adults, dug our nation into a fiscal hole that will require enormous changes to escape from, and has arguably made the very things you promised to improve – healthcare, the economy, and the financial sector – worse. Regardless of time, that is not change I want to believe in.

The internet is not written in pencil, it is written in ink. If Speaker Pelosi is going to demand that voters hold her party accountable, forgive me if I ignore Democrats more recent attempts to wriggle free of that pronouncement.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/10/28/democrats-lack-of-accountability-not-wooing-any-voters/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Sunday, October 31, 2010 - 19:41

The flashback episode. We have all seen this clichéd technique being abused by a television series. Inevitably, long after the series has reached its peak and is desperately trying to hang on to viewers the writers begin to lose their creativity. The result…a flashback!

The family or friends are sitting around their television screen when suddenly, the worst-case scenario happens – the power goes out. This is about the time when you would hear Homer say, “DOH!” The characters in the show are outraged.  What do you do when there is no TV? – how could you possibly survive? But just as the characters are on the verge of a riot, some nostalgic family members pulls out the scrapbook or whips out the old home movies. The producers will then force-feed a montage of memorable clips from past episodes in an attempt to tug the viewers heartstrings. It is all fluff – we all know it – we all hate it (but we still watch it). As the episode has finished its sad excuse for creativity, the cliché episode will end with a cliché finish; the power will come back on, the family will realize that it wasn’t all that bad without electricity, they’ll realize how much they all love each other, and the credits will roll.

Every year Americans add a new “necessity” to the market. College students can remember the first family computer, their first cell phone, or the first time they downloaded a song. They were a luxury at the time. An incredible innovation that added a level of simplicity or comfort to our lives. But over time they somehow become necessities. Like the sitcom family who loses power, losing these new “necessities” seems like the end of the world. Just imagine the mental angst you would cause if you told today’s average college student that they would have to go without internet for a week. They’d beg and plead and would likely be willing to give their left arm if it only meant that the blessed internet would remain.

To sum it up the lesson I would like to quote the 80′s hair band Cinderella when they sing, “You don’t know what you got, till it’s gone”.

Many European nations are learning that lesson the hard way. Over the past several decades the welfare state has essentially coddled and babied its citizens, providing them with a cradle to the grave social safety net.

In France the hallmark of the welfare state was their pension plan. France allowed workers to retire as early as age 60 and still receive full pension benefits. Unfortunately, like many European welfare states are discovering, the lavish system is simply unworkable. Spending on these programs continues to grow and grow even as government revenues shrink and shrink. It is a system destined to drag down the finances of even the most financially stable nations.

But the social innovation has become a seeming necessity. Having enjoyed the benefits of the welfare state for so long they are loathe to let it go, regardless of the fiscal realities. France has become the symbol of the problem. The French have been rioting for several weeks now, leading to multiple deaths, over the government’s proposed reduction in pension benefits. In other words, the power is out, they have no TV, they don’t know how to live.

France currently has some of the most luxurious pension benefits in the world.  These luxuries have taken their toll on the French economy. The French have been forced to restrict their pension program, however, due to the increase in the worker/benefactor ratio, along with inflation increases and the current economic environment.  Some of these changes include:

  • Raise the retirement age from 60 to 62 (gasp!) by 2018
  • Raise the security contributions qualification from 40.5 to 41.5 years
  • Raise the age pensioners can receive a full state pension from 65 to 67

Railways are shut down; garbage cans are left on the street; gas pumps are turned off; the airports are in a state that would somewhat resemble anarchy. All because of union protests. France has shut down. And it’s all because the government is doing what it must to remain solvent.

This tragic story carries many lessons for America. Workers here may seem miffed that the French could have the gall to protest over raising the retirement age to 62 when we have to work until 65. It’s hard for us to feel sympathize with the riotous French when they still receive more generous pension benefits than we do. It’s hard not to think to ourselves, “what are those snobby French complaining about again?”

But are we on a similar path? Our entitlement system has been growing right along with Europe. Social Security has been one of the main ofenders.

The US Social Security is a ticking time bomb. With “baby-boomers” nearing retirement there will be a huge increase in the number of Social Security beneficiaries and a decrease in the number of taxpayers who are funding their benefits. It is an untenable situation that concerns both sides of the political aisle. And yet the very mention of reform has become political suicide. Mention reform and you’ll instantly be lambasted for trying to steal granny’s retirement or wanting to gamble away our pensions. Instead of addressing the issue and talking seriously about alternatives, politicians must disavow any notion of change. They do this just as the system is crumbling around them.

Some brave politicians, however, have refused to neglect the problem. This has resulted in a barrage of distorted press releases which only make it more difficult for elected officials to even approach the issue.

Press coverage of important fiscal issues tends to oscillate. Much of the time, there is earnest reporting on the severity of the federal government’s fiscal problem, decrying the refusal of elected officials to get “serious” about fixing it. But when an elected official does put forward a serious proposal, many of these same media outlets naively quote from the most misleading attacks upon it. The electorate often ponders why politicians don’t simply suck it up and “do the right thing.” This regrettable, recurring pattern is a large part of the explanation (economics 21).

We as Americans must remember that if we wish to keep our entitlement system we must be willing to make sacrifices. We cannot become so beholden to its allure that we prevent the government from making changes to preserve it. The problem of debt and deficits cannot be allowed to evolve to a point where the only two options we face are bankruptcy or riots. The issue will only get worse if we continue to ignore it. Running with the television analogy, we need to work on the issue now, before the electricity goes out permanently. Unlike the sitcom cliché, it may not end with a big family hug.

by Brandon Greife and Reiley Hooper


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Wednesday, October 20, 2010 - 18:46

In every entry-level economics classroom you will almost always encounter the same scene. The front row will be dominated by opinionated and vocal liberals who feel it is their moral duty to set the class straight on the failings of American capitalism. The middle rows will be a nice blend of both conservative and liberal students who are trying their best to earn an A and perhaps learn a thing or two along the way. In the back there is the kid in the headphones with his legs stretched across another chair, obviously not caring one way or the other.

Those in the front rows, their hands perpetually raised, hoping for an opportunity to lash out at the oppressive capitalist system in which we live, have a laudable goal. Only those at the very top of the economic hierarchy are capable of overlooking the class divide in the United States. Nobody with a halfway functioning moral compass is happy that so many suffer through poverty while some enjoy the benefits of wealth.

Whether or not the middle class is shrinking, or wealth inequality is growing, is up for debate. Many liberals point to the fact that the income disparity in the United States is growing, with the top 10% of earners making 50% of the national income – up 15% in the last 30 years. Many conservative economists argue that when we adjust for things like regional costs of living differences “the rise in American inequality has been exaggerated both in magnitude and timing.” Moreover, if we use after-tax rather than pre-tax income Cato Institute economist Alan Reynolds finds that there has been no change in income inequality over the past several decades.

Regardless of the truthfulness of the claim, we can all agree that in theory any increase in the size of income inequality is a bad thing. The rich should not be getting richer if the poor are getting poorer.

The front-row liberals have a clear answer to solve this clear injustice – we have to drive down the incomes of the wealthy. We must level the playing field by redistributing the wealth and taxing the well-to-do also known as the lucky.

Sadly, our government is being run by people who sat in the front row and now have much more powerful tools at their disposal than simply an economics class rant. Take for instance, James Galbraith, a former director of the Joint Economic Committee. In regards to President Obama’s hope to increase taxes on higher income workers he said, “putting income in the hands of people who need it, and not in the hands of people who don’t, is the right economic policy.” Sounds eerily like Karl Marx idea: “from each according to his means, to each according to his needs.” Actually no, it sounds exactly like that.

Barack Obama feels similarly. He has remained consistent in his plan to eliminate the Bush-era tax cuts for the upper classes. As President Obama said on the campaign trail, “It’s not that I want to punish your success; I just… think when you spread the wealth around, it’s good for everybody.” He’s made similar comments about raising taxes on capital gains, arguing that it should be done, regardless if it lowers tax income “for purposes of fairness.”

The goal of such policies appears clear – we are going to create inequality by pushing the top down. That’s one way to do it I guess, but it seems to make more sense to do just the opposite. Couldn’t we also lower the income gap by promoting policies that pulling the top up?

The reason that this isn’t done is because it is more abstract. It is easy to visibly “punish” the top earners. Simply tax them. It is much more difficult, absent direct subsidy, to have such a direct or clear impact on “helping” the lower classes. Pulling up the lower classes requires things such as K-12 education reform, improving community colleges, and encouraging independence by trimming the social safety net. Such policies take time to see results and their effects are spread out. That doesn’t mean that this shouldn’t be the approach we take, it simply means that we must be more patient when searching for results.

Moreover, these ideas are being promoted by those who occupied the middle rows of your economics class – the ones who have studied the problem and have the right answer – but aren’t necessarily shouting their answers to the world. As they say, the squeaky wheel gets the grease. That adage is no more true than in Washington.

So in this election season, as Democrats spout concepts of fairness, ask yourself whether it is more fair to focus on bringing down the upper class, or focus on attempting to bring up the bottom classes. Hurting one group, especially the ones that happen to be the primary job creators, in return for questionable benefits on the middle and lower classes seems like a poor policy choice. Perhaps a smaller income gap would make them feel better, but that is much different than actually being better off. Instead, let’s pursue policies that are capable of building up one social class without attempting to tear down another. Only then will we truly be able to conquer any wage gap in society. Only then will those loudmouths in the front row sit down and shut up.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Wednesday, October 20, 2010 - 18:45

It is interesting to note that Obama is trying to model the US economy after the European welfare states, at a time that the European states are rescinding many of their welfare programs. Many European nations are realizing that their cradle to the grave welfare system is unsustainable. The economic crisis has curbed tax revenues, spurred huge deficits, and yet attempts to balance budgets are being met with mass protests.

The massive safety net that American progressives have often dreamt of is what is sinking the European economies.

Denmark, a progressive pinnacle, has been cutting back heavily. The European Union placed Denmark on a watch list of countries that must take action to slash their deficits or risk destabilizing the continent. Before the budget crisis Danes were eligible to receive up to four years worth of unemployment benefits. Economic realities have forced them to halve that.  On top of that, those out of work are guaranteed about 80 percent of their wages in benefits. These cuts were part of a government plan to cut state spending by 24 billion kroner ($5.23 billion). Nevertheless, the government’s proposed changes were not enough for the Economic Council that urged the government to prevent retirement before 62, reduce a number of public subsidies, and have zero growth in government spending through 2020. Denmark is facing such austerity measures regardless of a top income tax rate of 50 percent.

The British system also seeing cuts. Prime Minister David Cameron is trimming back the social safety net in an attempt to get his nation’s finances in order. Since 1997 the national debt has gotten out of control, growing from 400 billion pounds to more than 1 trillion pounds. In the 2009-2010 fiscal year the budget deficit hit a record high of 155 billion pounds (248 billion dollars) which is around 11 percent of GDP. To solve the problem the Conservative government announced $128 billion in spending cuts through 2015. In addition nearly 500,000 public sector jobs will be slashed and about $28.5 billion chopped from welfare programs. Finally, in one of the more highly contentious proposals, the state pension age will be raised to 66 – saving the government nearly $8 billion a year.

French Riot Police Stand Against Protesters

France has been rocked by massive strikes and protests over President Sarkozy’s attempt to slash the size of its welfare state. The nation’s social welfare budget faces a $43 billion shortfall in 2009, with projections only getting worse in the future. Taken on its own, France’s pension system, which currently runs a $13 billion deficit, is expected to rise to $123 billion within 40 years. To close the fiscal hole, Sarkozy has proposed massive changes to the pension program. The proposal would increase the minimum and full retirement ages to 62 and 67 respectively – up from the current 60 year retirement age. That represents part of a plan to lower the budget deficit from 8 percent to 3 percent by 2013 – roughly half of which will come from spending cuts.

Once upon a time Sweden was the model of a successful “womb-to-tomb” welfare state. Since the financial crisis of the early 1990s Sweden has been quietly reforming its system and has been deregulating key industries. In 1994, with revenues down and the welfare system driving up debt, the government budget deficit exceeded 15 percent of GDP and the total debt was about 71 percent of GDP.

In the 1990s Sweden began to course correct and abolished government monopolies, trimmed public spending by lowering government benefits, and partially privatized its pension system. Yes you read that right, Sweden has privatized its equivalent of Social Security, an idea that would be considered a non-starter in the much more conservative United States. Sweden now has the second most competitive economy in the world according to the World Economic Forum and was able to withstand the recent global recession with relative ease.  Sweden’s economy had a 4.6% annual growth rate in the second quarter of 2010.

Rather than emulate the Sweden of today, President Obama and Congressional Democrats are attempting to rewind the clock and mimic the failed welfare policies of pre-80s Sweden. Ya know, the Sweden whose debt led to out of control inflation and an economic crisis that prompted conservative reforms.

America and traditional welfare states are crossing paths. While the cradle-to-the-grave approach to social welfare is being buried, Democrats in Washington are hoping to resurrect the flawed model and install it here. We’re headed toward becoming a welfare state just as welfare states are headed towards small government, free market capitalism.

Our national debt and deficits are threatening our place as the most powerful economy on earth. Moreover, our entitlement programs, such as Medicare, Medicaid, and Social Security represent the overwhelming majority of the growth in our future deficits. Rather than reform these programs, we added a new one – Obamacare, that will speed up our long-term woes.

That is the tragedy of America’s trajectory.  We are a step behind the rest of the world. So please America stop and look. Look around and see what is happening to the welfare states. Austerity packages, benefit cuts, and violent protests in response. We need to pull a U-turn. That is why this election is so important. The is our chance to free ourselves from a safety net that is no longer protecting us from falling, but is preventing us from rising.

by Brandon Greife (hat tip Justin Williams)

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/10/20/us-heads-toward-welfare-state-as-europe-flees-toward-austerity/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Wednesday, October 13, 2010 - 12:53

Here’s the narrative you hear everywhere: President Obama has presided over a huge expansion of government, but unemployment has remained high. And this proves that government spending can’t create jobs

This excerpt is out of Paul Krugman’s recently published New York Times article entitled, “Hey, Small Spender”. I’ve never agreed more with anything the controversial liberal economist has ever written. The federal government under president Obama has grown at historic levels, even as private sector employment continues to contract. Unemployment has indeed remained high. In fact, that is an understatement. Following September’s job report, the unemployment rate has now topped 9.5 percent for 14 straight months – the longest stretch since the 1930s. This is all despite nearly $1 trillion in taxpayer-funded stimulus, trillions more in buying up risky mortgages, and the Fed doing everything in its power to spur the economy. If that doesn’t prove government spending can’t create jobs then what does?

Unfortunately, Krugman didn’t stop there. You didn’t really expect him to take a conservative (or even rational) viewpoint did you?

He continued, by saying, “Here’s what you need to know: The whole story is a myth.”

Normally when you make that strong of statement, saying the entire theme of the upcoming is bunk, you at least have some evidence to back it up. So let’s see what kind of evidence Krugman’s got.

He begins his argument against the government expansion “myth” by asking a question. “What major new federal programs have started up since Mr. Obama took office?” asks Krugman. Well, first there is healthcare reform, the largest government program since Medicare. Implementing it will cause the IRS to hire as many as an additional 16,500 additional auditors to investigate and collect the new taxes. That is in addition to the thousands of new government workers who will go to staff the 159 new government agencies, bureaucracies, and boards mandated by the new health law.

Krugman dismisses all of this with one line. Healthcare reform hasn’t kicked in yet.

Having ignored that elephant in the room he asks another question, “are there giant infrastructure projects under way? No.”

Well, we’re not building any Bridges to Nowhere, but when viewed as an entire package, yes there are giant projects underway! The stimulus directed $300 billion towards states and cities for spending on infrastructure projects like roads and bridges. For more context consider that more than 100,000 projects to upgrade schools, airports, subways, schools, roads, railways, etc. are being funded by the stimulus. None of that includes nearly one-sixth of stimulus dollars that TIME Magazine describes as “an all-out effort to exploit the crisis to make green energy, green building and green transportation real.”

So yes, Mr. Krugman, there are giant infrastructure projects underway that are boosting the size and scope of the federal government.

Ignoring these facts, Krugman lobs up his final question, “are there huge new benefits for low-income workers or the poor? No.”

Once again, the facts are in conflict with his simple dismissal. Unemployment insurance benefits have been extended multiple times to accommodate for the enormous numbers of unemployed. Enrollment in Medicaid, the healthcare program for the poor, “showed the sharpest annual rise last year since the late 1960s.” Enrollment in the food stamp program has also skyrocketed – with 41.3 million people receiving the stamps, up 45 percent from 2008. As the Wall Street Journal summed up the situation,

As recently as the early 1980s, about 30% of Americans lived in households in which an individual was receiving Social Security, subsidized housing, jobless benefits or other government-provided benefits. By the third quarter of 2008, 44% were, according to the most recent Census Bureau data.

Krugman conveniently ignores all of these facts in making his assertions. He only addresses the enormous increases in government programs by saying Medicaid, Social Security, etc. don’t really count as big government. The reason, he says is that when people denounce big government they’re talking about “big bureaucracies and major new programs.” Somehow he doesn’t notice that these programs are big bureaucracies. When facts don’t match his argument, Krugman is content to change the facts.

His final argument, the supposed nail in the big government coffin, is that “the total number of government workers in America has been falling, not rising, under Mr. Obama.”

Perhaps he’d like to take this up with the Bureau of Labor Statistics who reported growth in all sectors of government in 2010.

But that is not my main quarrel with his argument. By talking about the total number of government workers and then saying “under Obama,” Krugman gives the impression that the President controls state and local government hiring. That is simply not the case. So when we focus on what the President does have control of, the size of the federal government, we find that the government has gained 198,100 jobs. Growth in government, regardless of whether it is big or small should be considered unacceptable against a backdrop in which the private sector has lost 7,837,000.

Despite the lack of facts, Krugman finishes his argument with the smug statement, “[s]o as I said, the big government expansion everyone talks about never happened.”

Well, as I said, Krugman should have stopped after his first paragraph. If he had, it may have been his most honest and informative column he’s ever written.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/10/13/debunking-the-krugman-claim-that-government-expansion-is-a-myth/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, September 28, 2010 - 16:17

 

This is Part II in a series, to see our analysis on the GOP’s Pledge to create jobs see HERE.       Republicans are looking ahead to one of the most promising election years in over a decade. There are many reasons for our rosy prospects, but they are encapsulated by a common theme – a perception that government has overstepped its bounds. This term has been marked by unprecedented growth in our government. Unsurprisingly then, it has also been marked by historic levels of spending that threaten to literally bankrupt our future.       Perhaps the single largest symbol in government’s growth is the Democrats’ healthcare plan. Although it is a significant retreat from their favored plan, a government run single-payor system, it nevertheless represents the growth of government in a traditionally private sector.       Facing steeply rising premium prices the public was, and remains, open to fundamental healthcare reform. Sadly, the Democrats’ plan focused on the wrong problem. Rather than enact changes that would address the growing cost of healthcare, the government turned its focus toward forced increases in coverage. They hoped that by mandating that people join government approved healthcare plans, healthy people would be able to subsidize the larger number of insured.   This strategy has been an utter failure. Studies conducted by the federal government have found that the Democrats healthcare plan will increase costs, government spending, and ultimately make it harder to balance the budget. In June 2009 the CBO said that “enacting the proposal would result in a net increase in federal budget deficit of about $1.0 trillion over the 2010-2019 period. In April 2010 the Center for Medicare and Medicaid Services found that “we estimate the for calendar years 2010 through 2019, [national health expenditures] would increase by $311 billion, or 0.9 percent, over the updated baseline projection.” And on June 2010 CBO Director Douglas Elmendorf found that, “In CBO’s judgment, the health legislation enacted earlier this year does not substantially diminish [the] pressure of [rising health costs].”   Given the numbers, it is unsurprising that a majority of Americans (61 percent) now favor repealing the healthcare law while a mere 33 percent say it will be good for the country.   Based on that feedback Republicans have made repealing and replacing Obamacare a key component of their governing agenda. Realistically, repealing the healthcare law would be politically impossible. Even if the GOP retakes the House and/or the Senate, they would likely face a presidential veto which would then require support from 2/3 of both chambers to override. But this isn’t about politics, or even possibility, so much as a reflection of the voters’ values.  
  • The plan shows that Republicans’ understand and embrace the need for reform, but accomplish it by focusing on lowering costs rather than mandating coverage. Among the Republican promises as part of their reform are:
  • Enact medical liability reform
  • Introduce free market competition by allowing people to purchase health care across state lines
  • Expand health savings accounts
  • Strengthen doctor-patient relationship
  • Ensure access for patients with pre-existing conditions
  • Permanently prohibit taxpayer abortions
  To be fair, Democrats and Republicans agree on quite a bit. They both focus on creating insurance exchanges that make it easy to comparison shop. They also focus on prevention rather than treatment, understand the importance of access for preexisting conditions, and have a goal of lowering costs. The true difference lies in what Republicans want to leave out. They want to reduce the government’s presence in the healthcare law by simplifying the law and eliminating the need for the 3,833 pages of federal regulations that have already been written and the hundreds of new departments and agencies tasked with carrying out the law.   
Rather than focus on what the government can do, Republicans rely on the power of free markets and individuals to get costs under control. The nexus of their plan is removing the current (but dying) system of employer and government provided coverage. One of the main problems that insurers have been able to drive costs skyward is that the consumer has no idea what healthcare actually costs. With no concept of what they are paying for, consumers’ incentive to shop for lower costs is reduced to near nothing. By allowing individuals, supplemented by an advanceable tax credit, to purchase their healthcare they will be forced to spend wisely.   The upcoming elections shows the power of the people when united behind a common cause. By empowering people to make healthcare decisions, unchained from the current broken system, we can reinvigorate a free market where competition and lower costs reign. The result will not only be less government intrusion in our lives, but reduced premium prices and lower governmental costs.   The Republican “Pledge” is not perfect but it represents a necessary shift from Washington. One in which the government’s role is not to provide healthcare, but one in which the government uses its power to grease the wheels for the free market. If Republicans are elected, the politics of repeal remain difficult, but at least the Pledge shows that their hearts and minds are in the right place.   by Brandon Greife, Political Director   http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/09/27/republicans%E2%80%99-healthcare-%E2%80%9Cpledge%E2%80%9D-shows-understanding-of-obamacare%E2%80%99s-flaws/
Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, September 28, 2010 - 16:11

 

Taxpayers of America rejoice! Tired of the nearly endless stream of reports showing the mind-nubbingly dumb ways in which their stimulus project was spending taxpayer money, the Obama administration decided to fight back. Their report, entitled, 100 Recovery Act Projects That Are Changing America, was intended as a direct response to several reports issues by Sens. John McCain and Tom Coburn highlighting the 100 Most Wasteful Stimulus Projects.

So does the Obama report allow taxpayers to rest easy knowing that their tax money was spent on worthwhile projects? No.

Just take a look at some of the projects that the report, supposedly the best-of-the best, highlights:

  • A $299 million grant to build a battery manufacturing facility in Michigan for a company that was considering Asian locations. The project created or saved at least 100 jobs.
  • $8.3 million in grants to Toledo to allow them to re-hire 31 police officers.
  • $114 million for ECOtality, a manufacturer of electric vehicles, to help them produce 8,500 electric drive vehicles. The company reported the stimulus helped support 50 jobs.
  • $3 million for the Malden Redevelopment Authority to help remove lead paint and other safety hazards. They company reports it was able to retain 5 employees that would otherwise be laid off.

There are two distinct problems with even these cream-of-the-crop proposals. First, none of these projects deliver a respectable cost-to-jobs ratio. Second, they artificially diverts capital away from other worthwhile projects.

The government is notoriously inefficient. Or to take Reagan’s preferred metaphor, “Government is like a baby: An alimentary canal with a big appetite at one end and no sense of responsibility at the other.” In this case the taxpayers were forced to feed the giant baby a whopping $862 billion to fund the economic stimulus plan. Coming out the other end it looks a lot like what you would expect.

Even after having passed the largest stimulus in our nation’s history the unemployment rate continues to tick upwards. Moreover, things are not on track to improve anytime soon. Recently economists predicted that over the next year the unemployment rate will rise above 10 percent before finally starting to fall. Why didn’t the stimulus stimulate? One big reason is that the money was not used efficiently. It went towards things like seeing how monkeys react under the influence of cocaine, improving the freezing process of rat sperm, and improving African genital hygiene.

You may argue that these projects are cherry-picked and not indicative of the whole. But even when you look at the administration picked as its best projects you see a whole lot of money spent and very few jobs created.  For instance, their #1 project used $100 million stimulus dollars and has created 230 jobs so far. That’s approximately $430,000 per job. The second and third projects don’t get much better – $153 million to save 150 research positions and $49 million to create 100 jobs. Each of these projects arguably does worthwhile things, providing housing for wounded soldiers or cancer research, but we weren’t sold on the plan because it was worthwhile. We were sold on the plan because it was supposed to create jobs. And judging by that metric, the only one that matters, the stimulus is a miserable failure.

Second, the stimulus projects are being championed by the administration using a myopic train of thought. Nobel Prize winning economist Henry Hazlitt wrote in his seminal book, Economics in One Lesson, that,

The bad economist sees only what immediately strikes the eye; the good economist also look beyond. The bad economist sees only the direct consequences of a proposed course; the good economist looks at the longer and indirect consequences. The bad economists sees only what the effect of a given policy has been or will be on one particular group; the good economist inquires also what the effect of the policy will be on all groups.

Using this definition we can tell that the White House is chock full of bad economists. The short-term, long-term dichotomy has become thoroughly engrained in today’s politics. Democrats cried that we needed an enormous injection of funds to get the economy going, Republicans countered that the national debt that would be created would be a long term drag on the economy that it would actually hinder growth.

But the argument, or as Hazlitt would say “fallacy,” that I want to discuss is that Democrat’s are too focused on the good of one particular group without looking at the broader picture. We know that every dollar of government spending must eventually be pad for through future taxes. So when a government creates a stimulus project with the idea of increasing employment it is not a free bridge, future taxpayers must pay for it. But, you may say, it created jobs. Yes, it created jobs for the construction workers necessary to build the bridge. But it is also true that the cost of the bridge, say $5,000,000, is directly taken from money that would have been spread around to other jobs. That $5 million would have been spread around the economy purchasing things like televisions, computers, and cars, each of which take people to build. So the stimulus project didn’t so much create jobs as it did divert jobs.

The problem is that we can see the construction worker get hired. We can mark him on our tally of “jobs saved or created.” On the contrary the “other” jobs are spread throughout the economy and thus imminently less visible, and thus, less politically valuable. And political value is the name of the game in Washington where creating jobs is only a means to an end, namely, reelection.

President Obama is hyping the success of the stimulus in his new report 100 Stimulus Projects That are Changing America. But is this clear waste and redistribution really the kind of change they should be touting?

by Brandon Greife, Political Director

 

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/09/21/100-recovery-act-projects-that-are-changing-america-for-the-worse/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, September 28, 2010 - 16:10

 

“It’s not me, it’s you.” Those are normally the words that cement the failure of a relationship that has gone awry. Across the country, Democratic candidates are hearing this sentiment, and they can’t understand why. They can’t understand why they have fallen out of favor with the population in general, but more importantly, they haven’t realized that they have lost the allegiance of today’s college students.

The fact is simple, while Democrats have spent at a record rate ($4.71 trillion added to the national debt) America has seen unemployment increase! No generation is being burdened more by Washington’s recent spending orgy than mine, and this article will explain why young people don’t like it, and what College Republicans plan to present as an alternative.

Did you know that nearly 20% of young adults are unemployed? That is twice the national average, which in itself is unacceptable. A 54.3% increase to the national debt has frightened job creators to the point where one in five young people can’t find a paying job. This clearly shows that the more government wastefully spends, the less ability people will have to find work.  Don’t think the stimulus was loaded with wasteful spending? Take a look at “Stupid Spending” on www.ourtab.org to see where our hard-earned money went. My personal favorite is the $677,000 that the Georgia State University received to study “how monkeys respond to inequity and unfairness.” I think it’s unfair that we are psychoanalyzing monkeys while millions of Americans can’t find work.

What terrifies young students the most is the amount of money they will be forced to pay to the debt. Today, every child’s share of the national debt is $118,000, money that will have to be paid off through higher taxes or reduced government services. But how can we be expected to pay this off if 20 percent of our generation doesn’t even have a job? With so much bad policy in such a short amount of time, it’s worth asking: has the statist agenda won out?

The answer is no. There is a reason why Obama has seen an 18% drop in his approval rating amongst 18-29 year old voters according to a February Pew Poll.  His plans are detrimental to young people. He said he had our best interests in mind, but he lied! He cheated on our generation, but we’ve caught him in the act. Let’s just say that come November, young adults will say to Democrats, “It’s not me, it’s your policies that have ruined our relationship.”

by Zach Howell, National Chairman of the College Republicans

 

 

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/09/21/obamas-big-spending-agenda-ruined-relationship-with-young-adults/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, September 28, 2010 - 16:09

 

All politics is local. That is the phrase Democrats have been bandying about as their savior for the midterm elections. They know most of the country doesn’t like Nancy Pelosi, Congressional Democrats, or even Barack Obama, but if you can just keep the issues local then they have a chance to win some seats and retain the majority. The problem with this theory is that the crushing burden of debt extends well beyond the federal government; it reaches deep into the wallets of our cities and municipalities. Though we’ve made a point to talk about Greece and the Spain, about California and Illinois, and about all things Washington, but left out of the discussion so far have been places like Harriburg, Virginia or Los Angeles. But these places, though certainly less flashy to talk are also on the verge of bankruptcy.

The problem stems from the same spending addiction that plagues Washington. Cities and states are facing an enormous money crunch. With so many people out of a job, tax revenues have fallen through the floor. Adding insult to injury, cash-strapped people have been unable to afford their homes, forcing property values, along with property taxes to drop. Unfortunately, you would never be able to tell that municipalities faced a revenue problem if all you saw was the amount of money they have been spending. An report by the Bureau of Economic Analysis found that despite some deep program cuts, total spending by state and local governments actually increased by .1 percent in 2009.

It should come as no surprise then that as of the first quarter of 2010, state and local governments had $2.8 trillion in outstanding debt. Even worse, this astounding figure doesn’t include the number one problem facing states – their unfunded pension liabilities that may be as much as $2 trillion in and of itself.

A significant amount of the debt comes from long-term municipal bonds. These bonds are popular because of their perceived low risk, short-term yields, and tax-free returns. Unfortunately, the idea of a low risk investment is flying out the window.

Although only eight municipalities have declared bankruptcy in the last five years, the writing on the wall appears to signal a looming problem. Take the 1930s as an example. In those days total municipal debt was around $250 billion in today’s dollars, less than 10 percent of the debt currently held by our state and local governments. Then the Great Depression hit, drying up tax revenues and highlighting the reckless spending of previous generations. By the time the dust had settled, 4,500 municipalities had defaulted.

We now face a similar problem. Cities and states, like the federal government, haven’t been great stewards of our money. Many have used the funds to finance everything from low cost housing to stadium projects. They then borrowed even more money in an attempt to cover up the huge deficits such spending caused.

Harrisburg, PA is the first domino to fall. The city’s 2010 budget completely omitted debt payments, signaling that they may intentionally default on the debt obligations. The immediate cause will be a missed interest payment on an incinerator, but the long-term problem is structural deficits. Beyond the losses to the Harrisburg citizens who invested in their city, the major weight of the default will lie on third party investors. To politicians this seems like an almost too good to be true scenario. Few citizens will lose money, their debts get taken off the books, and they accomplished it all without having to raise taxes or reduce spending.

Of course, this too, has its problems. Cities rely on outside parties, including large corporations, to purchase their debt. Strategic defaults such as this one in Harrisburg may send a signal that municipalities are willing to default rather than do the politically risky thing of raising taxes. As Dave Anderson wrote,

Default is attractive when the options are firing half the police force, closing all the pools and not paving any streets for the next three years to pay off a large debt, or keeping most public services and public employment working while screwing those SOBs on Wall Street.

But as cities default their credit ratings will face downgrade. This in turn will make capital much more difficult to come by now, and especially in the future as banks return to being more liquid. Defaulting now may mean that cities will no longer be able to afford necessary infrastructure projects down the road.

A possibly larger problem is the worried investors holding billions of dollars in short term municipal debt who are now scared to death that their investment will be worth nothing. Companies, small businesses, retirees, and anyone else with an investment portfolio that includes these typically safe bonds may face enormous losses. Such a loss of wealth will only hinder recovery as job creators attempt to get their balance sheets back in alignment by cutting costs and consumers buying power is reduced.

All politics may be local, but as our municipalities’ balance sheets show, the spending problem exists far beyond Washington.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director (hat tip Reiley Hooper)

 

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/09/20/6819/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, September 28, 2010 - 16:06

 

We’re making history for all the wrong reasons. Under President Obama’s leadership our national debt has reached it’s highest level in history. Even more worrisome, it is not going away anytime so

According to the budget issued earlier this year by the Obama administration, our national spending will increase from a 50 year average of 20.5 percent of GDP to 28 percent in 2020, to 42 percent in 2040. Such an incredible jump in spending will have long lasting negative consequences that threaten the very economic foundation of our generation.

The enormous spending increases is the primary cause of the debt crisis we face. The debt is scheduled to explode, jumping from 60 percent of GDP in the year 2000 to 110 percent of GDP by 2020. For a dose of comparison, the federal debt has only surpassed 100 percent of GDP one other time in our nations history – in the period just after World War II. As soon as the war was over, our debt fell. Unfortunately, if current spending trends remain constant, we shouldn’t look towards the same rebound. Under the Congressional Budget Office’s predictions, by 2035 our national debt could reach 185 percent of GDP and would continue to spiral upwards.

The majority of the spending is the result of an unsustainable entitlement system that produces an inexorable growth in costs. Programs such as Social Security and Medicare are funded under a pay-as-you-go approach that promise benefits today that will only be paid for out of taxes tomorrow. Take Social Security for instance. If you take a look at your paycheck, a substantial portion is being taken out in payroll taxes to pay for the program. The money being taken out of your salary is not being stashed away so that it can supplement your retirement; no, it’s being used now to pay for today’s retirees.

The problem with this system is that the federal government can promise a generous benefit without regard to whether or not it can actually afford it in the future. As Andrew Biggs explained in his article Why Does Government Grow and Grow and Grow, “Once today’s taxpayers reach retirement they feel fully entitled to their benefits, even if the taxes they paid were nowhere near enough to fund the benefits they will receive.” In other words, we’re creating an “entitlement society” who is made to feel they deserve a certain level of government benefits, regardless of the impact this will have on the deficit. Sadly, the culture of Washington, which rewards extravagant promises with reelection, has nurtured this “entitlement society.”

The results are breathtaking. In 1970, 38 percent of total spending was mandatory entitlement programs. By 2010, that number had jumped to 62 percent of total spending and by 2040 it will by 82 percent. As the proportion of our spending is increasingly devoted to ensuring stable benefits for our growing entitlement programs, some things which we currently take for granted will be forced to fall by the wayside. Education? National defense? Infrastructure? If we continue down the current entitlement path, there will be nothing left over for these once core government functions.

Yet, if you believed President Obama, we shouldn’t be focusing on our unsustainable spending habits, instead our eyes should be firmly affixed on finding ways to increase revenue. Enter, the Democrats plan to appeal to the deficit-hawks – eliminate some of the Bush era tax cuts. Even if we set aside the conservative principle that the government should, to the extent that they are able, stay out of the pockets of its citizens, there are economic reasons to support extending the tax cuts. The CBO has said that extending the tax cuts put in place under President Bush would provide a “considerable” economic boost where “economic growth would be stronger next year; unemployment would be lower next year.” Harvard researcher Alberto Alesina agrees. His study of over 200 fiscal policies following recessions finds that a combination of tax cuts and spending discipline is the best way to spur economic growth – not government stimulus.

The Obama administration would be wise to change its focus. A review of our nation’s balance sheet reveals that spending, not revenues, is the major problem we face in returning to a sustainable financial balance. Even as our nation recovers from this deep recession, our national debt will remain a drag on our economic success. This November we, as a country, must vote for change. We must vote for candidates who understand that before the government can ask us to reach deeper into our wallets, it must first make necessary changes to its spending habits.

by Brandon Greife and Grant Walters

 

http://speakout.crnc.org/blog/2010/09/17/a-debt-that-threatens-our-future/


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Tuesday, September 28, 2010 - 16:04

With elections just weeks away, the Administration is doing everything it can to finesse Obamacare into looking as good as possible. But, like the old saying goes, you can’t put lipstick on a pig.

Recent calculations as to the health plan’s cost have been less than rosy. Both the CBO and the Center for Medicaid and Medicare Services have shown that the Democrats’ healthcare bill will do little to keep federal costs down.

The latest report, compiled by the Government Accountability Office (GAO) shows that not only has the bill failed to live up to promises. The promises themselves are misleading. Even worse, the government is using taxpayer money to pay for their misleading information campaign.

In order to convince the American people what a great piece of legislation Obamacare really was, the Administration sent a mailer to seniors. Among the promises the mailer contained were:

  • “The Affordable Care Act passed by Congress…will provide you and your family greater savings and increased quality of care.”
  • “Your Medicare benefits won’t change”
  • “Your choice of doctors will be preserved”

But after examining the pamphlet the GAO states that “the brochure overstates some of [the Democrats’ health overhaul’s] benefits.”

“In our view, the brochure presents a picture of [the healthcare bill] that is not universally shared. For example, two government analyses have determined that [the Democrats’ legislation] reductions in funding for Medicare Advantage may decrease enrollment and result in less generous benefit packages,” and “significant increases in premiums for some beneficiaries may be necessary.”

The fact that such misinformation was spread using taxpayer dollars is absurd in and of itself. What’s worse, while promoting their own views, Democrats are snuffing out any who disagree.

The latest assault comes from Health and Human Services Secretary Kathleen Sebelius who wrote to Karen Ignagni, president of America’s Health Insurance Plans, demanding insurers stop using “misinformation and scare tactics.”  There will be “zero tolerance for this type of misinformation” she continues.

Sebelius is responding to a number of health insurers who have asked for rate increases between 1 percent and 9 percent for 2011. What she fails to grasp is that the increase is required to pay for extra benefits required under the Democrats’ healthcare plan.

So why does she threaten the insurers attempt to break even? Because, as she says, “according to our analysis and those of some industry and academic experts, any potential premium impact…will be minimal.” The troubling word there is “some.” Some industry experts believe that the costs of compliance will be small. This implies that others believe there will be substantial compliance costs that would then be passed on to the consumer. After all it doesn’t take a genius to realize that increased benefits lead to additional costs which would drive up the cost of plans.

That word, “some,” has frightening implications. As Eugene Volokh, UCLA professor of law,wrote on his blog,

If the Administration is threatening to use its considerable regulatory power to retaliate against insurance companies that, in the Administration’s view, are conveying “misinformation” — for instance, because their financial analyses disagree with the Administration’s financial analyses — that strikes me as quite troubling. . .

[E]ven if such action would be constitutionally permissible, it would be quite troubling, as would threats that seem to hint as such action: It would involve the Administration’s deliberately trying to suppress criticism of its policies, under a “misinformation” standard that sounds highly subjective and politically contestable.

What it sounds like Sebelius is trying to say is that there will be “zero tolerance” for dissent. I understand why Democrats would be afraid of differing views. We were all led to believe that our premiums and the federal government’s total outlays would be lowered by the Democrats’ plan. Sadly, those realities are not going to come true. Rather than own up to the law’s failings, Democrats are stifling criticism and using taxpayer money to promote a rosier picture of the bill. That is something that I, and voters, should have zero tolerance for.

by Brandon Greife, Political Director


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Thursday, September 16, 2010 - 16:28

Obamacare was passed with very specific promises from Democrats. President Obama said “We [Senate Democrats and the Administration] agree on reforms that will finally reduce the costs of health care. Families will save on their premiums.” Senate Majority Leader Harry Reid added, “We can reduce the costs of premiums for Nevadans and all Americans. This is one more reason why we need to pass health insurance now, protecting patients and making health care affordable.”

None of that has turned out to be true. Two new reports out from the Wall Street Journal this week find that both Americans and the federal government will be spending more on healthcare for the foreseeable future.

Remembering back to the campaign trail the impact of rising costs of healthcare premiums on families was the primary reason for reform. We were told that Americans, and America for that matter, could not afford the path we were on. We were promised change. Turns out that it wasn’t quite the change we were looking for. Aetna, BlueCross BlueShield, and other insurance carriers are planning on raising premiums 1 to 9 percent. But the rate change isn’t result of the evil corporations trying to screw over Main Street – it’s the expected costs these companies will bear because of new extra benefits required under the Democrats’ health care law.

This should not be all that surprising. Less than one month ago a leaked Democratic memo showed that the pary was drastically shifting their attempts to defend their healthcare bill. The memo encouraged them to abandon the claim that it would reduce costs and instead encouraged Democrats to stress that they will work to “improve it.” So much for Max Baucus, chair of the Senate Finance Committee, claim that “for all Americans – all Americans – premiums will be lower.”

As it turns out Democrats are about as good at predicting the results of their healthcare bill as they were at predicting the success of the stimulus. That is to say…not very good.

Individuals aren’t the only ones likely to see a rate increase. A new report from the Center for Medicare and Medicaid Services finds that the federal share of healthcare costs will continue to soar upward. According to the report, by 2019 the United States will spend $4.6 trillion on healthcare, up from the $2.6 trillion we spent this year. That is much faster than the expected growth of inflation and faster than if the law had not been passed.

That is a huge expenditure growth that Washington must find a way to pay for amidst declining tax revenues and a budget already awash in red ink. As Vice President Joe Biden said at the Health Care Summit last February, “unless we bend that cost curve, we’re in trouble.” He’s exactly right. Sadly, his party’s healthcare reform package bent it the wrong way creating costly regulations and adding millions of people to Medicaid’s rolls.

With all the bad news rolling in it is no surprise that Democrats have gone quiet on healthcare. What was once supposed to be their clarion call for the November elections has since turned into a dirty word. As the Wall Street Journal’s opinion page said today,

‘They’re betting that between now and November, you’re going to come down with amnesia,” President Obama told a Milwaukee crowd on Monday, vilifying the Republicans who “helped devastate our middle class.” But it seems as if the real case of amnesia—or maybe post-traumatic stress disorder—has struck the Democrats, who are now doing everything they can to help voters forget ObamaCare.”

Gone are the days when Democrats thought they could use healthcare reform as a lever to retain the momentum in 2010. Gone are the days when President Obama had the guts to say that if we don’t pass healthcare reform “Our deficit will grow. More families will go bankrupt. More businesses will close. More Americans will lose their coverage…And more will die as a result.” No, that big-talk has turned into mere whispers. It turns out all those harsh realities exist and possibly made worse by the passage of healthcare.

I’m not sure whether it was ignorance or ego that led them to believe that the flawed healthcare bill they passed would actually be a help come November. Regardless, as members of their own party are tripping over themselves in their attempts to distance themselves from the bill and the administration who passed it, it has become clear it isn’t. Instead, it has become yet another symbol in the inability of Washington to match their rhetoric with reality

I doubt any of this news is what Nancy Pelosi had in mind when she said “we have to pass the bill so that you can find out what is in it.”


Brandon.Greife
Posted: Thursday, September 16, 2010 - 16:22

The World Economic Forum’s latest Global Competitiveness Report is out and the U.S. is falling faster than the Virginia Tech football team. Having been first for a number of years the United States has begun to stumble under Obama’s stewardship. Last year we fell one spot to #2 overall; this year we fell two more spots and reside at #4. Being fourth on a list of 139 nations isn’t exactly awful, but the recent fall is an indictment of the policies of the current Democratic administration.

The report takes into account numerous variables in an attempt to show the “ability of countries to provide high levels of prosperity to their citizens.” These rankings are based on many factors like: macroeconomic stability, innovation, government trust, and labor market efficiency. These criterion are intentionally general, and very difficult to change over a short period of time. So when the US dropped two spots, putting it behind Switzerland, Sweden, and Singapore, it proves there have been serious changes in economic policy.

So why is the US falling? The report shows two clear reasons. First, our federal government is standing in the way of American business growth. When asked what the most problematic factors are for doing business, respondents said that inefficient government bureaucracy, tax rates, and tax regulations were three of the top four. All of those are the directly tied to big government stifling private sector growth. Rather than admit their failures and let businesses flourish under a free market system, the current administration has taken steps in the opposite direction. Enormous increases in spending and the size of government under President Obama show his fundamental belief that government rather than the private sector will be the key to economic recovery.

Second, our national debt is spiraling out of control.

“Continued budget deficits and high public debt are likely to have a negative impact on productivity for a number of reasons. First, they reduce fiscal flexibility. Because of higher interest payment on debt, the government will have fewer funds available to invest in areas that are necessary to maintain future growth.”

Of course, this is merely a strand in the interconnected web of problems. Higher debt also raises interest rates which make the cost of capital higher. It leads to higher taxes to repay the debt which leads to investing less and saving more. And eventually it leads to smaller growth, making it even harder to pay back debt, ultimately spiraling downwards toward default, much like we saw in Greece.

Although this year hasn’t exactly been a banner year for growth worldwide, the United States and its poor economic policy choices, were hit especially hard. As Irene Mia, senior economist for the WEF explained, “the US has very important strengths, but macroeconomic stability was a problem beforehand and the crisis exacerbated it.” Sadly, if President Obama’s budget is an accurate forecast, our stability will be a problem long after the economic crisis has passed. As the nonpartisan CBO recently said,

“Further increases in federal debt relative to the nation’s output (gross domestic product, or GDP) almost certainly lie ahead if current policies remain in place. Unless policymakers restrain the growth of spending, increase revenues significantly as a share of GDP, or adopt some combination of those two approaches, growing budget deficits will cause debt to rise to unsupportable levels”.

Basically, we cannot continue to support our spending habits.  Failure to change current fiscal policies inevitably will result in a less-competitive America.  As we continue to become less competitive, our nations GDP will swiftly decline.  Republican or Democrat, we all want to have a competitive economy.  Without such, we cannot afford to help our nation excel in anything but poverty.  NOW is the time to make the changes.  We need to cut back on spending or raise taxes significantly.  Since the later of these is political suicide, we indeed need to make cut backs, if only temporary.  We need to do this now.  The longer we put off the needed reform, the more difficult it will become to resuscitate our crashing economy.


Speak OutSoundboardBlogTirviaAbout CRNC

DonateSolutions for DebtDebt WidgetPledgeFacebook